DPWH 2015 DGCS Vol 6

Design Guidelines, Criteria and Standards: Volume 6 – Public Buildings and Other Related Structures
Table 5-1 General Lighting Load Density ....................................................................................................................................5-5

Table 5-2 Maximum Values for Lighting Power for Building Exterior Load Density ..............................................5-5
Table 5-3 Maximum Values for Lighting Power for Roads and Ground Load Density ............................................5-6
Table 5-4 Recommended Design Illuminance Levels ............................................................................................................5-6
Table 5-5 Illuminance Levels (Average) ......................................................................................................................................5-7
Table 5-6 Efficacy Ranges of Various Lamps .......................................................................................................................... 5-10
Table 5-7 Recommended Room Surface Reflectance .......................................................................................................... 5-10
Table 5-8 Control Types and Equivalent Number of Control Points ............................................................................ 5-11
Table 5-9 Minimum Connected Receptacle Load .................................................................................................................. 5-13
Table 5-10 Receptacle Rating for Various Size Circuits ........................................................................................................ 5-14
Table 6-1 Overall Heat Coefficient ..................................................................................................................................................6-4
Table 6-2 Typical Change Values ....................................................................................................................................................6-6
Table 6-3 Sprinkler installation guidelines ................................................................................................................................6-7
Table 6-4 Hazen Williams C values ................................................................................................................................................6-8
Table 6-5 Equivalent Pipe Length Chart ......................................................................................................................................6-8
Table 6-6 Recommended Basic Water Requirements for Human Needs. a ............................................................... 6-10
Table 6-7 Flow through Schedule 40 B.I. Pipes in Liters per Minute ........................................................................... 6-10
Table 6-8 Determination of Number of Cars ........................................................................................................................... 6-12
Table 6-9 Average Operation Interval of Cars ........................................................................................................................ 6-12
Table 8-1 Waste water contribution per capita / day ...........................................................................................................8-5
Table 8-2 Minimum Requirements for Various Occupancies .............................................................................................8-6
Table 8-3 Drainage Fixture Unit Values (DFU) ...................................................................................................................... 8-11
Table 8-4 Discharge Capacity in Liters per Second for Intermittent Flow Only ..................................................... 8-12
Table 8-5 Maximum Unit Loading and Maximum Length of Drainage and Vent Piping ..................................... 8-14
Table 8-6 Cleanouts........................................................................................................................................................................... 8-18
Table 8-7 Minimum Horizontal Distance Required From Building Sewer ................................................................ 8-26
Table 8-8 Maximum / Minimum Fixture Unit Loading On Building Sewer Piping ................................................ 8-27
Table 8-9 Pipe Connections in Blow-off Condensers and Sumps .................................................................................. 8-31
Table 8-10 Minimum Size Condensate Drain Pipes ................................................................................................................ 8-33
Table 8-11 Horizontal Distance of Trap Arms .......................................................................................................................... 8-35
Table 8-12 Grease Traps ..................................................................................................................................................................... 8-39
Table 8-13 Caulking Ferrules ........................................................................................................................................................... 8-63
Table 8-14 Soldering Bushings ........................................................................................................................................................ 8-63
Table 8-15 Hanger Rod Sizes ........................................................................................................................................................... 8-64
Table 8-16 Hangers and Support .................................................................................................................................................... 8-65
Table 8-17 Disposal Fields ................................................................................................................................................................. 8-72
Table 8-18 Capacities, Airspace and Fittings for Testing ..................................................................................................... 8-75
Table 8-19 Location of Sewage Disposal System ..................................................................................................................... 8-77
Table 8-20 *Capacity of Septic Tanks............................................................................................................................................ 8-78
Table 8-21 Estimated Waste / Sewage Flow Rates ............................................................................................................... 8-79
ix
Design Guidelines, Criteria and Standards: Volume 6 – Public Buildings and Other Related Structures Design Guidelines, Criteria and Standards: Volume 6 – Public Buildings and Other Related Structures
Table 8-22 Design Criteria of Five Typical Soils ............................................................................................................................... 8-80

Table 8-23 Septic Tank Capacity Limits ............................................................................................................................................... 8-80
Abbreviations
Table 8-24 Sizing Roof Drains, Leaders, and Vertical Rainwater Piping (METRIC) ......................................................... 8-86 Acronym Definition
Table 8-25 Sizing of Horizontal Rainwater Piping .......................................................................................................................... 8-86 °C Degrees Centigrade
Table 8-26 Sizing of Horizontal Rainwater Piping ......................................................................................................................... 8-87 A Ampere
Table 8-27 Sizing Of Horizontal Rainwater Piping .......................................................................................................................... 8-87 AC Alternating Current
Table 8-28 Size of Gutters ............................................................................................................................................................................ 8-88 AFSU Amenities, Facilities, Services and Utilities
Table 8-29 Controlled Flow Maximum Roof Water Depth ........................................................................................................... 8-90 AHJ Authority Having Jurisdiction
ALBO Acting Local Building Official
Table 8-30 Distance of Scupper Bottoms above Roof .................................................................................................................... 8-90
AMBF Allowable Maximum Building Footprint
Table 8-31 Minimum Length of Color Field and Size of Letters ................................................................................................ 8-93
AMBV Allowable Maximum Volume of Building
Table 8-32 Minimum Airgaps for Water Distribution 4 ................................................................................................................. 8-96 ANSI American National Standards Institute
Table 8-33 Backflow Prevention Devices, Assemblies and Methods ..................................................................................... 8-97 ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode
Table 8-34 Water Supply Fixture Units (WSFU) and Minimum Fixture Branch Pipe Sizes 3 ..................................... 8-112 ATS Automatic Transfer Switches
Table 8-35 Fixture Unit Table for Determining Water Pipe and Meter Sizes ................................................................... 8-114 B.P. Batas Pambansa (national law)
Table 8-36 Minimum Required Air Chamber Dimensions ........................................................................................................ 8-115 BAS Building Automation System
BHL Building Height Limit
Table 8-37 Flushometer Fixture Units for Wayer Sizing Using .............................................................................................. 8-116
BoC Board of Consultants
Table 8-38 Equivalent Length of Pipe for Various Fittings1 ..................................................................................................... 8-116
BoD Bureau of Design
Table 8-39 Allowance in Equivalent Length of Pipe for Friction Loss in Valves and Thread Fittings ................... 8-117
CAAP Civil Aviation Authority of the Philippines
Table 8-40 Minimum Standards for Illumination ......................................................................................................................... 8-118 CDP Comprehensive Development Plan
Table 8-41 Maximum Allowable Noise Level in General Areas .............................................................................................. 8-119 CFL Compact Fluorescent Lighting
CHED Commission on Higher Education
Figure 1-1 Overview of Parts of Volume 6 ......................................................................................................................................1-1 CLUP Comprehensive Land Use Plan
Figure 3-1 Ideal and Optimum Building Orientations in the Philippines ....................................................................... 3-25 CLWAUP Comprehensive Land, Water & Air Use Plan
Figure 3-2 Philippine Solar and Wind Information for About 7 Months of a Year..................................................... 3-25 CLWUP Comprehensive Land and Water Use Plan
Figure 3-3 Observations on the behavior of wind inside buildings (DPWH, c:2009, unpublished) .................. 3-27 CT Current Transformer
DC Development Control
Figure 3-4 Stack Effect (DPWH, C:2009, unpublished) ............................................................................................................. 3-28
DepEd Department of Education
Figure 3-5 Venturi Effect (DPWH, c:2009, unpublished)......................................................................................................... 3-29
DG Design Guidelines
Figure 4-1 Diagrams of Lateral Earth Pressures on Retaining Wall ................................................................................. 4-32
DoH Department of Health
Figure 4-2 Flowchart for Foundation Selection ......................................................................................................................... 4-40 DoTC Department of Transportation and Communications
Figure 4-3 Concentrically Loaded Footing ................................................................................................................................... 4-49 DPWH Department of Public Works and Highways
Figure 4-4 Eccentrically Loaded Footing (e ≤ L/6) .................................................................................................................. 4-50 DR Derivative Regulation
Figure 4-5 Eccentrically Loaded Footing e > L/ 6 ..................................................................................................................... 4-51 DTI Department of Trade and Industry
EIA Electronic Industries Alliance
Figure 4-6 Design Flow ......................................................................................................................................................................... 4-98
ELCB Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker
Figure 4-7 Analysis and Design Process for Beams (when analysis and design software is not available) ... 4-99
EMI Electromagnetic Interference
Figure 4-8 Design of Compression Member Structural Members Subjected to Compression........................... 4-100
EMT Electrical Metallic Tubing
Figure 4-9 Design of Tension Members Structure Members Subjected to Tension ............................................... 4-101 EO Equipment Outlet
Figure 5-1 Typical Power Distribution Scheme ......................................................................................................................... 5-16 ESE Early Streamer Emission
Figure 6-1 Sample Work Sheet for Mechanical Engineer ...................................................................................................... 6-14 EVAC Emergency Voice Alarm Communications
FACP Fire Alarm and Control Panel
FAR Floor Area Ratio (same as FLAR)
x xi
Acronym Definition Acronym Definition
FCC Federal Communications Commission NEC National Electrical Code®

FDDI Fiber Distributed Data Interface NFPA National Fire Protection Association
FLAR Floor to Lot Area Ratio NHA National Housing Authority
G.I. Galvanized Iron NMB Non-mobile Billboard
GFA Gross Floor Area OBO Office of the Building Official
GFCI Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupter OFB Outermost Face of Building
GPRA Government Procurement Reform Act OLBP Outermost Limit of Building Projection
HC Horizontal Cross-Connect P.D. Presidential Decree
HID High Intensity Discharge PBH Provisional Building Height
HLURB Housing and Land Use Regulatory Board PEZA Philippine Economic Zone Authority
HPS High-Pressure Sodium PRI Primary Rate Interface
HUDCC Housing and Urban Development Coordinating Council PSC Philippine Sports Commission
HZ Hertz PT Potential Transformer
IC Intermediate Cross-Connect PVC Polyvinyl Chloride Conduit
ICAO International Civil Aviation Organization PWD Person with Disability
IEC International Electro-Technical Commission R.A. Republic Act
IED Intelligent Electronic Device RC Referral Code
IEEE The Institute Of Electrical And Electronics Engineers RF Radio Frequency
IMC Intermediate Metallic Conduit RLA Registered and Licensed Architect
IRR Implementing rules and regulations RLP Registered and Licensed Professional
ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network ROW Right-of-Way
kV KiloVolts RROW Road Right-of-Way
LAN Local Area Network RSC Rigid Steel Conduit
LBO Local Building Official SARP Standard and Recommended Practices
LED Light Emitting Diode ScTP Screened Twisted-Pair
LEED Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design SDP Site Development Plan
LGU Local Government Unit SF6 Sulfur Hexafluoride
Lm Linear Meter SLD Single Line Diagram
LRFD Load and Resistance Factor Design TGB Telecommunications Grounding Busbar
M Meter TGFA Total Gross Floor Area
m2 Meter square (Area) THHN Thermoplastic High Heat-resistant Nylon
MC Main Cross-Connect TIA Telecommunications Industry Association
MCB Miniature Circuit Breaker TIEZA Tourism Infrastructure and Enterprise Zone Authority
MCC Motor Control Center TLA Total Lot Area
MCCB Molded Case Circuit Breaker TMGB Telecommunications Main Grounding Busbar
MH Metal Halide TSB Telecommunications System Bulletin
MLE Mandated Legal Easement UNE Unión Nacional Española
Mm Millimeter UPS Uninterruptible Power System
MoS Manual of Standards UTP Unshielded Twisted-Pair
MTS Manual Transfer Switch V Volts
NBCP National Building Code of the Philippines VA Volt Ampere
NBO National Building Official W Watt
NBZ No-build Zone W/Lm Watts per Lumens
NCCA National Commission on Culture and the Arts W/M2 Watts per Meter square
xii xiii
Acronym Definition
Glossary
XLPE Cross Linked Polyethelene
ZO zoning ordinance Acronym Definition
Addressable Device A fire alarm system component can be individually identified of its status or used to individually control
other functions.
Addressable System A fire alarm system consisting of an addressable fire alarm control panel and addressable devices that
primarily gives the exact location of a fire.
Alarm Indicator A device which by visual means indicates the zone which an alarm has originated.
Alarm Zone A part or subdivision of a protected building or premises.
Allowable Maximum The resultant area established at grade level upon which the proposed building/structure may be
Building Footprint erected.
Annunciator A fire alarm system component containing one or more indicator lamps or alphanumeric displays in
which each indication provides status information.
Architectonics The science part of architecture, unifying the architectural, structural and utility plans/designs of a
building/structure.
Architectural Design A development or redevelopment concept that focuses on the components or elements of a building,
structure or system and unifies them into a coherent and functional whole, utilizing the principles of
strength, harmony and aesthetics in arriving at a solution to a spatial problem through the deft
application of the arts and sciences, according to a particular approach, to achieve the
development/redevelopment objective/s under the given constraints/limitations.
As-Built Plan A scaled drawing that shows a project and infrastructure components after completion of construction
Attention Signal (alias Tone or ringing-style short signal before an announcement.

Preliminary Noise or
Instruction Signal)
Bore Hole A hole drilled in the ground to obtain samples for subsoil investigation.
Building A roofed and walled structure built for permanent use.
Closed Circuit A video system in which signals are not publicly distributed and monitored for surveillance, security and
Television(CCTV) monitoring purposes.
Compression When a body is subjected to a force or forces acting towards it causing it to squeeze, shorten or crush.
Concrete A mixture of cement, fine aggregate, coarse aggregate and water.
Cross Section View generated by slicing an object at an angle perpendicular to its longer axis.
(alias Cross Section Plan)
Dead Load An inert, inactive load such as the weight of the members, the supported structure and permanent
attachment or accessories in bridges.
Design Life Period assumed in the design for which the infrastructure is required to perform its function without
replacement or major structural repair.
Differential Settlement The vertical displacement due to settlement of one point in a foundation with respect to another point of
the foundation.
Dispersal Area (Safe) An area which will accommodate a number of persons equal to the total capacity of the stand and
building/structure it serves, in such a manner that no person within the area need be closer than fifteen
meters (15.0 m) from the stand or building/structure. Dispersal areas shall be based upon the area of
not less than 0.28 m2 per person.
Domestic sewage Comprise of Industrial wastewater, Recycled water, Reclaimed water and Reuse water.
Ductility Ability of a component or solid material to deform under tensile stress.
Factor of Safety The ratio of a limiting value of a quantity or quality to the design value of that quantity or quality.
Acoustic Feedback Feedback of the output signal of an amplifying system on the input of the system depending on the
difference in the intensity and phasing between the input and output signal.
Flange Angles Angles used in riveted plate girders to carry tensile or compressive forces induced by bending.
Flexure A deformation or behavior of an elastic structural element subjected to an external load perpendicular
to the axis of the element.
Footprint The surface area of a building where it meets the natural ground or the finished grade i.e. the outer
perimeter of a building.
xiv xv
Force A push or a pull in a given direction on a body that changes or tends to change its state or rest. (or its Sustainable Design The philosophy of designing physical objects, the built environment and services to substantially
state of motion). comply with the principles of economic, social and ecological sustainability, without compromising
natural and other resources that must be bequeathed to future generations
Foundation A component of an engineered structure that transmits the structure's forces into the soil or rock that
supports it Sway Bracing Secondary structural members spanning between the trusses at interior panel points and provide lateral
stability and shear transfer between trusses.
Friction Pile A pile which derives its supports principally from the surrounding soil through which it is placed by the
development of shearing resistance between the soil and the pile. Topographic Survey Collection of data to represent horizontal and vertical positions of an area, including features such as
(alias Ground Survey) roads, bridges and bodies of water with contours, elevations and coordinates.
Geomembrane Very low permeability synthetic membrane liner of barrier used with any geotechnical engineering related
material so as to control fluid (or gas) migration in a human-made project, structure, or system.
Green Architecture Architecture in which the plan/design is focused on making a building energy-efficient, so as to reduce its
energy consumption, water consumption, operating costs and environmental impact
Green Roof (alias Eco A roof that is either partially or completely covered in vegetation and built on top of a man-made roof,
Roof, Living Roof, deck roof, deck or other support structure
Vegetated Roof)
Green Wall (alias A wall or similar vertical support/element that may be either free-standing or attached to an existing wall,
Biowalls, Ecowalls, and that may be partially, substantially or fully covered with vegetative cover.
Vertical Gardens)
Isolated Footing A footing designed to support a structural load from a single column. Usually a shallow foundation, and
square or circular in shape
Land-use Map Maps that reflect the land resources and types of land use in the national economy.
Longitudinal Section View generated by slicing an object at an angle parallel to its longer axis
Physical Planning The activities pertaining to the preparation of a physical layout of land or property on which vertical
structures such as buildings and/or structures and horizontal developments are proposed.
Pile A slender member that is driven (hammered), drilled or jetted into the ground. Piles are usually
constructed of timber, steel or pre-stressed reinforced concrete.
Point Bearing Piles A pile placed or driven on or into a material which is capable of developing the pile load by directly
(alias End Bearing Piles) resting on a bearing stratum with a reasonable factor of safety.
Post Tensioning The system of prestressing whereby tendons are stressed after the concrete has attained the required
strength and the prestressing forces are transmitted to the concrete generally by anchoring the stressed
tendons to the members.
Precast Concrete A structural member specially of concrete that has been cast into form either in a permanent plant or
somewhere near the site of construction before being transported to the site of installation and finally
erected at its final location.
Prestressed Concrete Concrete reinforced with strands, pretensioned or post tensioned, wherein the effective internal stresses
are induced deliberately by forces caused by tensioned steel or other means to give an active resistance
to loads.
Pretensioning The system of prestressing concrete members whereby wires or strands called tendons are stressed to
a predetermined amount by stretching them between anchorages prior to pouring of concrete.
Reinforced Concrete A composite material which utilizes the concrete in resisting compression forces and some other
materials, usually steel bars or wires, to resist the tension forces.
Retaining Wall A structure usually made of stone masonry, concrete or reinforced concrete that provides lateral support
for a mass of soil.
Seismic Retrofitting Modification of existing structures to make them more resistant to seismic activity, ground motion or soil
failures due to earthquake.
Settlement The downward movement of soil, or the downward movement of a foundation.
Shear Connector A welded stud, spiral bar short length steel element that resists shear between components of a
composite beam.
Sheet Piles A long vertical earth retention and excavation support, steel, vinyl or reinforced concrete, driven into the
ground with interlocking edges to form a continuous wall to resist water or earth pressure.
Spread Footings Also, isolated footing. A footing designed to support a structural load from a single column. Usually a
shallow foundation, and square or circular in shape.
Stirrups Lateral reinforcement formed of individual units, open or closed or continuously wound reinforcement.
(alias Ties)
Structural Foundation Foundation of a structure which generally serves to transfer the loads from the structure to underlying
materials (such as soil or rock) which are known as the foundation material.
xvi xvii
For clarity, GFAs or TGFAs generated below grade (or sidewalk surface) level i.e.
basement or lower ground levels, are not to be counted as part of either the GFA or
TGFA, which are essentially floor areas generated above grade (or sidewalk
surface) level.
 Apply prescribed setbacks and yards/court to determine AMBF.

 TGFA/AMBF = provisional building height or PBH (for direct comparison with
the applicable BHL); whichever shall result in the lower number of
floors/levels applies i.e. the most stringent rule always applies.
For clarity, building height classification in relation to the BHL for buildings shall
be as follows:
Table 3-2 Conversion Table of Gross Floor Area (GFA) to Total Gross Floor Area
(TGFA), 2004 Revised IRR of P.D. No. 1096
Excluded Floor Areas

Type of Building/Structure based on (non-GFA) as a Multiplier to
Use/Occupancy Percentage (%) of the Convert the GFA to
TGFA TGFA
Residential 1 33% 1.50
Residential 2 (Basic), Residential 3 (Basic) and 20% 1.25
Residential 4
Residential 2 (Maximum), Residential 3 16% 1.20
(Maximum) and Residential 5
Commercial 1 20% 1.25
Industrial 1 25% 1.33
Industrial 2 and 3 33% 1.50
Transportation, Utility and Service Areas 33% 1.50
Agricultural and Agro-Industrial 2%-5% 1.03-1.06
A low-rise building/structure shall be from one (1) to five (5) storeys i.e. from 3.0
m (m) to 12.0 m plus 1.0m for a parapet wall (if provided with deck roof),
collectively reckoned from grade (or sidewalk surface) level, including mezzanine
level, in the case of non-residential buildings/structures; and from one (1) to five
(5) storeys i.e. from 3.0 m (m) to 15.0 m plus 1.0m for a parapet wall (if provided
with deck roof), collectively reckoned from grade (or sidewalk surface) level,
including mezzanine level, in the case of residential buildings/structures; low-rise
buildings may or may not be provided with an elevator but must satisfy the basic
accessibility requirements;
A medium-rise building/structure shall be from six (6) to fifteen (15) storeys i.e.
from 15.0 m (m) to 45.0m plus 1.0m for a parapet wall (if provided with deck
roof), collectively reckoned from grade (or sidewalk surface) level, including
mezzanine level, in the case of non-residential buildings/structures; and from six
(6) to fifteen (15) storeys i.e. from 18.0 m (m) to 45.0 m plus 1.0 m for a parapet
wall (if provided with deck roof), collectively reckoned from grade (or sidewalk
surface) level, including mezzanine level, in the case of residential
buildings/structures; medium-rise buildings must be provided with an elevator
and must satisfy the basic accessibility requirements; and
3-5
 Is there an alternate disaster plan for the disposal of sewerage?  Choice of materials like glass and other non-masonry/non-metal exterior
finishing that can withstand high wind pressure must be specified
Communication  Secure installations of electrical and emergency electrical power system
 Are equipment securely anchored and protected?
 Design and layout of windows, doors and other openings
 Are there alternate means of communication when systems fail?
 Location of garage and emergency equipment must allow for quick access and
 Are computers latched onto uninterruptible power supply (UPS)? use
 Is there a facility for obtaining a mobile emergency generator?  Community facilities must be securely braced and protected
 Emergency water supply (for 2-3 days)
Furniture, Fixtures and Equipment Anchorage (especially crucial for hospital designs)
 Life-saving equipment securely located and anchored
 Are the following equipment securely braced?
 Bracing and trimming of big trees (especially those with shallow root systems
- Storage equipment: filing cabinets, shelving, etc.
like acacia, mango, etc.) and structures that pose danger to life
- Table- and floor-mounted equipment
 Non-mobile billboards shall follow standards set under the 2008 DPWH
- Ceiling-mounted equipment: ceiling fans, lighting fixtures, etc. Additional Rules and Regulations (ARR) supplementing Rule XX of the NBCP.
LGUs can enact ordinances that are more stringent than the ARR and Rule XX
 Are there storage tanks (for liquid oxygen and hot water)?
of the NBCP but cannot relax the same.
 Are there surgical fixtures?
 LGU shall provide the appropriate equipment like chainsaws and other
 Are there imaging equipment? earthmoving and transport equipment.
 Is there a gas system?
3.5.4 Floods Mitigation Checklist
 What are the other essential equipment?
 Availability of recent secondary hydrologic information to ascertain flood
 Are there fire alarm and fire-fighting equipment? levels for physical planning at a community level
 Site analysis and site development must seriously consider the site’s history
3.5.2 Fire Mitigation Checklist
and experience with floods
 Compliance with R.A. No. 9514, the 2008 Fire Code of the Philippines (FCP) and
its 2009 or latest IRR  Provisions for emergency evacuation
 Area of Rescue Assistance (ARA): an area, which has direct access to an exit,  All of the Typhoon Mitigation Checklist
where people who are unable to use the stairs or elevators may remain  Prepare map for flood-prone areas. (DPWH, c.2009, unpublished); refer also to
temporarily in safety, to await further instructions or assistance DG Volume 3
 Materials Selections: fire-related materials must be given priority; flame- Floor levels for buildings should be located above the flood level along with a
spread must be checked at various critical points suitable freeboard, as determined based on Volume 3. The appropriate design
 Firefighting facilities/preparedness: planning and deducing must consciously flood to be adopted for different types of buildings is provided in Table 3-3. The
consider the installation of fire-fighting equipment as an integral factor following should also apply:
 Provision for gas masks, fire-resistant jackets, boots, helmets, etc.  If basement parking is to be adopted, then all entries and openings to the
basement should be above the design flood level noted in Table 3-3. A
 Provision of life safety harness system
secondary evacuation route, such as a stairwell, should be provided that
 Emergency water supply provides access to a level above the design flood level.
 All electrical and related services should be above the design flood level, or
3.5.3 Typhoon Mitigation Checklist flood proofed above the flood level.
 Wind direction and other topographical factors like loose soil, loose rock
 Where inundation is expected to occur for more than a few hours, then
anchorage that may be exacerbated by heavy rainfall shall be dealt with
provisions should be provided for appropriate evacuation.
dispatch
3-8 3-9
The hawker’s plaza and ‘bagsakan’ (wholesale) area are places near the semi-wet
and dry sections for the convenience of both vendors and delivery vans, most of
which supply dry goods such as groceries and sari-sari items (different/wide
variety of goods). It is recommended that the hawker’s plaza should not exceed
60% of the size of the market core, except for those markets which may have only
one or two market days per week. The ‘bagsakan’ (wholesale) area is computed at
around 10–13% of the total built-up area.
Market Stalls and Aisles

A public market basically consists of stalls and aisles. A stall is the most important
element of the market. In detailed design, great care must be exercised in
analyzing the needs of vendors, particularly in the case of the wet stalls.
The required stall area for a market must be about 60% of the total floor area. The
circulation area, which is the aisle, is 35% and the offices, toilets and utility room
at 5% of the total floor area.
The stalls are designed with high flexibility to make them functional even if the
original intention is changed. For planning purposes, the average sizes of the
different market stalls may be assumed at 2–4 m2 per stall for vegetable, fruits,
meat and dried fish, 5–9 m2 per stall for shops and sari-sari (general) store and
15–18 m2 for carinderia (eatery) and cereals.
For purposes of preliminary programming, the following illustrate the above
applications:
Wet Market Stalls
 1.7 m x 2.25 m or 3.8 m2 – for meat/fish and vegetables
 1.7 m x 2.25 m or 3.8 m2 – for fruits and vegetables
Dry Market Stalls
 3.4 m x 4.5 m or 15.30 m2 –for cereals and carinderia(eatery)
 2.25 m x 3.41 m or 7.67 m2 –for shops and sari-sari (General Store)
 2.27 m x 4.49 m or 10.19 m2 – garments
Recommended stall sizes should be matched with existing stall sizes and should be
related to the market vendor analysis. Any deviations from the recommended stall
sizes should be done in increments/multiples of 1.44m2 (1.2 m x 1.2 m) or even
fractions (1/2”, 1/4”, 1/8”, 1/16”).
For two storey market buildings, the dry markets stalls shall be situated at the
upper level.
The counter aisle should be at 1.5 – 2.0 m wide while the primary and secondary
entry aisles may be assumed at 2.0 – 3.5 m wide.
The proposed dry section market stalls shall have a secure ceiling e.g. wire mesh,
cyclone wire or similar material, to be installed directly above or below the ceiling
material
3-18
3.8.3 School Building Design Particulars Maximum Space Requirements

(m2)
Refer to pertinent DepEd standards/ guidelines or to applicable DPWH standards
Assistant Secretary 56.00
(duly approved by the DepEd) and to Annex C.
Staff 4.00 – 6.00/pax2
Conference Room 30.00
3.8.4 Design of Other Key Structures
Reception Room 20.00
Such as small airport/port passenger terminal buildings. Refer to pertinent
Toilet/Bathroom 6.00
DoTC standards/guidelines (if available) and to Annex C.
Pantry 10.00
Storage Area 10.00
3.8.5 Design of Government Offices
Office of the Director
Table 3-6 provides the recommended standards for use as a reference in the space
Director IV 36.00
planning of typical high density non-residential buildings such as offices.
Staff 4.00 – 6.00/pax2
Table 3-6 Space Allocation Standards for Typical Office Spaces (GFA)
Particulars Maximum Space Requirements
(m2) Toilet/Bathroom 4.00
Main Lobby 0.25/pax; minimum for lobby as waiting/standing Pantry 5.00

room is 0.28
Storage Area 6.00
Conference Room 1.20/pax including aisles and demonstration
Office of the Assistant Director
space
Director III 24.00
Training Room 2.40/pax including aisles and services such as
storage, production room and toilet for the staff Staff 4.00 – 6.00/pax2
Toilet Facilities 1
1.50 per one water closet (WC) enclosure Toilet/Bathroom 4.00
For Agencies providing frontline services 1 WC/1 – 100 for female Based on the Revised National Plumbing Code of the Philippines (R.A. 1378)
1
(for Public use) 1 WC/1 – 200 for male

1 urinal/1 – 100 for male Includes circulatory area
2
1 lavatory/2 WC
Division-Level Unit
For Agencies with no clientele 1 WC/1 – 15 for male and female
Division Chief 12.00
(for Employee use) 2 WC/16 – 35 for male and female
3 WC/36 – 55 for male and female Staff 4.00 – 6.00/pax2
1 lavatory/40 for male and female; or
1 lavatory/2 WC Includes circulation area
2
Space Requirement/s of Key Officials

Office of the Secretary
The same reference standards places open plan areas at offices at 80%, with
Secretary 72.00
enclosed office areas at 20%.
Staff 4.00 – 6.00/pax2
The equivalent space allocations for officers at national government
agencies/GOCCs, such as Secretary, Undersecretary and Assistant Secretary shall
apply for all affected public buildings (refer Table 3-6).
Pantry 10.00 Other applicable space planning standards for other Philippine buildings i.e.
Storage Area 10.00 standards that are not found in the NBCP, are as follows:
Office of the Undersecretary  Hospitals and health care facilities c/o the DoH
Undersecretary 63.00
 Primary and secondary school buildings c/o the DepEd
Staff 4.00 – 6.00/pax2
Conference Room 40.00  Tertiary school buildings c/o the CHED
 Markets c/o the DTI and/or the HLURB and HUDCC
 Industrial buildings c/o the PEZA
Pantry 10.00
Storage Area 10.00  Tourism facilities c/o the TIEZA
Office of the Assistant Secretary
 Recreational facilities c/o the HLURB and HUDCC
3-20 3-21
pipes/tubings/drains connected to NON-CAPITAL EQUIPMENT and

plumbing/electrical/electronic/ mechanical fixtures and the like; and other
decorative accessories such as curtains, drapes, blinds, shades and carpets/carpet
tiles, paintings, wall hangings, sculpture (large/medium/small), and
decorative/accent lighting devices, with complete fittings and accessories, and the
like.
3.11.3 Fixtures
These are pieces of equipment or furniture that is fixed in position in a building or
vehicle; articles attached to a building or land and considered legally part of it so
that such items normally remain in place even when the building owner moves out;
something securely fixed in place or attached as a permanent appendage,
apparatus, or appliance e.g. plumbing fixtures; the possible examples of fixtures in
a typical Philippine building/grounds include the following: visible, remote-
operated and/or tangible/operational devices or provisions that are fixed in
position in (such as permanently attached to) a building and which partake of
finishing items, such as plumbing fixtures (water closets, urinals, lavatories, water
fountains, etc.), electrical fixtures (general and task lighting, area lighting for
grounds, exterior building lighting including up-lighting or down-lighting, indoor
and outdoor switches/manual controls and convenience outlets, etc.), electronic
fixtures (indoor and outdoor/rooftop cameras, speakers, sensors, monitors, card-
access or biometric access terminals for secure areas, automated main gates and
doors, etc.), mechanical and related auxiliary fixtures (sprinkler heads, indoor
climate management or control terminals/stations/switches, etc.), and the like; and
architectural fixtures such as large fixed/sectional mirrors, finish hardware items,
wall (or floor) safes and the like.
3.11.4 Equipment
These are the necessary items for a particular purpose or activity; equipment
(solid state), apparatus, gear, material (i.e. the aggregate of
portable/transportable/self-propelled equipment and/or supplies used by a
specific organization, such as the military or para-military or the government),
outfit, paraphernalia and the like; materials needed for a purpose such as
laboratory apparatus; all the fixed assets other than land and buildings of a
business enterprise; tangible property (other than land or buildings) that is used
in the operation of a business; examples of equipment include devices, machines,
tools, and vehicles; the possible examples of equipment in a typical Philippine
building are: visible and tangible/operable apparatus, gear, materiel
(transportable equipment), outfit, paraphernalia, tools relating to architectural,
structural, electrical, electronic and auxiliary
(telecommunications/audio/video/building management system/BMS),
mechanical, sanitary, plumbing, fire-fighting functions/operations of the building
e.g. integrated computer systems including peripherals, ticketing system including
cash registers and official receipt or trip ticket printers, point of sale (POS)
reporting system (as applicable, possibly for both ticketing/parking and
commercial leased spaces), public information/notification/address systems
3-33
3.12.1 Sites/Grounds
 Land and site sustainability considerations during construction activities such
as plans and documentation needed for site excavation, sedimentation and
erosion control, air pollution control, etc.
 Use of organic soil treatment products.
 Minimization of over-paving through the requisite compliances with valid and
subsisting laws, rules, regulations, guidelines, standards and procedural
manuals pertaining to physical planning e.g. NBCP, Water Code, Sanitation
Code, etc. (refer also to pertinent portions of Annex E).
 Management of shadows cast by the proposed buildings on adjacent lots and
buildings/structures.
 Miscellaneous considerations i.e. rainfall information and hydrologic (and
flooding) characteristics of the site including flood risk assessment mitigation
studies (if available); public passage-ways such as secure pathwalks and
bicycle lanes and bicycle parking plan (if provided); community connectivity
(amenities, facilities, services and utilities/AFSU); waiting sheds and other key
street furniture; vehicle use, maneuver and parking plans (open, semi-covered
and covered); landscaping plans (hard and soft scapes); green roofs and heat
insulated areas.
3.12.2 Buildings/Structures
 Energy conservation and management i.e. compliances with the latest
Department of Energy (DoE) guidelines on energy conservation and
management i.e. lighting and power design, etc.; use of light-emitting diodes
(LEDs), compact fluorescent lamps (CFLs) and similar energy-saving
illumination devices (provided the proper disposal methods are also in place),
etc.; extensive use of natural lighting and ventilation matched with the use of
sun-shading devices; use of renewable (non-fossil) energy sources where
applicable i.e. sun, wind, wave, current, hydro, dendro (forest products), hot
springs, animal, biogas/compost, solid waste, etc.
 Water conservation and management i.e. reduction or optimization of
domestic water consumption such as use of low-flow plumbing/sanitary
fixtures and equipment, etc., domestic wastewater reuse or recycling; storm
water management and rainwater harvesting such as collection, storage,
treatment, use, reuse, recycling, disposal, etc., wastewater treatment such as
use of compact/ compartmentalized sewage treatment devices or sewage
treatment plants (STPs), etc.
 Solid waste management i.e. waste management plan; material recovery/
segregation facility (MRF/MSF); use of ‘non-burn’ waste to energy (WTE) or
waste to worth (WTW) technologies that utilize local and foreign advanced
technologies compliant with the PH Clean Air Act of 1999.
 Indoor environment quality considerations e.g. non-smoking areas;
minimization of emitted volatile organic compounds (VOCs) by materials
specified for the building/structure/project; air-conditioning refrigerant
3-35
3.13.1 Sites/Grounds
 Less paving around the building to help retard surface water flow i.e. through
percolation into the ground, inasmuch as the collected surface water contribute
to flash flooding at lower elevations within a community.
 Proper setbacks and compliance with mandated legal easements (MLEs) along
waterways to maintain floodwater at a low level such as narrower waterways
translate into higher flood levels.
3.13.2 Buildings/Structures
 Use of concrete deck roofs instead of sloped metal roofs.
 If the use of metal roofs cannot be avoided, provide much steeper roof slopes
(because flatter slopes are easily penetrated by strong winds such as wind
drag).
 Use of roof that is sloped at all four (4) sides (since typhoon winds come from
all directions).
 Use of green roofs (only when technically and financially feasible).
 Use of very short eaves i.e. the roof extension outside the exterior wall of the
building or residence, usually provided for shade and aesthetics (inasmuch as
long eaves cause uplift which open up the roof cavity to more/extensive wind
damage); the short eaves could be paired with media agua (shed roofs) over
windows and doors; short eaves are those that are 610 mm or shorter as
measured from the finished building wall while the long eaves are those that
extend as much as 2.44 m or longer from the finished building wall (and which
may already require additional structural support); the minimum eaves shall
be at 300 mm while the maximum eaves can be as much as 3.66 m (with or
without additional structural supports), provided that the appropriate climate
change adaptive and disaster reduction considerations are all factored into the
design.
 Use of gutterless roofs in sites where trees shed a large volume of leaves i.e. dry
and decomposed leaves and debris clog up the drains, downspouts and catch
basins and the accumulated water cause the un-drained roof to collapse; a
gutterless roof has to be partnered with a trench drain, sand pit or a sand and
gravel bed at the ground below to absorb the falling water.
 Controlled roof cavity and/or ceiling cavity openings to relieve or equalize
pressure inside and outside the building during strong winds i.e. a certain
amount of wind has to be let in the building/structure to relieve and/or
equalize air pressures.
 For flood-prone or flood-risk areas, the use of the lower level as a multi-use,
flexible use space (that can be flooded), and which can be connected to the
upper level/s of the building through stairs or ramps (for use by PWDs or large
domesticated/farm animals).
 Use of stilted or floating building technologies, if technically and financially
feasible, if safe and if locally available.
3-37
 Tall buildings shall be provided with safe refuge zones or floors for evacuating
building occupants; these areas shall have stronger structural reinforcement
and fire protection features if compared with regular floors.
 All emergency, exit and public doors servicing rooms or areas with users
numbering twelve or more occupants must all swing outward and use non-
detachable pins for added safety; if 2 exits are located in an enclosed space,
these must be located far apart and at opposite sides of such space.
 All fire lanes and emergency/fire exits, passageway and stairs shall be
maintained free of all forms of obstructions and fitted with emergency lighting
devices all the way to the refuge floors and/or the street below.
 Location of emergency exits shall be far apart and/or opposite of each other
and in full accordance with prescriptions of the NBCP and the Fire Code.
 Avoidance of use of non-fire rated substances and materials for buildings,
particularly those that produce toxic or harmful fumes during fire e.g.
polyvinyl chloride (PVC) doors and jambs, etc.
 Use of medium-weight movable materials as furniture pieces i.e. those that can
readily serve as sturdy flotation devices.
 Elevated floor finish line (FFL) at say 0.60 m minimum above sidewalk level
for carports and for main entrances for low-rise structures e.g. .residences in
known flood risk areas. Refer to Section 3.5.4 for flood levels for buildings.
 Positioning of convenience outlets above table surface height i.e. say about
850 mm above the finished floor line (FFL)
 Possible positioning of the main power panel at a reachable height just below
the finished ceiling line (FCL) i.e. at a maximum height of 300 mm below the
finished ceiling line (FCL) and at a minimum eye level (or pix) height of 1400
mm above the finished floor line (FFL).
 Use of jalousie windows, which are designed for use in the tropics, and which
could serve as a fast means of escape (but requires security provisions such
grillwork or similar devices).
 A fast emergency escape system using maintenance gondolas or possibly even
zip lines mounted on roofs of tall buildings directed at refuge floors/levels of
adjoining tall buildings or open refuge areas may need to be devised.
 Design of low-rise buildings for survivability i.e. controlled detachment of a
designated survival room/pod from the main building/structure for purposes
of flotation or similar survival action/procedures.
 Use of low-cost to optimum-cost devices or technologies than can readily
convert seawater, brackish water, inland waterway water, wastewater, etc.
into domestic water fit for cooking and drinking (potable water) i.e. solely
with the use of renewable energy i.e. sun or wind to power the conversion
process.
 Use of stilted or floating building technologies, if technically and financially
feasible, if safe and if locally available.
3-39
valid and subsisting law that is implemented and enforced by DPWH and its  Use of natural light and ventilation, particularly of day-lighting and passive
agents. The NBCP has apparently been breached and violated at will over the last cooling
36 years of its existence, resulting in the present pitiful state of the built
 Elevator traffic calculations and zoning (as applicable)
environment.
 Building and site/grounds colors and textures, particularly those that are
An architectural permit application must be accompanied by the pertinent
absorptive and reflective of light and heat (that should illustrate the RLA’s
architectural documents, together with computations that must be signed and
appreciation of tropical design as the same applies to Philippine buildings)
sealed only by registered and licensed Architects (RLAs), in full compliance with
law (Section 20.5 of RA No. 9266, The Architecture Act of 2004). Such  Graphics, signage and way-finding provisions
architectural computations must contain basic spatial and volumetric information  Design sensitivities i.e. gender and development (GAD), children and the
about the proposed new building/fit-out or elderly, persons with disabilities (PWDs, physical, mental, emotional, etc.),
repair/renovation/rehabilitation/expansion/retrofit project such as those ethnicity and indigenous peoples, people with differing lifestyles/preferences,
mandated under Rules VII and VIII (as well as Rule XII) of the 2004 Revised IRR of religion, etc.
the NBCP, to wit:
The foregoing are only basic architectural plan and design features of the building.
 Zoning classification with statements of principal, accessory and conditional Should the DPWH IRR on sustainable building design be promulgated, the RLA
uses shall also be responsible for a number of sustainable building features, as well as
 Allowed building occupancy and building type features that address issues and concerns pertaining to climate change adaptation
and disaster resilience. The RLA's description of the proposed building’s
 Lot type, configuration and access systems
sustainable design features must necessarily include descriptions of the embodied
 RROW width (stating arcade width if applicable) and TLA energy levels of construction and finishing materials proposed for use in the
building, carbon footprint calculation for the building and its users over a certain
 On-site and off-site analyses, with particular attention to topography, slopes,
period of time, energy and water conservation features (to include rainwater
hazards, etc.
harvesting if possible), solid waste management provisions (collection, storage,
 Building and site/grounds orientations with respect to sun, wind, rain/storm, recycling, reuse, disposal), etc.
noise, pollution sources, odors, view corridors (and privacy satisfaction)
The architectural permit application must clearly show that the building fully
 Treatment of the mandated legal easements (MLE) satisfies all the spatial requirements and all the applicable development controls
 FLAR (FAR), GFA &TGFA (DCs). To be sure that only RLAs shall be responsible for architectural permits and
their support documents, the author (signatory) of the architectural permit
 Applicable setbacks (including incremental setbacks)
application support documents or his/her duly designated representative should
 Firewall compliances (as needed) be present (or available through electronic means) to defend the contents of the
documents when the same are reviewed by RLAs who should also be the ones in
 Basement level compliances (as applicable)
charge of the architectural divisions of LGU OBOs i.e. full compliance with Section
 Open and covered parking compliances (including public transportation 35 of R.A. No. 9266 (The Architecture Act of 2004).
connectivity)
The architectural permit application must also show the calculations for
 PSO and AMBF including clear indications of the total open space within lot architectural life safety code compliances, particularly those mandated under R.A.
(TOSL) and the unpaved surface area (USA) that shall assist in surface water No. 9514 (The 2008 Fire Code of the Philippines/FCP and its 2009 IRR). Also for
flow retardation and percolation into the aquifer inclusion is the satisfaction of the mandated compliances with B.P. Blg. 344
 Applicable BHL (including CAAP restrictions or other agency restrictions as (Accessibility Law of 1983) particularly with respect to parking slots, ramps,
applicable) elevators and toilets for persons with disabilities (PWDs). Additionally, the
pertinent information on architectural design features that address specific user
 AMVB needs and sensitivities must be included e.g. gender, age, ethnicity, religion, etc. as
 OFB, OLBP and the angle of angular plane with respect to the RROW well as urban design features e.g. including lists of street furniture, way-finding
provisions and directional signages as well as statements of the proposed
 The architectural and space programs
treatments of transitional spaces between the public domain (e.g. RROW) and the
 Wall/window orientations and wall to window ratio (WWR) building grounds and enclosed building spaces.
 Site development (including urban design) features
3-42 3-43
4.2.3 Gravity Loads

This section shall apply to designing the gravity loads as specified in NSCP Section
204 – Section 205.
Gravity loads are the weights of structural, non-structural elements, and expected
weight of occupants that is applied to structures as downward forces.
4.2.4 Dead Load

Dead loads consist of the permanent weights and include the weight of columns,
beams and girders, floor slab, roofing, walls, windows, plumbing, electrical
fixtures, finishes and fixed equipment. The minimum densities for design loads
from materials are shown in Table 4-1. The minimum values for dead loads in low-
rise buildings are shown in Table 4-2.
4.2.5 Live Load

Live load is determined by the function and occupancy of the building. Loads
include the weights of temporarily placed items on the structure such as
furnishings, human occupants and construction and maintenance activities. The
standards in designing the live load of a building are provided in NSCP Section
205.
All loads shall be the maximum loads expected by the intended use or occupancy
and not be less than the loads required by this section. Live loads are provided in
Tables 4-3, 4-4 and 4-5.
4-3
Table 4-3 Minimum Uniform and Concentrated Live Loads Use or Occupancy Uniform Load1 Concentrated
Load
Use or Occupancy Uniform Load 1
Concentrated
Load Category Description kPa kN
Category Description kPa kN Ground floor corridors 4.8 4.5
1. Access floor systems Office use 2.4 9.0 2
20. Sidewalks and driveways Public access 12.0 --7
Computer use 4.8 9.02 21. Storage Light 6.0 --
2. Armories -- 7.2 0 Heavy 12.0 --
3. Theaters, assembly areas3 and Fixed seats 2.9 0 22. Stores Retail 4.8 4.52
auditoriums
Movable seats 4.8 0 Wholesale 6.0 13.42
Lobbies and platforms 4.8 0 23. Pedestrian bridges and walkways -- 4.8 --
Stages areas 7.2 0 Source: NSCP, 2010.
4. Bowling alleys, poolrooms and -- 3.6 0 Notes for Table 4-3

similar recreational areas 1
See NSCP Section 205.5 for live load reductions
2
See NSCP Section 205.3.3, first paragraph, for area of load application.
5. Catwalk for maintenance access -- 1.9 1.3 3
Assembly areas include such occupancies as dance halls, drill rooms, gymnasiums, playgrounds,
6. Cornices and marquees -- 3.6 4
0 plazas, terraces and similar occupancies that are generally accessible to the public.
4
For special-purpose roofs, see NSCP Section 205.4.4.
7. Dining rooms and restaurants -- 4.8 0 5
Exit facilities shall include such uses as corridors serving an occupant load of 10 or more persons,
exterior exit balconies, stairways, fire escapes
8. Exit facilities5 -- 4.8 06 6
Individual stair treads shall be designed to support a 1.3 kN concentrated load placed in a position
9. Garages General storage and/or repair 4.8 --
7 that would cause maximum stress. Stair stringers may be designed for the uniform load set forth in
the table
Private or pleasure-type motor 1.9 --7 7
See NSCP Section 205.3.3, second paragraph, for concentrated loads. See Table 4-4 for vehicle
vehicle storage barriers
8
Residential occupancies include private dwellings, apartments and hotel guest rooms.
10. Hospitals Wards and rooms 1.9 4.52 9
Restroom loads shall not be less than the load for the occupancy with which they are associated,
Laboratories & operating 2.9 4.5 2 but need not exceed 2.4 kPa.
rooms
Corridors above ground floor 3.8 4.5
11. Libraries Reading rooms 2.9 4.52
Stack rooms 7.2 4.52
12. Manufacturing Light 6.0 9.02
Heavy 12.0 13.42
13. Office Call Centers & BPO 2.9 9.0
Lobbies & ground floor 4.8 9.0
corridors
Offices 2.4 9.02
Building corridors above 3.8 9.0
ground floor
14. Printing plants Press rooms 7.2 11.02
Composing and linotype rooms 4.8 9.02
15. Residential8 Basic floor area 1.9 06
Exterior balconies 2.94 0
Decks 1.9 4
0
Storage 1.9 0
16. Restrooms9 -- -- --
17. Reviewing stands, grandstands, -- 4.8 0
Bleachers, and folding and
telescoping seating
18. Roof decks Same as area served or -- --
Occupancy
19. Schools Classrooms 1.9 4.52
4-6 4-7
Table 4-4 Special Loads1 11

Vertical members of storage racks shall be protected from impact forces of operating equipment, or
racks shall be designed so that failure of one vertical member will not cause collapse of more than
Use or Occupancy Vertical Load Lateral Load the bay or bays supported by that member.
12
The 1.1 kN load is to be applied to any single fire sprinkler support point but not simultaneously to
Category Description kPa kPa all support joints.
1. Construction, public access at site Walkway 7.2 -
(live load)
Canopy 7.2 - Table 4-5 Minimum Roof Live Loads 1
2. Grandstands, reviewing, stands Seats and footboards 1.75 See Note 3 METHOD 1 METHOD 2
bleachers, and folding and
telescoping seating (live load) Tributary Area (m )2
Uniform Rate of Maximum
ROOF SLOPE Load2 reduction, Reduction R
3. Stage accessories (live load) Catwalks 1.9 - 0 to 20 20 to 60 Over 60 (kPa) r (percentage)
Follow spot, projection and 2.4 - Uniform Load (kPa)
control rooms
1. Flat or rise less than 4 units
3
1.00 0.75 0.60 1.00 0.08 40
4. Ceiling framing (live load) Over stages 1.0 - vertical in 12 units horizontal
(33.3% slope). Arch and dome
All uses except over 0.54 - with rise less than one-eighth of
stages span
5. Partitions and interior walls - - 0.25 2. Rise 4 units vertical to less than 0.75 0.70 0.60 0.75 0.06 25
6. Elevators and dumbwaiters (dead 2× total loads - 12 units vertical in 12 units
and live loads) horizontal (33.3% to less than
100% slope). Arch and dome
7. Cranes (dead and live loads) Total load including impact 1.25 x total load5 0.10× total load6 with rise one-eighths of span
increase
3. Rise 12 units vertical in 12 units 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 No reduction permitted
8. Balcony railings and guardrails Exit facilities serving an - 0.75 kN/m7 horizontal (100% slope) and
occupant load greater than greater. Arch or dome with rise
50 three-eighth of span or greater
Other than exit facilities - 0.30 kN/m7 4. Awnings except cloth covered.4 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25
Components - 1.2 8 5. Greenhouses, lath houses and 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50
agricultural buildings.5
9. Vehicle barriers - - 27 kN 9
Source: NSCP, 2010
10. Handrails See Note 10 See Note 10
Notes for Table 4-5
11. Storage racks Over 2.4 m high Total loads11 See NSCP Table 1
For special-purpose roofs, see NSCP Sections 205.4.4.
208-12 2
See NSCP Sections 205.5 and 205.6 for live-load reductions. The rate of reduction r in NSCP
12. Fire sprinkler structural support - 1.1 kN plus weight of See NSCP Table Equation 205-1 shall be as indicated in the table. The maximum reduction, R, shall not exceed
water-filled pipe12 208-12 the value indicated in the table.
3
A flat roof is any roof with a slope less than 1/4 unit vertical in 12 units horizontal (2% slope). The
Source: NSCP, 2010 live load for flat roofs is in addition to the ponding load required by NSCP Section 206.7.
4
See definition in NSCP Section 202.
Notes for Table 4-4: 5
See NSCP Section 205.4.4 for concentrated load requirements for greenhouse roof members.
1
The tabulated loads are minimum loads. Where other vertical by this code or required by the design
would cause greater stresses, they shall be used. Loads are in kPa unless otherwise indicated in
the table. 4.2.6 Other Minimum Loads
2
Unit is kN/m.
3
Lateral sway bracing loads of 350 N/m parallel and 145 N/m perpendiculars to seat and footboards. Other minimum loads to be considered are:
4
Does not apply to ceilings that have sufficient total access from below, such that access is not
required within the space above the ceiling. Does not apply to ceilings if the attic areas above the  Impact loads (NSCP Section 206.3). This is the dynamic effect on a body as
ceiling are not provided with access. This live load need not be considered as acting simultaneously
with other live loads imposed upon the ceiling framing or its supporting structure. induced by the contact of moving load or operating equipment. Impact is
5
The impact factors included are for cranes with steel wheels riding on steel rails. They may be
modified if substantiating technical data acceptable to the building official is submitted. Live loads on expressed as a percentage increase in the load when at rest.
crane support girders and their connections shall be taken as the maximum crane wheel loads. For
pendant-operated traveling crane support girders and their connections, the impact factors shall be  Crane Loads (NSCP Section 206.9).
1.10.
6
This applies in the direction parallel to the runway rails (longitudinal). The factor for forces  Heliport and Helistop Landing Areas (NSCP Section 206.10).
perpendicular to the rail is 0.20 x the transverse traveling loads (trolley, cab, hooks and lifted loads).
Forces shall be applied at top of rail and may be disturbed among rails of multiple rail cranes and  Soil load.
shall be distributed with due regard for lateral stiffness of the structures supporting these rails.
7
A load per lineal meter (kN/m) to be applied horizontally at right angles to the top rail.
8
Intermediate rails, panel fillers and their connections shall be capable of withstanding a load of 1.2
kPa applied horizontally at right angles over the entire tributary area including openings and spaces 4.2.7 Wind Load
between rails. Reactions due to this loading need not be combined with those of Footnote 7.
9
A horizontal load in kN applied at right angles to the vehicle barrier at a height of 450 mm above the
The most significant consideration in the computation of wind load is the location
parking surface. The force may be distributed over a 300-mm-square area. of the structure. Areas facing the Pacific Ocean are analyzed against a maximum
10
The mounting of handrails shall be such that the completed handrail and supporting structure are
capable of withstanding a load of at least 890 N applied in any direction at any point on the rail. wind design velocity of 250 kph and are designated as Zone 1, consistent with the
These loads shall not be assumed to act cumulatively with Item 9. strong tropical storms that originate from this area. The wind from Zone 1 wind
weakens to 200 kph in the area designated as Zone 2. This wind exits at the
4-8 4-9
Philippine Sea with a velocity of 150 kph in the area designated as Zone 3. Table 4- Pnet9 = net design wind pressure for Exposure B at h=9 m
7 identifies specific provinces under each zone and a quick reference map is
Iw = 1.0 from NSCP Figure 207-3, kPa
available on NSCP Figure 207-24.
NSCP also requires the use of the occupancy importance factor, a magnifier that Method 2: Analytical Procedure
increases (or reduces) the wind load. A magnifies of 15% is used for many
Analytical procedure shall be used for buildings or structures that do not satisfy
structures most needed during emergencies, structures that can have many
the conditions for using the simplified procedure provided that the building or
occupants in one area and facilities that house dangerous materials that may
structure is regular-shaped as defined in NSCP Section 207.5 and does not have
cause additional harm to the populace if toxins are released due to structural
response wind loading, vortex, shedding, instability due to galloping or flutter, or
failure. A low of -15% is used for facilities that are not usually used as human
does not have a site location for which channeling effect or buffering in the wake
shelter. Table 4-6 describes occupancy/function of structure, while Table 4-9
of upwind obstructions warrant special consideration as stated in NSCP Section
factor the numerical value for occupancy importance factor.
207.5.1.
Analysis of structures should include a separate consideration for the Main Wind
The steps of analytical procedure in accordance with NSCP Section 207.5.3 are:
Force Resisting System (MWFRS) which is the assembly of structural members
that provide the overall reliability against wind forces, and the components and 1. Determine the basic wind speed V and wind directionality factor K d in
cladding elements which are individual parts of the structure that cover and accordance with NSCP Section 207.5.4 and NSCP Table 207-2 respectively.
complete the skeletal MWFRS. 2. Determine the importance factor, Iw, in accordance with NSCP Section 207.5.5.
The design wind load for buildings, including MWFRS and component and 3. Determine the exposure category or exposure coefficient Kz or Kh, as
cladding elements, shall be determined using the following methods. applicable for each wind direction in accordance with NSCP Section 207.5.6.
4. Determine the topographic factor Kzt in accordance with NSCP Section 207.5.7.
Method 1: Simplified Procedure
5. Determine the gust effect Factor G or Gf, as applicable in accordance with NSCP
The steps in accordance with are:
Section 207.5.8.
1. The basic wind Speed, V, in accordance with NSCP Section 207.5.4 shall be
6. Determine the enclosure classification in accordance with NSCP Section
determined assuming the wind can come from any horizontal direction.
207.5.9.
2. Determine the importance factor, Iw, in accordance with NSCP Section 207.5.5.
7. Determine the Internal Pressure coefficients, GCpi in accordance with NSCP
3. Determine the exposure category in accordance with NSCP Section 207.5.6. Section 207.5.11.1.
4. Determine the height and exposure adjustment coefficient, λ, shall be 8. Determine the External Pressure coefficient Cp or GCpf or force coefficients Cf,
determined from NSCP Figures 207-2 and 207-3. as applicable in accordance with NSCP Section 207.5.11.2 or NSCP Section
5. For the Main Wind-Force Resisting System: Determine Ps for the horizontal 207.5.11.3, respectively.
pressures which is the combination of the windward and leeward net 9. Determine the velocity pressure qz or qh, as applicable, in accordance with
pressures and shall be determined by the following equation: NSCP Section 207.5.10. The velocity pressure, qz evaluated at height z shall be
ps = λK zt Iw ps9 calculated by the following equation:
qz = 47.3 x 10−6 K z K zt K d V 2 Iw
The net design wind pressures, pnet, for the components and cladding of buildings where:
shall be determined by the following equation:
Kd = wind directionality factor in NSCP Table 207-2
Pnet = λK zt Iw pnet9
Kz = velocity pressure exposure coefficient evaluated at height z
where:
Kzt = topographic factor as defined in NSCP Section 207.5.7
Kzt = topographic factor as defined in NSCP Section 207.5.7
10. Determine the wind load p or F in accordance with NSCP Sections 207.5.12,
ps9 = simplified design wind pressure for Exposure B at h=9 m 207.5.13, 207.5.14, and 207.5.15 as applicable. The design wind pressure is
given by the following equations:
Iw = 1.0 from NSCP Figure 207-3, kPa
For rigid buildings of all heights:
4-10 4-11
p = qGCp − qi (GCpi ) Table 4-6 Occupancy Category
Occupancy Category Occupancy or Function of Structure

For flexible buildings:
Occupancy having surgery and emergency treatment
p = qGf Cp − qi (GCpi ) areas
Fire and police stations
Garage and shelters for emergency vehicles and
where: emergency aircraft
Structures and shelters in emergency preparedness
I Essential Facilities centers
q = qz for windward walls evaluated at height z above the ground Aviation control towers
Structures and equipment in communication centers and
q = qh for leeward walls, side walls and roofs evaluated at height h other facilities required for emergency response
Facilities for standby power-generating equipment for
Category I structures
qi = qh for windward walls, leeward walls, and roofs of enclosed Tanks or other structures containing housing or supporting
buildings and fpr negative internal pressure evaluation in water or other fire-suppression material or equipment
required for the protection of Category I, II or III structures
partially enclosed buildings Public school buildings
Hospitals
qi = qz for positive internal pressure evaluation in partially enclosed Designated evacuation centers
buildings where height is defined as the level at the highest Occupancies and structures housing or supporting toxic or
opening in the building that could affect the positive internal II Hazardous Facilities explosive chemicals or substances
Non-building structures storing, supporting or containing
pressure quantities of toxic or explosive substances
G = gust effect factor from NSCP Section 207.5.8 (See discussion in Single-story school buildings
Buildings with an assembly room with an occupant
NSCP Section 207.5.12.2) capacity of 1,000 or more
Educational buildings such as museums libraries,
Cp = external pressure coefficient from NSCP Figure 207-6 or 207-8 auditorium with a capacity of 300 or more students
III Special Occupancy Structures Buildings used for college or adult education with a
capacity of 500 or more students
(GCpi) = internal pressure coefficient from NSCP Figure 207-5; q and qi Institutional buildings with 50 or more incapacitated
shall be evaluated using exposure defined in NSCP Section patients, but not included in Category I
Mental hospitals, sanitariums, jails, prison and other
207.5.6.3. Pressure shall be applied simultaneously on windward buildings where personal liberties of inmates are similarly
and leeward walls and on roof surface as defined in NSCP Figures restrained
All structures with an occupancy of 5,000 or more persons
207-6 and 207-8. Structures and equipment in power-generating stations,
and other public utility facilities not included in Category I
Alternatively, design wind pressures for the MWFRS of low-rise buildings shall be or Category II, and required for continued operation
determined by the following equation: IV Standard Occupancy Structures All structures housing occupancies or having functions not
listed in Category I, II or III and Category V
p = qh[(GCpf) – (GCpi)]
V Miscellaneous Structures Private garages, carports, sheds and fences over 1.5 m
high
where:
qh = velocity pressure evaluated at mean roof height h using
exposure defined in NSCP Section 207.5.6.3
(GCpf ) = external pressure coefficient from NSCP Figure 207-10
(GCpi ) = internal pressure coefficient from NSCP Figure 207-5
4-12 4-13
Table 4-7 Wind Zone for the Different Provinces of the Philippines Table 4-10 Velocity Pressure Exposure Coefficients1 , Kh and Kz
Zone Classification (Basic Provinces Height above Ground Exposure (Note 1)

Wind Speed) Level, z (m)
B C D
Zone 1 (V=250kph) Albay, Aurora, Batanes, Cagayan, Camarines Norte, Camarines
Sur, Catanduanes, Eastern Samar, Isabela, Northern Samar, Case 1 Case 2 Cases 1 & 2 Cases 1 & 2
Quezon, Quirino, Samar, Sorsogon 0-4.5 0.70 0.57 0.85 1.03
Zone 2 (V=200 kph) Abra, Agusan del Norte, Agusan del Sur, Aklan, Antique, Apayao, 6 0.70 0.62 0.90 1.08
Bataan, Batangas, Benguet, Biliran, Bohol, Camiguin, Capiz,
Cavite, Cebu, Compostela Valley, Davao Oriental, Guimaras, 7.5 0.70 0.66 0.94 1.12
Ifugao, Ilocos Norte, Ilocos Sur, Iloilo, Kalinga, La Union, Laguna,
Leyte, Marinduque, Masbate, Misamis Oriental, Mountain 9 0.70 0.70 0.98 1.16
Province, National Capital Region, Negros Occidental, Negros 12 0.76 0.76 1.04 1.22
Oriental, Nueva Ecija, Nueva Vizcaya, Occidental Mindoro,
Oriental Mindoro, Pampanga, Pangasinan, Rizal, Romblon, 15 0.81 0.81 1.09 1.27
Siquijor, Southern Leyte, Surigao del Norte, Surigao del Sur,
Tarlac, Zambales 18 0.85 0.85 1.13 1.31
Zone 3 (V=150 kph) Basilan, Bukidnon, Davao del Norte, Davao del Sur, Lanao del 21 0.89 0.89 1.17 1.34
Norte, Lanao del Sur, Maguindanao, Misamis Occidental, North 24 0.93 0.93 1.21 1.38
Cotabato, Palawan, Sarangani, South Cotabato, Sultan Kudarat,
Sulu, Tawi-tawi, Zamboanga del Norte, Zamboanga del Sur, 27 0.96 0.96 1.24 1.40
Zamboanga Sibugay
30 0.99 0.99 1.26 1.43
36 1.04 1.04 1.31 1.48
Table 4-8 Wind Directionality Factor, K d
42 1.09 1.09 1.36 1.52
Structural Type Directionality Factor Kd*
48 1.13 1.13 1.39 1.55
Buildings 54 1.17 1.17 1.43 1.58
Main Wind Force Resisting System 0.85
Components and Cladding 0.85 60 1.20 1.20 1.46 1.61
Arched Roofs 0.85 75 1.28 1.28 1.53 1.68
Chimneys, Tanks, and Similar Structures 90 1.35 1.35 1.59 1.73
Square 0.90
Hexagonal 0.95 105 1.41 1.41 1.64 1.78
Round 0.95
120 1.47 1.47 1.69 1.82
Solid Signs 0.85
135 1.52 1.52 1.73 1.86
Open Signs and Lattice Framework 0.85
150 1.56 1.56 1.77 1.89
Trussed Towers Notes for Table 4-10:
Triangular, square, rectangular 0.85
All other costs sections 0.95 1. Case 1: a. All components and cladding.
* Directionality Factor Kd has been calibrated with combinations of loads specified in NSCP Section b. Main wind force resisting system in low-rise buildings designed using NSCP Figure
203. This factor shall only be applied when used in conjunction with load combinations specified
207-10.
in NSCP Section 203.3 and 203.4.
Case 2: a: All main wind force resisting systems in buildings except those in low-rise buildings
designed using NSCP Figure 207-10.
Table 4-9 Importance Factor, Iw (Wind Loads)
b. All main wind force resisting systems in other structures.
Occupancy Category Description IW
2. The velocity pressure exposure coefficient Kz may be determined from the following formula:
I Essential 1.15
2/a
II Hazardous 1.15 For 𝓏𝓏 < 4.5 m
4.5
K 𝒵𝒵 = 2.01 ( )
𝓏𝓏g
III Special Occupancy 1.15
2/a
𝓏𝓏
IV Standard Occupancy 1.00 For 4.5 m ≤ 𝓏𝓏 ≤ 𝓏𝓏g K 𝓏𝓏 = 2.01 ( )
𝓏𝓏g
V Miscellaneous 0.87 Note: 𝓏𝓏 shall not be taken less than 9.0 m for Case 1 in exposure B.
1
refer Table 4-6 for types of occupancy under each category.
3. α and 𝓏𝓏g are tabulated in NSCP Table 207-5.
4. Linear interpolation for intermediate values of height 𝓏𝓏 is acceptable.
5. Exposure categories are defined in Section 207.5.6.
4-14 4-15
Table 4-11 Terrain Exposure Constants Simplified Design Base Shear

Exposure B C D NSCP Section 208.5.2.3.1 describes the Minimum Design Lateral Forces and its
a 7.0 9.5 11.5 Related Effects.
Zg (m) 365 275 215
This approach is applicable to single family dwellings not more than three floors
𝑎𝑎̂ 1/7 1/9.5 1/11.5
excluding the basement and also other structures not more than two stories
𝑏𝑏̂ 0.84 1.00 1.07
excluding basement. The approach falls under seismic occupancy importance
𝑎𝑎̅ 1/4 1/6.5 1/9
factor =1 under standard and miscellaneous occupancies (Refer Table 4-12).
𝑏𝑏̅ 0.45 0.65 0.80
3𝐶𝐶𝑎𝑎
C 0.30 0.20 0.15 V= W
R
D0 0.010 0.005 0.003
ℓ(m) 100 150 200 where:
ℰ̅ 1/3 1/5 1/8
V = base shear
*zmin (m) 9 4.5 2.10
* zmin = minimum height used to ensure that the equivalent height 𝓏𝓏̅ is or 2/3 h for trussed towers, I = seismic occupancy importance factor in Table 4-12
the height of the transmission cable above ground, or 0.6h for buildings and other structure.
For ≤ zmin 𝓏𝓏̅ shall be taken as zmin. W = total dead load including permanent equipment loads and a
portion of the live load if the Structural Engineer finds it
Method 3 – Wind Tunnel Procedure necessary. A minimum of 25% of the floor live load shall also
NSCP Section 207.5.2 of NSCP explains that this method is used when structures apply for storage facilities
do not meet the provisions of NSCP Section 207.5.1 or have unusual shapes or R = numerical equivalent to account for the inherent
response characteristics. overstrength of the adopted structural system. (Refer Table
4-19 to 4-22)
4.2.8 Seismic Load
Ca, Cv = seismic coefficients (Refer Tables 4-15 and 4-16
Other than Mainland Palawan, the Sulu, Tawi-Tawi group of Islands, the
respectively)
Philippines is situated in a highly seismic zone categorized as Zone 4 similar to
those of California, Japan, China, Mexico etc. Structures and portions thereof shall Na, Nv = near source Factors (Refer Tables 4-17 and 4-18
be designed and constructed to resist the effects of seismic ground motions as respectively)
provided in NSCP Section 208. Two methods of analysis are available, namely:
T = fundamental period of vibration (Method A)
Static Analysis and Dynamic Analysis. The latter method may be used for any
structure but is a must for structures described in Tables 4-23 and 4-24 and NSCP 𝑇𝑇 = 𝐶𝐶𝑡𝑡 (ℎ𝑛𝑛 )3/4
Section 208.4.8.3. 𝐶𝐶𝑡𝑡 = 0.0853 for steel moment-resisting frame
Minimum Design Lateral Forces (NSCP Section 208.5)
= 0.0731 for reinforced concrete moment resisting frames and
The section discusses computation of lateral loads and in particular explains the eccentrically braced frames.
static lateral load, load distribution as well as the calculation for drift. = 0.0488 for all other buildings
NSCP Section 208.5.2 provides us with the static force procedure.
Table 4-12 Seismic Importance Factor
NSCP Section 208.5.2.1 provides calculation of the design base shear by:
Occupancy Category1 Seismic Importance Factor, Seismic Importance2
𝐶𝐶𝑣𝑣 𝐼𝐼 2.5𝐶𝐶𝑎𝑎 I Factor, Ip
𝑉𝑉 = 𝑊𝑊 ≤ 𝑉𝑉 = W I
𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 R
I. Essential Facilities3 1.50 1.50
≥ 𝑉𝑉 = 0.11𝐶𝐶𝑎𝑎 𝐼𝐼 𝑊𝑊 II. Hazardous Facilities 1.25 1.50
0.8Z𝑁𝑁𝑣𝑣 I III. Special Occupancy 1.00 1.00
≥ 𝑉𝑉 = R
W (for zone 4) Structures4
IV. Standard Occupancy 1.00 1.00
Structure4
V. Miscellaneous Structures 1.00 1.00
1
See Table 4-6 for occupancy listing.
4-16 4-17
2
The limitation of Ip for panel connections in NSCP Section 208.8.2.3 shall be 1.0 for the entire Table 4-16 Seismic Coefficient, Cv
connector
3
Structural observation requirements are given in NSCP Section 107.9. Seismic Zone Z
4
For anchorage of machinery and equipment required for life-safety systems, the value of Ip shall Soil Profile Type
be taken as 1.5. Z=0.2 Z=0.4
SA 0.16 0.32Nv
Table 4-13 Soil Profile Type SB 0.20 0.40Nv
Average Soil Properties for Top 30 m of Soil Profile SC 0.32 0.56Nv

Soil Profile SD 0.40 0.64Nv
Soil Profile Name/ Generic Shear Wave SPT, N Undrained
Type Description Velocity, Vs (blows/ 300 mm) Shear SE 0.64 0.96Nv
(m/s) Strength SU
(kPa) SF See Footnote 1
SA Hard Rock > 1500
1
Site-specific geotechnical investigation and dynamic site response analysis shall be performed to
determine seismic coefficient
SB Rock 760 to 1500
SC Very Dense Soil 360 to 760 > 50 > 100 Table 4-17 Near-Source Factor Na1
and Soft Rock
SD Stiff Soil Profile 180 to 360 15 to 50 50 to 100 Closest Distance to Known Seismic Source2
Seismic Source Type
SE1 Soft Soil Profile <180 < 15 < 50 ≤ 5 km ≥ 10 km
SF Soil Requiring Site-specific Evaluation. See NSCP Section 208.4.3.1 A 1.2 1.0
1
Soil Profile Type SE also includes any soil profile with more than 3.0 m of soft clay defined as a B 1.0 1.0
soil with plasticity index, PI> 20, wmc ≥ 40 percent and su< 24 kPa. The Plasticity Index, PI, and
the moisture content, wmc, shall be determined in accordance with approved national standards. C 1.0 1.0
Table 4-14 Seismic Source Type1 Table 4-18 Near-Source Factor, Nv1
Seismic Source Closest Distance to Known Seismic Source2

Definition Seismic Source Type
Seismic Source Seismic Source Description ≤ 5 km 10 km ≥15 km
Type Maximum Moment
Magnitude, M A 1.6 1.2 1.0
A Faults that are capable of producing large M ≥ 7.0 B 1.2 1.0 1.0
magnitude events and that have a high C 1.0 1.0 1.0
rate of seismic activity.
Notes for Tables 4-17 and 4-18
B All faults other than Types A and C. 6.5 ≤ M < 7.0 1
The Near-Source Factor may be based on the linear interpolation of values for distances other
than those shown in the table.
C Faults that are not capable of producing M < 6.5 2
The closest distance to seismic source shall be taken as the minimum distance between the site
large magnitude earthquakes and that
and the area described by the vertical projection of the source on the surface (i.e. surface
have a relatively low rate of seismic
projection of fault plane). The source projection need not include portions of the source at deptsh
activity
of 10 km or greater. The largest value of the Near-source Factor considering all sources shall be
1
Subduction sources shall be evaluated on a site-specific basis. used for design.
Table 4-15 Seismic Coefficient, Ca
Seismic Zone Z
Soil Profile Type
Z = 0.2 Z=0.4
SA 0.16 0.32Na
SB 0.20 0.40Na
SC 0.24 0.40Na
SD 0.28 0.44Na
SE 0.34 0.44Na
SF See Footnote 1 of Table 4-16
4-18 4-19
Table 4-19 Earthquake – Force Resisting Structural Systems of Concrete Table 4-21 Earthquake-Force-Resisting Structural Systems of Steel
System Limitation and System Limitation and

Building Height Limitation Building Height Limitation
Basic Seismic-Force Resisting System R Ω0 by Seismic Zone, m Basic Seismic-Force Resisting System R Ω0 by Seismic Zone, m
Zone 2 Zone 4 Zone 2 Zone 4
A. Bearing Wall Systems A. Bearing Wall Systems
 Light-framed walls with shear panels: 5.5 2.8 NL 20  Light steel-framed bearing walls with tension-only bracing 2.8 2.2 NL 20
wood structural panel walls for
structures three stories or less  Braced frames where bracing carries gravity load 4.4 2.2 NL 50
 Heavy timber braced frames where 2.8 2.2 NL 20  Light framed walls sheathed with wood structural panels 4.5 2.8 NL 20
bracing carries gravity load rated for shear resistance or steel sheets
 Light-framed walls with wood shear NA NA  Light-framed walls with shear panels of all other light 4.5 2.8 NL 20
panels walls for structures three materials
stories or less 2.8 2.2 NL NP
 Light-framed wall systems using flat strap bracing
 All other light framed walls NA NA
B. Building Frame Systems
 Heavy timber-braced frames where 2.8 2.2 NL 20 8.5 2.8 NL 30
 Steel eccentrically braced frames (EBF), moment-resisting
bracing carries gravity load connections at columns away from links
B. Building Frame Systems 6.0 2.2 NL 30
 Steel eccentrically braced frames (EBF), non moment-
 Light-framed walls with shear panels: 6.5 2.8 NL 20 resisting connections at columns away from links
wood structural panel walls for 6.0 2.2 NL 30
 Special concentrically braced frames (SCBF)
structures three stories or less
 Ordinary concentrically braced frames (OCBF) 3.2 2.2 NL NP
 Ordinary heavy timber-braced frames 5.6 2.2 NL 20
 Light-framed walls sheathed with wood structural panels/ 6.5 2.8 NL 20
sheet steel panels
Table 4-20 Earthquake-Force-Resisting Structural Systems of Masonry
 Light frame walls with shear panels of all other materials 2.5 2.8 NL NP
System Limitation and  Buckling-restrained braced frames (BRBF), non 7 2.8 NL 30
Building Height moment-resisting beam-column connection
Basic Seismic-Force Resisting R Ω0 Limitation by Seismic
System Zone, m  Buckling-restrained braced frames, moment-resisting 8 2.8 NL 30
beam-column connections
Zone 2 Zone 4
 Special steel plate shear walls (SPSW) 7 2.8 NL 30
A. Bearing Wall Systems
C. Moment-Resisting Frame Systems
 Masonry shear walls 4.5 2.8 NL 50
 Special moment-resisting frame (SMRF) 8.0 3 NL NL
 Intermediate steel moment frames (IMF) 4.5 3 NL NP
 Masonry shearwalls 5.5 2.8 NL 50
 Ordinary moment frames (OMF) 3.5 3 NL NP
C. Moment-Resisting Frame
Systems  Special truss moment frames (STMF) 6.5 3 NL NP
 Masonry moment-resisting wall 6.5 2.8 NL 50  Special composite steel and concrete moment frames 8 3 NL NL
frames (MMRWF)
 Intermediate composite moment frames 5 3 NL NP
D. Dual Systems
 Composite partially restrained moment frames 6 3 48 NP
 Masonry shear walls with SMRF 5.5 2.8 NL 50
 Ordinary composite moment frames 3 3 NP NP
 Masonry shear walls with steel 4.2 2.8 NL 50
OMRF D. Dual Systems
 Masonry shear walls with 4.2 2.8 NL NP  Steel eccentrically braced frames 8 2.8 NL NL
concrete IMRF
 Special steel concentrically braced frames 7 2.8 NL NL
 Masonry shear walls with 6.0 2.8 NL 50
masonry MMRWF  Composite steel and concrete eccentrically braced frame 8 2.8 NL NL
 Composite steel and concrete concentrically braced frame 6 2.8 NL NL
 Composite steel plate shear walls 7.5 2.8 NL NL
 Buckling-restrained braced frame 8 2.8 NL NL
 Special steel plate shear walls 8 2.8 NL NL
 Masonry shear wall steel OMRF 4.2 2.8 NL 50
 Steel EBF with steel SMRF 8.5 2.8 NL NL
4-20 4-21
System Limitation and Vertical Distribution of Force (NSCP Section 208.5.5)

Building Height Limitation
Basic Seismic-Force Resisting System R Ω0 by Seismic Zone, m The Base Shear (V) shall be distributed over the structure height using the formula:
Zone 2 Zone 4 n
 Steel EBF with steel OMRF 4.2 2.8 NL 50 V = 𝐹𝐹𝑡𝑡 + ∑ 𝐹𝐹𝑡𝑡
 Special concentrically braced frames with steel SMRF 7.5 2.8 NL NL i=1
 Special concentrically braced frames with steel OMRF 4.2 2.8 NL 50 Where 𝐹𝐹𝑡𝑡 is the whip effect applied at level n in addition to Fn
E. Dual System with Intermediate Moment Frames
𝐹𝐹𝑡𝑡 = 0.07TV
 Special steel concentrically braced frame 6 2.8 NL NP
 Composite steel and concrete concentrically braced frame 5.5 2.8 NL NP 𝐹𝐹𝑡𝑡 need not exceed 0.25V and is considered nil when the fundamental period T is
 Ordinary composite braced frame 3.5 2.8 NL NP
0.7 second or less.
 Ordinary composite reinforced concrete shear walls with 5 2.8 NL NP The remaining force "V-𝐹𝐹𝑡𝑡 " shall be distributed over the entire height of the
steel elements
structure using the formula
F. Cantilevered Column Building Systems
2.2 2.0 10 10
(𝑉𝑉 − 𝐹𝐹𝑡𝑡 )𝑤𝑤𝑥𝑥 ℎ𝑥𝑥
 Special steel moment frames 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 =
1.2 2.0 10 NP
∑𝑛𝑛𝑖𝑖=1 𝑤𝑤𝑖𝑖 ℎ𝑖𝑖
 Intermediate steel moment frames
 Ordinary steel moment frames 1.0 2.0 10 NP
where:
 Cantilevered column elements 2.2 2.0 NL 10
G. Steel Systems not Specifically Detailed for Seismic 3 3 NL NP
Fx,wx,hx = level 'x' lateral force F, floor weight 'w' and height 'h' from the
Resistance, Excluding Cantilever Systems base(ground).
Fi,wi,hi = force weight and height of level 'i'
Table 4-22 Earthquake-Force-Resisting Structural Systems of Wood
System Limitation and

Building Height Horizontal Distribution of Shear (NSCP Section 208.5.6)
Basic Seismic-Force Resisting System R Ω0 Limitation by Seismic
Zone, m Forces 𝐹𝐹𝑡𝑡 , 𝐹𝐹𝑥𝑥 shall be distributed to the lateral force resisting elements in
Zone 2 Zone 4 proportion to their relative rigidities.
A. Bearing Wall Systems For rigid diaphragms, mass eccentricity is assumed to be 5% of the building
 Light-framed walls with shear panels: wood structural 5.5 2.8 NL 20 dimension perpendicular to the direction of the force.
panel walls for structures three stories or less
 Heavy timber braced frames where bracing carries gravity 2.8 2.2 NL 20 Dynamic Analysis Procedure (NSCP Section 208.6)
load
 Light-framed walls with wood shear panels walls for NA NA Pertinent parameters are enumerated as a guidelines in three dimensional
structures three stories or less modelling of structures with irregular plan configuration (such as those in Table
 All other light framed walls NA NA 4-24).
 Heavy timber-braced frames where bracing carries gravity 2.8 2.2 NL 20
load Lateral Forces on Components of Structure, Non-Structural Components and Equipment
Supported by Structures (NSCP Section 208.7)
 Light-framed walls with shear panels: wood structural 6.5 2.8 NL 20 The section discusses the structural analysis of structure components such as non
panel walls for structures three stories or less
structural walls, parapets etc.
 Ordinary heavy timber-braced frames 5.6 2.2 NL 20
Seismic shall be determined considering the following (NSCP Section 208.4.1):
 Seismic Zone (NSCP Figure 208-4, Section 208.4.4.1) either zone 4 or zone 2.
Regions are categorized as having the highest seismicity (zone 4) to an area of
least or lowest recorded seismic activity (zone 1). Except for Palawan and
some island provinces of Mindanao (zone 2). The Philippines is under zone 4.
 Site Characteristics (NSCP Section 208.4.3 – Section 208.4.4). This includes,
soil type, proximity to earthquake generators and seismic source type which
essentially predicts the magnitude that the fault can generate.
4-22 4-23
 Occupancy (NSCP Section 208.4.2 together with NSCP Table 4-6). The code
also requires the use of occupancy importance factor, a magnifier that
increases (or reduces) the seismic load to a maximum of 50% for structures
most needed during emergencies and those that would have a many occupants
in one area as well as facilities that house dangerous materials that may cause
additional harm to the populace in case toxins are released due to structural
failure.
 Building Configuration (NSCP Section 208.4.5) describes regular and
irregular structures which will become part of the basis for the method of
design.
 The type of Structural System as discussed in NSCP Section 208.4.6 as well as
the Building Heights (NSCP Section 208.4.7) shall be used in the computation
of the design seismic force.
Table 4-23 Vertical Structural Irregularities
Irregularity Type and Definition Reference NSCP Section

1. Stiffness Irregularity – Soft Story 208.4.8.3
A soft story is one in which the lateral stiffness is less than Item 2
70 percent of that in the story above or less than 80 percent
of the average stiffness of the three stories above.
2. Weight (Mass) Irregularity 208.4.8.3
Mass irregularity shall be considered to exist where the Item 2
effective mass of any story is more than 150 percent of the
effective mass of an adjacent story. A roof that is lighter
than the floor below need not be considered.
3. Vertical Geometric Irregularity 208.4.8.3
Vertical geometric irregularity shall be considered to exist Item 2
where the horizontal dimension of the lateral-force-resisting
system in any story is more than 130 percent of that in an
adjacent story. One-story penthouses need not be
considered.
4. In-Plane Discontinuity In Vertical Lateral-Force- 208.5.8.1
Resisting Element Irregularity
An in-plane offset of the lateral-load-resisting elements
greater than the length of those elements.
5. Discontinuity In Capacity – Weak Story Irregularity 208.4.9.1
A weak story is one in which the story strength is less than
80 percent of that in the story above. The story strength is
the total strength of all seismic-resisting elements sharing
the story for the direction under consideration.
4-24
4.3.2 Site Investigations These hazards may be identified through historical records and reports from local
All projects require site investigations to be conducted by the duly authorized units and previous site investigations. Interviews from the inhabitants of the area
party. Site investigations must provide sufficient information for apt planning of may also be done to cross-reference gathered historical data.
the sub-surface investigation as determined by the engineer.
Recognition of the site hazards will prompt the engineers of the additional
NSCP Section 303.1 recommends: considerations critical to the investigation, design and analysis of the site.
 A geotechnical study be conducted for foundation design for structures two
stories or higher. Anthropogenic Features
Man-made structures and other appurtenances for water supply, power
 A total of 2 boreholes for structures less than 300 m2 in area and at least 3
generation, agriculture, aquaculture, pumping wells, flood control, coastal
boreholes for larger building area.
improvement, land reclamations, sanitary landfills, slope stabilization, mining and
 A maximum of 1 borehole for every 200 m2 of a structure. quarrying, telecommunications, transportation, infrastructure and other edifices
near the site constitute additional considerations.
Topography and Geologic Features
General features that must be noted are:
Terrain analysis of the project site can be carried out using remotely-sensed
imagery or topographical maps and then confirmed by conducting site  Underground utility lines and other conduits
reconnaissance surveys. The project site is located on the map and the general  Adjacent structures
surface environment and terrain can be interpreted. By identifying the terrain,
specific issues can be taken into account such as sloping ground, soil and rock  Accessibility (for construction purposes)
(geologic) formation, hydrologic formations, fault systems.  Waste disposal facilities
Geologic information can also be gathered from geologic assessments by licensed  Cuts and fills
and recognized geologists, boring information or geotechnical reports from
 Drainage
previous projects in close proximity to the project site, and data from local
government units and pertinent government offices. The geologic information  Land use
must provide insight to the regional geology of the site particularly soil and rock The aforementioned factors can affect and be affected by any soil investigation or
formation, groundwater table elevation, and other geotechnical characteristics. construction that it is essential to determine the existence and location of such.
An overview of the rainfall patterns and climatic conditions is also ideal for Underground conduits that convey water, sewage, electricity, and
holistic analysis as this provides an insight on the possible environmental telecommunication lines may exist within the project site and must be preserved
conditions to be encountered in the construction and engineering process. from damage during sub-surface exploration and construction.
Drainage and surface water conditions may also provide useful information.
Similarly, structures adjacent to project site must not experience disturbance,
usually due to excessive vibrations and improperly designed excavations that may
Hazards
induce instability or aesthetic detriment (such as misalignment of plumbing and
Exposure to natural hazards must be comprehensively identified for sub-surface door settling) as determined by the Engineer.
investigation and design references. Hazards cover natural and environmental
factors that highly influence the stability and safety conditions of the project Accessibility of the site for mobilization and demobilization of equipment to be
during and after construction. Common risk factors include, but are not limited to, used during sub-surface exploration and construction must be outlined so as to
the following: recommend applicable methods to carry out such works.
 Seismicity/earthquake risks
4.3.3 Sub-surface Investigations
 Flooding Sub-surface exploration shall observe the implementing rules and guidelines of
 Tidal waves governing agencies of national and local government, adapted international
standards without compromising engineering principles and with high priority for
 Landslides safety the of stakeholders involved.
 Problematic soils (such as liquefiable soils, expansive soils and collapsible Existing guidelines observed by local practice pertinent to this section:
soils)
 Sinkholes
4-26 4-27
 DPWH Standard Specifications for Highways, 2012 Edition: Highways, Bridges 4.3.4 Laboratory Tests
and Airports (Volume II) Soil laboratory tests must follow applicable governing standards from references
stated above. Geotechnical laboratories that will conduct tests must be ISO-
 Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines National Structural Code
certified and duly recognized to operate for local business.
of the Philippines 2010, Sixth Edition: Buildings, Towers, and Other Vertical
Structures (Volume I) Some of the geotechnical laboratory tests and corresponding standards are
provided in Table 4-25. The laboratory tests will be conducted to determine the
 Relevant DPWH Orders, Memoranda, etc.
soil properties according to the rock sample recovered and the discretion of the
In addition to the referenced guidelines, the DGCS shall also adopt additional geotechnical engineer on the soil parameters required for engineering design.
guidelines from international standards, professional industry handbooks and
globally used academic literature applicable for the implementation. The Table 4-25 Geotechnical Laboratory Tests and Corresponding Standards
references include:
Laboratory Test Test Standard Parameter Observed
Designation
 American Standard for Testing and Materials International Geotechnical
Moisture Content ASTM D2216-05 Moisture content
Engineering Standards
Specific Gravity ASTM D854-05 Specific gravity
 International Code Council International Building Code 2009 Grain-size Analysis (Mechanical ASTM D422-63 Soil gradation
Sieve Analysis and Hydrometer
 Geotechnical Engineering Investigation Handbook, Second Edition by Hunt, Analysis)
R.E. Atterberg Limits ASTM D4318-05 Liquid limit
Plastic limit
In this section, detailed discussion and instruction is provided on the (1) purpose
Unified Soil Classification ASTM D2487-00 Classification of soil type
and importance of sub-surface investigations; (2) proper execution of standard System (USCS)
techniques and methodologies of soil explorations; and (3) output data analysis of Unconfined Compression Test ASTM D2166-00 Strength parameters
field investigations for geotechnical reports. (for Soils)
Unconfined Compression Test ASTM D2938-95 Strength parameters
Significance and importance of adequate soil sub-surface investigations shall be (for Intact Rock)
explained in relation with structure stability, effects on structural design, effects Tri-axial Test ASTM D2850-03a Strength parameters
(Unconsolidated-Undrained)
on project cost, etc.
Tri-axial Test ASTM D4767-04 Strength parameters
Execution of soil exploration methods shall integrate internationally-adopted (Consolidated-Undrained)
standards and DPWH-observed guidelines. Various soil exploration methodologies Oedometer Test ASTM D2435-04 Consolidation parameters
(1-D Consolidation)
will be discussed focusing on proper procedures, applicability to different soil and
Direct Shear Test ASTM D3080-04 Strength parameters
rock formations, and field considerations.
Soil Sulfate Test Hach Method 8051 Sulfate content
Analysis of information from field explorations shall include good practices in Constant-Head Test ASTM D2434 Hydraulic conductivity
preparing boring logs and borehole logs to facilitate efficient geotechnical Falling-Head Test
analysis. Source: NSCP 2010
Groundwater table must be determined after drilling and rechecked 24 hours Additional tests may be specified by the engineer as needed by the nature of the
after drilling. The Engineer must make sure that the measured groundwater table project.
is not due to the drilling fluid used during boring.
Selection of the laboratory test must reflect the actual site conditions and
Sub-surface investigation must extend reasonably beyond the basement consistent with the assumed failure mode of the soil material under
requirements of the project, if any. When hard strata is encountered (SPT N- consideration.
value>50), coring is executed 3–5m into the hard stratum to analyze its quality
and verify it is really hard strata (or merely an intercepted boulder or such). 4.3.5 Allowable Soil Bearing Capacity
Provisions for unprecedented irregularities during soil sub-surface explorations To determine the allowable soil bearing capacity, the Geotechnical Engineer
will be tackled in brevity. should use any widely accepted method in the industry to calculate for the
ultimate soil bearing capacity. The safe soil bearing capacity shall be determined by
dividing the ultimate bearing capacity (qult) by a safety factor,𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆, between 2.0 and
3.0. The allowable soil bearing capacity (qallow) shall be a safe bearing capacity that
4-28 4-29
exhibits settlement within the tolerable limits for the project. Tolerable settlement Table 4-26 Comparison of Soil Bearing Capacity Theories
varies upon the nature of the project. Author Comments
𝑞𝑞𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 Terzaghi Used for estimating 𝑞𝑞𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 for very cohesive soils and footings with
𝑞𝑞𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 = (𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑 𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠) axial loads only
𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆
Hansen Used for any particular case with applicable correction factors
In estimating the soil bearing capacity, adjacent soil strata with relatively same Meyerhof Used for any particular case with applicable correction factors
properties may be assumed homogenous under the discretion of the assigned Vesic Used for any particular case with applicable correction factors
engineer. Any anomalies in the stratification (such as sand lenses and intercepted specially footings on slopes
boulders) must be noted and properly considered in the calculations and must be
reflected in the report. The correction factors given by each author must not be compounded with other
correction factors given by another author or researcher, unless otherwise
Groundwater table effects on the soil bearing capacity must be considered. The
specified.
season when the field investigation was carried out must also be a factor; boring
during dry season may decrease the groundwater table significantly while the wet The method selected for the analysis must be compatible with the site soil type. As
season may increase it considerably as well. The engineer must calculate the recommended, the use of more than one method is advisable to determine a safe
allowable soil bearing capacity conservatively when insufficient and/or unreliable range of the allowable bearing capacity. From the results, a range of the allowable
or questionable data is derived from the soil investigation program. soil bearing capacity is provided for the structural engineer to adopt in the design
calculations.
The general soil bearing capacity equation for shallow strip footings is:
Soil shear strength parameters (cohesion and angle of internal friction) must be
𝑞𝑞𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 = 𝑐𝑐𝑁𝑁𝑐𝑐 + 𝑞𝑞𝑁𝑁𝑞𝑞 + 0.5𝛾𝛾𝛾𝛾𝑁𝑁𝛾𝛾
determined in either drained or undrained conditions through laboratory testing
where: or correlations. Deformation properties of the soil (such as compression index,
recompression index, coefficient of consolidation, elastic modulus) must also be
𝑞𝑞𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 = ultimate bearing capacity determined for settlement analysis.
𝑐𝑐 = cohesion of soil
Lateral Earth Pressure
𝑞𝑞 = overburden pressure at footing base
Lateral earth pressures are computed whenever the soil exerts horizontal
𝛾𝛾 = soil unit weight beneath footing
pressures on structures particularly retaining walls, sheet piles, and excavation
𝐵𝐵 = footing width bracing. Refer Figure 4-1.
𝑁𝑁𝑐𝑐 , 𝑁𝑁𝑞𝑞 , 𝑁𝑁𝛾𝛾 = bearing capacity factors; function of soil angle of internal friction, 𝜙𝜙 In computing for lateral earth pressures, widely-accepted theories and models
may be used so as the applicability of the model is justifiable.
This equation is modified by different factors provided by various geotechnical
researchers depending on the considerations of the shallow foundation such as: Lateral earth pressures may be active or passive by character. When the
horizontal pressure is less than the vertical pressure, the soil is under active case;
 Footing shape
otherwise, it is under passive case. A structure may be subjected to both pressures
 Depth of embedment at the same time depending on the geometry and other site conditions during
 Load inclination different phases of construction.
 Ground (slope)
 Eccentric loading
Some of the authors of widely-used modified bearing capacity equations and
comments regarding the use of their correction factors are provided in Table 4-26.
Further information on soil bearing capacity is provided in DGCS Volume 2C
Geotechnical and Geological Investigation.
4-30 4-31
Any correlation from these methods to determine soil properties must be applied
with prudence. Deviations from the established procedures must all be noted
during the procedure.
To monitor consolidation settlement, piezometers may be installed to observe
changes in pore water pressure. Inclinometers and other soil movement gauges
may as well be utilized by experienced users of such technology.
GeoHazards
DGCS Volume 2A GeoHazard Assessment describes the nature of geohazards in
the Philippines, the information required to assess their likelihood at a site, and a
procedure for preparing a preliminary.
As determined by the Engineer, special soil investigation must be carried out to
determine the presence of problematic soil (such as expansive soils, liquefiable
soils, fractures and discontinuities in rock material). Any uncommon condition in
the subsurface material that will influence the project must be noted and properly
investigated.
Various signs of GeoHazards and anomalous behavior in the soil include:
 Sudden soil collapse or heaving
 Steep slopes
 Landslide deposits
 Sand lenses
 Penetration resistance inconsistencies
 Abrupt changes in subsurface stratification
Special caution is practiced in investigating such hazards so as not to induce any
unanticipated danger.
Once the hazard is characterized by a Geotechnical Engineer, mitigating or
remediating procedures may be applied. Any widely-accepted soil or rock
improvement method may be conducted as long as it is identified by the Engineer
as appropriate to the site condition.
Ground remediation techniques include:
 Grouting
 Vertical and/or horizontal drains
 Surcharge preloading
 Lime/cement stabilization
 Geosynthetic reinforcement
The option of removing the soil can be adopted if it is viable and economical.
4-33
4.3.7 Shallow Foundations (Footing Design) End-bearing capacity of piles is estimated by employing principles of soil bearing
Shallow foundations can be used if the soil support mechanism relies on the as shown below.
bearing capacity of the soil within a foundation’s zone of influence and discounts
𝑄𝑄𝑝𝑝 = 𝐴𝐴𝑝𝑝 ∗ 𝑞𝑞𝑝𝑝
the effect of skin friction. Shallow foundations are designed accordingly to exert
pressures less than the allowable soil bearing capacity. 𝑞𝑞𝑝𝑝 = 𝑐𝑐′𝑁𝑁𝑐𝑐 ∗ + 𝑞𝑞′𝑁𝑁𝑞𝑞 ∗
In the design of shallow foundations, project requirements for basement levels are
where:
major factors. The basement level will determine the depth of the foundation and
may prompt the engineer to decide between using shallow or deep foundation. 𝑄𝑄𝑝𝑝 = pile end-bearing capacity
The footing design will observe the provisions of NSCP for structural concrete. 𝐴𝐴𝑝𝑝 = area of pile tip
Eccentric loadings must be emphasized in the design of the footing. Effects may be 𝑞𝑞𝑝𝑝 = pile end-bearing pressure
dealt with using any modification in the footing design that is permissible given
𝑐𝑐′ = effective cohesion
the particular restraints of the project.
𝑞𝑞′ = effective overburden pressure
4.3.8 Deep Foundations (Pile Design) 𝑁𝑁𝑐𝑐 ∗ , 𝑁𝑁𝑞𝑞 ∗ = pile end-bearing capacity factors
Deep foundation is used when the soil support mechanism relies on the skin
Skin friction resistance of piles is estimated by employing the principles below.
friction and end bearing of the foundation against the soil. Deep foundations are
used when soil bearing capacity is not enough to support the weight of the 𝑄𝑄𝑠𝑠 = ∑ 𝑓𝑓𝐴𝐴𝑙𝑙 = ∑ 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓Δ𝐿𝐿
structure, if the upper soil strata are weak, and if the project is off-shore or
subjected to high groundwater table. Accessibility and adjacent structures are 𝑓𝑓 = 𝐾𝐾𝜎𝜎0 ′ 𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡′
some other considerations for the use of deep foundations.
where:
Two general schemes of pile installation may be chosen by the engineer: driven
piles and bored piles. 𝑄𝑄𝑠𝑠 = skin friction capacity
a. Driven piles requires installation of precast piles on-site using a pneumatic or 𝑓𝑓 = unit friction resistance
drop hammer heavy equipment. The installation procedure causes significant 𝑝𝑝 = perimeter of pile section
noise and vibration to induce public disturbance and structural damage to
adjacent structures. This method, however, effectively mobilizes the skin Δ𝐿𝐿 = incremental pile length over which the frictional resistance is
friction resistance of the soil. Driven piles also facilitate construction. evaluated
b. Bored piles require on-site assembly of reinforcing bars and preparation of 𝐾𝐾 = effective earth pressure coefficient
drilled hole. The rebar skeleton is lowered into the hole and filled with 𝜎𝜎0 ′ = effective vertical stress at incremental depth considered
concrete mix delivered on site. Before the concrete is poured onto the hole,
𝛿𝛿′ = soil-pile friction angle
debris and other dirt must be removed from the bottom of the hole to ensure
the load transfer mechanism of the pile. Significant noise or public disturbance When piles are grouped and act as a unit, the pile group capacity must likewise be
and structural damage must not be caused within proximal area of the project. determined. Grouped piles must be placed as near each other as required by space
This method effectively mobilizes the end-bearing more than the skin friction allotment but more importantly, as far from each other for skin friction to develop
resistance of the soil. Bored piles relatively take a little more time than driven and mobilize. The limiting distance between piles must be specified by the
piles to install. attending engineer.
Any widely-accepted method can be used to estimate pile capacity. Pile capacity
Micropiles
mainly relies on two components which are point- or end-bearing resistance and
skin friction. End-bearing capacity depends on the stratum on which the pile end Micropiles are bored mini piles with diameter not exceeding 300 mm. Because of
rests. Skin friction is the frictional force exerted by the soil surrounding the pile the small size of mini piles, only small dimension equipment is needed for
through its embedment length. construction and can be used to drill through any type of soils, boulders and hard
materials. They are constructed using high strength small diameter casing or
thread bar. Typically the casing is advanced to the design depth using a drilling
technique. Reinforcing steel in the form of an all-thread bar is typically inserted
4-34 4-35
into the micropile casing. High strength cement grout is then pumped into the For soil which has a high corrosion potential, it may be assumed that the steel
casing. The casing may extend to the full depth above the bond zone with the casing is not effective in carrying tensile loads, Acasing = 0. The reinforcing bar
reinforcing bars extending to the full depth. The finished micropile resists should be designed to carry the entire tension design load.
compression, uplift or tension loads and lateral loads.
Since a micropile can be subjected to lateral loads or overturning moments, they
The design of micropiles for buildings and bridges involves the same approach. are subject to bending stresses also, thus requiring combined stress evaluation.
The structural design of micropiles, cased or uncased length, provided below is The design check for combined stresses (appropriate for micropile) is:
based on the Micropile Design and Construction Reference Manual, US fa fb
Department of Transportation, Federal Highway Administration, Publication No. + ≤ 1.0
Fa (1 − fa ) F
FHWA NHI-05-039, December 2005. F′e b
The allowable compression load for the cased length of a micropile is: where:
fa = axial stress = Pc ⁄Acasing
Pc−allowable = [0.4f ′ c−grout x Agrout + 0.47Fy−steel (Abar + Acasing )] fb = bending stress = Mmax ⁄S ; S is the elastic section
modulus of the steel casing
where:
Fa = allowable axial stress that would be permitted if axial
Pc-allowable = allowable compression load
force alone existed
f’c = unconfined compressive strength of grout
= 0.47 Fy−casing
(typically a 28-day strength)
Agrout = area of grout in micropile cross section (inside Fb = allowable bending stress that would be permitted if
casing only, discount grout outside the casing) bending moment alone existed
Fy-steel = yield stress of steel = 0.55 Fy−casing
Abar = cross sectional area of steel reinforcing bar (if Fe′ = Euler buckling stress
used) The contribution of a central reinforcing bar to bending strength is small
Acasing = cross sectional area of steel casing. compared to that of the casing, hence its effects on bending strength are ignored in
the above combined axial and bending equation. In this equation, it is
Strain compatibility under compression load is considered for the steel conservatively assumed that the maximum axial compression load, Pc , is carried
components and grout by limiting allowable stresses to the minimum allowable by the steel casing only and the yield stress of the steel casing is used.
for any individual component (i.e., steel casing, steel reinforcement, or grout).
Therefore, the maximum yield stress of steel to be used in the above equation is
the minimum of yield stress of casing, yield stress of steel reinforcing rod and
maximum stress based on grout failure.
The outside diameter of the steel casing is reduced to account for losses due to
corrosion in the computation of the allowable compression capacity of a cased
length. Also, if the micropile is used in very weak ground, the allowable
compression load may be reduced to consider the effect of buckling over the
length of the micropile. Further discussion of losses due to corrosion and buckling
are discussed in the Micropile Design and Construction Reference Manual of the
US Federal Highway Administration.
In cases where the micropiles will be subject to tensile loads, the allowable
tension load 𝑃𝑃t−allowable for the cased length of a micropile can be calculated as:
Pt−allowable = 0.55 Fy−steel × (Abar + Acasing )
where:
Fy−steel = minimum yield stress of the bar and casing
4-36 4-37
Section properties required for the analysis are calculated as: is provided demonstrating that the confined grout can sustain higher strain levels
π without crushing.
Acasing = (OD2 − ID2 )
4 The allowable tension load for the uncased length of a micropile is given as:
Icasing
S= Pt−allowable = 0.55Fy−bar × Abar
(OD⁄2)
π
Icasing = (OD4 − ID4 ) 4.3.9 Excavations and Fills
64
For excavation works, all applicable provisions indicated in DPWH Standard
The Euler buckling stress is calculated as: Specifications 2012 Volume II must be observed.
π2 E Excavations for any project must be properly designed and monitored on-site.
Fe′ =
FS(Kl⁄r)2 Depths of unsupported or unbraced excavation must not exceed 3 m unless the
conditions are deemed stable and safe by the Geotechnical Engineer.
where: Various techniques in supporting excavations may be used depending on the

nature of the project. The Geotechnical Engineer must account for several factors
E = elastic modulus of the steel casing (typically assumed to
like in-situ soil parameters, access, groundwater table and overall intent in
be 200,000 MPa (29,000ksi)
excavating.
FS = factor of safety equal to 2.12
If the groundwater is relatively shallow, dewatering may be employed, however,
K = effective length factor (assumed equal to 1.0) caution is advised so as not to cause structural damage or significant settlement to
adjacent structures. Observation wells may also be installed near the excavation
L = unsupported length of micropile
sites to monitor dewatering progress and effects.
1⁄2
r = radius of gyration of the steel casing = (Icasing⁄Acasing ) To design the support system for excavations, rain conditions must be considered
The assumption that the entire axial load is carried by the steel casing is in the design observing the principles on lateral earth pressure in Section 4.3.5.
conservative. A combined stress check that can account for the contribution of the Methods such as shotcrete application, soil nailing and other soil reinforcement
grout inside the casing to compression capacity, assuming that buckling potential methods for excavations can be used as long as it is supervised by experienced
is negligible, is: engineers in using the technology.
Pc Mmax For engineered fills, compaction degree will be specified to 95% of maximum dry
+ ≤ 1.0
Pc−allowable Mallowable density, or better. The optimum moisture content will be determined in the
where: laboratory using applicable standard methods. Every layer in the compacted fill in
the field shall be tested according to the specifications.
P𝑐𝑐 = maximum axial compression load;
In the selection of the fill material, special consideration must be given to the use
Pc−allowable = determined from the above equation for
of the fill material particularly with the hydraulic properties of the structure.
compression
Mmax = maximum bending moment in the micropile; and
𝑀𝑀𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 = Fb (= 0.55Fy−casing ) × S
The allowable compression load for the uncased length of a micropile is given as:
Pc−allowable = (0.4fc′ × Agrout + 0.47Fy−bar × Abar )
For the uncased portion of the pile, the reinforcing bar yield stress used in the
calculations in compression is assumed to not exceed 600 MPa (87 ksi). The limit
of 600 MPa is to prevent grout crushing at an assumed strain of 0.003 unless data
4-38 4-39
 Intermediate Grade ASTM A615 Grade 40 Fy =276 Mpa Design Strength (NSCP Section 409.4 and 409.5)
 High Grade ASTM A615 Grade 60 Fy =414 Mpa NSCP Section 409.4 provides the recommended strength reduction factor while
NSCP Section 409.5 Design Strength for Reinforcement, states that yield
Welded plain wire fabric for concrete reinforcement shall conform to
strength used in calculation shall not exceed 550 MPa, except in prestressing
"Specifications for Steel Welded Wire, Fabric, Plain for Concrete Reinforcement" tendons and for transverse reinforcement in NSCP Sections 410.10.3 and
(ASTM A 185M).
421.3.5.4.
Grade 60 steel is generally used for high-rise buildings.
Deflection Control (NSCP Section 409.6)
4.4.2 Structural Detailing (NSCP Section 407) NSCP Table 409-1 provides the Minimum Thickness of Non-prestressed Beams or
In general, this section shall be used as reference in detailing requirements for One-way Slab.
constructability and ensure that placement of reinforcement is consistent with
NSCP Section 409.6.2.5 recommends the need to modify immediate deflection to
the design intent.
account for longtime deflection, creep and shrinkage by a factor stated therein
NSCP Section 407.7 – "Spacing Limits for Reinforcement" shall be used in when no comprehensive analysis is prepared.
determining effective depth used in the generated couple that resist stress as in
NSCP Section 409.6.3 governs the minimum thickness of nonprestressed two way
Bending. This will also define the number of bars that can be accommodated per
slab. NSCP Section 409.6.3.3 provides computations for thickness.
layer of bar in flexural members which in turn shall be used in the computation of
effective depth. The center to center spacing and other details of tendons are also NSCP Section 409.6.3.2 contain provisions for flat slabs. NSCP Table 409-3
included in this Section of NSCP. provides minimum thickness of flat slabs
NSCP Section 407.8 – "Concrete Protection for Reinforcement" completes the NSCP Table 409-2 shows the Maximum Permissible Computed Deflection.
information needed as described in the previous paragraph. It specifies the
minimum concrete cover for cast-in-place concrete and precast concrete both for Flexure and Axial Load (NSCP Section 410)
non prestressed and prestressed members. Flexure and axially loaded members shall be analyzed using accepted classical
NSCP Section 407.13 -"Shrinkage and Temperature Reinforcement"- defines code methods with due consideration for all possible loads and load combinations.
requirements for reinforcement that are required other than those that design This section of the code provides basic assumptions and minimum requirements
computations yield. These are usually provided in structural slabs where the that needs to be satisfied.
flexural reinforcement extend in one direction only.
Further details on structural detailing are provided in ACI Detailing Manual 2004. Shear and Torsion (NSCP Section 411)
Simultaneous to other stresses, members subjected to shear and torsion shall
4.4.3 Analysis and Design (NSCP Section 408) proportioned and reinforced using this section of the code which provides basic
NSCP Section 408.2 requires structural concrete members to be proportioned for assumptions and minimum requirements.
adequate strength design using load factors and strength reduction may be used
as specified in NSCP Section 409. Alternative procedure for strength design may Development Length and Splice Lengths of Reinforcement (NSCP Section 412)
be used as provided in NSCP Section 426.
Consistent with the requirements for reinforced concrete in reinforcement
NSCP Section 424 permits the use of "working stress design (WSD)". This is placement, detailing, and arrangement, equally important are splicing and
applicable for non-prestressed reinforced concrete members which are allowed to development length. Splicing requires the tensile or compressive stress generated
be designed using service loads (without load factors) and permissible load by loads on the reinforcement to prevent slippage of the rebar from its position
stresses. which may cause failure when it is not being able to generate the internal stress
resistance between the concrete and rebar.
Load Combinations and Load Factors (NSCP Section 409.3)
NSCP Section 409.3.1 provides the recommended load factors and combinations of Two Way Slab (NSCP Section 413)
loads to be investigated. Basic design procedure for conventional and flat slab system.
4-42 4-43
Design Axial Load Strength
ØPn = 0.85Ø[.85f'c(Ag-Ast) + Astfy]
where:
Ø = 0.65
Spiral Column
steel ratio ρ= As/Ag
where:
As = area of non prestressed longitudinal tension reinforcement
Ag = gross area of section
ρmin = 0.01 ρmax=0.06
Minimum spiral diameter is Ø10 mm bars and a max of Ø16 mm.
Volumetric spiral reinforcement ratio ρs, shall not be less than the value given
by:
ρs = 0.45(Ag/Ach – 1)f'c/fyt
where:
Ag = gross area of section
Ach = area of section measured from the outer edge of the spiral
reinforcement
fyt shall not exceed 700 Mpa
Design Axial Strength
ØPn = 0.80Ø[.85f'c(Ag-Ast) + Astfy]
where:
Ø = 0.75
Slenderness effect (NSCP 410.11)
1. For members unbraced against sidesway
klu/r ≤22
2. Members braced against sidesway
klu/r ≤ 34 – 12(M1/M2) ≤ 40
where:
k = the effective length factor
lu = clear height of the column
M1 = the smaller absolute value of the two end moments acting on
the column
4-47
4.5.2 General Design Approach Members fail either by excessive deformation or by fracture. A member fails by
The structural engineer must be able to check the compliance of structural design excessive deformation if the stress on the gross section is greater than the yield
drawings and specifications in the code of standard practice. stress, Fy. And if the stress on the net section is greater than the tensile strength,
Fu, a member fails by fracture. The design strength and the allowable tensile
4.5.3 Material strength shall be the lower value determined based on the limit states mentioned
This section shall apply to material test reports conforming to testing standards above.
set by the American Standard for Testing and Materials (ASTM).
Effective Net Area (Ae) (NSCP Section 504.3)
Such standards are specified in the following local and international codes:
The effective net area of tension members, as specified in the governing code, is
 National Structural Code of the Philippines (NSCP) 2010 Sixth Edition:
given by:
Buildings, Towers, and Other Vertical Structures (Volume I); Chapter 5, Part 1
– Specifications for Steel Members. Ae = AnU
 International Conference of Building Officials Uniform Building Code 1997 where:

(Volume 2).
Ae = effective net area of tension members, mm2
 American Institute of Steel Construction 2010: Ninth Edition for Allowable
U = shear lag factor
Strength Design (ASD) and Thirteenth Edition for Load Resistance and Factor
Design (LRFD). An = effective net area and is the difference between the gross area (Ag)
Materials included are hot-rolled structural shapes, structural tubing, pipe, plates, and the area of bolt holes, mm2
bars, and sheets. Also covered are unidentified steel, rolled heavy shapes, steel The structural engineer shall take into consideration that different U values apply
castings and forgings, bolts, washers and nuts, anchor rods and threaded rods, for tension members provided in NSCP Table 504.3.1. Shear lag factors for
welding, and headed stud anchors. connections to tension members of different cases are:
 Structural Steel Design Requirements, NSCP Chapter 5 1. Tension members where tension load is transmitted directly to each of cross-
sectional elements by fasteners or welds.
 NSCP Section 501 General provisions
 NSCP Section 502 Design Requirements for ASD and LRFD 2. Tension members, except plates and HSS, where tension load is transmitted to
some but not all of the cross-sectional elements by fasteners or longitudinal
welds.
4.5.4 Design for Tension Members (NSCP Section 504)
This section shall apply to designing tension members as specified in NSCP 2010, 3. Tension members where tension load is transmitted by transverse welds to
Referral Code of the NBCP. The DGCS shall also adopt additional design guidelines some but not all of the cross-sectional elements.
from international standards. 4. Plates where the tension load is transmitted by longitudinal welds only.
This covers the following topics: Slenderness Limitation (NSCP Section 504.1), 5. Round HSS with a single concentric gusset plate.
Tensile Strength (NSCP Section 504.2), Effective Net Area (NSCP Section 504.3),
Built-up Members (NSCP Section 504.4), Pin-connected Members (NSCP Section 6. Rectangular HSS.
504.5), and Eyebars (NSCP Section 504.6). 7. W, M, S or HP shapes.
8. Single angles.
Slenderness Ratio (NSCP Section 504.1)
As specified in the governing code, the slenderness ratio, L/r, preferably should Pin-Connected Members (NSCP Section 504.5)
not exceed 300, but is not applicable to rods or hangers in tension. The
Pin – connected members in tension are subjected to several types of failure. The
specification shall aid in the design of bracing members, tension chords and
design strength and allowable tensile strength shall be designed based on the
internal ties in trusses and lattice girders.
lower value obtain from the limit states of tensile rupture, shear rupture, bearing
and yielding.
Tensile Strength (NSCP Section 504.2)
The structural engineer shall consider two limit states for tension member design,
tensile yield strength and tensile rupture strength.
4-52 4-53
As specified in NSCP 504.5, the following shall apply:

1. Tension acting on the net effective area
Pn = 2tbeffFu (NSCP 504.5-1)
2. Shear acting on the effective area
Pn = 0.6FuAsf (NSCP 504.5-2)
Sf = 0.75 (LRFD) Ωsf = 2.0 (ASD)
3. Tension acting on the gross section
Pn = FyAg (NSCP 504.2-1)
t = 0.90 (LRFD) Ωt = 1.67 (ASD)
4. Bearing
Pn = 1.8FyApb (NSCP 510.7-1)
 = 0.75 (LRFD) Ω = 2.0 (ASD)
An example is provided for pin-connected tension members.
where:
Pn = force on area
Rn = nominal bearing strength
Fy = specified minimum yield stress of steel used MPa
Apb = projected bearing area
Fu = specified aluminum tensile stress of steel used
Ag = gross area of member, mm2
Asf = 2t(a+d/2), mm2
A = shortest distance from edge of the pin hole to the edge of the
member measured parallel to the applied force
beff = 2t + 16, mm but not more than the actual distance from the
pinhole to the edge of the member measured perpendicular to the
force.
d = pin diameter, mm
t = thickness of plate, mm
Eyebars (NSCP Section 504.6)
An example is provided for an eyebar connection.
Example: W, Single-angle, WT, Rectangular HSS, Round HSS, Double Angle Tension Members
Designing a member with given loads in tension and member length.
4-54
Ω = 2.00 Example: Eyebar Tension Members
Pn/Ω > Pa Verifying member strength with given loads in tension, pin diameter and eyebar
dimensions.
5. Calculate the available shear rupture strength.
1. Determine material properties for ASTM Designation, Fy and Fu (AISC Table 2-
Pn = 0.6FuAsf 4); and geometric properties of the member.
Asf = 2t(a+d/2)
2. Check dimensional requirements such as t, w, d. dh, R (NSCP Section 504.6.2)
Using LRFD 3. Calculate the required tensile strength, Pu (LRFD) or Pa (ASD). Note that Pu is a
Φ = 0.75 factored load.
ΦPn > Pu 4. Calculate the available tensile yielding strength at the eyebar body (at w)
Using ASD Determine An and Pn.
Ω = 2.00 Pn = FyAg
Pn/Ω > Pa 5. Determine the tensile yield strength.
6. Calculate the available bearing strength. Using LRFD
Pn = 1.8FyApb Φ = 0.90
Using LRFD ΦPn > Pu
Φ = 0.75 Using ASD
ΦPn > Pu Ω = 1.67
Using ASD Pn/Ω > Pa
Ω = 2.00 The structural engineer shall take note that the pin should also be checked for
shear yielding and bearing.
Pn/Ω > Pa
Example: Find Ae of a Plate with Staggered Bolts

7. Calculate the available tensile yielding strength.
1. Calculate the net hole diameter, dnet.
Pn = FyAg
dnet = dh + 1/16 in.
Using LRFD
2. Compute the net width for all possible paths across the plate, w.
Φ = 0.90
w = 14 – Ʃdnet + Ʃs2/4g
ΦPn > Pu
Calculate for An. Note that the nearest path (smallest value) shall govern in the
Using ASD design.
Ω = 1.67 3. Determine U.
Pn/Ω > Pa 4. Determine Ae.
8. Determine the governing strength from the lowest calculated values. Ae = AnU
4.5.5 Design for Compression (NSCP Section 505)

This section shall apply to designing compression members as specified in NSCP
2010, Referral Code of the NBCP. The DGCS shall also adopt additional design
guidelines from international standards.
4-56 4-57
This section covers the following topics: general provisions (NSCP Section 505.1), Requirements for members composed of two or more rolled shapes and for
effective length and slenderness (NSCP Section 505.2), compressive strength for members composed of plates or combination of plates and shapes with related
flexural buckling of members without slender elements (NSCP Section 505.3), connections are specified in the governing code.
compression and bending (NSCP Section 508.1-508.3), composite compression
members (NSCP Section 509.2), and compressive strength of connecting elements Member with Slender Elements
(NSCP Section 510.4.4).
This section shall apply to members with slender sections for compressed
members. The design is similar to members without slender elements except that
Effective Length a reduction factor is introduced to modify the formulas. Appropriate reduction
As specified in the governing code, the slenderness ratio, KL/r, preferably should factors in available strength are incorporated in AISC Manual Part 4.
not exceed 200.
The nominal compressive strength, Pn, shall be based on the limit states of
torsional, flexural and flexural – torsional buckling.
Flexural Buckling of Members without Slender Elements
As mentioned in the governing standards, this section shall apply to compression Example: W-Shape Column Design Pinned Ends
members with non-slender (compact and non-compact sections), for uniformly
Design a W-shape column to carry specific loads in axial compression, given
compressed elements. This includes non-slender built-up I-shaped columns and
column length and shape.
non-slender HSS columns.
1. Calculate the required strength, Pu (LRFD) or Pa (ASD). Note that Pu is a
The nominal compressive strength, Pn, shall be based on the limit state of flexural
factored load.
buckling. Flexural buckling is a deflection caused by bending about the axis
corresponding to the largest slenderness ratio. 2. Select a section using AISC Manual Table 4-1.
The equation for determining nominal compressive strength is given by: 3. Find K. For a pinned-pinned connection, K=1.0.
Pn = FcrAg Y-Y axis will govern for unbraced lengths same in both x-x and y-y
directions.
Torsional and Flexural-Torsional Buckling of Members without Slender Elements And for all W-shapes, rx exceeds ry.
This section is most commonly applicable to double angles and Tee sections which 4. Enter the table with an effective length, KL and proceed until reaching the
are singly symmetrical shapes subject to torsional buckling and flexural – least weight shape with an available strength that equals or exceeds the
torsional buckling. required strength.
As specified in the governing code, the nominal compressive strength, Pn, shall be 5. Select column section (for adjustments).
determined based on the two limit states mentioned above, torsional and flexural
6. Determine available strength in compression, y-y axis effective length using
– torsional buckling. Available strength of the members is available in AISC
Manual Part 4. AISC Manual Table 4-1.
Using LRFD
Single Angle Compression Members ΦPn > Pu
This section as stated in the governing code shall apply to single angle
Using ASD
compression members wherein the nominal compressive strength, Pn, shall be
determined for axially loaded members, as well as those subject to the Pn/Ω > Pa
slenderness modification, provided the members meet the criteria. Available
strength of the members is available in AISC Manual Part 4. Example: W-Shape Column Design with Intermediate Bracing
Redesigning Example C1a assuming the column is laterally braced about the y-y
Built-Up Members axis and torsionally braced at the midpoint.
The analysis for built – up compression member is the same for any other 1. Calculate the required strength, Pu (LRFD) or Pa (ASD). Note that Pu is a
compression member if the cross-sectional properties are known. However, the factored load.
parts of the cross section must be properly connected.
2. Select a column using AISC Manual Table 4-1.
4-58 4-59
ΦPn > Pu Using ASD

Using ASD Pn/Ω > Pa
Pn/Ω > Pa
4.5.6 Flexural Members
7. Repeat procedures (2) to (6) for all members.
This section shall apply to designing flexural members as specified in NSCP 2010,
Referral Code of the NBCP. The DGCS shall also adopt additional design guidelines
Example: Double Angle Compression Member without Slender Elements from international standards. The section contains provisions for determining
Verifying member strength with given loads in axial compression, column flexural strength of members subject to simple bending about a principal axis.
dimensions and column length which are pinned at both ends. Provisions for I shaped members, channels, HSS, tees, double angles, single angles,
rectangular bars, rounds and unsymmetrical shapes.
1. Determine material properties for ASTM Designation, Fy and Fu (AISC Table 2-
3); and geometric properties of member (AISC Table 1-15 for Double angles The selection and evaluation of all members to be used is based on the deflection
and AISC Table 1-17 for MC shapes). requirements and strength. The design strength shall be determined based on
flexural strength, ϕMn or the allowable flexural strength, Mn/Ω.
2. Calculate the required strength, Pu (LRFD) or Pa (ASD). Note that Pu is a
factored load.
Doubly Symmetric Compact I-Shaped Members and Channels Bent about their Major Axis
3. Select column (AISC Table 4-9)
This shall apply to members with compact I – shaped beam and channel cross
4. Find K and compute for KL value for both x and y-axis. sections subject to bending about their major axis as specified in the governing
5. Determine the available strength in axial compression for both axes. code. The only limit state to consider is lateral – torsional buckling. Almost all
rolled wide – flange shapes listed identified by the governing code are qualified to
(AISC Table 4-9) be designed by the provisions of this section.
Using LRFD
ΦPn > Pu Doubly Symmetric I-Shaped Members with Compact Webs and Non compact or Slender Flanges
Bent about their Major Axis
Using ASD The strength of shapes designed according to this section is limited by local
Pn/Ω > Pa buckling of the compression flange. Few rolled wide – flange shapes are subject to
this criterion, i.e. having noncompact flanges.
6. Determine the available strength from the lowest value of the two axes
computed.
Other I-Shaped Members with Compact or Non compact Webs Bent About Their Major Axis
Example: Design of Rectangular HSS Compression Member with Slender Elements As specified in the governing code, this section shall apply to doubly symmetric I –
shaped members bent with noncompact webs and singly symmetric I – shaped
Selecting a rectangular HSS member with given loads in axial compression,
members (having different flanges) with compact or noncompact webs.
column dimensions and column length. The base is fixed while the top is pinned.
1. Determine material properties for ASTM Designation, Fy and Fu (AISC Table 2- Doubly Symmetric and Singly Symmetric I-Shaped Members with Slender Webs Bent About
3). Their Major Axis
2. Calculate the required strength, Pu (LRFD) or Pa (ASD). Note that Pu is a As specified in the governing code, this section shall apply to doubly symmetric
factored load. I – shaped members with slender webs, also known as “plate girders”.
3. Find K. Solve for KLx and KLy.

I-Shaped Members and Channels Bent About Their Minor Axis
4. Enter AISC Table 4-3 and proceed across the page until the lightest section is
As specified in the governing code, this section shall apply to I – shaped members
found with an available strength that is equal to or greater than the required
and channels bent about their minor axis. The majority of W-, M-, C-, and MC-
strength.
shapes have compact flanges which can develop the full plastic Mp about the minor
5. Determine the available strength in axial compression. axis.
Using LRFD
ΦPn > Pu
4-62 4-63
Square and Rectangular HSS and Box-Shaped Members

As specified in the governing code, this section shall apply to square and
rectangular HSS, and doubly symmetric box – shaped members bent about either
axis, having compact and noncompact webs and compact and noncompact slender
flanges.
Round HSS and Pipes

This section shall apply to both tubes and pipes. As specified in the governing
code, this section shall apply to round HSS having D/t ratios of less than 0.45E/Fy.
Tees and Double Angles Loaded in the Plane of Symmetry

As specified in the governing code, this section shall apply to tees and double
angles loaded in the plane of symmetry. The specification provides a check for
flange local buckling which applies only when the flange is in compression due to
flexure.
Single Angles
As specified in the governing code, this section shall apply to single angles with
and without lateral restraint along their length. The structural engineer shall
consider the geometric axis of bending. Also, when designing single angles without
continuous bracing using the geometric axis design provisions, My should be
multiplied by 0.80.
Rectangular Bars and Rounds

As specified in the governing code, this section shall apply to rectangular bars bent
about either geometric axis and rounds.
The structural engineer shall consider solid square, rectangular and round bars,
with the exception of rectangular bars bent about the strong axis, are not subject
to lateral-torsional buckling; rectangular bar bent about the strong axis are
subject to lateral torsional buckling; and local buckling does not apply to any bars.
Unsymmetrical Shapes
As specified in the governing code, this section shall apply to all unsymmetrical
shapes, except single angles. However, the structural engineer is advised to have
an appropriate investigation and good engineering judgment for this section to be
applied.
Proportions for Beams and Girders

According to the governing code, this section states the requirements of members
proportioned on the basis of flexural strength of the section. Specific provisions
apply for particular members such as beams and girders with hole reductions, for
I – shaped members, members using cover plates and built – up beams.
4-64
Example: I-Shaped Flexural Member in Minor-Axis Bending

Selecting a member with given uniform loads, and limit to live load deflection
L/240. The beam is simply supported and is braced at ends only.
1. Determine material properties such as ASTM Designation, Fy and Fu (AISC Table
2-3).
2. Calculate the required flexural strength, Mu (LRFD) or Ma (ASD). Note that Mu is
a factored load.
3. Determine the minimum required moment of inertia.
Solve for Δmax and Ireq.
4. Choose the lightest section from AISC Manual Table 3-3.
The structural engineer should consider deflection governing the design for
light sections.
5. Select a trial section and take note of material’s geometric properties, i.e. Sy, Zy, Iy.
6. Check flange slenderness, i.e. if compact or noncompact.
7. Calculate the nominal flexural strength, Mn.
8. Determine the available flexural strength.
Using LRFD
Φ = 0.90
ΦMn > Mu
Using ASD
Ω = 1.67
Mn/Ω > Ma
Example: HSS-Flexural Member with Noncompact Flanges

Selecting a member with given uniform loads, and limit to live load deflection
L/240. The beam is simply supported and is braced at ends only. Selection of
member using AISC Manual.
1. Determine material properties such as ASTM Designation, Fy and Fu (AISC
Table 2-3).
2. Determine the required strength, Mu (LRFD) or Ma (ASD). Note that Mu is a
factored load.
3. Compute for the minimum moment of inertia, Imin.
Solve for Δmax
4. Select HSS member with a minimum Ix from (3) using ASIC Table 1-11; and
having adequate available flexural strength using ASIC Table 3-12.
5. Determine required strength using ASIC Table 3-12.
6. Check available flexural strength.
4-69
ΦMn > Mu
Using ASD
Ω = 1.67
Mn/Ω > Ma
The structural engineer shall take note that for a combination of non-compact
flange and compact web, the specification provides different equation in solving
for the nominal flexural strength.
Example: HSS Flexural Member with Slender Flanges

Verifying a member strength with given nominal uniform loads (dead load and
live load) and limit to live load deflection L/240.
Table 2-3).
2. Compute for the required flexural strength, Mu (LRFD) or Ma (ASD). Note that
Mu is a factored load.
3. Obtain member flexural strength using AISC Manual Table 3-13.
Using LRFD
ΦMn > Mu
Using ASD
Mn/Ω > Ma
4. Check for member deflection. The deflection should be less than the given
limit to live load deflection of L/240.
Example D9. Pipe Flexural Member

Selecting a member with given uniform loads assuming the beam has no limit to
deflection. The beam is simply supported and is braced at ends only.
Table 2-3).
2. Compute for the required flexural strength, Mu (LRFD) or Ma (ASD). Note that
Mu is a factored load.
3. Select a member from AISC Manual Table 3-15 with the required flexural
strength.
4. The available flexural strength of the member shall then be greater than the
required flexural strength.
Using LRFD
ΦMn > Mu
Using ASD
Mn/Ω > Ma
4-71
4.5.10 Plate Girders

This topic is included in Section 4.5.11.
4.5.11 Connections
This section shall apply to design of connections subjected and/or not subjected to
cyclic loading as specified in NSCP 2010, Referral Code of the NBCP. The DGCS
shall also adopt additional design guidelines from international standards.
Bolts and Threaded Parts

The provisions set forth by the governing code shall apply to the use of high –
strength bolts. As mentioned, all joint surfaces shall be free of scale, except tight
mill scale. Installation shall be assured by the any of these methods: turn – of – nut
method, direct tension indicator, calibrated wrench or alternative design bolt.
The structural engineer shall refer to the governing code for the size and use of
holes and the minimum and maximum dimensions for both spacing and edge
distance. Design strengths shall be determined based on the following limit states:
tensile rupture, shear rupture, combined tensile and shear rupture, slip and
tension and shear in slip – critical connections.
Welds
The provisions shall apply to groove welds, fillet welds, plug and slot welds and
combination of welds. The governing code specifies the effective area and the
limitations for each kind in terms of the minimum requirements for application.
Affected Elements of Members and Connecting Elements

According to the governing code, this section shall apply to elements of members
at connections and connecting elements such as plates, gussets, angles and
brackets. The design strengths and allowable strengths shall be determined based
on the following limit states: for elements in tension – tensile yielding and tensile
rupture; shear – shear yielding and shear rupture; block shear – block shear
rupture; and in compression – yielding and buckling.
Fillers
In choosing electrode for use in completing joint – penetration grove welds
subject to tension normal to the effective area, the electrode shall comply with the
requirements for matching filler metals provided by the governing code.
Splices
When tensile forces due to applied tension or flexure are to be transmitted
through splices in heavy sections, by complete penetration groove welds, material
notch – toughness requirements, weld access hole details and thermal cut surface
preparation and inspection requirements shall apply. This provision, however, is
not applicable to built – up members welded prior to shape assembly. This section
is as stated in the governing code.
4-77
Bearing Strength Using ASD

The provisions for bearing strength specified in the code shall apply to the bearing Rn/Ω > Ra
strength at bolt holes to be determined based on the limit state of bearing. As
3. For uncoped beams, beam web shall be checked for bolt bearing.
mentioned in the governing code, the sum of the bearing resistances of the
individual bolts shall apply to connections. Using LRFD
The structural engineer is advised to check the bearing strength for bearing type ΦRn > Ru
and slip – critical conditions.
Using ASD
Column Bases and Bearing on Concrete Rn/Ω > Ra
According to governing code the provisions are made for transferring column 4. Supporting member flange shall be checked for bolt bearing.
loads and moments to the footings and foundations. Using LRFD
The design strength and allowable bearing strength shall be determined based on ΦRn > Ru
the limit state of concrete crushing.
Using ASD
Anchor Rods and Embedments Rn/Ω > Ra
The anchor rods, as specified in the code, shall be designed to provide the
required resistance to loads on the structure at the base of columns. The design Example: Bolted/Welded Double Angle Connection
shall be in accordance with requirements for threaded parts. The designer shall Substituting welds for bolts in the support legs of a double angle connection using
take into consideration the base plate hole size, anchor rod setting tolerance, and a given weld electrode.
the horizontal movement of the column when designing anchor rods resisting
horizontal forces on the base plate.
Table 2-3) and geometric properties (AISC Table 1-1).
Flanges and Webs with Concentrated Forces 2. Determine required weld strength, Ru (LRFD) or Ra (ASD). Note that Ru is
factored. Select weld size and length which shall have a tfmin lesser than bolt tf.
As specified in the governing code, this section shall apply to single – and double –
concentrated force applied normal to the flange(s) of wide flange sections and Using LRFD
similar built – up shapes. ΦRn > Ru
The structural engineer shall take note that provision for the use of stiffeners shall Using ASD
apply to members with required strength exceeding the available strength. Such
provisions are available in the governing code. Rn/Ω > Ra
3. Determine minimum angle thickness, tmin. Check if tmin < weld size.
Example: All-Bolted Double Angle Connection
4. Checks shall be done on the following limit states: bolt shear and the angles for
Selecting an all bolted double-angle connection between a given and column bolt bearing, shear yielding, shear rupture, and block shear rupture.
flange supporting a given beam end reactions, dead and live loads. Also given are
Using LRFD
bold diameter and hole dimension.
ΦRn > Ru
Table 2-3) and geometric properties (AISC Table 1-1). Using ASD
2. Determine required bolt strength, Ru (LRFD) or Ra (ASD). Note that Ru is Rn/Ω > Ra
factored. Check governing specifications for limiting states in bearing, shear 5. Beam web shall be checked for bolt bearing.
yielding, shear rupture, and block shear rupture on the angles, and shear on
the bolts. Using LRFD
Using LRFD ΦRn > Ru
ΦRn > Ru Using ASD
4-78 4-79
Rn/Ω > Ra This section pertains to the design of structural members cold-formed to shape
from carbon or low-alloy steel sheet, strip, plate, or bar not more than 25 mm in
6. Supporting member flange shall be checked for bolt bearing.
thickness and used for load-carrying purposes specified in in the governing code.
Using LRFD The structural engineer shall apply specifications such as the use of design
ΦRn > Ru strength method, second-order analysis and additional provisions which he/she
may deem adequate for the purpose.
Using ASD
Rn/Ω > Ra 4.5.14 Load and Resistance Factor Design
Note: The example shown above shall be applicable when the coped section does To satisfy the requirements of the governing code, the design strength of each
not control the design. If the relative size of the cope to the overall size of the structural component shall be equal or shall exceed the required strength
beam cannot be determined, use AISC Manual Part 9. determined on the basis of LRFD load combinations. This can be written as:
Factored load ≤ Factored Strength
Example: All Welded Double Angle Connection
As mentioned in NSCP 2010, the design shall be in accordance with the following
Designing an all welded double angle connection between a given beam and
equation:
column flange through the aid of AISC Table 10-3. Also given is the weld electrode.
Ru = φRn
Table 2-3) and geometric properties (AISC Table 1-1).
where:
2. Determine required weld strength, Ru (LRFD) or Ra (ASD). Note that Ru is
Ru = required strength
factored.
Rn = nominal strength
Design the weld between the angle leg and the beam to weld such that
twmin is lesser than tw. Φ = resistance factor
Using LRFD φRn = design strength
ΦRn > Ru
4.5.15 Cold-Rolled Steel and Built-Up Members
Using ASD This section shall be in conjunction with “6.11. Cold-Formed Steel Structures” as
Rn/Ω > Ra presented in NSCP 2010, Referral Code of the NBCP.
3. Determine minimum angle thickness, tfmin. Check if tmin < tf.

4.5.16 Plastic Design
4. Minimum angle thickness shall be checked, tmin. The purpose of this Specification is to provide criteria using plastic design as
presented in various sections in NSCP 2010, Referral Code of the NBCP. The DGCS
4.5.12 Column Base Plate and Beam Bearing Plates shall also adopt additional design guidelines from international standards.
This topic is included in Section 4.5.11. Members designed by plastic design would reach the point of failure under the
factored loads but are safe under actual service or working loads.
4.5.13 Cold-Formed Steel Structures
This section shall apply to cold-formed steel structural members design as Design Consideration
specified in NSCP 2010, Referral Code of the NBCP. The DGCS shall also adopt Although plastic design is specified in design codes, local and international, the
additional design guidelines from international standards. Such standards are as governing design standard for structural members is the Load and Resistance
mentioned in “Material” and other reference codes: Factor Design.
 American Iron and Steel Institute 1969: Specification for the Design of Cold-
Formed Steel Structural Members
 American Iron and Steel Institute 2001: Specification for the Design of Cold-
Formed Steel Structural Members
4-80 4-81
Design procedure:
1. After determining the design stresses from structural analysis (e.g. shear and
moment diagram). Maximum moments and shears are determined.
2. Use these maximum moment and shear in determining the section required to
satisfy the following:
 Allowable stresses based on wood specie to be used and stress grade
of the material
 Factoring in the different capacity reduction factors
 Case to case detailing issues that may affect design (e.g. notches)
3. Detail as necessary
Flexure
According to NSCP Section 616.2.1, a beam of circular section may be assumed to
have the same strength in flexure as a square beam having the same cross-
sectional area. If a circular beam is tapered, it shall be considered a beam of
variable cross section. In NSCP Section 616.2.2, it is stated that if possible,
notching of beams should be avoided. Notches in sawn lumber bending members
shall not exceed one-sixth the depth of the member and shall not be located in the
middle third of the span.
As in all flexural members, the standard formula for flexure is:
𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀
𝑓𝑓𝑏𝑏 =
𝐼𝐼
but since we deal mostly with rectangular sections:
6𝑀𝑀
𝑓𝑓𝑏𝑏 =
𝑏𝑏𝑑𝑑 2
Horizontal Shear
The maximum horizontal shear stress in a solid-sawn wood shall not exceed that
calculated by means of:
3𝑉𝑉
𝑓𝑓𝑣𝑣 =
2𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏
The actual shear fv shall not exceed the allowable for the species and the grade as
given in NSCP Table 6.1 adjusted for duration of loading, as provided in NSCP
Section 615.3.4.
Horizontal Shear in Notched Beams

When rectangular-shaped girder, beams or joists are notched at points of support
on the tension side, they shall meet the design requirements of that section in
bending and in shear. Provisions and equations to be used regarding horizontal
shear in notched beams are stated in NSCP Section 616.4.
4-83
Design of Joints in Shear For bearing of less than 150 mm in length and not nearer than 75 mm to the end
Eccentric connector and bolted joints and beams support by connectors or bolt of a member, the maximum allowable load per square mm may be obtained by
shall be designed so that fv does not exceed the allowable unit stresses in multiplying the allowable unit stresses in compression perpendicular to grain by
horizontal shear: the factor indicated by:
3𝑉𝑉 𝑙𝑙𝑏𝑏 + 0.375
𝑓𝑓𝑣𝑣 = 𝐶𝐶𝑏𝑏 =
2𝑏𝑏𝑑𝑑𝑒𝑒 𝑙𝑙𝑏𝑏
In which 𝑙𝑙𝑏𝑏 is the length of bearing in mm measured along the grain of the wood.
where:
The multiplying factors for indicated length of bearing on such small areas as
𝑑𝑑𝑒𝑒 (with connectors) = depth of the member less the distance from the
plates and washers is provided in Table 4-29.
unloaded edge of the member to the nearest edge
of the nearest connector.
Table 4-29 Multiplying Factors for Length of Bearing on Small Areas
𝑑𝑑𝑒𝑒 (with bolts or lag screws) = depth of the member less the distance from the Length of Bearing (mm) 13 25 38 50 75 100 150 or more
unloaded edge of the member to the center of the Multiplying Factor 1.75 1.38 1.25 1.19 1.13 1.10 1.00
nearest bolt or lag screw.
Allowable unit stresses in shear for joint involving bot or connectors loaded In using the preceding equation and table for round washers or bearing areas,
perpendicular to grain may be 50% greater than the horizontal shear values as set use a length equal to the diameter.
forth in NSCP Table 6.1 and, provided that the joint occurs at least five times the In joists supported on a ribbon or ledger board and spiked to the studding, the
depth of the member from its end. When the joint is less than five times the depth allowable stress in compression perpendicular to grain may be increased 50%.
of the member from its end, the included shear stress is calculated by:
3𝑉𝑉 𝑑𝑑
𝑓𝑓𝑣𝑣 = ( )
2𝑏𝑏𝑑𝑑𝑒𝑒 𝑑𝑑𝑒𝑒
And the 50% increase in design values for shear in joints does not apply.
Compression Perpendicular to Grain

In application where deformation is critical, the following equation shall be used
to calculate the compression-perpendicular-to-grain design values.
𝐹𝐹𝑐𝑐⊥ ′ = 0.73𝐹𝐹𝑐𝑐⊥
where:
𝐹𝐹𝐶𝐶⊥ = compression-perpendicular-to-grain values from NSCP Table 6.1
′
𝐹𝐹𝐶𝐶⊥ = critical compression-perpendicular-to-grain value
The duration of load modification factors given in NSCP Section 615.3.4 shall not
apply to compression-perpendicular-to-grain values for sawn lumber.
The allowable unit stresses for compression perpendicular to grain in NSCP Table
6.1 and 6.17 apply to bearings of any length at the ends of the beam and to all
bearing 150 mm or more in length at any other location.
4-84 4-85
4.6.4 Column Design Flexure and Axial Compression

According to NSCP Section 617, a simple column consists of a single piece or of Members subjected to both flexure and axial compression shall be proportioned
pieces properly glued together to form a single members. Spaced columns are that:
formed of two or more individual members with their longitudinal axes parallel,
𝑓𝑓𝐶𝐶 𝑓𝑓𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏
separated at the ends and middle points of their length by blocking and joined at ≤1
𝐹𝐹𝑐𝑐 ′ 𝐹𝐹′𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 − 𝐽𝐽𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐
the ends by timber connectors capable of developing the required shear
resistance. Built-up columns, other than connector-joined spaced columns and The value of J shall be derived as:
glued-laminated columns, shall not be designed as solid columns. 𝑙𝑙𝑒𝑒
𝑑𝑑
− 11
For simple solid columns, l/d shall not exceed 50. 𝐽𝐽 =
𝑘𝑘 − 11
The effective column length, le, shall be used in design given in NSCP Section
𝐸𝐸
617.3. Actual column length, l, may be multiplied by the factors given the table in 𝐾𝐾 = 0.671 √
NSCP Section 617.3. 𝐹𝐹𝑐𝑐
Except that J shall not be less than zero nor greater than one (0 ≤ J ≤ 1).
4.6.5 Combined Load Design
F’c and K shall be determined in accordance with the provision in NSCP Section
Flexure And Axial Tension 617.3, except (1) when checking the design in the plane of bending the
slenderness ratio, 𝑙𝑙𝑒𝑒 /d, in the plane of bending shall be used to calculate F’c and J
Members subjected to both flexure and axial tension shall be so proportioned
and (2) when checking the design perpendicular to the plane of bending the
that:
slenderness ratio, 𝑙𝑙𝑒𝑒 /d in the plane of bending shall be used to calculate F’c and J
𝑓𝑓𝑡𝑡 𝑓𝑓𝑏𝑏 shall be set equal to zero.
+ ≤1
𝐹𝐹𝑡𝑡 𝐹𝐹𝑏𝑏 ∗
and Spaced Columns
𝑓𝑓𝑏𝑏 − 𝑓𝑓𝑡𝑡 In the case of spaced columns, this combined stress formula maybe applied only if
≤1 the bending is in a direction parallel to the greater d of the individual member.
𝐹𝐹𝑏𝑏 ∗∗
where: 4.6.6 Truss Compression Chords
𝐹𝐹𝑏𝑏 ∗ = tabulated bending design value multiplied by all applicable Effect of buckling of a 50 mm by 200 mm or smaller truss compression chord
having effective buckling lengths of 2.40 m or less with 9 mm or thicker plywood
adjustment factors except beam stability factor,𝐶𝐶𝐿𝐿
sheathing nailed to the narrow face of the chord in accordance with appreciate
= 𝐹𝐹𝑏𝑏 (𝐶𝐶𝐷𝐷 )(𝐶𝐶𝑀𝑀 )(𝐶𝐶𝑡𝑡 )(𝐶𝐶𝐹𝐹 )(𝐶𝐶𝑟𝑟 )(𝐶𝐶𝑖𝑖 ) for sawn lumber standards shall be determined from the equation:
= 𝐹𝐹𝑏𝑏 (𝐶𝐶𝐷𝐷 )(𝐶𝐶𝑀𝑀 )(𝐶𝐶𝑡𝑡 )(𝐶𝐶𝑣𝑣 ) for glulam 1 + 0.62 𝑙𝑙𝑒𝑒
𝐶𝐶𝑇𝑇 =
𝐹𝐹𝑏𝑏 ∗∗ = tabulated bending design value multiplied by all applicable 𝐸𝐸0.05
adjustment factors except volume factor,𝐶𝐶𝑣𝑣 where:
= 𝐹𝐹𝑏𝑏 (𝐶𝐶𝐷𝐷 )(𝐶𝐶𝑀𝑀 )(𝐶𝐶𝑡𝑡 )(𝐶𝐶𝐿𝐿 )(𝐶𝐶𝐹𝐹 )(𝐶𝐶𝑟𝑟 )(𝐶𝐶𝑖𝑖 ) for sawn lumber 𝐶𝐶𝑇𝑇 = buckling of the stiffness factor
= 𝐹𝐹𝑏𝑏 (𝐶𝐶𝐷𝐷 )(𝐶𝐶𝑀𝑀 )(𝐶𝐶𝑡𝑡 )(𝐶𝐶𝐿𝐿 ) for glulam = 0.819E for machine-stress-rated lumber
𝐹𝐹𝑇𝑇 ′ = allowable tension design value parallel to grain 𝑙𝑙𝑒𝑒 = effective buckling length used in design of chord for
𝑓𝑓𝑡𝑡 = actual unit stress in tension parallel to grain compression loading
𝑓𝑓𝑏𝑏 = actual unit stress for extreme fiber in bending 𝐸𝐸0.05 = 0.589E for visually graded lumber
E = Modulus of Elasticity from tables of allowable unit stress,
N/mm2
The value of 𝐶𝐶𝑇𝑇 determined from this equation are for wood seasoned to a
moisture content of 19% or less at the time the plywood is nailed to the chord. For
4-86 4-87
wood that is unseasoned at the time of plywood attachment, 𝐶𝐶𝑇𝑇 shall be Bolts
determined from NSCP Table 6.17 provides the safe loads in KN for bolts in shear in seasoned
1 + 0.331 𝑙𝑙𝑒𝑒 lumber.
𝐶𝐶𝑇𝑇 =
𝐸𝐸0.05 When wood is connected to concrete or masonry, the allowable shear value is
For chords with an effective buckling length greater than 2.40 m, 𝐶𝐶𝑇𝑇 shall be taken permitted to be “one half the tabulated double shear values for a wood member
as the value for a chord having an effective length of 2.40 m. twice the thickness of the member attached to the concrete or masonry".
The buckling stiffness factor does not apply to short columns or trusses used
Nails and Spikes
under wet conditions. The allowable unit compressive stress shall be modified by
the buckling stiffness factor when a truss chord is subjected to combined flexure Safe Lateral Strength: When used to fasten wood members together. The
and compression and the bending moment in the direction that induces maximum load causing shear and bending that a common wire nail driven
compression stresses in the chord face to which the plywood is attached. perpendicular to grain of the wood shall not exceed the safe lateral strength of the
wire nail or spike in NSCP Table 6.21.
The buckling stiffness factor 𝐶𝐶𝑇𝑇 shall apply as follows:
𝑙𝑙
Use only 2/3 of the capacity of nail driven perpendicular to the grain when wire
Short column ( 𝑒𝑒 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 11 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙) nail is driven parallel to the grain of the wood.
𝑑𝑑
𝐹𝐹′𝑐𝑐 = 𝐹𝐹𝑐𝑐 Toenails shall be designed using only 5/6 of the lateral load allowed for nails
𝑙𝑙 driven perpendicular to the grain.
Intermediate columns ( 𝑒𝑒 𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔 𝑡𝑡ℎ𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 11 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 𝑡𝑡ℎ𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 𝐾𝐾):
𝑑𝑑
Safe Resistance to Withdrawal: NSCP Table 6.21 provides the safe resistance of
K = 0.671√𝐶𝐶𝑇𝑇 E/𝐹𝐹𝐶𝐶 nails wire driven perpendicular to grain of wood against withdrawal from
anchorage.
1 𝑙𝑙𝑒𝑒 /𝑑𝑑 4
[
𝐹𝐹′𝑐𝑐 = 𝐹𝐹𝐶𝐶 1 − ( ) ]
3 𝐾𝐾
4.6.9 Working Stresses for Timber
𝑙𝑙
Long column ( 𝑒𝑒 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 𝐾𝐾 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔) The working stress for visually stress-graded unseasoned structural timber is
𝑑𝑑
provided in Table 4-30. The relative densities for species to determine allowable
0.30 𝐸𝐸𝐶𝐶𝑇𝑇
𝐹𝐹′𝑐𝑐 = loads is provided in Table 4-31.
(𝑙𝑙𝑒𝑒 /d)2
4.6.7 Compression at Angle to Grain

The allowable unit stress in compression at an angle of load to grain between 0𝑜𝑜
and 90𝑜𝑜 shall be computed from the Hankinson Equation as follows:
𝐹𝐹𝐶𝐶 𝐹𝐹𝐶𝐶⊥
𝐹𝐹𝑛𝑛 =
𝐹𝐹𝐶𝐶 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠2 𝜃𝜃+ 𝐹𝐹𝐶𝐶⊥ 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 2 𝜃𝜃
Allowable values 𝐹𝐹𝐶𝐶 shall be adjusted for duration of load before use in
Hankinson’s Equatioon. Values of 𝐹𝐹𝑛𝑛 and 𝐹𝐹𝐶𝐶⊥ are not subjected to duration of load
modifications.
4.6.8 Timber Connectors and Fasteners

Mechanical wood connectors and fasteners are used to transfer member forces to
other structural elements. NSCP Section 619 provides us the allowable loads and
installation of timber connectors and fasteners. NSCP Tables 6.2, 6.17, 6.19 and
6.20 are the pertinent references for the allowable loads and installation for
timber connectors.
4-88 4-89
Table 4-30 Working Stresses for Visually Stress-Graded Unseasoned Structural 80% Stress Grade
Timber of Philippine Woodsa
Species Bending Modulus of Compression Compression Shear
80% Stress Grade (Common and Botanical Names) and Tension Elasticity Parallel to P’pendicular Parallel
Parallel to in Bending Grain to Grain to Grain
Species Bending Modulus of Compression Compression Shear Grain
(Common and Botanical Names) and Tension Elasticity Parallel to P’pendicular Parallel
Parallel to in Bending Grain to Grain to Grain (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
Grain ×103
MPa MPa MPa MPa MPa
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
×103 Lanutan-bagyo [Gonystylus macrophyllum 15.0 6.06 8.96 2.02 1.84
MPa MPa MPa MPa MPa (miq.) Airy Shaw]
I. High Strength Group Lauan (Shorea spp.) 13.9 5.83 8.18 1.72 1.48
Agoho (Casuarina equisetifolia Forst) 26.3 8.22 14.5 5.91 2.95 Malaanonang (Shorea spp.) 13.8 5.41 8.54 1.96 1.59
Liusin [Parinari corymbosa (Blume) Miq.] 25.0 9.36 15.6 4.31 2.64 Malasaging (Aglaia spp.) 16.8 5.94 9.51 2.92 1.85
Malabayabas (Tristania spp.) 28.7 8.30 15.8 8.70 3.02 Malugai (Pometia spp.) 15.4 6.30 9.33 3.07 2.07
Manggachapui (Hopea spp.) 25.8 9.63 16.0 6.03 2.78 Miau (Dysoxylum spp.) 15.7 6.50 8.83 2.78 2.06
Molave (Vitex parviflora Juss.) 24.0 6.54 15.4 6.34 2.88 Nato (Palaquium spp.) 16.2 5.56 9.17 2.33 1.98
Narig (Vatica spp.) 21.8 8.33 13.7 4.97 2.61 Palosapis (Anisoptera spp.) 13.8 5.98 8.38 2.73 1.68
Sasalit [Teijmanniodendron ahernianum 31.3 9.72 21.60 10.2 3.38 Pine (Pinus spp.) 14.7 6.66 8.29 1.88 1.56
(Merr) Bkh.]
Salakin (Aphanamixis spp.) 15.7 5.67 8.83 2.94 1.88
Yakal (Shorea spp.) 24.5 9.78 15.8 6.27 2.49
Vidal lanutan [Hibiscus campylosiphon 19.5 5.83 8.54 2.65 2.39
Turcz. Var. glabrecens (Har. Ex. Perk.)]
II. Moderately High Strength Group
Antipolo (Arthocarpus spp.) 18.6 5.35 10.8 3.90 2.06 IV. Moderately Low Strength Group
Binggas (Terminalia spp.) 18.9 6.57 11.4 3.27 2.24 Almaciga [Agathis dammara (Lamb.) Rilh.] 11.8 5.47 6.27 1.44 1.47
Bokbok (Xanthophyllum excelsum (Blume) 18.1 6.36 11.3 3.41 2.18 Bayok (Pterospermum spp.) 12.6 4.75 7.33 1.30 1.20
Miq.]
Lingo-lingo (Vitex turczaninowii Merr.) 13.2 4.13 6.85 2.00 1.66
Dao (Dracontomelon spp.) 16.2 5.43 9.44 2.27 1.92
Mangasinoro (Shorea spp.) 12.8 5.36 7.46 1.97 1.44
Gatasan [Garcinia venulosa (Blanco) 20.8 6.84 13.5 3.52 2.36
Choisy] Raintree [Samanea saman (Jacq.) Merr.] 11.9 2.75 7.23 3.32 2.07
Guijo (Shorea spp.) 21.8 8.47 13.2 4.26 2.40 Yemane (Gmelina arborea R. Br.) 12.6 4.09 7.87 3.40 1.96
Kamagong (Diospyros spp.) 20.9 7.20 11.7 4.39 2.47

Kamatog [Erythrophloeum densiflorum 19.0 7.56 11.2 3.95 2.35 63% Stress Grade
(Elm) Merr.]
Species Bending and Modulus of Compression Compression Shear
Katmon (Dillenia spp) 18.4 6.82 11.9 4.84 2.29 Tension Elasticity in Parallel to P’pendicular Parallel
(Common and Botanical Names)
Kato (Amoora spp.) 18.4 8.04 10.6 3.46 1.96 Parallel to Bending Grain to Grain to Grain
Grain
Lomarau (Swintonia foxworthyi Elm.) 19.8 7.92 11.8 2.98 2.18
(1) (7) (8) (9) (10) (10)
Mahogany, Big-leafed (Swietenia 16.5 4.66 10.5 3.83 2.71 ×103
macrophylla King) MPa MPa MPa MPa MPa
Makaasim (Sysygium nitidum Benth) 20.5 6.72 11.4 3.70 2.40 I. High Strength Group
Malakauayan [Decusocarpus 18.9 6.66 11.12 2.32 2.14 Agoho (Casuarina equisetifolia Forst) 20.7 6.47 11.4 4.65 2.32
philippinensis (Fxw.) de Laub.]
Liusin [Parinari corymbosa (Blume) Miq.] 19.7 7.37 12.3 3.39 2.08
Narra (Pterocarpus indicus Willd) 18.0 5.94 11.4 3.07 1.91
Malabayabas (Tristania spp.) 22.6 6.53 12.5 6.85 2.38
Pahutan (Mangifera spp.) 16.6 6.53 10.0 2.50 2.05
Manggachapui (Hopea spp.) 20.3 7.58 12.6 4.75 2.19
Molave (Vitex parviflora Juss.) 18.9 5.15 12.1 5.00 2.27
III. Medium Strength Group
Narig (Vatica spp.) 17.2 6.56 10.8 3.92 2.06
Apitong (Dipterocarpus spp.) 16.5 7.31 9.56 2.20 1.73
Sasalit [Teijmanniodendron ahernianum 24.7 7.65 17.0 8.07 2.67
Bagtikan [Parashorea malaanonan 16.6 6.48 9.89 2.33 1.82 (Merr) Bkh.]
(Blanco) Merr.]
Yakal (Shorea spp.) 19.3 7.70 12.0 4.94 1.96
Dangkalan (Calophyllum spp.) 16.3 6.38 9.20 2.48 1.98
Gisau (Canarium spp.) 14.3 5.33 8.16 1.99 1.90
4-90 4-91
63% Stress Grade 63% Stress Grade
Species Bending and Modulus of Compression Compression Shear Species Bending and Modulus of Compression Compression Shear
(Common and Botanical Names) Tension Elasticity in Parallel to P’pendicular Parallel (Common and Botanical Names) Tension Elasticity in Parallel to P’pendicular Parallel
Parallel to Bending Grain to Grain to Grain Parallel to Bending Grain to Grain to Grain
Grain Grain
(1) (7) (8) (9) (10) (10) (1) (7) (8) (9) (10) (10)
×103 ×103
MPa MPa MPa MPa MPa MPa MPa MPa MPa MPa
Antipolo (Arthocarpus spp.) 14.7 4.21 8.53 3.07 1.62 IV. Moderately Low Strength Group
Binggas (Terminalia spp.) 14.9 5.17 8.98 2.57 1.77 Almaciga [Agathis dammara (Lamb.) Rilh.] 9.26 4.30 4.94 1.13 1.16
Bokbok (Xanthophyllum excelsum (Blume) 14.3 5.01 8.90 2.68 1.72 Bayok (Pterospermum spp.) 9.94 3.74 5.78 1.03 0.95
Miq.]
Choisy] Raintree [Samanea saman (Jacq.) Merr.] 9.37 2.16 5.70 2.61 1.63
Guijo (Shorea spp.) 17.1 6.67 10.4 3.35 1.89 Yemane (Gmelina arborea R. Br.) 9.90 3.22 6.20 2.68 1.55
Kamagong (Diospyros spp.) 16.6 5.67 9.21 3.46 1.95

Kamatog [Erythrophloeum densiflorum 15.0 5.95 8.79 3.11 1.85 50% Stress Grade
(Elm) Merr.]
Katmon (Dillenia spp) 14.8 5.37 9.38 3.81 1.80 and Tension Elasticity Parallel to P’pendicular Parallel
(Common and Botanical Names)
Kato (Amoora spp.) 14.5 6.33 8.34 2.73 1.54 Parallel to in Bending Grain to Grain to Grain
Grain
(1) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16)
Mahogany, Big-leafed (Swietenia 13.0 3.67 8.24 3.01 2.13 ×103
macrophylla King) MPa MPa MPa MPa MPa
Makaasim (Sysygium nitidum Benth) 16.1 5.29 8.95 2.92 1.89 I. High Strength Group
Malakauayan [Decusocarpus 14.9 5.24 8.79 1.83 1.69 Agoho (Casuarina equisetifolia Forst) 16.4 5.14 9.06 3.69 1.84
Liusin [Parinari corymbosa (Blume) Miq.] 15.6 5.85 9376 2.69 1.65
Malabayabas (Tristania spp.) 17.9 5.19 9390 5.44 1.89
Manggachapui (Hopea spp.) 16.1 6.02 10.0 3.77 1.74
Molave (Vitex parviflora Juss.) 15.0 4.09 9.60 3.96 1.80
Narig (Vatica spp.) 13.6 5.20 8.59 3.11 1.63
Sasalit [Teijmanniodendron ahernianum 19.6 6.08 13.5 6.40 2.12
Bagtikan [Parashorea malaanonan 13.1 5.10 7.79 1.84 1.43 (Merr) Bkh.]
(Blanco) Merr.]
Yakal (Shorea spp.) 15.3 3.11 9.55 3.92 1.55
Lanutan-bagyo [Gonystylus macrophyllum 11.8 4.77 7.06 1.59 1.45
(miq.) Airy Shaw] Antipolo (Arthocarpus spp.) 11.6 3.34 6.77 2.44 1.29
Lauan (Shorea spp.) 10.9 4.59 6.44 1.35 1.17 Binggas (Terminalia spp.) 11.8 4.11 7.13 2.04 1.40
Malaanonang (Shorea spp.) 10.9 4.26 6.72 1.54 1.25 Bokbok (Xanthophyllum excelsum (Blume) 11.3 3.97 7.06 2.13 1.36
Miq.]
Malasaging (Aglaia spp.) 13.3 4.68 7.49 2.30 1.46
Malugai (Pometia spp.) 12.1 4.96 7.35 2.42 1.63
Miau (Dysoxylum spp.) 12.3 5.12 6.96 2.19 1.62 Choisy]
Nato (Palaquium spp.) 12.7 4.38 7.22 1.84 1.56 Guijo (Shorea spp.) 13.6 5.30 8.22 2.66 1.50
Palosapis (Anisoptera spp.) 10.9 4.71 6.60 2.15 1.33 Kamagong (Diospyros spp.) 13.1 4.50 7.31 2.74 1.54
Pine (Pinus spp.) 11.6 5.24 6.53 1.48 1.23 Kamatog [Erythrophloeum densiflorum 11.9 4.72 6.98 2.47 1.47
(Elm) Merr.]
Katmon (Dillenia spp) 11.7 4.26 7.44 3.03 1.43
Turcz. Var. glabrecens (Har. Ex. Perk.)] Kato (Amoora spp.) 11.5 5.02 6.62 2.17 1.23
4-92 4-93
50% Stress Grade

(Common and Botanical Names) and Tension Elasticity Parallel to P’pendicular Parallel
Parallel to in Bending Grain to Grain to Grain
Grain
(1) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16)
×103
MPa MPa MPa MPa MPa
Mahogany, Big-leafed (Swietenia 10.3 2.91 6.54 2.39 1.69
macrophylla King)
Makaasim (Sysygium nitidum Benth) 12.8 4.20 7.10 2.31 1.50
Malakauayan [Decusocarpus 11.8 4.16 6.98 1.45 1.34

Bagtikan [Parashorea malaanonan 10.4 4.05 6.18 1.46 1.14
(Blanco) Merr.]
Lanutan-bagyo [Gonystylus macrophyllum 9.39 3.79 5.60 1.26 1.15
(miq.) Airy Shaw]
Lauan (Shorea spp.) 8.68 3.64 5.11 1.07 0.93
Malaanonang (Shorea spp.) 8.63 3.38 5.34 1.23 0.99
Malasaging (Aglaia spp.) 10.5 3.71 5.95 1.83 1.16
Malugai (Pometia spp.) 9.62 3.94 5.83 1.92 1.30
Miau (Dysoxylum spp.) 9.80 4.06 5.52 1.74 1.29
Nato (Palaquium spp.) 10.1 3.48 5.73 1.46 1.24
Palosapis (Anisoptera spp.) 8.65 3.73 5.24 1.70 1.05
Pine (Pinus spp.) 9.19 4.16 5.18 1.18 0.98
Turcz. Var. glabrecens (Har. Ex. Perk.)]
IV. Moderately Low Strength Group

Almaciga [Agathis dammara (Lamb.) Rilh.] 7.35 3.42 3.92 0.90 0.92
Bayok (Pterospermum spp.) 7.89 2.97 4.58 0.81 0.75
Raintree [Samanea saman (Jacq.) Merr.] 7.43 1.72 4.52 2.07 1.30
Yemane (Gmelina arborea R. Br.) 7.86 2.55 4.92 2.13 1.23
4-94
Test procedures should be able to recreate the material design stresses. In the
absence of a reliable as-built plan, a comprehensive investigation should be
conducted which includes, but not limited to, the use of the following:
 Rebound hammer test and concrete coring for compression tests
 The PUNDIT (Portable Ultrasonic Nondestructive Digital Indicating Tester)
test for evaluating the uniformity of concrete, locating internal concrete voids
and cracks, and estimating severity of concrete deterioration.
 Rebar locator for concrete structures
 Corrosion and carbonation tests for concrete
 Direct measurement of structural members including plumbness detection
 Load testing
Structural analysis based on the test results will then be made to complete the
study.
Analysis may be code based or performance based.
Retrofitting work will follow the results of the structural analysis and review. The
retrofitting shall be dependent of the established criteria (code based or
performance based) and shall be considered on case by case basis depending on
the discovered inadequacies of the structure being investigated.
Code based: the intention of this type of analysis is essentially to bring the
existing structure into a design level consistent with the NSCP.
Performance based: Uses as an objective the "degree of acceptable risk" which
should be agreed upon by stakeholders. The structural engineer may consider, the
acceptable damage to the structure without loss of life. To the owner, the higher
construction cost in case the owner decides on a higher design criteria.
Expected performance level can be one of the four damage states after an
earthquake:
 Fully operational – use of structure is the same as before the earthquake
 Operational – building suffers some damage but remains functional and will
not collapse.
 Life safety – foremost in the consideration is the safety of the occupant and not
the prevention of structural and non structural member failure.
 Collapse prevention. – allows minimum design criteria and would require
extensive repair (or demolition) after an earthquake event.
References are:
 Earthquake Engineering: From Engineering Seismology to Performance-
Based Engineering by Yousef Bozorgnia, Vitelmo V. Bertero 2004
 Fundamentals of Earthquake Engineering, Amr S. Elnashai, Luigi Di Sarno
2008, ISBN 978-0-470-02483-6 (Hbk)
4-97
 Locations and details, expansion joint detail  Stair details

 Rebar splice, development length, hook schedule  Shearwall and shearwall footing details, ramp details
 Slab opening, corner reinforcements, depression details  Elevated water tank detail including concrete saddles
 Pipe sleeve on beam, change in elevation of beams  Cistern, septic tank details
 Bay sections
Framing Plans
Foundation Plan
 Foundation plan should contain property line, footing and column
designations
 Location of walls with wall footings, slab on fill thickness and rebar size and
spacing
 Scale should be consistent with the floor plan scale
 Excavation plan
Floor Framing Plans (including deck)

 Beam and slab designations, scaled location of beams and columns, floor
openings
 Columns terminated at a particular floor should be hatched
 Scale should be consistent with the floor plan scale.
Roof Framing Plan

 Roof beams, truss, rafters, bracings designations. Scaled location of beams,
truss
 Rafters, bracings
 Purlin size and spacing call out
 Columns terminated at a particular floor should be hatched
 Scale should be consistent with the floor plan scale
Schedule and Typical Details

 Slabs, beams, footings showing all necessary dimensions and rebar size and
number
 Detailed column section and typical column elevation showing rebars and
splice
 Restrictions
 Truss and rafter schematic diagrams with sizes and connection/anchoring
detail
 Purlin, sagrod, bracing connection details
4-102 4-103
5.2.2 Availability of Power Source

Availability of power should be known beforehand. The type and characteristics
such as the number of phases, voltage rating and the frequency in Hertz should be
known and available. Samples of electric power source are as follow:
Primary Voltage:
 34.5 kV, three-phase, four wire, 60 Hz or
 34.5 kV, single-phase, two wire, 60 Hz or
 20 kV, single-phase, three-wire, 60Hz or
 7.62 kV, single –phase, three-wire, 60 Hz
Secondary Voltage:
 460/265 volts, three-phase, four wire, 60 Hz AC or
 400/230 volts, three-phase, five wire, 60 Hz AC or
 230 volts, three-phase, four wire, 60 Hz AC or
 230 volts, single-phase, three wire, 60 Hz AC
 230 volts, single phase, 60 Hz AC Multi-ground
5.2.3 Local Power Utility Company Requirements

Follow the rules and regulations of the local electric company, where applicable as
follows:
 For projects requiring new electrical service, the electrical designer shall
coordinate requirements with the local utility service company. For
renovations of and/or additions to existing buildings, the electrical designer
shall investigate the existing electrical service/distribution system and
determine whether sufficient capacity is available to accommodate the new
loads. If applicable, the electrical designer shall inform the electric utility
company of the new service requirements and additional loads.
 Major site distribution components, such as medium voltage and low voltage
power feeders, duct banks, and manholes, shall be shown on the civil utility
plans for coordination purposes. The routing of site utilities and location of
manholes should be determined early in the design process.
 The service entrance location shall be determined concurrently with the
development of conceptual design. Space planning documents and standards
for equipment furnished by utility companies should be incorporated into the
concept design. Locations for transformers, unit substation, vaults, meters and
5-3
Table 5-1 General Lighting Load Density  Parking lots shall be designed with pole mounted luminaires that is
Type of Occupancy Load Density (VA per environment friendly and requires less energy but efficient. Emergency power
m²)
shall not be required for parking lot lighting.
Office Buildings 39
Schools 33
 Entrances: Lighting fixtures shall be provided at all entrances and exits of
Hospitals 22
major buildings and shall be connected to the emergency lighting circuit.
Warehouse storages 3  Loading Docks: Exterior door lighting shall be provided at loading docks.
Court Rooms 22 Fixtures for illumination of the interior of trailers shall be provided at each
Auditoriums 11 truck position.
Corridors 6
 The basic lighting density for roadway shall not exceed the maximum values
Clubs 22 as indicated in Table 5-3.
Dwelling Units 33
Parking Area 3 Table 5-3 Maximum Values for Lighting Power for Roads and Ground Load Density
Reception & Waiting Area/Lobby 6
Type of Occupancy Load Density
Toilet & Washroom 6 (W/m²)
Work Area 2
Source: PEC Part 1, Table 2.20.2.3 Activity area for casual use (such as picnic, grounds, gardens, parks) 1
Private driveways/walkways 1
Exterior Lighting Public driveways/walkways 1.5

Private Parking lots 1.2
The total lighting density for the exterior spaces of buildings shall not exceed the
Public Parking lots 1.8
maximum values for building areas as indicated in Table 5-2.
Source: Guidelines on Energy Conserving Design of Buildings (2007 Ed.)
Table 5-2 Maximum Values for Lighting Power for Building Exterior Load Density
5.3.2 Illumination Levels for Various Areas
Building Area/Space Lighting Power
Exit (with or without canopy) 60 W/L.m. of door opening
For lighting levels for interior spaces please refer to the values indicated in Table
Entrance (without canopy) 90 W/L.m. of door opening
5-4 and 5-5. The electrical designer shall have the option to use the manual
calculation and/or the applicable lighting calculation software.
High Traffic (such as retail, airport) 100 W/m² of area with canopy
Light Traffic (such as office, school) 10 W/m² of area with canopy
Table 5-4 Recommended Design Illuminance Levels
Loading Area 3 W/m²
Minimum and
Loading Door 50 W/L.m. of door opening
Task Maximum Application
Total power allowance for the exterior (exclusive 100 W/L.m. (Lux)
of above allowances) of building perimeter for
Lighting for Infrequently Used 50-150 Circulation area and Corridors
buildings of up to 5 storey (above ground) plus
6W/L.m. of building perimeter for each additional 100-200 Stairs
storey
100-200 Escalators
Lighting for Working Interiors 200-300 Infrequent reading and writing
300-750 General offices, typing and computing
 Exterior lighting is to comply with the local zoning laws of Barangay, 300-750 Conference room
Municipalities and Cities. Use lighting levels appropriate for exterior areas as 500-1000 Deep-plan general offices
indicated in the available standard references. Flood lighting shall also be 500-1000 Drawing offices
provided if necessary.
Localized lighting for Exacting tasks 500-1000 Proofreading
 Parking and roadway lighting shall be of High Intensity Discharge (HID) lamps 750-1500 Designing, architecture and machine
engineering
or Light Emitting Diode (LED). The illumination ratios shall not exceed 10 to 1
1000-2000 Detailed and precise work
maximum to minimum ratio and a 4 to 1 average to minimum ratio.
5-5 5-6
Table 5-5 Illuminance Levels (Average) component of illumination only and ignore the indirect component of light, which
Area Nominal Illuminance Level in can contribute significantly to the uniformity. However, used within its limits, a
Lumens/m² (lux)
Spacing Criterion can be valuable. To use the Spacing Criterion, multiply the net
Office Area
mounting height (luminaire to work plane) by the Spacing Criterion number.
Normal work station area, open or closed offices 500
Applicable Lighting Software shall be used to determine the required spacing
Automated Data Processing (ADP) 500
considering the technical characteristic of the luminaires to be used.
Conference Rooms 300
Training Rooms 500 Refer also to the recommendations of the DoE Manual of Practice on Efficient
Internal Corridors 200 Lighting.
Public Areas
Entrance Lobbies 200 5.3.4 Office Lighting
Elevator Lobbies, Public Corridors 200 Office lighting is generally fluorescent (tubular or CFL) and/or LED type lighting
Stairwells 200 fixtures utilizing pinlight or downlight. A lighting layout with a fairly even level of
Support Areas general illumination is desirable. In open office areas with systems furniture
Toilets 200 partitions, the coefficient of utilization shall be reduced to account for the light
Staff Locker Rooms 200 obstruction and absorption of the partitions.
Storage Rooms, Janitors’ Closets 200 Design for glare, contrast, visual comfort and color rendering and correction shall
Electrical Rooms, Generator Rooms 200 be considered by the design engineer.
Mechanical Rooms 200
Task lighting shall be used in situations, such as areas of systems furniture, where
Communications Rooms 200
the general lighting level would be insufficient for the specific functions required.
Maintenance Shops 200
Loading Docks 200 If the area contains special work stations for computer graphics, dimmable CFL or
Trash Rooms 200 LED may be required. If a large area is segregated into areas of high and low
Specialty Areas personnel activity, switching design should provide for separate control of lights
Dining Areas 150-200
in high- and low-activity areas of the area.
Kitchens 500
Outleased Area 500 5.3.5 Conference Rooms and Training Rooms
Physical Fitness Area 500 These areas shall have a combination of fluorescent (tubular or CFL) and/or
Child Care Centers 500 dimmable LED or halogen lighting fixture.
Structured Parking, General Area 50
Structured Parking, Intersections 100 5.3.6 Lobbies, Auditorium and Public Corridors
Structured Parking, Entrances 500 Special lighting design concepts shall be applied in these areas. The lighting design
shall be an integral part of the architecture. Wall fixtures or combination wall and
U.S. General Services Administration
ceiling fixtures shall be considered in corridors to help break the monotony of a
long, plain space.
5.3.3 Lighting Layout
Lighting shall be designed to enhance both the overall building architecture as
5.3.7 Mechanical and Electrical Areas
well as the effect of individual areas within the building with consideration on
energy efficiency. Lighting in equipment rooms or closets shall be provided by industrial-type
fluorescent fixtures or vapor-tight fixtures. Care shall be taken to locate light
For the required spacing with respect to mounting height between luminaires or fixtures so that lighting is not obstructed by tall or suspended pieces of
lighting outlets shall consider the spacing criteria recommended by the equipment.
manufacturer.
Spacing criteria provide the designer with information regarding how far apart 5.3.8 Dining Areas and Services
luminaires may be spaced while maintaining acceptable illumination uniformity Ample daylight is the illumination of choice in dining areas, assisted by fluorescent
on the work plane based on the photometric data of the luminaire to be used. (tubular or CFL) and/or LED type fixtures. Limited CFL for accents shall be
Criteria for spacing are generally conservative; they take into account the direct
5-7 5-8
considered if comparable architectural effect to LED or incandescent lighting can  Design of lighting shall use the energy efficient lighting fixtures. The lighting
be achieved. system shall be selected to provide an aesthetic and adaptable environment in
accordance with the intended purpose and with the minimum likely energy
5.3.9 Structured Parking requirements.
Fixtures for parking areas shall be fluorescent strip fixtures with wire guards or  Task oriented lighting shall be chosen wherever applicable.
diffusers. Care must be taken in locating fixtures to maintain the required vehicle
 When choosing lighting fixtures, take into account the color rendition and
clearance. Enclosed fluorescent or HID fixtures should be considered for above-
appearance of the area to be lighted. Refer Table 5-6.
grade parking structures
Table 5-6 Efficacy Ranges of Various Lamps

5.3.10 High Bay Lighting
Lamp Type Rated Power Ranges Efficacy Ranges
Lighting in shop, supply, or warehouse areas with ceilings above 4900 mm shall (watts) (lumens/watt)
be color-improved HPS. In areas where color rendition is known to be of Linear/Tubular Fluorescent Lamp
particular importance, metal halide MH shall be used.
Halophosphate 10 – 40 55 – 70
Triphosphor 14 – 65 60 – 83
5.3.11 Emergency Lighting
Compact Fluorescent Lamp (CFL) 3 – 125 41 – 65
Emergency lighting shall be provided to designated areas and installed on wall Light Emitting Diode (LED) 3 – 100 80 – 95
below the ceiling line. Incandescent Lamp 10 – 100 10 – 25
Mercury Vapor Lamp 50 – 2000 40 – 63
5.3.12 Exit Lighting Metal Halide lamp Up to 1000 75 – 95
Exit lighting shall be provided to all emergency and egress areas installed surface Low Pressure Sodium Lamp 20 – 200 100 – 180
mounted on the ceiling or wall mounted. High Pressure Sodium Lamp 50 – 250 80 – 130

5.3.13 Energy Conservation
The largest factor in the energy consumption of a building is lighting. The overall
 Consider the maximum practical room surface reflectance in the lighting
efficiency of the lighting system shall depend both on the individual components
design. Utilize light finishes to attain the best overall efficiency of the whole
and on the interaction of components in a system. A good controls strategy shall
lighting system. Avoid dark surfaces because these absorb light. Table 5-7
be applied to eliminate lighting in unoccupied areas and reduces it where day
shows the recommended room surface reflectance.
lighting is available that can contribute significantly to energy conservation.
Necessary applicable control methods shall be applied such as through a Building
Table 5-7 Recommended Room Surface Reflectance
Automation System (BAS) and other available technology to comply with the
energy conservation. Surface % Reflectance
Ceilings 80 – 92
Walls 40 – 60
5.3.14 Visual Impact
Furniture 26 – 44
The location and selection of the electrical system shall have visual impact on the
Floors dimming 21 – 39
interior and exterior of the building or facility that shall be closely coordinated
with the architectural design. This includes colors and finishes of lights, outlets Source: Guidelines on Energy Conserving Design of Buildings (2007 Ed.)
and switches.
5.3.16 Lighting Calculations
5.3.15 General Requirements for Lighting Design The designer has the option to use sample calculations as indicated in DoE Manual
The minimum requirements in achieving energy efficient lighting design and of Practice on Efficient Lighting or from lighting software.
installations is one purpose of this guidelines. The provisions are expressed in
terms of lighting power density, luminous efficacy and illumination level. In 5.3.17 Lighting Controls
choosing suitable indoor illuminance level for an area, energy efficient shall be Manual (tumbler and dimmer switches), automatic, or programmable
considered plus other lighting requirements. microprocessor lighting controls shall be provided for all lighting, except those
required for emergency or exit lighting for security purposes. The application of
5-9 5-10
these controls and the controlled zones shall depend on a number of space factors: location should not be considered as increasing the number of controls to
frequency of use, available daylighting, normal and extended work hours and the meet the requirements of Table 5-8.
use of open or closed office plans. The factors to be considered when establishing
 Exceptions:
zones, zone controls, alternate control and appropriate lighting control are:
- Lighting control requirements for areas, which shall be used as a whole
 At least one lighting control device shall be provided for each space enclosed
shall be controlled in accordance with the work activities. Its controls
by ceiling-height partitions. The device shall have the ability to switch on and
shall be centralized in remote places. These areas include public lobbies
off all the lights within the area.
of hospitals, office buildings, warehouses, store rooms and service
 Every task lighting shall be provided with lighting control device. corridors under central control and monitoring system.
 The general lighting of any enclosed area equal to or greater than 10 m² - Automatic and non-automatic control devices may decrease the quantity
wherein the connected loads is greater than 10 W/m² for the entire area shall of controls required by using equivalent number of controls from Table
be controlled so that the lights load may be reduced by at least one-half while 5-8.
retaining a uniform level of illuminance all over the area. This process shall be
- Automatic Control System, Programmable Controllers
made by the use of dimmers, dual switching of alternate lighting fixture, or
switching each lighting fixture. - Lighting Controls requiring expert operators and lighting controls for
security and safety hazards.
 The quantity of control devices needed shall be at least one for every 1.5 kW of
connected lighting load. It shall also comply with the preceding item. The total
5.3.18 Power Layout
number of control points to be used is shown in Table 5-8.
Receptacle/Convenience Outlet Load Analysis

Table 5-8 Control Types and Equivalent Number of Control Points
In establishing electrical loads for buildings or facility it is important to look its
Type of Control Equivalent Number of
Control Points actual requirements. Future changes have the effect of redistributing electrical
Manually operated On-Off Switch 1 loads. The minimum connected receptacle loads indicated in Table 5-9 combined
Occupancy Sensor 2 with other building or facility loads multiplied by appropriate demand factors, and
Timer – Programmable from the space being controlled 2 with spare capacity added, shall be used for obtaining the overall electrical load of
3 Level step-control (including off) or preset dimming 2 the building.
4 Level step-control (including off) or preset dimming 3 Building standard receptacle shall be duplex. Single receptacle shall be used on
Continuous (Automatic) dimming 3 certain equipment to be used such as for Emergency Light, Exit Light, etc. Special
Source: Guidelines on Energy Conserving Design of Buildings (2007 Ed.) purpose receptacles shall be provided for window type Air-conditioning unit,
Electric Ranges, Heating and Refrigeration and other similar equipment. Device
 Exterior lighting not intended for 24 hours continuous use or both all-night plates shall be plastic, colored to match the receptacles.
and part-night lighting circuits shall be automatically switched on by a timer,
photocell or combination of both timer-photocell. This process shall be
provided with manual bypass switch.
 Use manual or automatic controls where adequate day lighting is available.
Examples of automatic controls are photoelectric switches or automatic
dimmers. These controls shall not only be provided for day lighted spaces but
also to operate rows of lights parallel to front/exterior wall.
 Continuous lighting shall be applied for security purposes,
Control Location
 Lighting controls shall be readily accessible to area tenants.
 Controls for task lighting areas shall be installed as part of the task lighting
system. Control switches controlling the same load from more than one
5-11 5-12
Table 5-9 Minimum Connected Receptacle Load Table 5-10 Receptacle Rating for Various Size Circuits
Type of occupied area Load per square meter (VA) Circuit Rating (Amperes) Receptacle Rating (Amperes)
Normal systems 15 Not over 15
Office/Workstation 14 20 15 or 20
Non-workstation areas such as public and storage 10 30 30
Public areas 5 40 40 or 50
Electronic systems 50 50
Office/Workstation 13 Source: PEC Part 1, Table 2.10.2.3(b)(3)
Computer rooms 700
U.S. General Services Administration  Branch Circuit Requirement: The type of circuit is a general purpose branch
circuit, a circuit that serves two or more receptacles or outlets for lighting and
Design the receptacle system per the following minimum requirements. The appliances. Each receptacle shall be valued at 180VA. In general every ten
designer shall create a design that provides for the average load requirement and 220V receptacles requires one branch circuit at 80 percent of rated capacity.
allows for flexibility for future additions and expansion. In this case the design
generally adheres to PEC requirement for general purpose receptacles in 5.3.19 Motors
residential buildings to provide a sufficient quantity of receptacles and meet any Provision of necessary power supplies for the intended operation and application
future needs: as indicated on the respective equipment schedule that requires motor loads.
 Location of receptacle outlets shall be readily accessible and the number of Sizing of required starting equipment shall be of direct-on-line or full voltage, star-
outlets depends on the area requirement of the structure. delta, auto-transformer and soft starters.
 For offices, minimum of 3.7 m spacing between receptacles is required. The motor nameplate horsepower shall be multiplied by the motor nameplate
However, for modular or workstation offices that requires computer, a service factor shall be at least 15% greater than the driven equipment operating
dedicated receptacle shall be provided. range maximum brake horsepower. For motors with 1.15 service factor, the
maximum load horsepower shall not exceed the motor nameplate.
 For hallway and corridors (to accommodate cleaning equipment), minimum of
6 m spacing between receptacles is required. Motors shall be designed in accordance with the latest applicable standards and
codes.
 For any heating, air-conditioning, or refrigeration equipment, a dedicated
receptacle is required. Special purpose receptacle shall be used for the
5.3.20 Branch Circuits, Feeders and Conduit/Raceways
applicable equipment.
 Ground-fault circuit interrupter (GFCI) or Earth leakage circuit breaker Branch Circuits
(ELCB) protection shall be provided on all receptacles located within 1.8 The design for the minimum branch circuit conductor size, before the application
meter of sinks, water fountains, vending machines, and any equipment holding of any adjustment or correction factors, shall have an allowable ampacity not less
a pool of water and connected to building plumbing. than the noncontinuous load plus 125% of the continuous load. Likewise, the
 Weatherproof receptacle shall be used for exterior installation exposed to feeders shall be protected against overcurrent in accordance with the provisions
weather condition. PEC. The branch circuits shall be installed on the conduit/raceways that originate
from Panelboard and supply power to one or more loads as indicated in Table 5-1,
 Receptacle Ratings: Where connected to a branch circuit supplying two or
5-2 and 5-3 with its respective Load Densities or with specific load as indicated in
more receptacles or outlets, receptacle ratings shall conform to the values
PEC Article 2.20.
listed in Table 5-10, or where larger than 50 amperes, the receptacle rating
shall not be less than the branch-circuit rating. For specific appliance and load shall be calculated based on the ampere rating of
the appliance or load served.
Feeders
The design for the minimum feeder conductor size, before the application of any
adjustment or correction factors, shall have an allowable ampacity not less than
the noncontinuous load plus 125% of the continuous load. Likewise, the feeders
5-13 5-14
shall be protected against overcurrent in accordance with the provisions PEC. The
feeders shall be installed on the conduit/raceways that originate at a primary
distribution center and supply power to one or more secondary
distribution centers, branch-circuit distribution centers, or a combination of these.
Conduit/Raceways for Wires

The design for the conduit/raceway systems used in supporting and protecting
electrical cable shall be in accordance with the provisions of the PEC.
 Raceway system consists of manholes, ductbanks, entrance rooms and vaults,
equipment room(s), closets, and the sleeves, ducts, conduits, raceways and
outlets that comprise the horizontal pathways, backbone pathways and
workstation outlets of the technology infrastructure.
 All cable trays except electronic trays shall be of trough or ladder type
construction with a maximum rung spacing of 150 mm, nominal depths of 100
mm to 150 mm, and various widths as required. There shall be a maximum
spacing of 2.4 m between cable tray supports, except fittings (elbows, tees,
etc.) which shall be supported in accordance with standards.
 Raceways or cable trays or wire ways containing electric conductors shall not
contain any pipe, tube, or equal for steam, water, air, gas, drainage, or any
service other than electrical.
 Metal raceways, cable armor, and other metal enclosures for conductors shall
be metallically joined together into a continuous electric conductor and shall
be connected to all boxes, fittings, and cabinets so as to provide effective
electrical continuity. Raceways and cable assemblies shall be mechanically
secured to boxes, fittings, cabinets, and other enclosures.
 Electrical conduits shall be installed in concrete slab or wall or double walls
and floors.
 PVC conduits shall be used for embedded and concealed installation, EMT for
concealed installation spaces up to 32 mm maximum size and RSC or IMC
conduit for exposed to weather, and in areas susceptible to damage and for
high and low-voltage feeders inside the building. PVC or RSC/IMC conduit
shall be used on underground installation with concrete encasement or duct
banks.
 Flexible Steel Conduit (Aluminum Flex Not Allowed) shall be used for short
runs from ceiling Junction-Boxes to light fixtures, final connection to motors or
other appliances and equipment or where special permission is granted for
use.
 Liquid tight flexible metallic conduit shall be used for damp location and for
connections to accessory devices such as: solenoid valves, limit switches,
pressure switches, etc.; for connections to motors or other vibrating
equipment; and across areas where expansion or movement of the conduit is
required.
5-15
color coded insulation shall be applied for all the low voltage system for easy Insulated case and power air circuit breakers shall be electrically operated.
identifying the phases, neutral and earth conductors. Wires/cables shall be of The enclosure shall be of free standing and shall be located in the Electrical
the approved type meeting all the requirement of the PEC. Room.
 Bus Duct: Where plug-in bus duct is used, it should have an integral ground  Required interrupting current capacity shall be provided to all the overcurrent
bus, sized at 50% of the phase bus to serve as the equipment grounding devices based on the short circuit calculations conducted. If applicable, the
conductor. designer shall conduct relay coordination study.
 Overcurrent Protection. Feeders shall be protected against overcurrent by  Switchboards shall be front and rear accessible. In smaller switchboards, front
providing overcurrent device such as the circuit breaker. Where a feeder access only is acceptable if space is limited.
supplies continuous loads or any combination of continuous and
 The meter section shall contain a voltmeter, ammeter and watt-hour meter
noncontinuous loads, the rating of the overcurrent device shall not be less
with demand register. Meters maybe of pulse type or IED for connection to the
than the noncontinuous load plus 125% of the continuous load.
BAS. Providing a power monitoring and management system is an acceptable
 Power Distribution Panels: Circuit breaker type panels shall be the standard option.
protection with respective interrupting capacity.
 Lighting and receptacle panelboards shall be circuit breaker type. Shall have 5.3.23 Unit Substation
minimum of 30 poles for 100 amps panelboards and minimum 42 poles for The unit substation shall be installed on secured and protected conspicuous area
225 amp panelboards. located indoor with necessary ventilation or cooling systems to maintain indoor
temperature as required for proper operation of the equipment.
 Panelboard shall be located in wall at accessible area or in the Electrical Room.
A unit substation consists of one or more transformers mechanically and
5.3.22 Panelboard, Switchboard/Switchgear
electrically connected to and coordinated in design with one or more switchgear
or switchboard assemblies with the outgoing section shall be rated below 1000
All panelboards, switchboard/switchgear shall have a rating not less than the
volts.
minimum feeder capacity required for the load calculated.
A typical unit substation consists of three sections:
Panelboard  An incoming section that accepts incoming medium voltage (2400 to 34,500
Shall be classified for the purposes as either lighting and appliance branch circuit volts) line. Air Interrupter Switch (fused or unfused) or Metal Clad Switchgear
panelboards or power panelboards, based on their content. A power panelboard is (SF6 or Vacuum type circuit breaker) shall be used.
one having 10 percent or fewer of its overcurrent devices protecting lighting and
 A transformer section that transforms incoming voltage down to utilization
appliance branch circuits. Overcurrent device to be installed shall be of miniature
voltage (480, 400 or 230 volts). Liquid filled or Dry Type Transformer shall be
circuit breaker (MCB) or molded case circuit breaker (MCCB). The enclosure shall
used.
be either flush or surface mounted in wall and shall be located on designated area
or in the Electrical Room.  An outgoing section (power load center) that distributes power to outgoing
feeders and provides protection for these feeders for the utilization voltage.
To ensure maximum flexibility for future systems changes, the following be sized
as follows: The unit substation shall bring power as close as possible to the load center
and shall provide the following features:
 Panelboard for branch circuits must be sized with at least 25% spare capacity
- Reduced power losses
 Panelboard and main switchgear for feeder shall provide at least 25% spare
ampacity - Better voltage regulation
 Spare overcurrent devices shall be provided as well as bus extension for - Improved service continuity
installation of future protective devices - Increased functional flexibility
- Lower installation cost
Switchboards/Switchgear
 Switchboards/Switchgear shall be provided with a single main service - Efficient space utilization
disconnect device. The devices shall be molded case, insulated case, power air Every component and assembly of the unit substations shall be designed as an
circuit breaker (ACB) or individually mounted, draw-out type (as applicable). integral part of a complete system
5-17 5-18
5.3.24 Emergency/Standby Power Systems A UPS system shall be sized with 25% spare capacity.
 Critical Technical Loads
Generator
Emergency power requirements for the building or facility shall be provided by a The UPS system shall serve critical loads only. Non-critical loads shall be
dedicated diesel generator set to supply the essential and critical loads during the served by separate distribution systems supplied from either the normal or
failure of the normal supply. Manual or Automatic transfer switches (MTS/ATS) emergency power system.
shall be provided to transfer the power supply from emergency to normal or vice  Emergency Electrical Power Source Requirements
versa. Refer Figure 5-1.
When the UPS is running on emergency power, the current to recharge the
Electric generating system shall meet the design requirements of NFPA 110. UPS batteries shall be limited. This limited battery charging load shall be
added when sizing the emergency generator.
Capacity. If the UPS system is backed up by a generator to provide for continuous
The engine generator shall be sized to approximately 110% of design load. Ideally operation, then the generator shall also provide power to all necessary
it shall run at 50% to 80% of its rated capacity after the effect of the inrush auxiliary equipment, i.e., the lighting, ventilation and air conditioning
current declines. When sizing the generator, consider the inrush current of the supplying the UPS and serving the critical technical area.
motors that are automatically started simultaneously. The initial voltage drop on
 System Status and Control Panel
generator output due to starting currents of loads must not exceed 15%.
The UPS shall include all instruments and controls for proper system
Generator Location operation. The system status panel shall have an appropriate audio/visual
alarm to alert operators of potential problems. It shall include the following
The generator shall be installed inside the buildings or facility with the required
monitoring and alarm functions: system on, system bypassed, system fault, out
area for the open type generator. Adequate and permanent ventilation to the
of phase utility fault and closed generator circuit breaker. It shall have an
outside air in the form of louvered vents shall be required to be provided as part
audible alarm and alarm silencer button. Since UPS equipment rooms are
of the generator room design. The required location shall be at the ground floor of
usually unattended, an additional remote system status panel shall be
the building where it can easily be accessed. This is to ensure ease of installation
provided in the space served by the UPS. The alarms should also be
and future replacement/retirement. The emission of exhaust shall be routed
transmitted to the Building Automation System (if available).
outside the atmosphere.
 UPS and Battery Room Requirements
Silent outdoor type generator shall also be used and installed adjacent to the
building or facility. Provide emergency lighting in both spaces. Provide a telephone in or adjacent
to the UPS room. Battery room design shall accommodate proper ventilation,
Auxiliary Equipment hydrogen detection, spill containment and working clearances.
Battery shall be provided in racks within engine-generator set skid base. Voltage
Batteries
regulated battery chargers shall be provided for engine-generator sets. Chargers
shall be furnished with float, taper, and equalize charge settings. Valve Regulated Lead Acid (VRLA) Battery shall be used for the UPS with an
immobilized electrolyte that is sealed in terms of electrolyte maintenance. The
Uninterruptible Power Systems (UPS) battery contains a pressure relief valve that releases excessive internal pressure
to the atmosphere when the cell pressure exceeds a manufacturer's prescribed
In some facilities, critical loads such as the computer system, etc. shall be
level. The immobilizing electrolyte medium accommodates an oxygen
designed with a back-up systems such as the UPS.
recombination cycle thus minimizing gassing and water consumption.
Requirements for UPS systems shall be evaluated on a case by case basis. If UPS is
The battery cabinet shall be sized with adequate space between shelves to allow
required, it may or may not require generator back-up. When generator back-up is
maintenance and test measurement access. Increased clearance shall be required
unnecessary, sufficient battery capacity shall be provided to allow for an orderly
for multiple rows of batteries behind the front row in the cabinet. Batteries on pull
shut-down.
out drawers are shall be provided with safety and maintenance access.
5-19 5-20
full-load primary current of the transformer for about 0.1 s when energized
initially.
Overcurrent protection for a transformer on the primary side is typically a fused
disconnect. In some instances where there is not a high voltage panel, there shall
be circuit breaker instead.
It is important to note that the overcurrent device on the primary side shall be
sized according to the transformer KVA rating and not sized based on the
secondary load to the transformer.
5.4.2 Transformer Vault

The transformer vault that to be installed inside the buildings or facility shall be
complied with the requirement of the PEC. The required location for the
transformer vault shall be at the ground floor of the building where it can easily be
accessed from the outside. This is to ensure ease of installation and future
replacement/retirement of the padmounted transformer.
The walls and roof shall be constructed using reinforced concrete not less than
150 mm thick. The floor shall have adequate strength for the load imposed on it
and shall be not less than 100 mm thick reinforced concrete when in direct
contact with earth or not less than 150 mm thick when located above another
storey. Floor finish shall be smooth and painted with one coat of polyurethane
sealer and two coats of epoxy dustproof coating.
There shall be a maximum of two (2) padmounted transformer units in a vault.
Generally, the minimum required dimension for the vault shall be 5 m (width) X 4
m (depth) for one (1) three-phase padmounted transformer or 8 m (width) X 4 m
(depth) for two (2) three-phase padmounted transformers units. This assumes
that a 3-m clear space in front of the equipment for switching operations can be
attained when the transformer access door is open. For 2nd floor and 1st
basement installations where this is not possible, a 6 m minimum depth for the
vault shall be required. [Exception: For 2nd floor transformer vault where a
hatchway is used, the depth required is 8 m.]
There shall be no openings, such as, doors, vents, etc., from the transformer vault
to any part of the building interior. All openings of the transformer vault shall only
lead to the outside of the building.
The concrete pad for the padmounted transformer shall be 75 mm height.
A 150 mm high door sill shall be provided by the as part of the transformer
vault liquid confinement area.
Adequate and permanent ventilation to the outside air in the form of louvered
vents shall be required to be provided as part of the transformer vault design. The
vents shall have a combined net area of opening (less the area occupied by the
louvers) of not less than 20cm² per kVA of the transformer bank capacity
installed. For adequate natural air circulation, the intake and exhaust vents shall
be located on opposite sides of the padmounted transformer with half of the total
5-22
 Major items of equipment, such as unit substations, transformer vault,

switchgear, motor control centers, relay panels, and control panels, shall have
integral ground buses which shall be connected to the ground grid.
 Electronic panels and equipment, where required, shall be grounded utilizing
an insulated ground wire. Where practical, electronics ground loops shall be
avoided. Where this is not practical, isolation transformers shall be furnished.
 All ground wires installed in conduit shall be insulated.
5.5.1 System Grounding

System grounding shall be extremely important, as it affects the susceptibility of
the system to voltage transients, determines the types of loads the system can
accommodate, and helps to determine the system protection requirements.
The system grounding arrangement shall be determined by the grounding of the
following power sources:
 Utility Service: The system grounding shall be usually determined by the
secondary winding configuration of the upstream utility substation
transformer.
 Generator: The system grounding shall be determined by the stator winding
configuration.
 Transformer: The system grounding on the system fed by the transformer
shall be determined by the transformer secondary winding configuration.
Solidly-grounded Systems
The solidly-grounded system is the most common system arrangement, and one of
the most versatile. The most commonly-used configuration is the solidly-grounded
wye, since it will support single-phase phase-to- neutral loads.
Ungrounded Systems
This system grounding arrangement shall be at the other end of the spectrum
from solidly-grounded systems.
An ungrounded system is a system where there shall be no intentional
connection of the system to ground.
5.5.2 Equipment Grounding

Metal parts of electrical equipment shall be grounded (connected to the earth) to
reduce induced voltage on metal parts from exterior lightning so as to prevent
fires from an arc within the building/structure.
Metal parts of electrical raceways, cables, enclosures, or equipment shall be
bonded together in a manner that creates a low-impedance path for ground-fault
current to facilitate the operation of the circuit overcurrent device.
5-24
A connection that provides a path to ground a conductor within the equipment. A

ground connection to any metal part of a wiring system or equipment that does
not carry current.
5.5.3 Lightning Protection Systems

The lightning protection system shall be designed for Early Streamer Emission
(ESE) air terminal in accordance to the UNE 21186 and similar ESE standards one
which conveys a lightning discharge to ground without electrification of its
supporting mast or pole and nearby structures. A set of protection system shall
consist of electrode, down conductor, ground rod(s), masts, fasteners and other
miscellaneous mounting hardware.
Lightning protection system shall be provided if lightning can easily strike a
building because of:
 Its length
 Its height, or the use to which it is located, or if
 It is expected that a lightning strike would have serious consequences

The lightning protection ground shall be connected to the main building or facility
ground and any nearby buried metallic items and building or facility structures.
Test pit shall be provided and each down conductor requires a test clamp and
dedicated earth system of 10 ohms or less. Should 10 ohms not be achievable,
additional ground rods or conductor shall be provided.
5.5.4 Single Line Diagram

Starting at the top of the drawing with the building transformers, the designer
shall indicated all pertinent electrical equipment down to the panelboard level.
These equipment includes switchboard/switchgear, panelboards, MCCs,
generators, transfer switches, uninterruptible power supplies, and inverter
systems. For transformers, note kVA size, primary and secondary voltages,
phasing (building service entrance only), and impedance. Show the distribution
switchboard and switchgear in "expanded" form. On the drawing detail the main
breaker, tie breaker, feeder breakers, spare breakers, CTs, PTs, and meter. Note
switchboard rated amperage, voltage, and short-circuit capability. Include frame
and trip size of all breakers in the gear. Note service entrance, feeder wire and
conduit sizes.
For larger buildings, additional SLD drawings may be required. If the building uses
MCCs, separate SLDs may be required. When MCCs are necessary, shall provide in
"expanded" form. Drawings shall be called "MCC Single Line Diagram" and be
numbered sequentially with the main SLD. Indicate starter and breaker sizes, bus
tap sizes, wire, and conduit size ending with each motor or other load. If the
building has a large standby power system, shall provide an "expanded" SLD of
this system also.
In general, use the following guidelines:
5-25
 Exterior Distribution System Plan

 Technical Specifications
 Bill of Materials
 Project Estimate
5-27
 Heat generated by equipment and appliances

 Heat gained from outside air (fresh air intake and ventilation)
After consideration of the factors, the amount of heat generated inside the room
will indicate the type of airconditioning system and its capacity requirement for
the room.
The heat loss/load equation is
Q = AU∆T
where:
A = surface area
U = overall heat transfer coefficient depending on the type of
construction materials
∆T = difference in outside and inside temperature
6.3.4 Overall Coefficient of Heat Transfer (U)

Using the principle of heat transfer, the overall coefficient, U, can be calculated
using the resistance method. The total resistance to heat flow through a flat
ceiling, floor or wall (or a curved surface if the curvature is small) is equal to the
sum of the resistances in series.
RT = R1 + R2 + R3….+Rn
Where R1, R2, R3…. Rn are the individual resistances of the surface components and
RT is the total resistance.
The overall heat transfer coefficient is the summation of resistance of the various
components of an assembly. The general formula is:
1 1 1
U= + ......
R1 R2 Rn
1
=∑
R1 ⊳Rn
For a wall of a single homogenous material of conductivity, k, and thickness, L,

with surface coefficient h1 and ho:
1 1 1
RT = + +
h1 k ho
and
1
U= RT
For a wall with air space construction, consisting of two homogenous materials of
conductivities k1 and k2 and thicknesses L1 and L2, respectively, separated by an
air space of conductance c:
1 L 1 L 1
RT = + k1 + + k2 +
h1 1 c 2 ho
6-3
and
1
U= RT
Over-all heat transfer coefficient for usual materials of construction are provided
in Table 6-1.
Table 6-1 Overall Heat Coefficient
Uo-value
Assembly BTU/hr-sqft F
Roof Assemblies (Heat Flow Down)
Galvanized Iron Roof with Medium Density Fiber (MDF) Cement Board 0.55
ceiling, No insulation
Galvanized Iron Roof with cement (MDF) Board, 25 mm thick fiberglass 0.18
insulation
Galvanized Iron Roof with Medium Density Fiber Cement (MDF) Board, 50 0.10
mm thick fiberglass insulation
150 mm Roof Slab without ceiling 0.61
150 mm Roof Slab , 25 mm thick fiberglass insulation no ceiling 0.19
150 mm Roof Slab , no insulation, with 200mm air space and MDF Board 0.36
150 mm Roof Slab , 25 mm thick fiberglass insulation, with 200mm air space 0.15
and MDF Board
Outdoor Wall Assemblies
100 mm Concrete Block w/ 0.5 inch Plaster, both sides 0.72
Floor Assembly (Heat Flow up)
150 mm thick floor slab with no ceiling below 0.58
150 mm thick floor slab with 200 mm airspace and MDF ceiling 0.38
Ceiling Assembly (Heat Flow down)
150 mm thick floor slab with no ceiling below 0.43
150 mm thick floor slab with 200 mm airspace and MDF ceiling 0.64
Wall Partitions
100 mm CHB with 12 mm plaster finish on both sides 0.55
150 mm CHB with 12 mm plaster finish on both sides 0.50
25 mm thick fiberglass insulation sandwiched between Medium Density 0.18

Fiber Cement Board
50 mm thick fiberglass insulation sandwiched between Medium Density 0.11
Fiber Cement Board
Internal Heat Gain Sources: The air conditioned room may be considered to be a
black box where all the heat going into the box has to be removed by the air
conditioning. The internal sources of heat are the people, lights, appliances and
equipment.
6-4
 NFPA 14: Standard for the Installation of Standpipe, Private Hydrant and Hose
Systems
 NFPA 20: Standard for the installation of Stationary Pumps for Fire Protection
6.5.1 General Design Procedure

The project drawings are the take off point for any fire protection system that
would be designed. The use of the building will determine the type of fire
protection system to be provided or should any be installed at all. Republic Act
9514 known as the Fire Code of the Philippines of 2008 and its implementing
rules and regulation shall be consulted as minimum code requirement for the fire
protection system to be provided.
6.5.2 Automatic Fire Sprinkler System

General: One of the most reliable extinguishing system is the automatic sprinkler
system. The design of the automatic sprinkler system shall be based on the
provisions of NFPA 13 – Standard for the Installation Sprinkler Systems. Facilities
requiring sprinkler systems shall be determined from the requirements of the Fire
Code of the Philippines of 2008.
Classification of Occupancies: Occupancy classification is used to determine
sprinkler installation only and does not supersede the requirements of the Fire
Code. Based on the available fuel during a fire, an area may be considered to be
light hazard if the combustibility of the contents is relatively low. Examples are
offices, restaurant sitting rooms, theaters. Ordinary Hazard on the other hand
have moderate to high rates of heat release. Examples of these are garages,
restaurant service areas and factories. Extra hazard occupancies have a very high
level of combustibles present. They include aircraft hangars, painting areas,
plywood manufacturing areas. Sprinkler installation guidelines are provided in
Table 6-3.
Table 6-3 Sprinkler installation guidelines
Occupancy Classification Maximum Sprinkler Sprinkler Spacing From Walls

Protection Area, (max:), m2 (max:), m2
m2
Light Hazard 20.9 4.5 2.25
Ordinary Hazard 12.0 4.5 2.25
Extra Hazard 9.2 3.6 1.8
Hydraulic Calculations
Pipe Friction Losses are determined by the Hazen-Williams formula where
P = 4.52 Q1.85
C1.85 d4.87
Where P is the friction loss in pounds per square inch per foot length of pipe, Q is
in gallons per minute. C is the Hazen-Williams coefficient dependent on the type of
pipe.
6-7
Pm = __4.52 Q1.85__
C1.85 dm4.87
Where Pm is in pounds per square inch per foot length of pipe, Q is flow in gallons
per minute, dm is the actual internal diameter of the pipe in inches and C is the
friction loss coefficient of the pipe
In SI units Pm = 6.05 x _4.52 Q1.85 _ x 105

C1.85 dm4.87
where:
Pm = bars per meter length of pipe
Q = flow in liters per minute
dm = the actual internal diameter of the pipe in mm
C = friction loss coefficient of the pipe
Table 6-4 Hazen Williams C values
Pipe or Tube Material C Value

Unlined Cast or Ductile Iron 100
Black steel (Dry Pipe Systems) 100
Black steel (Dry Pipe Systems) 120
Galvanized (all) 120
Plastics (listed) –all 150
Cement Lined ductile or Cast Iron 140
Table 6-5 Equivalent Pipe Length Chart
Equivalent Pipe lengths in feet

Fittings and Valves
1 in 1.25 in 1.5 in 2 in 2.5 in 3 in 4 in 5in 6in
45˚ Elbow 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 5 7
90˚ Standard Elbow 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 12 14
90˚ Long Radius Elbow 2 2 2 3 4 5 6 8 9
Tee or Cros 5 6 8 10 12 15 20 25 30
Butterfly Valve - - - 6 7 10 12 9 10
Gate Valve - - - 1 1 1 2 2 3
Swing Check Valve 5 7 9 11 14 16 22 27 32
6.5.3 Wet and Dry Standpipe Systems

General: A stand pipe system is an ideal supplement to an automatic
sprinkler system. A hose stream provides a high concentrated volume of
water to a fire. There are two (2) types of systems the first is the wet
standpipe system which has water in the pipes all the time and a dry
standpipe system is filled with water prior to use.
6-8
Table 6-6 Recommended Basic Water Requirements for Human Needs. a The Hazen-Williams formula mentioned in Section 5.5.2 may be utilized to
Purpose Recommended Minimum Range (liters/ person/ day) calculate friction loss. Pump selection shall take into account the available power
(liters/person/day) supply and the technical capability of the user to operate and maintain the system.
Drinking Water 5 2 to 5 The Pump Horsepower assist the designer in determining the horsepower of the
Sanitation Services 20 0 to over 75 pump to guide him in selecting the appropriate unit. Pum motor horse power may
Bathing 15 5 to 70d be determined as follows:
𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔
Cooking and Kitchen 10 10 to 50d 𝐹𝐹𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 ( ) × 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑 ℎ𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 (𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓)
𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚
𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 ℎ𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 =
Total Recommended Basic 50 3960 × 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒
Water Requirement
Source: Gleick, Peter H. “Basic Water Requirements for Human Activities: Meeting Basic Needs” Water Example:
International, Vol. 21, No. 2(1996). Page 88.
Assume a two (2) storey school building with a canteen catering to a total
a. Excluding requirement to grow food.
population of 360 students, teachers and staff. It is required that am overhead
b. This is a true minimum to sustain life in moderate climactic conditions and with average activity levels.
c. An average (not minimum) of 40 l/p/d is considered adequate for direct sanitation hookups in tank, cistern tank connected by a pump and piping will be required. The pipe is 15
industrialized countries. The upper end of the range represent extremely inefficient toilets. In water short m long, with 3 elbows, 3 gate valves, 1 check valve. Based on Table 6-6, each
regions, sanitation systems that use no water are available, but rarely embraced socially.
d. The upper values here represent societal preferences for moderately industrialized countries. Use in person will require 35 liters per day (drinking: 5 l, sanitation 20 l, cooking and
some water-rich regions may exceed these amounts. The lowest values reflect minimum uses in kitchen:10 l)
developing countries.
The overhead tank is calculated:
6.6.2 Sizing Overhead Tanks, Transfer Pumps and Level Control Over head tank capacity = 360 persons x 35 liters/person/day Table 6.6)
Overhead tanks supplied from cisterns shall be sized for a capacity of one day.
= 12,600 liters (or 3,315 gallons)
Float switches may be provided to activate transfer pumps.
The cistern tank is a minimum of 2.5 times the overhead tank. The capacity is:
Transfer pumps shall be provided to move water from the cistern to the overhead
tank. Water shall be transferred from the cistern to the overhead tank for a period Cistern tank capacity = 12, 600 liters x 2.5 = 31,500 liters
not exceeding two hours. Pumps operating in parallel is the preferred To fill the tank in an hour, the pump flow capacity must be:
configuration. Each pump shall be one-half the capacity of the maximum demand.
Pump capacity = 12,600 liters / 60 minutes
A third pump may be provided as a stand-by unit.
= 210 liters/ minute (55.25 gallons/minute)
Pipes shall be sized for a velocity of 1 – 3 m/sec. The flow through black iron pipes
is indicated in Table 6-7. From Table 6-5, a pipe 50 mmØ will be used.
The fittings to be used are:
Table 6-7 Flow through Schedule 40 B.I. Pipes in Liters per Minute
If the floor to floor height is 3.6 m and a sink is 1.0 m above the floor, an overhead
Velocity NominalPipe Size (inches)
tank may be mounted approximately 4.5 m above the point of use. The total height
(mps) Internal diameter (inches)
shall therefore be 9.1 m above the ground or 30 feet.
0.75 1 1.25 1.5 2 2.5 3 4
Pipe length = 15 m = 49 feet
0.824 1.049 1.38 1.61 2.067 2.469 3.068 4.026
Equivalent pipe length of fittings (Table 6.5):
1 21 34 58 79 130 189 287 384
Elbows: 3 x 5 = 15 feet
2 41 67 116 158 261 372 574 768
Gate Valve: 3 x 1 = 3 feet
3 62 101 174 237 391 558 862 1,152 Check valve 1 x 11 = 11 feet
Total = 29 feet
Calculating the total developed head (TDH) of the pump involves the summation Pm = __4.52 Q1.85__ = __4.52 x 55.251.85___ = 0.031 psi
of the friction loss in feet of the pipe from the cistern to the overhead tank plus the C1.85 dm4.87 1201.85 x 2.0674.87
static head in feet between the cistern and tank. Pipe friction loss = (49 feet + 29 feet) x 0.031 psi
= 2.48 psi x 2.31 feet H2O /psi
Pump Total Develop Head = Pipe Friction Loss+ Static Head+Velocity Head. = 5.7 feet
6-10 6-11
Figure 6-1 Sample Work Sheet for Mechanical Engineer
PROJECT
ROOM NO/DES.
DATE
Design Month July
Design Time 4:00 PM
Area or Sun Gain Factor Extension CONDITIONS DB WB %RH DP Gr/Lb
Item Quantity or Tem p Outdoor 95 82 56 78 146
Diff. Room 75 62.5 50 60 78
Solar Gain - Glass Difference 20 XXX XXX XXX
N Glass Sq. Ft. x 33 x 0.94 = BYPASS FACTOR
S Glass Sq. Ft. x 11 x 0.94 = OUTDOOR AIR Extension
E Glass Sq. Ft. x 11 x 0.94 = People x 20 cfm/person =
W Glass Sq. Ft. x 153 x 0.94 = Sq Ft x cfm/sf =
Skylight Sq. Ft. x 112 x 0.94 = CFM Ventilation =
Solar Gain - Walls & Roof APPARATUS DEW POINT
N Wall Sq. Ft. x 13 x 0.49 = Effective
S Wall Sq. Ft. x 31 x 0.49 = Sens. Heat = Eff. Rm Sen. Heat =
E Wall Sq. Ft. x 17 x 0.49 = Factor Eff. Rm. Total Ht.
W Wall Sq. Ft. x 31 x 0.49 =
Roof - Sun Sq. Ft. x 46 x 0.49 = Indicated ADP Selected ADP
Roof - Shaded Sq. Ft. x x = DEHUMIDIFIED AIR QUANTITY
Tansm ission Gain - Except Walls & Roof = ADP Temp = TRM - TADP =
All Glass Sq. Ft. x x = - Difference
Partition Sq. Ft. x x = -
Ceiling Sq. Ft. x x = - DTR =(1- BF) x ADP TD=
Floor Sq. Ft. x x = - ERSH = cfm
Infiltration CFM x x = - Fx 1.08
Internal Heat COIL CONDITIONS
People x 245 = - Coil Entering Tem perature
Pow er hp x 2545 = - Entering Air Flow Temperature SUM
Lights w atts 3.413 x 1.25 = - OA cfm FDB -
Appl., etc. x = - RA cfm FDB -
Additional Heat Gains x = Total cfm -
Sub-Total - Mixed Air cfm FDB
Safety Factor 10 % = - Humidity
Entering Air Flow Temperature SUM
Room Sensible Heat = - OA cfm Gr/lb -
Additional Heat Gain RA cfm Gr/lb -
SA Duct Heat Gain % - Total cfm -
RA Duct Heat Gain % - Mixed Air cfm Gr/lb
Fan HP % - Coil Lvg Conditions
OA cfm x BF x BF x - TADP + ( BF X ( TEDB -
Effective Room Sensible Heat - e
LATENT HEAT TADP) = FDB
Infiltration CFM x x 0.68 =
People x =
Steam lb/hr x 1050 =
Appl., etc. x =
Additional Heat Gains x =
Sub-Total = -
Safety Factor % = -
Room Latent Heat = -
Additional Heat Gain
OA cfm x BF x BF x -
Effective Room Latent Heat -
OUTDOOR AIR HEAT
Sens cfm x (1- BF)x x 1.08 = -
Lat cfm x (1- BF)x x 0.68 = -
GRAND TOTAL HEAT = - BTUH
6-14
Horizontal Sub-system Backbone Cable (Data-Fiber Optic Media)

The horizontal cabling subsystem extends from a Floor Distributor (FD) to the Fiber Optic Cable: Multi-mode and single-mode optical fiber cable shall be of
telecommunications outlet connected to it. The subsystem includes: tight buffered or loose tube construction suitable for indoor or outdoor
applications and PVC or LSOH outer jacket.
 Horizontal cables.
 The fiber optic cables shall meet the specifications and transmission
 Jumpers and patch cords in the floor distributor.
specification defined under TIA and ISO standards.
 Mechanical termination of the horizontal cables at the telecoms outlet.
 Mechanical termination of the horizontal cables at the floor distributor Fiber Connect Panel / Fiber Optic Patch Panel
including the connecting hardware of the inter-connect or cross-connect. The patch panel shall include the following features:
 Telecommunications outlets.  Modular design with snap in SC or LC adaptors
 Consolidation point (optional)  Equipped with fixing mechanism that ensures cable retention and support of
Horizontal Cable: The horizontal cable shall meet the following characteristics: incoming fiber optic cable
 Horizontal cabling shall be Category 6 , 23 AWG, 4-pair UTP cable , with a PVC  Be able to accommodate both direct termination or splicing
jacketing material
Fiber Optic Connector
 Impedance: 100 ohms + 15%, 1 MHz to 250 MHz
The patch cord shall include the following features:
Patch Panel: The patch panel shall include the following features:
 The fiber optic connector shall be field installable using either a two
 Category 6 patch panels shall be 1U high and support 24 modular jack ports or component epoxy glue or direct termination of factory pre-polished
2U high and support 48 modular jack ports, and shall accept RJ-45, 8-Position connectors
modular plugs
 The fiber optic connectors shall be LC or SC type
 Patch panels shall terminate the building cabling on an IDC (Insulation
Displacement Connector) type connector or module
Fiber Optic Patch Cords
 Category 6 UTP modular jack insulation displacement contacts shall be The patch cord shall include the following features:
capable of terminating solid conductors from Ø 0.5 mm to 0.65 mm (24 to 22
AWG)  Consist of one or two single, tight buffered, multimode graded-index fiber with
a 50 micron core with125 micron cladding (multi-mode) and 9 micron core
 The installed system shall comply with the Category 6 performance with 125 micron cladding (single mode) to suit the installed fiber optic cable.
characteristics as required by TIA and ISO standards.
 Factory terminated with LC or SC ceramic connectors at each end.
Patch Cords: Patch cords shall be provided when patching of voice and / or data
circuits is required at the cross-connections. The patch cords supplied shall be
Backbone Cable (Data-Copper Media)
able to support the designed applications.
UTP (4-pair) Category 6 cable: The backbone cable shall be UTP Category 6
The patch cord shall include the following features: compliant and shall meet the following specifications:
 RJ-45 Cat 6 patch cords shall be installed for equipment and patch panel  Backbone cabling shall be 23 AWG, 4-pair UTP, with a PVC jacketing material.
 Patch cords shall be factory terminated with 4-pair UTP Cat6 stranded cable  Impedance: 100 ohms + 15%, 1 MHz to 250 MHz.
Patch Panel: The patch panel shall include the following features:
Backbone Sub-system
The cable route within a building, connecting telecommunications rooms to the  Category 6 patch panels shall be 1 RU (Rack Unit) high and support 24
equipment room is called the backbone cabling. The building backbone cabling modular jack ports or 2U high and support 48 modular jack ports, and shall
subsystem extends from Building Distributor (BD) or Main Distribution Frame accept RJ-45, 8-position modular plugs
(MDF) to the Floor Distributor (FD) or Intermediate Distribution Frame (IDF).  The Cat 6 UTP modular jack insulation displacement contacts shall be capable
of terminating solid conductors from Ø 0.5 mm to 0.65 mm (24 to 22 AWG)
7-4 7-5
 The installed system shall comply with the Category 6 performance  Patch cords shall be factory terminated with 4-pair UTP stranded cable
characteristics as required by TIA and ISO standards
Patch Cords: Patch cords shall be provided when patching data circuits is Faceplate
required at the cross-connections to facilitate moves, adds and changes (MAC’s).  A choice of 1,2,3,4 outlets
The patch cords supplied shall be able to support the designed applications.
 A clear label for application of circuit identification
The patch panel shall include the following features:
 Shutter door for dust and contaminants protection
 RJ-45 Cat 6 patch cords shall be installed for equipment
 Accepts RJ45 jacks
 Patch cords shall be factory terminated with 4-pair UTP Cat6 stranded cable
Telecommunications Outlet
Backbone Cable (Voice-Copper Media)  Modular jacks shall be un-keyed, unshielded, 4-pair, RJ-45, and shall fit in a
UTP (25-pairs) Category 5e cable: The voice backbone cable shall be 100 ohms standard utility box or modular system furniture raceway
balanced UTP multi-pair cable in 25-pair cable configuration. It shall be Category
 The insulation displacement connectors shall be capable of terminating solid
5e compliant and shall meet the following specifications:
cable conductors from Ø 0.5 mm to 0.65 mm (22-24 AWG).
 Be 0.50 mm (24AWG) solid bare copper
 The nominal diameter or maximum jacket diameter shall not exceed 13.0 mm. 7.3.3 Telecommunication Spaces
The design considerations and standards for telecommunications spaces and
 Jacketing material ,non-plenum polyvinyl chloride(PVC)
rooms are described in TIA and ISO standards. The design for the
IDC Wiring Block: IDC Wring Block – All multi-pair voice backbone cable shall be telecommunications spaces must ensure that the operational requirements
terminated on a 10-pair, 25-pair , 50-pair or 100-pair insulation displacement addressed and objectives are met.
connection (IDC) module or wiring block and shall: Equipment Room (ER): An Equipment Room provides a controlled environment
 Be made of flame-retardant thermoplastic, with the base consisting of to house telecommunications equipment, termination hardware, splice closures,
horizontal index strips for terminating UTP cable conductors. grounding and bonding facilities and protection apparatus where applicable
Equipment Room(ER) shall be designed and provisioned according to the
 Have bases available in rack or frame configurations and for rack mounting
requirements of the standards.
with cable management hardware.
Telecommunications Room (TR): A Telecommunications Room is an enclosed
 Shall comply with TIA (Cat 5e) or ISO 11801: (Class D).
space for housing telecommunications equipment, cable terminations,
Jumper Wire: The cross-connect or jumper cable shall be 100 ohms balanced UTP interconnect and cross-connect. Telecommunications Rooms (TRs) differ from
cable in 1-pair or 2-pair configuration. It shall be Category 5e compliant and shall equipment rooms (ERs) and entrance facilities (EFs) in that they are generally
meet the following specifications: considered to be floor serving.
 Be 0.50 mm (24AWG) solid bare copper Entrance Facility (EF): An Entrance Facility is a room or facility that provides all
 Shall comply with TIA (Cat 5e) or ISO 11801: (Class D) necessary mechanical and electrical services that complies with all relevant
regulations, for the entry of telecommunications cables and other utility service
Work-area Sub-system
provider entrance cables into the building.
The work area subsystem includes patch cords, connectors, faceplates, and Building Distributor (BD): Building Distributor is the central point in a building
telecommunications outlet as well as the work area patch cords (equipment cord) from where the building backbone fans out. It can be a single wiring closet,
needed to make connections. A minimum of one work area outlet location multiple closets, a room or it can be combined with a floor distributor.
containing one voice and data shall be installed per work area. Floor Distributor (FD): A Floor Distributor is a floor serving facility that is used
The subsystem includes: to connect the horizontal cable and other cabling sub-systems or equipment.
Patch Cords Design Requirements
 RJ-45 Cat 6 patch cords shall be installed for the user work area During the design phase, there are a number of electronics and communication
infrastructure requirements that must be addressed by the electronics design
7-6 7-7
engineer and shall be coordinated with the A/E (Architectural / Engineering) for Room Size
space planning. The size of the Telecommunications Spaces is dependent upon the size of the area
that the room will serve and the variety of equipment installed within the room.
Room Location
The Telecommunications Spaces shall provide enough space for all planned
There are a number of factors that need to be considered when placing termination and electronic equipment and cables that will be installed to within
Telecommunications Spaces (TS) within a new building or facility. Site selection the telecommunications room; including any environmental control equipment,
factors for the telecommunications rooms or spaces are listed below. power distribution and uninterrupted power supply or UPS system.
Telecommunications Spaces shall be:
Doors
 Dedicated to the buildings telecommunications function and related support
facilities.  The door shall be a minimum of 0.9 m wide and 2.4 m high, without a doorsill.
 Located adjacent to vertical backbone pathway and as close as possible to the  Door shall be fire rated to match the fire rating of the wall in which it is
center of the area served and preferably in the core area so that the average installed, if applicable, or as required by local code requirements.
horizontal cable run is 50 m or less and no individual cable run shall exceed 90  Doors shall not contain a glass viewing window or panel for added security.
m, minimizing the length of the backbone and horizontal distribution cables.
 If it is anticipated that large equipment will be delivered to the
 Located in a clean and dry area that is not subjected to flooding. Telecommunications Spaces, a double door without a doorsill and center post
 Accessible directly from public hallways and not through offices or other utility is recommended.
spaces.  Doors shall open outward (code permitting).
Telecommunications Spaces shall not:
Floors
 Be shared with electrical equipment, building services or other equipment
other than those required in direct support of the telecoms equipment and  Floors shall be sealed concrete or tile to minimize dust and static electricity,
services. removable computer floor or raised flooring shall be of a tile type surface or
compact pressure laminate (CPL) type.
 Contain other building systems, such as fire alarm panels, access control
systems, building management systems, audio-visual (A / V) equipment, etc.  Floor loading capacity in the rooms shall be designed for a minimum
distributed load rating of 100 lbf / ft².
 Be located near electrical power supply transformers, elevator or pump
motors, generators, x-ray equipment, radio transmitters, induction heating  If a raised floor system is used, then it is possible the space will have to comply
devices and other potential sources of electromagnetic interference (EMI) and with the requirements of Article 645 Information Technology Equipment
radio frequency interference (RFI). section of the National Electrical Code.
 Be located near sources of mechanical vibration that could be conveyed to the

Walls
room via the building structure.
 Interior finishes shall be in a light color to enhance room lighting.
 Contain equipment not related to the support of the telecommunications
function (such as sprinkler, chilled water, supply and waste piping, ductwork)  At least one wall shall be lined with plywood backboard and mounted
shall not be installed in, pass through, pass overhead o enter the vertically starting at 6-inches above the finished floor.
telecommunications space.  All plywood shall be painted with two coats of fire retardant paint.
 Be located below water level unless preventive measures against water  The plywood shall be securely fastened to the wall-framing members.
infiltration are employed.
 Be located in any place that may be subject to water or steam infiltration, Ceilings
humidity from nearby water or steam, heat and any other corrosive  For EF and BD, there shall be no suspended ceilings and the walls must be
atmospheric or environmental conditions. continuous from floor to underside of the floor above.
 Share space in electrical closets, washrooms, janitorial closets and storage  Open structure ceilings shall provide the same environmental conditions as a
rooms. closed type of ceiling structure.
7-8 7-9
 Hard ceilings shall have IMC or EMT type conduit or pipe sleeves installed to Building Entrance Facility
facilitate the installation and fire stopping of cables. Building entrance facility is required whenever service provider entrance cables,
 Wall anchors shall be flush to the plywood surface as to not obstruct the public and private network cables, cable television service providers including
mounting of cabling hardware. The walls shall be capable of supporting Direct Antenna System (DAS) used by mobile service providers entering the
attached equipment. building.
 Horizontal pathways shall terminate in the Telecommunications Spaces  The Entrance Facility (EF) room shall be as close as practicable to the
located on the same floor as the area being served. building entrance point and shall be located in a dry area not subjected to
flooding.
 Be accessible directly from public hallways and not through offices or other
utility spaces and accessible for the delivery of large equipment to the room.  The building Entrance Facility (EF) room may be located next to the electrical
service room in order to reduce the length of equipment potential bonding
 Vertically aligned or stacked within a multi-floor building; each FD is placed
conductors to the electrical grounding system.
above each floor and shall have easy access to distribution cable pathways.
 Entrance conduit shall be schedule 40 PVC, corrosion resistant plastic with a
7.3.4 Special Design Considerations
4-inch inside diameter for underground installations.
 Entrance conduit shall be encased in concrete or cement slurry when the
Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) minimum conduit depth cannot be attained and conduits pass under
The Telecommunications Spaces (TS) shall not be located near electrical power roadways, driveways, where bend points are subject to movement.
supply transformers, elevators, pump motors, generators, x-ray equipment, radio  All entrance conduit penetrations or structural changes shall be approved by
transmitters, radar transmitters, induction heating devices or other potential the structural engineer of the building.
sources of electromagnetic interference (EMI).
7.3.5 Pathways (Conduit, Cable tray, Trunking, Wireway, and Raceway)
Emergency Back-up Power The cable must have a defined route that will protect it according to the
Sub-panels shall be connected to an emergency power source whenever such a environment in which it exists. Generally electronics engineers are expected to
source is provided to the building. use common sense to ensure the cable is adequately protected at the same time all
installation shall be in compliance with PEC or NEC and TIA or ISO pathways
Emergency power is especially important in telecommunications spaces and
standards.
rooms with emergency or life safety systems and critical electronics systems for
the building operations that are required to remain operational during power Conduit: Conduit is an enclosed tube made of metal or plastic which provides
outages that may extend past the systems battery backup capability. mechanical protection to the cable.
 The cable should not take up more than 50% of the available cross-sectional
HVAC Requirements area of the conduit.
The special requirement for the TS such as ER and IDF rooms where telecoms
 Maximum pathways capacity shall not exceed a 40% fill.
and network equipment are housed-in, the electronics design consultant must
coordinate with mechanical design consultant for the Heating, Ventilation and Air  Conduit fill capacity shall not exceed a 40% fill, refer to cabling manufacturer
Conditioning (HVAC) requirements. for their cable fill chart for various size and type of conduit with reference to
the nominal diameter of their cable.
 For ER ,the air handling system and environment controls for TS’s shall be
continuous and dedicated and designed to provide positive airflow and  Conduit systems should be available at intervals of no greater than 12 m.
cooling even during times when the main building systems are shut down.  Maximum of 30 m between pull points and not more than two 90° bends.
 The HVAC unit shall not be powered off the same electrical panel as the  The inside bend radius of the conduit must not be less than six times the inside
telecommunications spaces. diameter of the conduit.
 For specialized area such as Data Center where the room house-in sensitive Tray, Trunking, Wireway and Raceway: Tray is a cable containment or pathway
electronic components that will generate heat, it shall be provided with type that can hold cables in place as its use implies. The term cable tray is used as
proper cooling to maintain operating performance. the generic term for enclosed / non-enclosed, rigid, cable support structures.
 The most commonly used form and terminology are:
7-10 7-11
- Ladder ( the construction looks like a ladder) Labeling: Each piece patch panel and outgoing cable from the patch panels shall
be labeled. Corresponding labeling and numbering shall also be provided on the
- Solid-bottom cable tray
telecoms outlets.
- Perforated or through cable tray
 Cables: Horizontal and backbone cables shall be labeled at each end.
- Wire tray (welded wire construction)
 Faceplates: A unique identifier shall be marked on each faceplate.
7.3.6 Installation Requirements  Rack, Panels & Wiring Modules: A unique identifier shall be marked on the
General: All installation of the Structured Cabling System or Information connecting hardware.
Technology-Generic Cabling for Customer Premises shall comply with the Grounding and Bonding: Communications grounding and bonding shall be in
governing laws and applicable codes and standards. accordance with the requirements of NEC and TIA or ISO telecommunications
Personnel Qualification: The installation of SCS, including pathways and bonding and grounding standard and shall be observed throughout the entire
conduit layout, wiring, cable termination and, testing shall be done by a certified cabling system.
installer under the supervision of a duly registered Professional Electronics  Equipment racks or frames and metallic pathways shall be earthed or
Engineer (PECE) and / or certified designer for Structured Cabling System. connected to the Telecommunications Bonding Backbone (TBB) of the
The installer shall be certified and experienced in the proper installation and building
testing of SCS and trained by the cabling system manufacturer.  The TBB backbone shall be used to ground all telecommunications cable
Installation practices: Install all system components and cross-connect shields, equipment, racks, cabinets, raceways, and other associated hardware
hardware according to manufacturer’s specifications and instruction as well as that has the potential for acting as a current carrying conductor.
all applicable local codes and standards. All horizontal and backbone cables shall Firestopping: All firestop systems shall be installed in accordance with the
be installed in the following manner: manufacturer’s recommendations and shall be completely installed and available
 Cables shall be installed in continuous lengths from origin to destination. for inspection by the local inspection authorities prior to cabling system
acceptance.
 All horizontal cables shall not exceed 90 meters from the telecommunications
outlets in the work area to the horizontal cross connect or FD.  Apply fire-rated materials into penetrations in fire rated barriers such as
penetrations to floor slabs in the telecommunication riser / chase to establish
 The cable’s minimum bend radius of 4 times the cable diameter.
the fire-resistance rating and also to avoid fumes or gases from escaping or
 The maximum cable pulling tension of 25 lbs. shall not be exceeded. penetrating thru the barrier.
 Cable shall be installed above fire-sprinkler and systems and shall not be  All penetrations through fire-rated building structures (walls and floors) shall
attached to the system or any ancillary equipment or hardware. be sealed with an appropriate firestop system.
 The cabling system and support hardware shall be installed so that it does not
obscure any valves, fire alarm conduit, boxes, or other control devices. 7.3.7 Testing, Administration and Documentation
Testing: All cables and termination hardware shall be 100% tested for defects in
 Cables shall be dressed and terminated in accordance with the standards,
installation and to verify cable performance under installed conditions. All
manufacturer’s recommendations, and best industry practices.
conductors of each installed cable shall be verified useable by the contractor prior
 Cables shall be neatly bundled and dressed to their respective panels or to system acceptance.
blocks.
 All UTP and fiber optic cable field testing shall be performed with an approved
 Each panel or block shall be fed by an individual bundle separated and dressed test device 100% of cables installed shall be tested and shall all result to PASS
back to the point of cable entrance into the rack or frame. remarks channel or permanent link.
 Each cable shall be clearly labeled on the cable jacket behind the patch panel  All field testers shall be factory calibrated each calendar year by the field test
at a location that can be viewed without removing the bundle support ties. equipment manufacturer.
 The cable jacket shall be maintained as close as possible to the termination Test and Evaluation Reports: Provide test documentation after the completion
point. of the project. Summary test results and individual test results shall be part of the
close-out submittals and as-built plans.
7-12 7-13
 Detectors, initiating devices, manual call points and notification devices shall
be installed throughout the building as required by the relevant authority or
authority having jurisdiction (AHJ) or the local BFP.
 All buildings, facilities, structures, and premises, except those locations where
protection is not required shall have a fire detection and alarm system that
complies with the local fire code (FCP) and applicable codes and standards.
 Each room shall be separately protected.
 When a room is divided into sections by walls or partitions, each section shall
be separately protected.
Areas where Detection is not Required

Detectors are not required in the following locations:
 Toilet or bathroom with a floor area of less than 4 m2.
 Exhaust ducts exhausting from toilets or bathroom.
 Spaces under raised floor with a height of 250 mm or less.
 Spaces above drop ceiling with a height of 1 m or less.
 Concealed spaces under the roof with a height of 1 m or less.
 Covered paths, balconies, open-sided covered walkways & staircases,
overhanging roof areas, verandas, provided they are not used for storage of
goods.
Area Limitation
 A separate zone shall be provided for each 800 m2 of protected floor area.
The number of detectors required for this area shall not exceed what is
specified by the fire alarm system manufacturer.
False Alarm
 The system designer shall take care that in complying with the design
requirements contained herein in this document so that in any given instance
it will not result in a system that is prone to false alarms. Any alarm at the
control panel shall be treated as a fire until it can be proven to be a false
alarm, rather than being treated as a false alarm until proven to be a fire.
7-15
Monitor and Control of Other Equipment / Systems  If telephone jacks are used instead of telephone stations, at least two portable
The requirements for buildings or facilities with sprinkler flow switch, handsets shall be stored at the Fire Command Center or FACP for use by the
supervisory switch, fire pump, jockey pump and gas suppression panel are: responsible authorized personnel or emergency responders
 Each sprinkler flow switch shall be monitored by the Fire Alarm and Control  At least one telephone jack shall be provided at the following locations:
Panel (FACP) as one distinct alarm point or zone. - Each floor level
 Each fire pump shall be monitored by the FACP as one distinct alarm point or - Each alarm zone
zone.
- Each elevator lobby
 Each jockey pump shall be monitored by the FACP as one distinct alarm point
- Each elevator machine room
or zone.
- Generator set room
 Each gas suppression panel or pre-action deluge panel shall be monitored by
the FACP as one distinct alarm point or zone. - Fire pump room
- Inside the enclosed exit stairwell at each floor level

One-Way Emergency Communications System (ECS)
A one-way emergency communications system or emergency voice alarm Pressurization Fan, Exhaust Fan, Smoke Damper, HVAC, Elevator, Security System, Smoke Control
communications (EVAC) shall form part of the fire alarm system: System
 The one-way emergency communications sub-system, when activated by an The requirements for buildings or facilities with pressurization fan, exhaust fan,
initiating device going into alarm, shall automatically send out an alarm tone smoke damper, HVAC, elevator, security system, smoke control system are:
and a pre-recorded warning message, alternating with each other, to serve as  Each pressurization fan shall be controlled by the FACP as one distinct output
the programmed zone alarm. point or zone.
 The microphone shall be secured inside the locked FACP cabinet, and shall be  Each exhaust or ventilating fan shall be controlled by the FACP as one distinct
accessible only to responsible personnel authorized to operate it. output point or zone.
 A one-way Emergency Communications System(ECS) or Emergency Voice  Each smoke damper shall be controlled by the FACP as one distinct output
Alarm Communication(EVAC) shall be required for the following facilities: point or zone.
- airports  Each air handling unit (AHU) shall be controlled by the FACP as one distinct
- seaports output point or zone.
- transportation terminals with total floor area, including indoor loading /  Each elevator shall be controlled by the FACP as one distinct output point or
unloading and parking areas, of more than 10,000 m2. zone.
- office buildings with total floor area of more than 20,000 m2  Each elevator shall be controlled by the FACP as one distinct output point or
zone.
- buildings classified as high rise building (75 ft or 23 m. above ground level)
 The electrically-controlled doors of the security access control system shall be
Two-Way Telephone Communications System controlled by the FACP as one output group.
The two-way telephone communications system or fireman’s telephone shall be  Each smoke control door, wall, or partition shall be controlled by the FACP as
part of the fire alarm system and used by the fire responders in the event of fire or one distinct output point or zone.
emergency:
Primary Power Supply
 For addressable systems with more than 200 automatic detectors, a two-way
telephone communications system shall be required The primary power supply to the fire alarm control panel and the entire system
shall be from the electric utility company, normally direct or derived 220 ~ 240
 The FACP shall be capable of individually selecting the phone circuits for
VAC single phase.
communication and each telephone jack shall be labeled as specified
 The two-way telephone communications sub-system shall operate on a
common talk or conference call mode
7-16 7-17
 The primary power supply circuit shall be terminated to the integral power Smoke Detectors
supply inside the FACP cabinet and no external switch shall be installed The installation of smoke detectors shall comply with the listed spacing specified
between the circuit breaker at the electrical distribution panel and the FACP. in the code (NFPA 72) as applicable and appropriate. Smoke detectors shall be
 The primary power supply shall come from a dedicated and exclusive branch designed for detection of abnormal smoke densities by the photoelectric or
circuit. ionization principle and shall have a time delay to prevent false alarm. The
placement of smoke detectors is very important. Sleeping areas need the most
Secondary Power Supply / Battery Capacity
protection.
The secondary power supply, normally use a gel cell or nickel cadmium batteries
Location and Spacing of Smoke Detectors
with an automatic charger.
 Smoke detector shall be located on the ceiling. If installed on a sidewall, it shall
 The secondary power supply shall have sufficient capacity to operate the be located at a point not more than 300 mm from the ceiling to the top of the
system under normal non-alarm condition for a minimum of 24 hours, and at
detector.
the end of that period, capable of operating all alarm notification appliances
and emergency communications systems for a period of 5 minutes.  The quantity of smoke detectors connected on a single zone of a conventional
system, or to a zone monitor module in a semi-addressable system shall not be
 The changeover from primary to secondary power supply on primary power
more than 20.
failure, and from secondary to primary power supply on primary power
restoration, shall be automatic.  For flat ceilings with a height of not more than 4 m, the following shall be
complied with:
 The system operating on secondary power supply is considered a trouble
condition. - Smoke detector spacing shall not be more than 9 m and all points on the
ceiling shall have a detector within a distance of 6.4 m.
Building Management System - Spacing of detectors from walls or partitions shall not be less than 300 mm
A building management system (BMS) shall not control the functions of the FDAS and not more than 4.5 m.
but can only monitor it. It shall not be used to replace in whole or in part the FDAS.  Smoke detectors shall not be installed less than 500 mm from any air supply
The FDAS shall be capable of operating independently at all times. diffuser or outlet, or any other ceiling devices or fixtures that may cause
electromagnetic induction.
7.4.3 System Components, Device and Equipment
 For ceilings with a height of more than 6 m, spot-type smoke detectors shall
All components shall be listed (UL) by institutions recognized by relevant
not be used, instead, beam-type smoke detectors shall be used.
authorities and suitable to use in the locality or region.
Heat Detectors
Fire Alarm Control Panel
Heat detectors are normally used where the speed of operation of smoke
The FACP shall be programmable equipped with panel mounted LCD text display
detectors is not required or where, for environmental or other such reasons,
which will indicate the location of the alarm and fault and resets events showing
smoke detectors cannot be used in the system. In such circumstances, heat
the date and time with the zone and loop number.
detectors can provide an acceptable, though less sensitive alternative. Heat
detectors are designed to operate when the temperature rises abnormally quickly
Location and Environment or when a pre-selected temperature is reached.
 The FACP or network display shall be located in the fire command center of
the building or complex. Location and Spacing of Heat Detectors
 In the absence of a fire command center, it should be located ideally in a  Heat detector shall be located on the ceiling. If installed on a sidewall, it shall
position clearly visible from the main entrance or lobby of the building. be located at a point not less than 150 mm and not more than 300 mm from
the ceiling to the top of the detector.
 If the fire alarm panel is located in another location acceptable to the AHJ, an
annunciator or repeater panel that fully mimics it shall be installed in a  For flat ceilings of not more than 4m, heat detector spacing shall not be more
position clearly visible from the main entrance of the building. than 7.5 m. Therefore, all points on the ceiling shall have a detector within a
distance of 5.3 m.
7-18 7-19
 Spacing of detectors from walls or partitions shall not be less than 150 mm  Manual fire alarm stations shall be installed at a height of 1.4 m above the
and not more than 3.75 m. finished floor level and shall be located at easily accessible points, free from
obstructions.
 A heat detector shall not be installed in a location wherein the ambient
condition is such that the relative humidity is above 93%.  Manual fire alarm stations shall be mounted on a background of contrasting
color, and in a well-lighted location, so that they can be easily seen.
Beam Type Smoke Detector  Additional manual fire alarm stations shall be so located that from any point
This type of detector is specifically designed for interior use in large open–type within the building, the travel distance to activate the alarm shall not be more
areas, such as warehouses, workshops, etc. where the installation of point–type than 30 m, measured horizontally on the same floor.
detectors would be difficult.For ceilings with a height of more than 6 meters,
 Manual fire alarm boxes or pull stations shall be constructed with clearly
beam-type smoke detectors shall be used in place of spot type smoke detectors:
visible operating instructions provided on the cover and the word ‘FIRE’ shall
appear on the front of the stations.
Location of Beam Type Detectors
 The beam length and width coverage shall not exceed the maximum permitted Notification Appliances
by the manufacturer’s published specifications and instructions.
The alarm sound from audible notification appliances shall be clearly audible
 Beam-type detectors and mirrors or reflectors shall be mounted on stable throughout the floor and / or building in which they are installed. It should be
surfaces to prevent false operation or trouble occurrences due to movement. sufficient to warn and initiate evacuation of all occupants for whom the alarm
sound is intended.
 Beam-type detectors and mirrors or reflectors shall be mounted on stable
surfaces to prevent false operation or trouble occurrences due to movement.  Audible and visible notification appliances that produce audible and visible
alarm signals, such as horn strobes or speaker strobes, shall be used in all
Duct Type Smoke Detector public building. Any other facility that does not use audible or visible
notification appliances shall be subject to the approval of the AHJ.
For centralized air-conditioning systems, the return air duct of all air handling
units (AHU) shall be equipped with a duct-mounted smoke detector.  A sufficient number of audible notification appliances shall be used to produce
a minimum sound level of 65 dBA, or 10 dB above the ambient noise level and
Location of Duct Type Detectors having a duration of at least 30 seconds.
 The duct smoke detector shall be listed for use with the air velocity present in  The sound level produced by audible notification appliances and the ambient
the duct. Further, it shall be listed for use over the complete range of noise combined shall not exceed 115 dBA.
temperature and humidity expected at the detector when the AHU is
 The horizontal spacing between notification appliances shall not be more than
operating.
30 m.
 The duct smoke detector shall be installed in such a way as to obtain a
 Trouble conditions in the system shall not cause the automatic activation of
representative sample of the airstream. To achieve this, the detector shall be
any notification appliance.
installed outside the duct with rigidly mounted sampling tubes protruding
into the duct.  For facilities that use the bell sound as part of regular operations, such as
schools, horns or sounders shall be used instead.
Manual Pull Station
Annunciator Panel
Manual fire detection is achieved through the activation of fire alarm manual pull
station or call point. The basic principle of manual pull station is that no one For all buildings or facilities, at least one secondary display, such as a LCD display
should be able to leave a building or a storey of a building, without passing a that annunciates the exact information shown at the FACP primary display, shall
manual pull station or call point. The fire code recommends that manual pull be installed in another appropriate location within the protected premises.
stations should be located on escape routes or fire exits.  The zone annunciator shall be directory type or graphical type, wherein the
display or indicator lamp would represent one alarm zone.
Location and Mounting of Manual Pull Station
 In buildings or facilities where people sleep, such as hospitals, or the like, at
 Manual fire alarm stations shall be located within 1.5 m of each exit door on least one zone annunciator per floor level shall be installed so that occupants
each floor. get immediate information on the location of the fire detection.
7-20 7-21
 In office buildings, hospitals, or the like, wherein the automatic detectors shall be subject for final inspection to be conducted by in the presence of the
inside the rooms or units on the same floor are connected as a zone, an authorized representative and electronics engineer.
indicator light or annunciator shall be installed outside the room and clearly
As-built Plans and Drawings: As-built plans and drawings of the complete
visible from the corridor to indicate the actuation of the detectors.
installation including all floor plans and a single line diagram of the system shall
be provided to the user before final inspection by the AHJ. A copy of the as-built
7.4.4 Installation Requirements drawings shall be on hand at the Fire Command Centre or near the FACP at all
All installation of the fire alarm system shall comply with the applicable codes and times.
requirements referred herein and approved by the authority having jurisdiction
Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Operation and maintenance manuals of
(AHJ). The installation of FDAS, including conduit layout works, wiring, equipment
the installed equipment shall be provided to the user and shall include complete
mounting and installation, equipment connection and termination, programming,
trouble-shooting instructions and guidelines. A complete copy shall be on hand at
testing and commissioning, shall be done by qualified personnel or by installers
the Fire Command Centre or near the fire alarm control panel.
under the supervision of qualified personnel.
Fire Alarm Cable: NEC Article 760 covers the installation of wiring of fire alarm
systems, including all circuits controlled and powered by the fire alarm system.
Wiring shall be in accordance with local and national codes and as recommended
by the manufacturer of the fire alarm system.
 All wire and cable shall be UL listed and approved by a recognized testing
agency for use for fire alarm and protective signaling system.
 Number and size of conductors shall be as recommended by the fire alarm
system manufacturer, but not less than 18 AWG (1.02 mm) for Initiating
Device Circuits, Signaling Line Circuits and Notification Appliance Circuits.
Conduits and boxes: All conduits and boxes shall be in accordance with the
Philippine Electrical Code (PEC), NEC and local code requirements. All boxes and
cabinets shall be approved particular use and purpose.
 Where required, all wiring shall be installed in conduit or raceway.
 Conduit fill shall not exceed 40% of interior cross sectional area where
three or more cables are contained within a single conduit.
 Cable must be separated from any open conductors of power, or Class 1
circuits, and shall not be placed in any conduit, junction box or raceway
containing these conductors.
Testing Documentation and Administration

Testing: The service of a competent, factory-trained engineer or technician
authorized by the manufacturer of the fire alarm equipment shall be provided to
technically supervise and participate during all of the adjustments and tests for
the system. All installation shall tested in accordance with the requirements of
the code the tests should be conducted by in the presence of the authorized
building representative and Engineer On Record (EOR) .The test results should
be entered in the log or record.
Final Inspection: At the final inspection, a factory-trained representative of the
manufacturer of the major equipment shall certify and demonstrate that the
system functions properly in every respect. All devices and equipment tested
7-22 7-23
8-5
Table 8-1
Luxury camps
Boarding houses
Rooming houses
Boarding schools
Hotels and motels
Multiple Family use
Laundry residences
Hospitals* (Liters per bed)
Small dwellings and cottages
Tourist camps or trailer parks
Day workers at schools and offices
Country clubs per member present*

Public picnic parks (toilet waste only)
Swimming pools and bathing places*
Country Clubs per resident members*

Public Institutions other than hospitals
Large dwellings with numerous fixtures
Restaurants (kitchen waste per meal serve)
Work and construction camps (semi-permanent)

Type of Establishment
Resort camps (night and day) with limited plumbing
Public parks with bathhouse, showers and flush toilets

Day school without cafeterias, gymnasium or showers*
estimated from no. of meals served or 80% of enrollment)
Factories (Liters /person/shift. exclusive of industrial waste)

maximum no. expected to use gyms and showers in one day)
Waste water contribution per capita / day
Kitchen wastes at hotels, camps, boarding houses, etc. serving 3 meals/day
Day school with cafeterias but not gymnasiums or showers (Quantity
Day school with cafeteria but no gym or showers (Quantity estimated from
Source: Excerpts from Table1ofChapterXVII–IRRCodeonSanitationofthePhilippinesPD856

37.8
37.8
28.4
56.8
75.7
45.4
30.3
189.3
189.3
189.3
189.3
151.4
189.3
189.3
3.8 - 11.4
26.5 – 37.8
94.6- 189.3
56.8 -132.5
378.5-567.8
94.6 – 189.3
283.9 - 378.5
283.9 - 378.5
132.5 - 189.3
283.9 – 473.1
567.8 – 946.3
283.9 – 378.5
Liters/Person
Table 8-2 Minimum Requirements for Various Occupancies
Type of Building or Occupancy Water Urinals Lavatories Bathtubs or Showers Drinking Fountains
Closet(Fixtures/Person) (Fixtures/Person) (Fixtures/Person) (Fixtures/Person) (Fixtures/Person)
Male Female Male Only Male Female
Assembly places, theaters, Auditoriums, 1: 1-15 1: 1-15 0:1-9 1 per 40 1 per 40
convention halls, etc. for permanent 2: 16-35 3:16-35 1:10-50
employee use 3: 36-55 4: 36-55 Add one fixture for each
additional 50 males
Over 55, add 1 fixture for
each additional 40 persons
Assembly places, theaters, Auditoriums, 1: 1-100 3: 1-50 1:1-100 1: 1-200 1: 1-200 1:1-150
convention halls, etc. for public use 2: 101-200 4:51-100 2:101-200 2: 201-400 2:201-400 2:151-400
3: 201-400 8:101-200 3:201-400 3: 401-750 3:401-750 3:401-750
11:201-400 4:401-600 Over 750, add one
Over 600, add one fixture for fixture for each
Over 400, add one fixture each additional 300 males Over 750, add one fixture for additional 500 persons
for each additional 500 each additional 500 persons
males and 1 for each
additional 125 females
Dormitories 1 per 10 1 per 8 1 per 25 1 per 12 1 per 12 1 per 8 1 per 150
School Over 150, add one fixture for For females , add 1
Add 1 fixture for each each additional 50 males Over 12, add 1 fixture for bathtub per 30,
additional 25 males (over each additional 20 males and Over 150, add 1
10) and 1 for each additional 1 for each additional 15 bathtub per 20
20 females (over 8) females
Dormitories for Staff use 1: 1-15 1: 1-15 1 per 50 1 per 40 1 per 40 1 per 8
2: 16-35 3:16-35
3: 36-55 4: 36-55
Dwellings 1 per dwelling or apartment 1 per dwelling or apartment 1 per dwelling or
Single dwelling unit unit apartment unit
Multiple dwelling or apartment houses
Hospital waiting rooms 1 per room 1 per room 1 per 150
Hospitals –for employee use 1: 1-15 1: 1-15 0:1-9 1 per 40 1 per 40
2: 16-35 3:16-35 1:10-50
3: 36-55 4: 36-55 Add one fixture for each
additional 50 males
Hospitals 1 per room 1 per room 1 per room 1 per 150
8-6
Individual room 1 per 8 patients 1 per 10 patients 1 per 20 patients
Ward Room
Industrial 1: 1-10 1: 1-10 Up to 100, 1 per 10 persons 1 shower for each 15 1 per 150
Warehouses, workshops, foundries and 2: 11-25 2:11-25 Over 100, 1 per 15 persons persons exposed to
similar establishments- for employees use 3: 26-50 3:26-50 excessive heat or to
4: 51-75 4:51-75 skin contamination with
poisonous, infectious
Over 100, add 1 fixture for or irritating material
Institutional other than hospitals or penal 1 per 25 1 per 20 0:1-9 1 per 10 1 per 8 1 per 150
institutions (on each occupied floor) 1:10-50
Add one fixture for each
additional 50 males
Institutional other than hospitals or penal 1: 1-15 1: 1-15 0:1-9 1 per 10 1 per 8 1 per 150
institutions (on each occupied floor) for 2: 16-35 3:16-35 1:10-50
employees use 3: 36-55 4: 36-55 Add one fixture for each
additional 50 males
Office or public buildings 1: 1-100 3: 1-50 1:1-100 1: 1-200 1: 1-200 1 per 150
2: 101-200 4:51-100 2:101-200 2: 201-400 2:201-400
3: 201-400 8:101-200 3:201-400 3: 401-750 3:401-750
11:201-400 4:401-600
Over 600, add one fixture for
Over 400, add one fixture each additional 300 males Over 750, add one fixture for
for each additional 500 each additional 500 persons
males and 1 for each
additional 150 females
Office or public buildings – for employees 1: 1-15 1: 1-15 0:1-9 1 per 40
use 2: 16-35 3:16-35 1:10-50
additional 50 males
Penal institution – for employees use 1: 1-15 1: 1-15 0:1-9 1 per 40 1 per 40 1 per 150
2: 16-35 3:16-35 1:10-50
additional 50 males
Penal institution – for prison use 1 per cell 1 per exercise room 1 per cell 1 per cell block floor
8-7
Cell 1 per exercise room 1 per exercise room 1 per exercise room
Exercise room
Public or professional offices Same as office or Public Same as office or Public Same as office or Public Same as office or Public
Building employees use Building employees use Building employees use Building employees use
Restaurants, pubs, and lounges 1: 1-50 1: 1-50 0:1-150 1: 1-150 1: 1-150
2: 51-150 2: 51-150 Over 150, add one fixture for 2: 151-200 2: 151-200
3: 151-300 4: 151-300 each additional 150 males 3: 201-400 3: 201-400
Over 300, add 1 fixture for Over 400, add 1 fixture for
each additional 200 persons each additional 400 persons
Retail or Wholesale Stores 1: 1-100 1: 1-25 0:0-25 1 per 2 water closets 0: 1-30
2: 101-200 2: 26-100 1:26-100 1:31-150
3: 201-400 4: 101-200 2:101-200 One additional drinking
6: 201-300 8: 201-400 3:201-400 fountain for each 150
4:401-600 persons thereafter
Over 400, add 1 fixture for Over 600, add one fixture for
each additional 500 males each additional 300 males
and one for each 150
females
Schools – for staff use 1: 1-15 1: 1-15 1 per 50 1 per 40
All schools 2: 16-35 2: 16-35
3: 36-55 3: 36-55
Schools – for student use 1: 1-20 1: 1-20 1: 1-25 1: 1-25 1 per 150
Nursery 2: 21-50 2:21-50 2: 26-50 2:26-50
Over 50, add 1 fixture for Over 50, add 1 fixture for
each additional 50 persons each additional 50 persons
Elementary 1 per 30 1 per 25 1 per 75 1 per 35 1 per 35 1 per 150
Secondary 1 per 40 1 per 30 1 per 35 1 per 40 1 per 40 1 per 150
Others (colleges, universities, Adult 1 per 40 1 per 30 1 per 35 1 per 40 1 per 40 1 per 150
Centers, etc.)
Worship places educational and activities 1 per 150 1 per 75 1 per 150 1 per 2 water closets 1 per 150
Unit
Worship places principal assembly place 1 per 150 1 per 75 1 per 150 1 per 2 water closets 1 per 150
Source: Table 4-1US – Uniform Plumbing Code 2009
8-8
Notes for Table 8-2

1. Building categories not shown on this Table shall be considered separately by the Sanitary Engineer.
2. Drinking Fountains shall not be installed in Toilets rooms.
3. Laundry trays, One (1) laundry tray or one (1) automatic washer standpipe for each dwelling unit or one (1) laundry tray or one (1) automatic washer standpipe or combination thereof, for each
twelve (12) apartments. Kitchen sinks, one (1) for each dwelling or apartment unit.
4. Automatic washer standpipe or combination thereof, for each twelve (12) apartments. Kitchen sinks, one (1) for each dwelling or apartment unit.
5. For each urinal added in excess of the minimum required, one water closet shall be permitted to be deducted. The number of water closets shall not be reduced to less than two-thirds (2 / 3) of
the minimum requirement.
6. As required by Sanitation in Places of Employment.
7. Where there is exposure to skin contamination with poisonous, infectious, or irritating materials, provide one (1) lavatory for each five (5) persons.
8. 600 mm of wash sink, 450 mm of circular basin, when provided with water outlets for such space, shall be considered equivalent to one (1) lavatory.
9. Laundry trays, one (1) for each fifty (50) persons, Service sinks, one (1) for each hundred (100) persons.
10. General. In applying this schedule of facilities, consideration shall be given to the accessibility of the fixtures. Conformity purely on a numerical basis may not result in an installation suited to
the needs of the individual establishment. For example, schools should be provided with toilet facilities on each floor having classrooms.
11. Surrounding materials, wall and floor space to a point 600 mm in front of urinal lip and 1,200 mm above the floor, and not less than 600 mm to each side of the urinal shall be lined with non-
absorbent materials.
12. Through urinals shall be prohibited.
13. A restaurant is defined as a business that sells food to be consumed on the premises.
14. The number of occupants for a drive-in restaurant shall be considered as equal to the number of parking stalls.
15. Hand-washing facilities shall be available in the kitchen for employees
16. Where foods is consumed indoors, water stations shall be permitted to be substituted for drinking fountains. Offices or Public buildings for use by more than six (60 persons shall have one (1)
drinking fountain for the first one-hundred fifty (150) persons and one (1) additional fountain for each three-hundred (300) persons thereafter.
17. There shall be at least one (1) drinking fountain per occupied floor in schools, theaters, auditoriums, dormitories, offices or Public buildings.
18. The total number of water closets for females shall be equal to the total number of water closets and urinals required for males. This requirement shall not apply to Retail or Wholesales Stores.
19. For smaller-type Public and Professional Offices such as banks, dental offices, law offices, real estate offices, architectural offices, engineering offices and similar uses. A Public area in these
offices shall use the requirement for the Retail or Wholesale Stores.
20. Recreation or community room in multiple dwellings of apartment buildings, regardless of their occupant load, shall be permitted to have separate single-accommodation facilities in common-
use areas within tracts or multi-family residential occupants where the use of these areas is limited exclusively to owners, residents and their guests. Examples are community recreation or
multi-purpose areas in apartments, condos, townhouses, or tracts.
21. A drinking fountain shall not be required in occupancies of 30 or less.
8-9
8.3.2


S
n
with Section 8.3.1.

Minimum Velocity
Maximum Velocity
80 mm
50 mm
40 mm
32 mm
Fixture Units Equivalents
𝑉𝑉 =
100 mm
Sanitary Drainage Systems
Manning Equations
𝑛𝑛
=
=
=
=
1 2⁄
Velocity of Sewage Flow

𝑆𝑆 𝑅𝑅 3
1⁄
2
-
-
-
-
-
Exception: On self-service laundries.

Slope
per second in accordance with Table 8-4.

Sizes will be computed using the following:
0.75m/sec
3.05m/sec
and Q = AV
1unit
Wetted perimeter
8units
6units
4units
3units
by pipe manufacturer
Maximum trap loadings for sizes up to 100 mm are as follows:

slope of one percent (1%), or as permitted by this DGCS Volume 6.
Sewage shall be computed using Drainage Fixtures Unit values in accordance

of liquid waste matter or solutions in terms of velocity, roughness coefficient,
not shown in Table 8-3 shall be based on the rated discharge capacity in liters
the size of the trap required, and the unit equivalent of fixtures and devices
slope and pressure. Sanitary and Waste will be designed with a minimum
The unit equivalent of plumbing fixtures shown in Table 8-3 shall be based on
Use of formula and empirical data must be directly applicable to the behavior
8-10
Coefficient of Roughness 0.011 or as specified
Table 8-3 Drainage Fixture Unit Values (DFU) Plumbing Appliance, Appurtenance or Min Trap Non- Co on Assembly8
Fixture Size and public public
Plumbing Appliance, Appurtenance or Min Trap Non- Co on Assembly8 Trap Arm7
Fixture Size and public public
Trap Arm7 Liters/Flush
Bath tub or Combination Bath/Shower 38 2.0 2.0 Urinal, exposed trap 382 2.0 2.0 5.0
Bidet 32 1.0 Water Closet, 6.1 Liters / Flush 75 3.0 4.0 6.0
GravityTank6
Bidet 32 2.0
Water Closet, 6.1 Liters / Flush 75 3.0 4.0 6.0
ClothesWasher,domestic,standpipe 5
50 3.0 3.0 3.0 Flushometer Tank6
Dental Unit, cuspidor 32 1.0 1.0 Water Closet, 6.1 Liters / Flush 75 3.0 4.0 6.0
Dishwasher ,domestic, with independent 382 2.0 2.0 2.0 Flushometer Valve6
drain Water Closet, greater than 6.1 LPF 75 4.0 6.0 8.0
Drinking Fountain or Water cooler (per 32 0.5 0.5 1.0 GravityTank6
head) Water Closet, greater than 6.1 Liters / 75 4.0 6.0 8.0
Food-waste-grinder, commercial 50 3.0 3.0 Flush Flushometer Valve6
Floor Drain, emergency 50 0.0 0.0 Source: Excerpts from Table 8-3 UPC 2000 Edition
Floor Drain(for additional sizes see 50 2.0 2.0 2.0 Footnotes of Table 8-3:
Section7.3.2) 1. Indirect waste receptors shall be sized based on the total drainage capacity of the fixtures that
Shower single head trap 50 2.0 2.0 2.0 drain therein to, in accordance with Table 8-4.
2. Provide a 50 mm minimum drain.
Multi-head, each additional 50 1.0 1.0 1.0 3. For refrigerators, coffee maker, water stations, and similar low demands.
Lavatory, single 32 1.0 1.0 1.0 4. For commercial sinks, dishwashers, and similar moderate or heavy demands.
5. Buildings having a clothes washing area with clothes washers in a battery of three (3) or more
Lavatory in sets of two or three 38 2.0 2.0 2.0 clothes washers shall be rated at six (6) fixture units each for purposes of sizing common
Wash fountain 38 2.0 2.0 horizontal and vertical drainage piping.
6. Water closets shall be computed as six (6) fixture units when determining septic tank sizes
Wash fountain 50 3.0 3.0 based on.
Mobile Home, trap 75 12.0 7. Trap sizes shall not be increased to the point where the fixture discharge may be inadequate to
maintain their self-scouring properties.
Receptor,indirectwaste1,3 38 Seenote1 Seenote1 and
8. Assembly/ Public Use (See Table 8-1)
and 3 3
Receptor,indirectwaste1,4 50 Seenote1 Seenote1 and
and 4 4 Table 8-4 Discharge Capacity in Liters per Second for Intermittent Flow Only
Receptor,indirectwaste 1
75 Seenote1 Seenote1 L/sec
Sinks Up to 0.47 Equals 1 Unit
Bar 38 1.0 0.50 to 0.95 Equals 2 Units
Bar 382 2.0 2.0 1.00 to 1.89 Equals 4 Units
Clinical 75 6.0 6.0 1.95 to 3.15 Equals 6 Units
Commercial with food waste 382 3.0 3.0
Source: Table 8-4 UPC 2000 Edition
Special Purpose 38 2.0 3.0 3.0
Special Purpose 50 3.0 4.0 4.0
Size of Drainage Piping
Special Purpose 75 6.0 6.0
The minimum sizes of vertical and / or horizontal drainage piping shall be
Kitchen, domestic 382 2.0 2.0 2.0
(with or without food-waste-grinder and/or determined from the total of all fixture units connected thereto, and
dishwasher)
additionally, in the case of vertical drainage pipes, in accordance with their
Laundry 38 2.0 length.
(with or without discharge from a clothes
washer)
Table 8-5 shows the maximum number of fixture units allowed on any vertical
Service or Mop Basin 50 3.0 3.0
or horizontal drainage pipe, building drain or building sewer of a given size;
Service or Mop Basin 75 3.0 3.0
the maximum number of fixture units allowed on any branch interval of a
Service, flushing rim 75 6.0 6.0
given size; and the maximum length (in feet and meters) of any vertical
Wash, each set of faucets 2.0 2.0 drainage pipe of a given size.
Urinal, integral trap 3.78 Liters/Flush 3.78 50 2.0 2.0 5.0
Liters/Flush 1.0GPF2
Urinal, integral trap greater than 3.78 50 2.0 2.0 6.0
8-11 8-12
For a continuous flow into a drainage system, such as from a pump, sump
ejector, air conditioning equipment, or similar device, two (2) fixture units
shall be allowed for each 0.06 L/sec. of flow.
Fixture Connections (Drainage)

Drainage piping shall be provided with approved inlet fittings for fixture
connections, correctly located according to the size and type of fixture
proposed to be connected.
Two fixtures set back-to-back, or side-by-side, within the distance allowed
between a trap and its vent, may be served by a single vertical drainage pipe
provided that each fixture wastes separately into an approved double fixture
fitting having inlet openings at the same level.
Pot sinks, scullery sinks, dish washing sinks, silverware sinks, commercial
dishwashing machines, silverware-washing machines, and other similar
fixtures shall be connected directly to the drainage system. A floor drain shall
be provided adjacent to the fixture, and the fixture shall be connected on the
sewer side of the floor drain trap, provided that no other drainage line is
connected between the floor drain waste connection and the fixture drain. The
fixture and floor drain shall be trapped and vented as required by these Design
Guidelines.
Closet Rings (Closet Flanges)

Closet rings (closet flanges) for water closets or similar fixtures shall be of
an approved type and shall be bronze, copper, hard lead, cast iron,
galvanized malleable iron, ABS, PVC, or other approved materials. Each
such closet ring (closet flange) shall be approximately 175 mm in diameter
and, when installed, shall, together with the soil pipe, present a 38 mm
wide flange or face to receive the fixture gasket or closet seal.
Caulked-on closet rings (closet flanges) shall be not less than 6 mm thick and
not less than 50 mm in overall depth.
Closet rings (closet flanges) shall be burned or soldered to lead bends or stubs,
shall be caulked to cast iron soil pipe, shall be solvent cemented to ABS and
PVC and shall be screwed or fastened in an approved manner to other
materials.
All such closet rings (closet flanges) shall be adequately designed and secured
to support fixtures connected thereto.
Closet screws, bolts, washers, and similar fasteners shall be of brass, copper,
or other listed, equally corrosion resistant materials. All such screws and
bolts shall be of adequate size and number to properly support the fixture
installed.
8-13
shall be so constructed as to insure a positive mechanical seal. Such backwater

valves shall remain sufficiently open during periods of low flows to avoid
screening of solids and shall not restrict capacities or cause excessive
turbulence during peak loads. Unless otherwise listed, valve access covers
shall be bolted type with gasket and each valve shall bear the manufacturer’s
name cast into body and cover.
The drainage and venting systems in connection with fixtures, sumps,
receiving tanks, and mechanical waste lifting devices, shall be installed under
the same requirements as provided for in this Guidelines for gravity systems.
Sumps and receiving tanks shall be water tight and shall be constructed of
concrete, metal, or other approved materials. If constructed of poured
concrete, the walls and bottom shall be adequately reinforced and designed to
recognized acceptable standards. Metal sumps or tanks shall be of such
thickness as to serve their intended purpose and shall be treated internally
and externally to resist corrosion.
All such sumps and receiving tanks shall be automatically discharged and,
when in any “Public use” occupancy, shall be provided with dual pumps or
ejectors arranged to function independently in case of overload or mechanical
failure. The lowest inlet shall have a minimum clearance of 50 mm from the
high water or “starting” level of the sump.
Sumps and receiving tanks shall be provided with substantial covers having a
bolt and gasket type manhole or equivalent opening to permit access for
inspection, repairs, and cleaning. The top shall be provided with a vent pipe
which shall extend separately through the roof, or when permitted, may be
combined with other vent pipes. Such vent shall be large enough to maintain
atmospheric pressure within the sump under all normal operating conditions
and, in no case, shall be less in size than that required by Table 7-5 for the
number and type of fixtures discharging into the sump, nor less than 38 mm in
diameter.
When the foregoing requirements are met and the vent, after leaving the
sump, is combined with vents from fixtures discharging into the sump, the size
of the combined vent need not exceed that required for the total number of
fixtures discharging into the sump. No vent from an air-operating sewage
ejector shall combine with other vents.
Air tanks shall be so proportioned as to be of equal cubical capacity to the
ejectors connected therewith in which there shall be maintained an air
pressure of not less than 3 kg for each meter of height the sewage is to be
raised. No water operated ejectors shall be permitted.
When subsoil drainage systems are installed, such systems shall be discharged
into an approved sump or receiving tank and shall be discharged in a manner
satisfactory to the Sanitary Engineer/ Master Plumber.
Grinder Ejector Pump: With the approval of the Sanitary Engineer/ Master
Plumber, a grinder pump may be used. A Grinder Ejector pump is used to
discharge wastewater that cannot be discharged through a gravity system and
8-20
no joint or pipe in the building (except the uppermost 3.048 m.) of the system
shall have been submitted to a test of less than a 3.048 m. head of water. The
water shall be kept in the system, or in the portion under test, for at least
fifteen (15) minutes before inspection starts. The system shall then be tight at
all points.
Air Test: The air test shall be made by attaching an air compressor testing
apparatus to any suitable opening, and, after closing all other inlets and outlets
to the system, forcing air into the system until there is a uniform gage pressure
of 34.5 kPa or sufficient to balance a column of mercury 254 mm in height. The
pressure shall be held without introduction of additional air for a period of at
least fifteen (15) minutes.
8.3.4 Building Sewers

Every building in which plumbing fixtures are installed and every premises
having drainage piping thereon, shall have a connection to a Public or Private
sewer, except as provided below.
When no Public sewer, intended to serve any lot or premises, is available in
any thoroughfare or right of way abutting such lot or premises, drainage
piping from any building or works shall be connected to an approved Private
sewage disposal system.
Within the limits prescribed by article immediately below hereof, the
rearrangement or subdivision into smaller parcels of a lot which abuts and is
served by a Public sewer shall not be deemed cause to permit the construction
of a Private sewage disposal system, and all plumbing or drainage systems on
any such smaller parcel or parcels shall connect to the Public sewer.
The Public sewer may be considered as not being available when such Public
sewer or any building or any exterior drainage facility connected thereto, is
located more than 60.8 meter from any proposed building or exterior drainage
facility on any lot or premises which abuts and is served by such Public sewer.
No permit shall be issued for the installation, alteration, or repair of any
Private sewage disposal system, or part thereof, on any lot for which a
connection with a Public sewer is available.
On every lot or premises hereafter connected to Public sewer, all plumbing
and drainage systems or parts thereof, on such lot or premises shall be
connected with such Public sewer.
Exception: Single family dwellings and buildings or structures accessory
thereto, existing and connected to an approved Private sewage disposal
system prior to the time of connecting the premises to Public sewer may,
when no hazard, nuisance, or insanitary condition is evidenced and written
permission has been obtained from the Sanitary Engineer, remain connected
to such properly maintained Private sewage disposal system when there is
insufficient grade or fall to permit drainage to the sewer by gravity.
8-22
Exception:
When approved by the Sanitary Engineer and where it is impractical, due to
the depth of the street sewer or to the structural features or to the
arrangement of any building or structure, to obtain a slope of 20.9 mm/m, any
such pipe or piping 100 mm through 150 mm may have a slope of not less
than 10.5 mm/m and any such piping 200 mm and larger may have a slope of
not less than 5.3 mm/m.
Building sewer piping shall be laid on a firm bed throughout its entire length,
and any such piping laid in made or filled-in ground shall be laid on a bed of
approved materials and shall be adequately supported to the satisfaction of
the Sanitary Engineer.
No building sewer or other drainage piping or part thereof, which is
constructed of materials other than those approved for use under or within a
building, shall be installed under or within 600 mm of any building or
structure, or part thereof, nor less than 300 mm below the surface of the
ground. The provisions of this subsection include structures such as porches
and steps, whether covered or uncovered, breezeways, roofed porte-cocheres,
roofed patios, carports, covered walks, covered driveways, and similar
structures or appurtenances.
8.3.5 Cleanouts
Cleanouts shall be placed inside the building near the connection between the
building drain and the building sewer or installed outside the building at the
lower end of the building drain and extended to grade. Additional building
sewer cleanouts shall be installed at intervals not to exceed 30.48 meter in
straight runs and for each aggregate horizontal change in direction exceeding
one hundred thirty-five (135) degrees (2.36 rad).
When a building sewer or a branch thereof does not exceed 3.048 meter in
length and is a straight line projection from a building drain which is provided
with a cleanout, no cleanout will be required at its point of connection to the
building drain.
All required building sewer cleanouts shall be extended to grade and shall
comply with all appropriate sections of Cleanouts, Section 8.3.6 for sizing,
construction and materials. When building sewers are located under buildings,
the cleanout requirements of Section 8.3.6 shall apply.
Each cleanout shall be installed so that it opens to allow cleaning in the
direction of flow of the soil or waste or at right angles thereto, and except in
the case of wye branch and end-of-line cleanouts, shall be installed vertically
above the flow line of the pipe.
Cleanouts installed under concrete or asphalt paving shall be made accessible
by yard boxes, or extending flush with paving with approved materials and be
adequately protected.
8-24
Sterile Equipment: Appliances, devices, or apparatus such as stills, sterilizers,

and similar equipment requiring water and waste and used for sterile
materials shall be drained through an air gap.
Appliances: Appliances, devices, equipment, or other apparatus not regularly
classed as plumbing fixtures which are equipped with pumps, drips, or
drainage outlets may be drained by indirect waste pipes discharging into an
approved type open receptor.
When the condensate waste from air conditioning coils discharges by direct
connection to a lavatory tailpiece or to an approved accessible inlet on a
bathtub overflow, the connection shall be located in the area controlled by the
same person controlling the air-conditioned space.
When undiluted condensate waste from a fuel burning condensing appliance
is discharged into the drainage system, the material in the drainage system
shall be cast iron, galvanized iron, plastic, or other materials approved for this
use.
Exceptions: When the above condensate is discharged to an exposed fixture
tailpiece and trap, such tailpiece and trap may be brass.
Any materials approved in Section 8.3.13 “MATERIALS FOR SANITARY
DRAINAGE” may be used when, in the opinion of the Sanitary Engineer,
condensate waste from a fuel burning condensing appliance is diluted either
before or after discharge into the drainage system.
No domestic dishwashing machine shall be directly connected to a drainage
system or food waste disposer without the use of an approved dishwasher
airgap fitting on the discharge side of the dishwashing machine. Listed airgaps
shall be installed with the flood level (FL) marking at or above the flood level
of the sink or drainboard, whichever is higher.
Cooling Water: When permitted by the Sanitary Engineer, clean running
water used exclusively as a cooling medium in an appliance, device or
apparatus, may discharge into the drainage system through the inlet side of a
fixture trap in the event that a suitable fixture is not available to receive such
discharge. Such trap connection shall be by means of a pipe connected to the
inlet side of an approved fixture trap, the upper end terminating in a funnel
shaped receptacle set adjacent, and not less than 150 mm above the overflow
rim of the fixture.
Drinking Fountains: Drinking fountains may be installed with indirect
wastes.
Steam and Hot Water Drainage Condensers and Sumps: No steam pipe
shall be directly connected to any part of a plumbing or drainage system, nor
shall any water having a temperature above 60°C be discharged under
pressure directly into any part of a drainage system. Pipes from boilers shall
discharge by means of indirect waste piping, as determined by the Sanitary
Engineer or the boiler manufacturer’s recommendations.
8-30
Such pipes may be indirectly connected by discharging into an open or closed

condenser, or intercepting sump of approved type, that will prevent the
entrance of steam or such water under pressure into the drainage system. All
closed condensers or sumps shall be provided with a vent which shall be taken
off the top and extended separately, full size above the roof. All condensers
and sumps shall be properly trapped at the outlet with a deep seal trap
extending to within 150 mm of the bottom of the tank. The top of the deep seal
trap shall have a 20 mm opening located at the highest point of the trap to
serve as a siphon breaker.
Outlets shall be taken off from the side in such a manner as to allow a water
line to be maintained that will permanently occupy not less than 50% the
capacity of the condenser or sump. All inlets shall enter above the water line.
Wearing plates or baffles shall be installed in the tank to protect the shell. The
sizes of the blow off line inlet, the water outlets, and the vent shall be as shown
in Table 8-9. The contents of condensers receiving steam or hot water under
pressure must pass through an open sump before entering the drainage
system.
Table 8-9 Pipe Connections in Blow-off Condensers and Sumps
Boiler Blowoff Water Outlet Vent
20 mm* 20 mm* 50 mm
25 mm 25 mm 65 mm
32 mm 32 mm 80 mm
40 mm 40 mm 100 mm
50 mm 50 mm 125 mm
65 mm 65 mm 150 mm
*To be used only with boilers of 9.29 sq.m of heating surface or less.
Sumps, condensers, or intercepting tanks which are constructed of concrete

shall have walls and bottom not less than 100 mm in thickness, and the inside
shall be cement plastered not less than 12 mm in thickness. Condensers
constructed of metal shall be not less than No. 12 U.S. Standard gauge 2.77 mm
and all such metal condensers shall be protected from external corrosion by
an approved bituminous coating.
Sumps and condensers shall be provided with suitable means of access for
cleaning and shall contain a volume of not less than twice the volume of water
removed from the boiler or boilers connected thereto when the normal water
level of such boiler or boilers is reduced not less than 100 mm.
Strainers: Every indirect waste interceptor receiving discharge containing
particles that would clog the receptor drain shall have a readily removable
beehive strainer.
Chemical Wastes: Chemical or industrial liquid wastes which are likely to
damage or increase maintenance costs on the sanitary sewer system,
8-31
mm/m or one percent slope and shall be of approved corrosion-resistant

material not smaller than the outlet size as required in either Section 310.3 or
310.4 of the UPC 2000 edition, below for air-cooling coils or condensing fuel-
burning appliances, respectively. Condensate or waste water shall not drain
over a Public way. Indirect Drainage shall be provided for Air-conditioning
condensate waste pipes shall be independent of any drainage and waste
system and shall not be smaller than shown in Table 8-10.
Table 8-10 Minimum Size Condensate Drain Pipes
Minimum Condensate
Equipment Capacity in Tons of Refrigeration (Kw)
Pipe Diameter (mm)
Through 3 (Through 10.56) 20 mm

The size of condensate waste pipes may be for one unit or a combination of
units, or as recommended by the manufacturer. The capacity of waste pipes
assumes a 10.5 mm/m) or one percent slope, with the pipe running 75% full
at the following conditions:
Outside Air-20% DB WB
32°C 23°C
Room Air – 80% DB WB
24°C 17°
a) Condensate drain sizing for other slopes or other conditions shall be
approved by the Sanitary Engineer. Air conditioning waste pipes shall be
constructed of materials specified in Section 7.3.
b) Point of Discharge: Air-conditioning condensate waste pipes shall
connect indirectly to the drainage system through an airgap or airbreak to:
 A properly trapped receptor
 To a points of discharge acceptable by Sanitary Engineer, including dry
wells, leach pits, the tailpiece of plumbing fixtures, etc.
 Condensate or waste water shall not drain over a Public way.
8.3.6 Traps and Interceptors

Each plumbing fixture, excepting those having integral traps shall be
separately trapped by an approved type water seal trap. Not more than one
(1) trap shall be permitted on a trap arm.
One (1) trap may serve a set of not more than three (3) single compartment
sinks or laundry tubs of the same depth or three (3) lavatories immediately
8-33
Table 8-12 Grease Traps
Total Number of Fixtures Required Rate of Flow per Grease Retention Capacity,
Connected Minute, Liters kg
1 76 18
2 95 22
3 132 31
4 189 45
Note:
For installations with more than four (4) fixtures, the Sanitary Engineer may permit the use of larger
grease traps designed not to exceed the parameters of Section 8.3.6.9, but not to exceed 284 liters
per minute.
Recommended Procedures for Design, Construction and Installation of Commercial Kitchen

Grease Interceptors:
General: The provisions of this recommended procedure shall apply to the
design, construction, installation, and testing of commercial kitchen grease
interceptors.
Waste Discharge Requirements: Waste discharge from fixtures and
equipment in establishments which may contain grease, including but not
limited to, scullery sinks, pot and pan sinks, dishwashing machines, soup
kettles and floor drains located in areas where grease-containing materials
may exist, may be drained into the sanitary waste through the interceptor
when approved by the Sanitary Engineer.
Toilets, urinals, and other similar fixtures shall not drain through the
interceptor.
All waste shall enter the interceptor through the inlet pipe only.
Design: Interceptors shall be constructed in accordance with the design
approved by the Sanitary Engineer and shall have a minimum of two
compartments with fittings designed for grease retention.
There shall be an adequate number of manholes to provide access for cleaning
all areas of an interceptor; a minimum of one (1) per 3.048 m of interceptor
length. Manhole covers shall be gastight in construction having a minimum
opening dimension of 508 mm.
In areas where traffic may exist the interceptor shall be designed to have
adequate reinforcement and cover.
Location: Each grease interceptor shall be so installed and connected that it
shall be at all times easily accessible for inspection, cleaning, and removal of
the intercepted grease. A grease interceptor may not be installed in any part of
a building where food is handled. Location of the grease interceptor shall meet
the approval of the Sanitary Engineer.
Interceptors shall be placed as close as practical to the fixtures it serves.
Each business establishment for which a grease interceptor is required shall
have an interceptor which shall serve only that establishment.
8-39
separator shall flow by gravity or shall be pumped to a higher elevation by approved indirect waste pipes into a floor sink or other approved type
an automatic pump. Pumps shall be adequately sized and accessible. Waste receptor.
oil tanks shall have a 50 mm minimum pump-out connection at grade and
Size of Vents:
40 mm minimum vent to atmosphere at an approved location at least
3.048m above grade.  The size of vent piping shall be determined from its length and the total
number of fixture units connected thereto, as set forth in Table 8-5. The
Design of Interceptors:
diameter of an individual vent shall not be less than 32 mm nor less than
 Each manufactured interceptor that is rated shall be stamped or labeled by fifty percent (50%) the diameter of the drain to which it is connected. In
the manufacturer with an indication of its full discharge rate in L/s. The addition, the drainage piping of each building and each connection to a
full discharge rate to such an interceptor shall be determined at full flow. Public sewer or a Private sewage disposal system shall be vented by
Each interceptor shall be rated equal to or greater than the incoming flow means of one or more vent pipes, the aggregate cross-sectional area of
and shall be provided with an overflow line to an underground tank. which shall not be less than that of the largest required building sewer, as
determined from Table 8–5.
 Interceptors not rated by the manufacturer shall have a depth of not less
than 600 mm below the invert of the discharge drain. The outlet opening Exception:
shall have not less than 457 mm water seal and shall have a minimum
 When connected to a common building sewer, the drainage piping of two
capacity as follows: where not more than three (3) motor vehicles are
(2) or more buildings located on the same lot and under one (1)
serviced and / or stored, interceptors shall have a minimum capacity of
ownership may be vented by means of piping sized in accordance with
0.2 cubic meter, and 0.03 cubic meter of capacity shall be added for each
Table 8-5, provided the aggregate cross-sectional area of all vents is not
vehicle up to ten (10) vehicles. Above ten (10) vehicles, the Sanitary
less than that of the largest required common building sewer.
Engineer shall determine the size of the interceptor required.
 No more than one-third (1 / 3) of the total permitted length, per Table 8-5,
 Where vehicles are serviced only and not stored, interceptor capacity
of any minimum sized vent shall be installed in a horizontal position.
shall be based on a net capacity of 0.03 cubic meter for each 9.3 sq.m of
surface to be drained into the interceptor, with a minimum of 0.2 cubic Exception:
meter.  When a minimum sized vent is increased one (1) pipe size for its entire
Combination Oil and Sand Interceptor: length, the maximum length limitation does not apply.
 A combination oil and sand interceptor may be installed when the design Vent Pipe Grades and Connections:
is approved in writing by the Sanitary Engineer.  All vent and branch vent pipes shall be free from drops or sags and each
such vent shall be level or shall be so graded and connected as to drip back
8.3.7 Vents by gravity to the drainage pipe it serves.
Vents Required:
 Where vents connect to a horizontal drainage pipe, each vent pipe shall
 Each plumbing fixture trap, except as otherwise provided in these Design have its invert taken off above the drainage center line of such pipe
Guidelines, shall be protected against siphonage and back-pressure, and downstream of the trap being served.
air circulation shall be assured throughout all parts of the drainage system
 Unless prohibited by structural conditions, each vent shall rise vertically
by means of vent pipes installed in accordance with the requirements of
to a point not less than 150 mm above the flood level rim of the fixture
this Section and as otherwise required by these Design Guidelines.
served before offsetting horizontally, and whenever two or more vent
Vents Not Required: pipes converge, each such vent pipe shall rise to a point at least 150 mm
in height above the flood level rim of the plumbing fixture it serves before
 Where permitted by the Sanitary Engineer, vent piping may be omitted on
being connected to any other vent. Vents less than 150 mm above the
an interceptor when such interceptor acts as a primary settling tank and
flood level rim of the fixture shall be installed with approved drainage
discharges through a horizontal indirect waste pipe into a secondary
fittings, material and grade to the drain.
interceptor. The second interceptor shall be properly trapped and vented.
 All vent pipes shall extend undiminished in size above the roof, or shall be
 Traps serving sinks which are part of the equipment of soda fountains, and
reconnected with a soil or waste vent of proper size.
counters, need not be vented when the location and construction of such
soda fountains, and counters is such as to make it impossible to do so.  The vent pipe opening from a soil or waste pipe, except for water closets
When such conditions exist, said sinks shall discharge by means of and similar fixtures, shall not be below the weir of the trap.
8-45 8-46
 Two (2) fixtures may be served by a common vertical pipe when each such Frost or Snow Closure:
fixture wastes separately into an approved double fitting having inlet
 Where frost or snow closure is likely to occur in locations having minimum
openings at the same level.
design temperature below (-17.8°C), vent terminals shall be a minimum of
Vent Termination: 50 mm in diameter but in no event smaller than the required vent pipe.
The change in diameter shall be made inside the building at least 300 mm
 Each vent pipe or stack shall extend through its flashing and shall
below the roof in an insulated space and terminate not less than 254 mm
terminate vertically not less than 150 mm above the roof nor less than 300
above the roof, or as required by the Sanitary Engineer.
mm from any vertical surface.
Vent Stacks and Relief Vents:
 Each vent shall terminate not less than 3.048 m from, or at least 914 mm
above any openable window, door, opening, air intake, or vent shaft, nor  Each drainage stack which extends ten (10) or more stories above the
less than 914 mm in every direction from any lot line; alley and street building drain or other horizontal drain, shall be served by a parallel vent
excepted. stack which shall extend undiminished in size from its upper terminal and
connect to the drainage stack at or immediately below the lowest fixture
 Vent pipes shall be extended separately or combined, of full required size,
drain. Each such vent stack shall also be connected to the drainage stack at
not less than 150 mm above the roof or fire wall. Flag poling of vents shall
each fifth floor, counting down from the uppermost fixture drain by means
be prohibited except where the roof is used for purposes other than
of a yoke vent, the size of which shall be not less in diameter than either
weather protection. All vents within 3.048 m of any part of the roof that is
the drainage or the vent stack, whichever is smaller.
used for such other purposes shall extend not less than 2.134 m above such
roof and shall be securely stayed.  The yoke vent intersection with the vent stack shall be placed not less than
1.067m above the floor level, and the yoke vent intersection with the
 Vent pipes for outdoor installations shall extend at least 3.048 m above
drainage stack shall be by means of a wye branch fitting placed below the
the surrounding ground and shall be securely supported.
fixture branch serving that floor.
 Joints at the roof around vent pipes shall be made water tight by the use of
Vertical Wet Venting:
approved flashings or flashing material.
 Wet venting is limited to vertical drainage piping receiving the discharge
Lead:
from the trap arm of one (1) and two (2) fixture unit fixtures that also
 See Table14-1 US UPC2000 Edition. Sheet lead shall be not less than the serves as a vent for not to exceed four (4) fixtures. All wet vented fixtures
following: shall be within the same story; provided, further, that fixtures with a
For safe pans: continuous vent discharging into a wet vent shall be within the same story
as the wet vented fixtures. No wet vent shall exceed 1.829 m in developed
 Not less 19.5 kg / m2 or 1.6 mm thick. length.
For flashings or vent terminals:  The vertical piping between any two (2) consecutive inlet levels shall be
 Not less than 14.7 kg / m2 or 1.2 mm thick. considered a wet vented section. Each wet vented section shall be a
minimum of one (1) pipe size larger than the required minimum waste
 Lead bends and lead traps shall not be less than 3.2 mm wall
pipe size of the upper fixture or shall be one (1) pipe size larger than the
thickness.
required minimum pipe size for the sum of the fixture units served by
such wet vented section, whichever is larger, but in no case less than 50
mm.
 Common vent sizing shall be the sum of the fixture units served but in no
case smaller than the minimum vent pipe size required for any fixture
served, or by Section 8.3.7 “Size of Vents”.
8-47 8-48
Special Venting for Island Fixtures: Exception:

 Traps for island sinks and similar equipment shall be roughed in above the  Branch lines may have forty-five (45) degree (0.79 rad) vertical offsets
floor and may be vented by extending the vent as high as possible, but not
 Cleanouts may not be required on any wet vented branch serving a single
less than the drainboard height and then returning it downward and
trap when the fixture tailpiece or connection is not less than 50 mm in
connecting it to the horizontal sink drain immediately downstream from
diameter and provides ready access for cleaning through the trap. An
the vertical fixture drain. The return vent shall be connected to the
accessible cleanout shall be installed in each vent for the combination
horizontal drain through a wye-branch fitting and shall, in addition, be
waste and vent system.
provided with a foot vent taken off the vertical fixture vent by means of a
wye-branch immediately below the floor and extending to the nearest  No water closet or urinal shall be installed on any such system. Other one
partition and then through the roof to the open air or may be connected to (1), two (2), or three (3) unit fixtures remotely located from the sanitary
other vents at a point not less than 150 mm above the flood level rim of the system and adjacent to a combination waste and vent system may be
fixtures served. connected to such system in the conventional manner by means of waste
and vent pipes of regular sizes, providing that the two (2) pipe size is
 Drainage fittings shall be used on all parts of the vent below the floor level
based on the total fixture unit load connected to the system.
and a minimum slope of 20.9 mm/m back to the drain shall be maintained.
The return bend used under the drainboard shall be a one (1) piece fitting
8.3.8 Subsoil Drains
or an assembly of a forty-five (45) degree (0.79 rad), a ninety (90) degree
 Subsoil drains shall be provided around the perimeter of buildings having
(1.6 rad) and a forty-five (45) degree (0.79 rad) elbow in the order named.
basements, cellars, or crawl spaces or floors below grade. Such subsoil
Pipe sizing shall be as elsewhere required in these Design Guidelines. The
drains may be positioned inside or outside of the footing, shall be of
island sink drain, upstream of the returned vent, shall serve no other
perforated, or open-jointed approved drain tile or pipe not less than 80
fixtures. An accessible cleanout shall be installed in the vertical portion of
mm in diameter, and shall be laid in gravel, slag, crushed rock, approved
the foot vent.
19.1 mm crushed recycled glass aggregate, or other approved porous
Combination Waste and Vent Systems: material with a minimum of 100 mm surrounding the pipe on all sides.
 Combination waste and vent systems shall be permitted only where Filter media shall be provided for exterior subsoil piping.
structural conditions preclude the installation of conventional systems as  Subsoil drains shall be piped to a storm drain, to an approved water course,
otherwise prescribed by this Design Guidelines. to the front street curb or gutter, or to an alley; or the discharge from the
 Plans and specifications for each combination waste and vent system shall subsoil drains shall be conveyed to the alley by a concrete gutter. Where a
first be approved by the Sanitary Engineer before any portion of any such continuously flowing spring or groundwater is encountered, subsoil drains
system is installed. shall be piped to a storm drain or an approved water course.
 Each combination waste and vent system, shall be provided with a vent or  Where it is not possible to convey the drainage by gravity, subsoil drains
vents adequate to assure free circulation of air. Any branch more than shall discharge to an accessible sump provided with an approved
4.572m) in length shall be separately vented in an approved manner. The automatic electric pump. The sump shall be at least 375 mm in diameter,
minimum area of any vent installed in a combination waste and vent 457 mm in depth, and provided with a fitted cover. The sump pump shall
system shall be at least fifty percent 50% the inside cross-sectional area of have an adequate capacity to discharge all water coming into the sump as
the drain pipe served. The vent connection shall be downstream of the it accumulates to the required discharge point, and the capacity of the
uppermost fixture. pump shall not be less than 1.0 L/s. The discharge piping from the sump
pump shall be a minimum of 40 mm in diameter and have a union or other
 Each waste pipe and each trap in any such system shall be at least two (2)
approved quick disconnect assembly to make the pump accessible for
pipe sizes larger than the sizes required by Section 8.3.4 of this Design
servicing.
Guidelines, and at least two (2) pipe sizes larger than any fixture tailpiece
or connection.  For separate dwellings not serving continuously flowing springs or
groundwater, the sump discharge pipe may discharge onto a concrete
 Unless specifically required or permitted by the Sanitary Engineer, no
splash block with a minimum length of 600 mm. This pipe shall be within
vertical waste pipe shall be used in any such system, except the tailpiece or
100 mm of the splash block and positioned to direct the flow parallel to the
connection between the outlet of a plumbing fixture and the trap
recessed line of the splash block.
therefore. Such tailpieces or connections shall be as short as possible, and
in no case shall exceed 600 mm.
8-49 8-50
Urinals:
Urinals shall have an average water consumption of not more than 1.0 gallon
(3.8 liters) of water per flush.
Exception:
If approved by the Sanitary Engineer, blowout urinals may be installed for
Public use in stadiums, race courses, fairgrounds, and other structures used
for outdoor assembly and for similar uses.
Non-Metered Faucets:
Lavatory faucets shall be designed and manufactured so that they will not
exceed a water flow rate of 8.4 liters per minute.
Metered Faucets:
Self-closing or self-closing metering faucets shall be installed on lavatories
intended to serve the transient Public, such as those in, but not limited to,
service stations, train stations, airports, restaurants and convention halls.
Metered faucets shall deliver not more than 1.0 liter of water per use.
Kitchen Faucets:
Faucets for kitchen sinks shall be designed and manufactured so that they will
not exceed a water flow rate of 8.4 liters per minute.
Shower Heads:
Shower heads shall be designed and manufactured so that they will not exceed
a water supply flow rate of 9.5 liters per minute.
Exception:
Emergency safety showers.
Installation:
Water-conserving fixtures shall be installed in strict accordance with the
manufacturers’ instructions to maintain their rated performance.
Materials – Alternates:
Special use fixtures may be made of soapstone, chemical stoneware, or may be
lined with lead, copper base alloy, nickel-copper alloy, corrosion-resisting
steel, or other materials especially suited for the use for which the fixture is
intended.
Zinc Alloy Components:
Zinc alloy components shall meet the applicable nationally recognized
standards and shall be used in accordance with their listing.
Overflows:
When any fixture is provided with an overflow, the waste shall be so arranged
that the standing water in the fixture cannot rise in the overflow when the
stopper is closed or remain in the overflow when the fixture is empty. The
8-52
overflow pipe from a fixture shall be connected on the house or inlet side of the
fixture trap, except that overflow on flush tanks may discharge into the water
closets or urinals served by them, but it shall be unlawful to connect such
overflows with any other part of the drainage system.
Strainers and Connections:
Strainers. All plumbing fixtures, other than water closets and urinals, shall be
equipped with approved strainers having an approved waterway area.
Strainers serving shower drains shall have a waterway equivalent to the area
of the tailpiece.
Connections:
Fixtures having concealed slip joint connections shall be provided with an
access panel or utility space at least 305 mm in its least dimension and so
arranged without obstructions as to make such connections accessible for
inspection and repair.
Continuous wastes and fixture tailpieces shall be constructed from the
materials specified in Section 8.3.13 ”Materials For Drainage” for drainage
piping, provided, however, that such connections where exposed or
accessible may be of seamless drawn brass not less than No. 20 B&S Gauge
0.8 mm. Each such tailpiece, continuous waste, or waste and overflow shall
not be less than 40 mm O.D. for sinks, dishwashers, laundry tubs, bathtubs,
urinals and similar fixtures, and not less than 32 mm) for lavatories, drinking
fountains, and similar small fixtures.
Approved wye or other directional type branch fittings shall be installed in all
continuous wastes connecting or receiving the discharge from food waste
disposal units, dishwashers, clothes washers, or other force discharge fixtures
or appliances. No dishwasher drain shall be connected to a sink tailpiece,
continuous waste or trap on the discharge side of a food waste disposal unit.
Prohibited Fixtures:
Water closets having an invisible seal or an unventilated space or having walls
which are not thoroughly washed at each discharge shall be prohibited. Any
water closet which might permit siphonage of the contents of the bowl back
into the tank shall be prohibited. Drinking fountains shall not be installed in
Public toilet rooms.
Prohibited Urinals:
Floor-type and wall -hung-type trough urinals shall be prohibited. Urinals
which have an invisible seal or which have an unventilated space or wall
which is not thoroughly washed at each discharge shall be prohibited.
Fixed wooden, concrete, cement, or tile wash trays or sinks for domestic use
shall not be installed in any building designed or used for human habitation.
No sheet metal lined wooden bathtub shall be installed or reconnected. No dry
or chemical closet (toilet) shall be installed in any building used for human
habitation, unless first approved by the Sanitary Engineer.
8-53
corrosion-resistant screws or bolts. The closet flange shall be secured to a contents shall be provided with a flushometer valve, flushometer tank or flush
firm base. tank designed and installed so as to supply water in sufficient quantity and
rate of flow to flush the contents of the fixture to which it is connected, to
Where floor-mounted, back-outlet water closets are used, the soil pipe shall
cleanse the fixture, and to refill the fixture trap, without excessive water use.
not be less than 80 mm in diameter. Offset, eccentric, or reducing floor flanges
Flushing devices shall meet anti-siphon requirements required in Section
shall not be used.
8.3.17.
Setting:
Automatic Flushing Tanks: Tanks flushing more than one (1) urinal shall be
Fixtures shall be set level and in proper alignment with reference to adjacent automatic in operation and of sufficient capacity to provide the necessary
walls. No water closet or bidet shall be set closer than 381 mm from its center volume to flush and properly cleanse all urinals simultaneously. Automatically
to any side wall or obstruction nor closer than 762 mm center to center to any controlled flushometer valves may be substituted for flush tanks.
similar fixture. The clear space in front of any water closet or bidet shall not be
Flushometer Valves: No manually controlled flushometer valve shall be used
less than 600 mm. No urinal shall be set closer than 305 mm from its center to
to flush more than one (1) urinal and each such urinal flushometer valve shall
any side wall or partition nor closer than.
be an approved, self-closing type discharging a predetermined quantity of
Installations for Persons with Disabilities (PWDs): water. Flushometers shall be installed so that they will be accessible for repair.
Where facilities for the PWDs are required in applicable building regulations, Flushometer valves shall not be used where the water pressure is insufficient
the facilities shall be installed in accordance with those regulations. to properly operate them. When the valve is operated, it shall complete the
cycle of operation automatically, opening fully and closing positively under the
Supply Fittings:
line water pressure. Each flushometer shall be provided with a means for
The supply lines or fittings for every plumbing fixture shall be so installed as regulating the flow through it.
to prevent backflow as required in Section 8.3.17.
Water Supply for Flush Tanks: An adequate quantity of water shall be
Water Closets: provided to flush and clean the fixture served. The water supply for flushing
tanks and flushometer tanks equipped for manual flushing shall be controlled
Water closet bowls for Public use shall be of the elongated type. In nurseries,
by a float valve or other automatic device designed to refill the tank after each
schools, and other similar places where plumbing fixtures are provided for the
discharge and to completely shut off the water flow to the tank when the tank
use of children under six (6) years of age, water closets shall be of a size and
is filled to operational capacity. Provision shall be made to automatically supply
height suitable for children’s use. All water closets shall be equipped with
water to the fixture so as to refill the trap seal after each flushing. The water
seats as required below.
supply to flush tanks equipped for automatic flushing shall be controlled by a
Water Closet Seats: suitable timing device.
 Water closet seats shall be of smooth non-absorbent material. Flush Valves in Flush Tanks: Flush valve seats in tanks for flushing water
 All water closet seats, except those within dwelling units, shall be of the closets shall be at least 25 mm above the flood level rim of the bowl connected
open front type. thereto, except in approved water closet and flush tank combinations designed
so that when the tank is flushed and the fixture is clogged or partially clogged,
 Water closet seats shall be properly sized for the water closet bowl type. the flush valve closes tightly so that water does not spill continuously over the
 Seats for use in Public buildings shall conform to the standard listed in rim of the bowl or backflow from the bowl to the tank.
Table 14-1 of Standards for Materials, Equipment, Joints and Connections Overflows in Flush Tanks: Flush tanks shall be provided with overflows
US UPC 2000 Edition. discharging into the water closet or urinal connected thereto and shall be of
Urinals: sufficient size to prevent tank flooding at the maximum rate at which the tank
is supplied with water under normal operating conditions.
Every water supply to a urinal shall be protected by an approved type vacuum
breaker or other approved backflow prevention device as described in Section Floor Drains and Shower Stalls: Floor drains shall be considered plumbing
8.3.17.3. fixtures and each such drain shall be provided with an approved type strainer
having a waterway equivalent to the area of the tailpiece. Floor drains, floor
8.3.10 Flushing Devices for Water Closet and Urinals receptors, and shower drains shall be of an approved type, suitably flanged to
Flushing Devices Required: Each water closet, urinal, clinic sink, or other provide a water tight joint in the floor.
plumbing fixture which depends on trap siphonage to discharge its waste
8-55 8-56
Location of Floor Drains: Floor drains shall be installed in the following Exception: Showers which are designed to comply with the accessibility
areas: standards listed in Table 14-1 of Standards for Materials, Equipment, Joints
and Connections US UPC 2000 Edition.
Toilet rooms containing two (2) or more water closets or a combination of one
(1) water closet and one (1) urinal, except in a dwelling unit. The floor shall All shower compartments, regardless of shape, shall have a minimum finished
slope toward the floor drains. interior of 0.66 m2 and shall also be capable of encompassing a 750 mm circle.
The minimum required area and dimensions shall be measured at a height
8.3.11 Commercial kitchens equal to the top of the threshold and at a point tangent to its centerline. The
Laundry rooms in commercial buildings and common laundry facilities in minimum area and dimensions shall be maintained to a point 1.778 m above
multi-family dwelling buildings. the shower drain outlet with no protrusions other than the fixture valve or
valves, shower head, soap dishes, shelves and safety grab bars or rails. Fold-
Food Storage Areas: If drains are provided in storerooms, walk-in freezers,
down seats in accessible shower stalls shall be permitted to protrude into the
walk-in coolers, refrigerated equipment, or other locations where food is
750 mm circle.
stored, such drains shall have indirect waste piping. Separate waste pipes shall
be run from each food storage area, each with an indirect connection to the Exception: Showers which are designed to comply with the accessibility
building sanitary drainage system. Traps shall be provided if required under standards listed in Table 14-1 of Standards for Materials, Equipment, Joints
Section 8.3.5.5 and shall be vented. and Connections US UPC 2000 Edition.
Indirect drains may be located in freezers or other spaces where freezing When the construction of on-site built-up shower receptors is permitted by
temperatures are maintained, provided that traps, when provided, are located the Sanitary Engineer, one of the following means shall be employed:
where the seal will not freeze. Otherwise, the floor of the freezer shall be Shower receptors built directly on the ground: Shower receptors built
sloped to a floor drain located outside of the storage compartment. directly on the ground shall be water tight and shall be constructed from
Floor Slope: Floors shall be sloped to floor drains where drainage occurs on a approved type dense, non-absorbent and noncorrosive materials. Each such
regular or frequent basis, or as otherwise required by the Sanitary Engineer. receptor shall be adequately reinforced, shall be provided with an approved
flanged floor drain designed to make a water tight joint in the floor, and shall
Shower receptors are plumbing fixtures and shall conform to the general
have smooth, impervious, and durable surfaces.
requirements therefore contained in Section 8.3.8.1. Each such shower
receptor shall be constructed of vitrified china or earthenware, ceramic tile, Shower receptors built above ground: When shower receptors are built above
porcelain enameled metal or of such other material as may be acceptable to ground the sub-floor and rough side of walls to a height of not less than 76 mm)
the Sanitary Engineer. No shower receptor shall be installed unless it above the top of the finished dam or threshold shall be first lined with sheet
conforms to acceptable standards as referenced in Table 14-1 of US UPC 2000 plastic*, lead* or copper* or shall be lined with other durable and water tight
Edition or until a specification or a prototype or both of such receptor has first materials.
been submitted to and approval obtained from the Sanitary Engineer. All lining materials shall be pitched 20.9 mm/m to weep holes in the subdrain
Each shower receptor shall be an approved type and be so constructed as to of a smooth and solidly formed sub-base. All such lining materials shall extend
have a finished dam, curb, or threshold which is at least 25 mm lower than the upward on the rough jambs of the shower opening to a point no less than 76
sides and back of such receptor. In no case shall any dam or threshold be less mm above the top of the finished dam or threshold and shall extend outward
than 50 mm or more than 229 mm in depth when measured from the top of over the top of the rough threshold and be turned over and fastened on the
the dam or threshold to the top of the drain. Each such receptor shall be outside face of both the rough threshold and the jambs.
provided with an integral nailing flange to be located where the receptor Non-metallic shower sub-pans or linings may be built-up on the job site of not
meets the vertical surface of the finished interior of the shower compartment. less than three (3) layers of standard 6.8 kg asphalt impregnated roofing felt.
The flange shall be water tight and extend vertically a minimum of 25 mm The bottom layer shall be fitted to the formed sub-base and each succeeding
above the top of the sides of the receptor. The finished floor of the receptor layer thoroughly hot mopped to that below. All corners shall be carefully fitted
shall slope uniformly from the sides toward the drain not less than 20.9 and shall be made strong and water tight by folding or lapping, and each corner
mm/m, nor more than 41.8 mm/m. Thresholds shall be of sufficient width to shall be reinforced with suitable webbing hot-mopped in place. All folds, laps,
accommodate a minimum 559 mm door. Shower doors shall open so as to and reinforcing webbing shall extend at least 100 mm in all directions from the
maintain a minimum 559 mm unobstructed opening for egress. corner and all webbing shall be of approved type and mesh, producing a tensile
strength of not less than 344.5 kPa in either direction. Non-metallic shower
sub-pans or linings may also consist of multi-layers of other approved
8-57 8-58
equivalent materials suitably reinforced and carefully fitted in place on the job Access to Fixtures: In multi-story buildings, accessibility to the required
site as elsewhere required in this section. fixtures shall not exceed one (1) vertical story.
Linings shall be properly recessed and fastened to approved backing so as not Fixtures accessible only to Private offices shall not be counted to determine
to occupy the space required for the wall covering and shall not be nailed or compliance with this section.
perforated at any point which may be less than 25 mm above the finished dam
Separate Facilities: Separate toilet facilities shall be provided for each sex.
or threshold. An approved type sub-drain shall be installed with every shower
sub-pan or lining. Each such sub-drain shall be of the type that sets flush with Exceptions: Residential installations.
the sub-base and shall be equipped with a clamping ring or other device to In occupancies serving ten (10) or fewer people, one (1) toilet facility,
make a tight connection between the lining and the drain. The sub-drain shall designed for use by no more than one (1) person at a time, shall be permitted
have weep holes into the waste line. The weep holes located in the subdrain for use by both sexes.
clamping ring shall be protected from clogging.
In business and mercantile occupancies with a total floor area of 139.5 m2 or
*Lead and copper sub-pans or linings shall be insulated from all conducting less, one (1) toilet facility, designed for use by no more than one (1) person at a
substances other than their connecting drain by 6.8 kg asphalt felt or its time, shall satisfy the requirements for serving customers and employees of
equivalent and no lead pan or liner shall be constructed of material weighing both sexes.
less than 19.5 kg/m2. Copper pans or liners shall be at least No. 24 B & S Gauge
Fixture Requirements for Special Occupancies: Additional fixtures may be
0.5 mm. Joints in lead pans or liners shall be burned. Joints in copper pans or
required when unusual environmental conditions or special activities are
liners shall be soldered or brazed. Plastic pans shall not be coated with asphalt
encountered.
based materials.
In food preparation areas, fixture requirements may be dictated by health
All shower lining materials shall conform to approved standards acceptable to
Codes.
the Sanitary Engineer.
Types of occupancy not shown in Table 8-2 shall be considered individually by
Tests for Shower Receptors: Shower receptors shall be tested for water
the Sanitary Engineer
tightness by filling with water to the level of the rough threshold. The test plug
shall be so placed that both upper and under sides of the sub-pan shall be Facilities in Mercantile and Business Occupancies Serving Customers
subjected to the test at the point where it is clamped to the drain.
Requirements for customers and employees shall be permitted to be met with
Floors of Public shower rooms shall have a non-skid surface and shall be a single set of restrooms accessible to both groups. The required number of
drained in such a manner that waste water from one bather will not pass over fixtures shall be the greater of the required number for employees or the
areas occupied by other bathers. Gutters in Public or gang shower rooms shall required number for customers.
have rounded corners for easy cleaning and shall be sloped not less than 2%
Fixtures for customer use shall be permitted to be met by providing a centrally
toward drains. Drains in gutters shall be spaced not more than 2438 mm from
located facility accessible to several stores. The maximum distance from entry
side walls nor more than 4.897 mm apart.
to any store to this facility shall not exceed 152.4 m.
Location of Valves and Heads: Control valves and shower heads shall be
In stores with a floor area a 13.9 m2 or less, the requirement to provide
located on the sidewall of shower compartments or be otherwise arranged so
facilities for employees shall be permitted to be met by providing a centrally
that the showerhead does not discharge directly at the entrance to the
located facility accessible to several stores. The maximum distance from entry
compartment and the bather can adjust the valves prior to stepping into the
to any store to this facility shall not 91.4 m.
shower spray.
Food Service Establishments: Food service establishments with an occupant
Water Supply Riser. Every water supply riser from the shower valve to the
load of one hundred (100) or more shall be provided with separate facilities
shower head outlet, whether exposed or not, shall be securely attached to the
for employees and customers. Customer and employee facilities may be
structure.
combined for occupant loads less than one hundred (100).
8.3.12 Minimum Number of Required Fixtures Toilet Facilities for Workers: Suitable toilet facilities shall be provided and
Fixture Count. Plumbing fixtures shall be provided for the type of building maintained in a sanitary condition for the use of workers during construction.
occupancy and in the minimum number shown in Table 8-2.
8-59 8-60
8.3.13 Fixtures and Fixtures Fittings for Persons with Disabilities Underground Main Sewer and Waste Lines, Main Sewer and Waste Lines shall be
Plumbing fixtures and fixture fittings for persons with disabilities shall Bell and spigot cast iron pipe (CIP) and fittings conforming to ASTM A74. Or PVC
conform to the appropriate standards referenced in Table 14-1 of US UPC series 1000 and fittings Or HDPE and fittings, Schedule 40 ABS DWV, Schedule
2000 Edition. 40 PVC DWV, extra strength vitrified clay pipe, or other approved materials
having a smooth and uniform bore conforming to ATSM referred to in Table 14-
Whirlpool Bathtubs: Unless otherwise listed, all whirlpool bathtubs shall
1 UPC 2000 Edition, except that:
comply with the following requirements:
No galvanized wrought iron or galvanized steel pipe shall be used
A removable panel of sufficient dimension shall be provided to access the
underground and shall be kept at least 150 mm all be installed except for
pump.
individual single family dwelling units, materials exposed within ducts or
The circulation pump shall be located above the crown weir of the trap. plenums shall have a flame-spread index of not more than 25 and a smoke-
The pump and the circulation piping shall be self-draining to minimize water developed index of not more than 50, when tested in accordance with the Test
retention in accordance with standards referenced in Table14-1 of US UPC for Surface-Burning Characteristics of the Building Materials
2000 Edition. No vitrified clay pipe or fittings shall be used above ground or where
Suction fittings on whirlpool bathtubs shall comply with the listed standards. pressurized by a pump or ejector. They shall be kept at least 300 mm below
ground.
Installation of Fixtures Fittings: Faucets and diverters shall be installed and
adjusted so that the flow of hot water from the fittings corresponds to the left Copper tube for drainage and vent piping shall have a weight of not less than
hand side of the fitting during fixture operation. that of copper drainage tube type DWV.
Exception: In single handle mixing valves, the flow of hot water shall Drainage fittings shall be of cast iron, malleable iron, lead, brass, copper,
correspond to the markings on the fitting. ABS, PVC, vitrified clay, or other approved materials having a smooth
interior waterway of the same diameter as the piping served and all such
Bidets: Materials. Bidets shall conform to the standards listed in Table14-1 of
fittings shall be compatible with the type of pipe used. Pump Discharge Pipe
US UPC 2000 Edition.
shall be black iron pipe (BIP) and fittings conforming to ASTM A53.
Backflow Protection. The water supply to the bidet shall be protected
Fittings on screwed pipe shall be of the recessed drainage type. Burred ends
according to Section 8.3.17, which allows for an airgap or vacuum breaker.
shall be reamed to the full bore of the pipe.
Future Fixtures: When provision is made for the future installation of
The threads of drainage fittings shall be tapped so as to allow 20.9 mm/m
fixtures, those provided for shall be considered in determining the required
grade.
sizes of drain pipes. Construction for future installations shall be terminated
with a plugged fitting or fittings. Where the plugged fitting is at the point Fittings used for drainage shall be of the drainage type, have a smooth interior
where the trap of a fixture may be installed, the plumbing system for such waterway, and be constructed so as to allow 20.9 mm/m per foot grade.
fixture shall be complete and conform with all plumbing requirements of these Lead: See Table 14-1 of US UPC 2000 Edition Sheet lead shall be not less than
Design Guidelines. the following:
Shower and Tub/Shower Combination Control Valves: Showers and tub- For safe pans: not less than 19.5 kg / m2
shower combinations in all buildings shall be provided with individual control
For flashings or vent terminals: not less than 15 kg / m2 or 1.2 mm thick.
valves of the pressure balance or the thermostatic mixing valve type. Gang
showers, when supplied with a single temperature controlled water supply Lead bends and lead traps shall not be less than 3.2 mm wall thickness.
pipe, may be controlled by a master thermostatic mixing valve in lieu of
Ferrules and Bushings: Caulking ferrules shall be manufactured from
individually controlled pressure balance or thermostatic mixing valves.
bronze or copper and shall be in accordance with Table 8-13.
Handle position stops shall be provided on such valves and shall be adjusted
per the manufacturer’s instructions to deliver a maximum mixed water setting Soldering bushings shall be of bronze or copper in accordance with Table 8-14.
of 49°C. The water heater thermostat shall not be considered a suitable
control for meeting this provision.
Materials for Sanitary Drainage: Sewer lines shall be designed with a
minimum slope of one percent (1%), For high-rise buildings; Soil stack shall be
cast iron pipe (CIP) and fittings conforming to ASTM A74. Or HDPE and fittings,
8-61 8-62
Table 8-16 Hangers and Support
Material Type of Joints Horizontal Vertical

Cast Lead Oakum (1,524 mm), (3,048 Base and each floor not
mm) where foot lengths to exceed 4,572 mm
3,048 mm are Base and each floor
installed1,2,3 maximum of 4,572 mm
Every other joint, unless
over 1,219 mm, then
Compression support each joint1,2,3
Gasket
Cast –Iron Hubless Shielding Every other joint, unless Base and each floor
Coupling over 1,219 mm, then maximum of 4,572 mm
support each joint1,2,3,4
Copper Tube and Pipe Soldered or 40mm and smaller, Each floor, a maximum
Brazed 1,829 mm, 50 mm and of 3,048 mm,5
larger,3,048 mm
Steel and brass Pipe Threaded of and smaller, (3,048 Every other Floor, a
for Water or DWV Welded mm), 25 mm and larger, maximum of 7,620 mm5
(3,658 mm)
Steel, Brass and Threaded of 15mm (1,829 mm), 20 (12 mm) (1,829 mm)
Tinned Copper Pipe for Welded mm and (2 5 mm), (20mm) and 25 mm,
Gas (2,436 mm), 2,436 mm,
(32 mm) and larger, (32 mm) every floor
(3,048 mm) level
Schedule 40 PVC and Solvent Cemented All sizes, (1,219 mm). Base and each floor
ABS DWV Allow for expansion Provide mid-story
every (9,144 mm)3,6 guides. Provide for
expansion every (9,144
mm)3
CPVC Solvent Cemented (25 mm) and smaller, Base and each floor
(914 mm),(32 mm) and Provide mid-story
larger, (1,219 mm) guides6
PEX Metal Inserts and (813 mm) Base and each floor
Metal Provide mid-story
Compression guides
PEX-ALPEX Metal Inserts and (12 mm),(20 mm) and Base and each floor
Metal (25 mm) all (2,489 mm) Provide mid-story
Compression guides
PE-AL-PE Metal Inserts and (15 mm) (20 mm) and Base and each floor
Metal (25 mm) all sizes 98 Provide mid-story
Compression (2,489 mm) guides
Polypropylene (PP) Fusion Weld (25 mm) and smaller, Base and each floor
(socket, but, 813 mm), (32 mm) and Provide mid-story
saddle, larger, 4 feet (1,219 guides
electrofusion), mm)
threaded (metal
threads only), or
mechanical
Source: US-UPC 2009 (Table 3-2)
Footnotes of Table 8-16:

1. Support adjacent to joint, a maximum of eighteen 457 mm
2. Brace at a maximum of 12,192 mm intervals to prevent horizontal movement
3. Support at each horizontal branch connection
4. Hangers shall not be placed on the coupling
5. Vertical water lines shall be permitted to be supported in accordance with recognized
engineering principles with regard to expansion and contraction, approved by authority having
jurisdiction
6. See the appropriate IAPMO Installation Standard for expansion and other special requirements
8-65
required by this section. Drain pipe shall be placed on filter material in an

approved manner. The drain lines shall then be covered with filter material to
the minimum depth required by this section and this covered with untreated
building paper, straw, or similar porous material to prevent closure of voids
with earth backfill. No earth backfill shall be placed over the filter material
cover until after inspection and acceptance.
Exception: Listed or approved plastic leaching chambers may be used in lieu
of pipe and filter material. Chamber installations shall follow the rules for
disposal fields, where applicable, and shall conform to manufacturer’s
installation instructions.
A grade board staked in the trench to the depth of filter material shall be
utilized when distribution line is constructed with drain tile or a flexible pipe
material which will not maintain alignment without continuous support.
When seepage pits are used in combination with disposal fields, the filter
material in the trenches shall terminate at least 1.524 m from the pit
excavation and the line extending from such points to the seepage pit shall be
approved pipe with water tight joints.
Where two (2) or more drain lines are installed, an approved distribution box
of sufficient size to receive lateral lines shall be installed at the head of each
disposal field. The inverts of all outlets shall be level and the invert of the inlet
shall be at least 25.4 mm above the outlets. Distribution boxes shall be
designed to insure equal flow and shall be installed on a level concrete slab in
natural or compacted soil. Distribution boxes shall be coated on the inside
with a bituminous coating or other approved method acceptable to the
Sanitary Engineer.
All laterals from a distribution box to the disposal field shall be approved pipe
with water tight joints. Multiple disposal field laterals, wherever practicable,
shall be of uniform length.
Connections between a septic tank and a distribution box shall be laid with
approved pipe with water tight joints on natural ground or compacted fill.
When the quantity of sewage exceeds the amount that can be disposed in
152.4 m of leach line, a dosing tank shall be used. Dosing tanks shall be
equipped with an automatic siphon or pump which discharges the tank once
every three (3) or four (4) hours. The tank shall have a capacity equal to 60 to
75% of the interior capacity of the pipe to be dosed at one time. Where the
total length of pipe exceeds 304.8 m, the dosing tank shall be provided with
two (2) siphons or pumps dosing alternately and each serving one half (1/2)
of the leach field.
8-71
Table 8-19 Location of Sewage Disposal System Table 8-20 *Capacity of Septic Tanks
Minimum Horizontal Distance Clearance Single Family Multiple Dwelling Other Uses: Minimum
Structure Required Seepage Pit or Dwellings – Units or Maximum Fixture Septic Tank
Cesspool Number of Apartments – One Units Served per Capacity
Building Septic Tank Disposal Field Bedrooms Bedroom Each Table7-3
Sewer Liters
Buildings or structures 0.610 1.524 2.438 2.438 1 or 2 15 2838
Property line adjoining Private property Clear2

1.524 1.524 2.438 3 20 3785
Water supply wells 15.24 3 15.24 30.5m 45.7 4 2 units 25 4542

5 or 6 3 33 5678
Streams 15.24 15.24 15.240 6 30.5
4 45 7570
Trees - 3.048 3.048
5 55 8516
Seepage pits or cesspools - 1.524 1.524 3.658
6 60 9463
Disposal field - 1.524 1.219 4 1.524
7 70 10,409
On site domestic water service line - 1.524 1.524 1.524 8 80 11,355
Distribution box 3.048 - 1.524 1.524 9 90 12,301
Pressure Public water main 3. 048 5

3.048 3.048 3.048 10 100 13,248
Source: Table K-1 UPC 2000 Edition Source: Table K-2 UPC 2000 Edition
Footnotes of Table 8-19: Footnotes of Table 8-20:

When disposal fields and / or seepage pits are installed in sloping ground, the minimum horizontal 1. Extra bedroom, 568 liters each.
distance between any part of the leaching system and ground surface shall be 4.572 m. 2. Extra dwelling units over 10, add 946 liters each.
1. Including porches and steps, whether covered or uncovered, breezeways, roofed porte- 3. Extra fixture units over 100, add 95 liters per fixture unit.
cocheres, roofed patios, carports, covered walks, covered driveways and similar structures or
*Septic tank sizes in this table include sludge storage capacity and the connection of domestic food
appurtenances.
waste disposal units without further volume increase.
2. “No building sewer or other drainage piping or part thereof, constructed of materials other than
those approved for use under or within a building, shall be installed under or within 0.610 m of
any building or structure, or less than 0.305 m below the surface of the ground.”
3. All drainage piping shall clear domestic water supply wells by at least 15.24 m. This distance
may be reduced to not less than 7.62 m when the drainage piping is constructed of materials
approved for use within a building.
4. Plus 0.61 m for each additional 0.305 m of depth in excess of 0.305 m below the bottom of the
drain line. (See also Section 8.3.15.7).
5. For parallel construction: For crossings, approval by the Health Department shall be required.
6. These minimum clear horizontal distances shall also apply between disposal field, seepage
pits, and the ocean mean higher high tide line.
8-77 8-78
Table 8-21 Estimated Waste / Sewage Flow Rates Recommended Design Criteria. Sewage disposal systems sized using the
Type of Occupancy Liters Per Day estimated waste / sewage flow rates should be calculated as follows:
Airports 56.8 per employee
 Waste/sewage flow, up to 5677.5 L / day Flow x 1.5 = septic tank size
18.9 per passenger
Bowling alleys (snack bar only) 283.9 per land
 Waste/sewage flow, over 5677.5 L / day Flow x 0.75 + 1125 = septic tank
size
Camps
Campground with central comfort station 132.5 per person  Secondary system shall be sized for total flow per 24 hours.
Campground with flush toilets, no showers 94.6 per person
Day camps (no meals served) 56.8 per person Table 8-22 Design Criteria of Five Typical Soils
Summer and seasonal 189.3 per person Maximum absorption

Required leaching capacity in L / sq. m of
Churches (Sanctuary) 18.9 per seat
Type of Soil area / L leaching area for
with kitchen waste 26.5 per seat (sq.m / L) a 24 hrs period
Dance halls 18.9 per person Coarse sand or gravel 0.005 203.7
Factories Fine sand 0.006 162.9
No showers 94.6 per employee Sandy loam or sandy clay 0.010 101.8
With showers 132.5 per employee Clay with considerable sand or gravel 0.022 44.8
Cafeteria, add 18.9 per employee Clay with small amount of sand or gravel 0.030 32.6
Hospitals 946.3 per bed
Source: Table K-4 UPC 2000 Edition
Kitchen waste only 94.6 per bed
Laundry waste only 151.4 per bed Table 8-23 Septic Tank Capacity Limits
Hotels (no kitchen waste) 227.1 per bed (2 person)
Required Square meter of Maximum Septic Tank
Institutions (Resident) 283.9 per person Septic Tank Capacity (m2 / L) Size Allowable (Liters)
Nursing home 473.1 per person 0.005–0.006 28,387.5
Rest home 473.1 per person 0.010 18,925.0
Laundries, self-service ,in. 10 hrs / day 189.3 per wash cycle 0.022 13,247.5
Restaurants – cafeterias 75.7 per employee 0.030 11,355.0
Toilet 26.5 per customer Source: Table K-5 UPC 2000 Edition
kitchen waste 22.7 per meal
add for garbage disposal 3.8 per meal 8.3.16 Storm Drainage System
add for cocktail lounge 7.6 per customer Similar in physical design to Sewerage system but differs in discharge content
kitchen waste – disposable service 7.6 per meal which is storm water, the system discharges areas but not limited to: service
Schools – Staff and office 75.7 per person areas exposed to atmosphere precipitations or other influenced areas wherein
Elementary students 56.8 per person storm water is the main matter to discharge, such All roofs, paved areas, yards,
courts, and courtyards, roof, decks, balconies, parking, site areas shall be
Intermediate and high 75.7 per student
drained into a separate storm sewer system, or into a combined sewer system
with gym and showers, add 18.9 per student
where a separate storm sewer system is not available, or to some other place
with cafeteria, add 11.4 per student
of disposal satisfactory to the Sanitary Engineer. The system is connected by
Boarding, total waste 378.5 per person
gravity flow into the Public storm drainage, physically constrained gravity
Service station, toilets 3785 for first bay discharges requires ejector pumps for proper discharging. In Parking areas Oil
Stores 75.7 per employee Interceptors must be added into the system sub-collector lines at points
Public restrooms, add 1 per 4.1m2 of floor space appropriate for maintenance. In the case of one- and two-family dwellings,
Swimming pools, Public 37.9 per person storm water may be discharged on flat areas such as streets or lawns so long
Theaters, auditoriums 18.9 per seat as the storm water shall flow away from the building and away from adjoining
Drive-in 37.9 per space property, and shall not create a nuisance.
Source: Table K-3 UPC 2000 Edition
8-79 8-80
diameter and have a union or other approved quick disconnect assembly to

make the pump accessible for servicing.
For separate dwellings not serving continuously flowing springs or
groundwater, the sump discharge pipe may discharge onto a concrete splash
block with a minimum length of 600 mm. This pipe shall be within 100 mm of
the splash block and positioned to direct the flow parallel to the recessed line
of the splash block.
Subsoil drains subject to backflow when discharging into a storm drain shall be
provided with a backwater valve in the drain line so located as to be accessible
for inspection and maintenance.
Nothing in Section 8.3.17.2 shall prevent drains that serve either subsoil
drains or areaways of a detached building from discharging to a properly
graded open area, provided that:
 They do not serve continuously flowing springs or groundwater;
 The point of discharge is at least 3.048 m from any property line; and
 It is impracticable to discharge such drains to a storm drain, to an
approved water course, to the front street curb or gutter, or to an alley.
Drain Systems: Building Subdrains. Building subdrains located below the
Public sewer level shall discharge into a sump or receiving tank, the contents
of which shall be automatically lifted and discharged into the drainage system
as required for building sumps.
Areaway Drains: All open subsurface space adjacent to a building, serving as
an entrance to the basement or cellar of a building, shall be provided with a
drain or drains. Such areaway drains shall be 50 mm minimum diameter for
areaways not exceeding 9.3 m2 in area, and shall be discharged in the manner
provided for subsoil drains not serving continuously flowing springs or
ground water (see Section 8.3.16.1) Areaways in excess of 9.3 m2 shall not
drain into subsoil. Areaway drains for areaways exceeding 9.3 m2 shall be
sized according to Table 8-23.
Window Areaway Drains: Window areaways not exceeding 0.9 m2 in area
may discharge to the subsoil drains through a 50 mm pipe. However, window
areaways exceeding 0.9 m2 in area shall be handled in the manner provided
for entrance areaways.
Filling Stations and Motor Vehicle Washing Establishments: Public filling
stations and motor vehicle washing establishments shall have the paved area
sloped toward sumps or gratings within the property lines. Curbs not less than
152 mm high shall be placed where required to direct water to gratings or
sumps.
Paved Areas: Where the occupant creates surface water drainage, the sumps,
gratings or floor drains shall be piped to a storm drain or an approved water
course.
8-82
Roof Drainage: Primary Roof Drainage. Roof areas of a building shall be

drained by roof drains or gutters. The location and sizing of drains and gutters
shall be coordinated with the structural design and pitch of the roof. Unless
otherwise required by the Sanitary Engineer/ Master Plumber, roof drains,
gutters, vertical conductors or leaders, and horizontal storm drains for
primary drainage shall be sized based on a storm of sixty (60) minutes
duration and 100 year return period.
Secondary Roof Drainage: Where parapet walls or other construction extend
above the roof and create areas where storm water would become trapped if
the primary roof drainage system failed to provide sufficient drainage, an
independent secondary roof drainage system consisting of scuppers,
standpipes, or roof drains shall be provided. Secondary roof drainage systems
shall be sized in accordance with Section 8.3.16.1 “Roof Drainage” of these
Design Guidelines. Overflow drains shall be the same size as the roof drains
with the inlet flow line 50 mm above the low point of the roof and shall be
installed independent from the roof drains.
Where secondary roof drainage is provided by means of roof drains or
standpipes, the secondary system shall be separate from the primary system
and shall discharge independently at grade or other approved point of
discharge.
Where secondary roof drainage is provided, the overflow level(s) into the
secondary system shall be determined by the structural design of the roof,
including roof deflection, at a level not less than 50 mm above the level of the
primary drain. An allowance shall be made to account for the required
overflow head of water above the secondary inlets. The elevation of the
secondary inlet plus the required overflow head shall not exceed the
maximum allowable water level on the roof.
Scuppers shall be sized as rectangular weirs, using hydraulic principles to
determine the required length and resulting overflow head. Secondary roof
drains and standpipes shall be sized according to Table 8-24. Where
standpipes are used, the head allowance required under Section 8.3.16.1
“Secondary Roof Drainage” shall be not less than 38 mm.
Equivalent Systems: When approved by the Sanitary Engineer, the
requirements of Section 8.3.16.1 “Roof Drainage” shall not preclude the
installation of an engineered roof drainage system that has sufficient
capacity to prevent water from ponding on the roof in excess of that
allowed in the roof structural design with a rainfall rate of at least twice
that for a 100-year, 60-minute storm and with a blockage in any single point
in the storm drainage system.
Cleanouts: For building storm drains shall comply with the requirements of
Section 8.3.3.5.
Rain leaders and conductors connected to a building storm sewer shall have a
cleanout installed at the base of the outside leader or outside conductor before
it connects to the horizontal drain.
8-83
Table 8-24 Sizing Roof Drains, Leaders, and Vertical Rainwater Piping (METRIC)
Size of Drain, Flow Maximum Allowable Horizontal Projected Roof Areas

Leader or L/s Square Meters at Various Rainfall Rates mm/hour
Pipe
Mm 25 50 75 100 125 150
50 1.5 202 101 67 51 40 34

80 4.2 600 300 200 150 120 100
100 9.1 1286 643 429 321 257 214
125 16.5 2334 1117 778 583 467 389
150 26.8 3790 1895 1263 948 758 632
200 57.6 8175 4088 2725 2044 1635 1363
Footnotes for Table 8-24:

1. The sizing data for vertical conductors, leaders, and drains is based on the pipes flowing 7/24
full.
2. For rainfall rates other than those listed, determine the allowable roof area by dividing the area
given in the 25 mm / hour column by the desired rainfall rate.
3. Vertical piping may be round, square, or rectangular. Square pipe shall be sized to enclose its
equivalent round pipe. Rectangular pipe shall have at least the same cross-Sectional area as
its equivalent round pipe, except that the ratio of its side dimensions shall not exceed 3 to 1.
Table 8-25 Sizing of Horizontal Rainwater Piping
Size of Flow at 10 Maximum Allowable Horizontal Projected Roof Areas, Square

Pipe mm mm/m Meters at Various Rainfall Rates mm / hour
Slope L/s
25 50 75 100 125 150
80 2.1 305 153 102 76 61 51

100 4.9 700 350 233 175 140 116
125 8.8 1241 621 414 310 248 207
150 14.0 1988 994 663 497 398 331
200 30.2 4273 2137 1424 1068 855 713
250 54.3 7692 3846 2564 1923 1540 1282
300 87.3 12,375 6187 4125 3094 2476 2062
375 156.0 22,110 11,055 7370 5528 4422 3683
8-86
Table 8-26 Sizing of Horizontal Rainwater Piping Table 8-28 Size of Gutters
Size of Flow at 20 Maximum Allowable Horizontal Projected Roof Areas Square Maximum Rainfall mm/hour
Pipe,mm mm/m Meters at Various Rainfall Rates mm / hour Diameter of Gutter mm
Slope L/s 50:8 76:2 101:6 127:0 152:4
25 50 75 100 125 150
5:2 mm/m Slope
80 3.0 431 216 144 108 86 72
80 31.6 21.0 15.8 12.6 10.5
100 6.9 985 492 328 246 197 164
100 66.9 44.6 33.4 26.8 22.3
125 12.4 1754 877 585 438 351 292
125 116.1 77.5 58.1 46.5 38.7
150 19.8 2806 1403 935 701 561 468
150 178.4 119.1 89.2 71.4 59.5
200 42.7 6057 3029 2019 1514 1211 1009
175 256.4 170.9 128.2 102.2 85.3
250 76.6 10,851 5425 3618 2713 2169 1807
200 369.7 246.7 184.9 147.7 123.1
300 123.2 17,465 8733 5816 4366 3493 2912
250 668.9 445.9 334.4 267.6 223.0
375 220.2 31,214 15,607 10,405 7804 6248 5202
10:4 mm/m Slope
80 44.6 29.7 22.3 17.8 14.9
Table 8-27 Sizing Of Horizontal Rainwater Piping
100 94.8 63.3 47.4 37.9 31.6
Size of Flow at 40 Maximum Allowable Horizontal Projected Roof Areas Square 125 163.5 108.9 81.8 65.4 54.5
Pipe,mm mm/m Meters at Various Rainfall Rates mm / hour
Slope,L/s 150 252.7 168.6 126.3 100.8 84.1
25 50 75 100 125 150
175 362.3 241.5 181.2 144.9 120.8
80 4.3 611 305 204 153 122 102
200 520.2 347.5 260.1 208.1 173.7
100 9.8 1400 700 465 350 280 232
250 947.6 631.7 473.8 379 315.9
125 17.5 2482 1241 827 621 494 413
20:9 mm/m Slope
150 28.1 3976 1988 1325 994 797 663
80 63.2 42.2 31.6 25.3 21.0
200 60.3 8547 4273 2847 2137 1709 1423
100 133.8 89.2 66.9 53.5 44.6
250 108.6 15,390 7695 5128 3846 3080 2564
125 232.3 155.0 116.1 92.9 77.5
300 174.6 24,749 12,374 8250 6187 4942 4125
150 356.7 237.8 178.4 142.7 118.9
375 312.0 44,220 22,110 14,753 11,055 8853 7367
175 512.8 341.9 256.4 204.9 170.9
200 739.5 493.3 369.7 295.4 246.7
Footnotes for Table 8-25 to 27: 250 133.8 891.8 668.9 534.2 445.9
The sizing data for horizontal piping is based on the pipes flowing full.
For rainfall rates other than those listed, determine the allowable roof area by dividing the area given 41:7 mm/m Slope
in the 25 mm / hour column by the desired rainfall rate.
80 89.2 59.5 44.6 35.7 29.7
100 189.5 126.3 94.8 75.8 63.2
125 328.9 219.2 164.4 131.5 109.6
150 514.7 343.3 257.3 206.2 171.9
175 724.6 483.1 362.3 289.9 241.4
200 1040.5 693.0 520.2 416.2 346.5
250 1858.0 1238.4 929.0 743.2 618.7
Source: Table 11-3 (METRIC) UPC 2000 Edition
Strainers for Flat Decks: Roof drain strainers for use on sun decks, parking
decks, and similar areas which are normally serviced and maintained may be
of the flat surface-type. Such roof drain strainers shall be level with the deck
and shall have an available inlet area of no less than two (2) times the area of
the conductor or leader to which the drain is connected.
Roof Drain Flashings: Connection between the roof and roof drains which
pass through the roof and into the interior of the building shall be made water
tight by the use of proper flashing material.
8-87 8-88
Where lead flashing material is used, it shall be a minimum of 19.5 kg/m2. Table 8-29 Controlled Flow Maximum Roof Water Depth
*Roof Rise mm Max Water Depth at Drain mm

Where copper flashing material is used, it shall be a minimum of 3.7 kg/m 2.
(Flat) 75
Size of Leaders, Conductors, and Storm Drains: Vertical Conductors and 50 100
Leaders. Vertical conductors and leaders shall be sized on the basis of the 100 125
maximum projected roof area and Table 8-22.
150 150
Size of Horizontal Storm Drains and Sewers: The size of building storm Source: Table 11-4 UPC 2000 Edition
drains or building storm sewers or any of their horizontal branches shall be *Vertical measurement from the roof surface at the drain to the highest point of the
based upon the maximum projected roof or paved area to be handled and roof surface served by the drain, ignoring any local depression immediately adjacent
Table 8-25 to Table 8-30. to the drain.
Size of Roof Gutters: The size of semicircular gutters shall be based on the No less than two (2) drains shall be installed in roof areas of 929.0 m2 or less,
maximum projected roof area and Table 8-25 to 8-26. and no less than one (1) additional drain shall be installed for each 929.0 m 2 of
Side Walls Draining onto a Roof: Where vertical walls project above a roof so as roof area over 929.0 m2.
to permit storm water to drain to the roof area below the adjacent roof area may Each roof drain shall have a pre-calibrated, fixed (non-adjustable), and
be computed from Table 8-22. proportional weir (notched) in a standing water collar inside the strainer. No
 For one (1) wall – add fifty (50%) percent of the wall area to the roof area mechanical devices or valves shall be allowed.
figures. Pipe sizing shall be based on the pre-calibrated rate of flow L/s of the pre-
 For two (2) adjacent walls – add thirty-five (35%) percent of the total wall calibrated weir for the maximum allowable water depth, and Table 8-22 and
areas. Table 8-23 to 8-25. The height of stones or other granular material above the
waterproofed surface shall not be considered in water depth measurement,
 Two (2) walls opposite of same height – add no additional area.
and the roof surface in the vicinity of the drain shall not be recessed to create a
 Two (2) walls opposite of differing heights – add fifty (50%) percent of reservoir.
wall area above top of lower wall.
Roof design, where controlled flow roof drainage is used, shall be such that
 Walls on three (3) sides – add fifty (50%) percent of area of the inner wall the minimum design roof live load is 146.5 kg / m 2 to provide a safety factor
below the top of the lowest wall, plus allowance for the area of wall above above the 73.2 kg / m 2 represented by the depth of water stored on the roof
top of lowest wall, per (2) and (4) above. as indicated in Table 8-28.
 Walls on four (4) sides – no allowance for wall areas below top of lowest Scuppers shall be provided in parapet walls. The distance of scupper bottoms
wall – add for areas above the top of the lowest wall per (1), (2), (4) and above the roof level at the drains shall not exceed the maximum distances
(5) above. specified in Table 8-30.
Values for Continuous Flow: Where there is a continuous or semi-
Table 8-30 Distance of Scupper Bottoms above Roof
continuous discharge into the building storm drain or building storm sewer, as
from a pump, ejector, air-conditioning plant, or similar device, 3.8 L / min. of Maximum Distance of
Roof Rise mm Scupper Bottom
such discharge shall be computed as being equivalent to 2.2 m2 of roof area, Above Roof Level at Drains mm
based upon a rate of rainfall of 100 mm per hour. (Flat) 75
Controlled-Flow Roof Drainage: Application. In lieu of sizing the storm 50 100
drainage system in accordance with this section “Size of Leaders, 100 125
Conductors, and Storm Drains”, the roof drainage may be sized on the basis 150 150
of controlled flow and storage of the storm water on the roof, provided the Source: Table 11-5 UPC 2000 Edition
following conditions are met:
The water from a 25 year frequency storm shall not be stored on the roof for Scupper openings shall be a maximum of 25.4 mm high. A sufficient number of
more than twenty-four (24) hours. scuppers shall be provided so that the total scupper cross-Sectional area is at
least equal to that required for horizontal storm drains in Table 8-23 to Table
During the storm, the water depth on the roof shall not exceed the depths
8-25 (column for 12.7 mm slope).
specified in Table 8-29.
8-89 8-90
pressure of 34.5 kPa or sufficient to balance a column of mercury 254 mm

in height. This pressure shall be held without introduction of additional air
for a period of at least fifteen (15) minutes. Schedule 40 plastic DWV
systems shall not be tested by the air test method.
Exceptions: When circumstances exist that make air and water tests,
impractical, and for minor maintenance, repairs and installations, the Sanitary
Engineer may perform the inspection as considered advisable by said authority
to assure that the work has been in accordance with provisions of these Design
Guidelines.
Material Uses: Rainwater piping placed within the interior of a building or
run within a vent or shaft shall be of cast iron, galvanized steel, wrought iron,
brass, copper, lead, Schedule 40 ABS DWV, Schedule 40 PVC DWV, or other
approved materials, and changes in direction shall conform to the
requirements of Section 8.3.3.4, ABS and PVC DWV piping installations shall
be installed except for individual single family dwelling units, materials
exposed within ducts or plenums shall have a flame-spread index of not more
than 25 and a smoke-developed index of not more than 50, when tested in
accordance with the Test for Surface-Burning Characteristics of the Building
Materials.
Expansion Joints Required: Expansion joints or sleeves shall be provided
where warranted by temperature variations or physical conditions.
Hangers and supports: Hangers and support shall be the same as referred to in
Section 8.3.14.2.
8.3.17 Water Supply and Distribution System

Description: The water is supplied from a local water utility service through a
metering device and into the building and / or a storage tank. The water
distribution design is based on the architectural plan. The system may be up
feed or gravity feed depending on the approach of the engineer. Potable water
is distributed by to the fixtures depending on the system adopted by the
designer.
Running Water Required: Except where not deemed necessary for safety or
sanitation by the Sanitary Engineer, each plumbing fixture shall be provided
with an adequate supply of potable running water piped thereto in an approved
manner, so arranged as to flush and keep it in a clean and sanitary condition
without danger of backflow or cross-connection. Water closets and urinals shall
be flushed by means of an approved flush tank or flushometer valve. In
jurisdictions which adopt Reclaimed Water for non-Residential Buildings
(Appendix J of UPC 2000 Edition), water closets, urinals, and trap primers in
designated non-residential buildings may be provided with reclaimed water as
defined and regulated by same referenced appendix.
Identification of a Potable and Non–Potable Water System: In all buildings
where potable water and non-potable water systems are installed, each
system shall be clearly identified. Each system shall be color coded as follows:
8-92
Potable Water – Green Background with White Lettering: Non-potable Design Criteria
Water – Yellow background with black lettering, with the words “CAUTION:
NONPOTABLEWATER, DO NOT DRINK”. Each system shall be identified with Water Distribution System
a colored band to designate the liquid being conveyed, and the direction of Hot and Cold Water Supply
normal flow shall be clearly shown. The minimum size of the letters and
1. Operating Pressure
length of the color field shall conform to Table 8-31.
Minimum = 1.7 kg/sq.cm.
A colored identification band shall be indicated every 6.096m but at least once
per room, and shall be visible from the floor level. Where vacuum breakers or Maximum = 4.22kg/sq.cm.
backflow preventers are installed with fixtures listed in Table 14-1 of UPC 2000
2. Pressure Drop Due to Friction
Edition, identification of the discharge side may be omitted. Each outlet on the
non-potable water line which could be used for special purposes shall be posted Pressure drop is determined to provide minimal effect on the delivery of
as follows: water to the fixtures. Friction effect will be lower using smoother the pipes.
“CAUTION: NONPOTABLE WATER, DO NOT DRINK” for Galvanized Steel Pipe = 120
for Cast Iron Pipe = 110
Table 8-31 Minimum Length of Color Field and Size of Letters
for Copper Pipe = 120
Outside Diameter of Pipe or Minimum Length of Color Minimum Size of Letters
Covering Field mm for polymer Pipe = 130
mm Mm
3. Velocity
15 to 32 203 12.7
40 to 50 203 19.1
Optimum velocity for cold water piping
65 to 150 305 32 Mains (maximum) = 1.8 m/s
200 to 250 619.0 64
Risers (maximum) = 2.4 m/s
Over 250 813.0 89
Branches (maximum) = 3.0 m/s
Pipe Sizing
Reclaimed Water – Purple (Pantone color #512) background and shall be
imprinted in nominal 1/2” (12.7 mm) high, black, upper case letters, with the Shall be based on water flow requirement and as provided by National Plumbing
words “CAUTION: RECLAIMED WATER, DO NOT DRINK”. Code minimum requirement, refer to Section 8.3.18.7 for Pipe Sizing for Potable
Water.
Connections Prohibitions
Faucets and Diverters: Faucets and diverters shall be connected to the water
distribution system so that hot water corresponds to the left side of the
fittings.
Unlawful Connections: No installation of potable water supply piping or part
thereof shall be made in such a manner that it will be possible for used,
unclean, polluted or contaminated water, mixtures, or substances to enter any
portion of such piping from any tank, receptor, equipment, or plumbing fixture
by reason of back-siphonage, by suction or any other cause, either during
normal use and operation thereof or when any such tank, receptor,
equipment, or plumbing fixture is flooded, or subject to pressure in excess of
the operating pressure in the hot or cold water piping.
No person shall make a connection or allow one to exist between pipes or
conduits carrying domestic water supplied by any Public or Private water
service system, and any pipes, conduits, or fixtures containing or carrying
8-93 8-94
Figure A-6 Suggested Minimum Lot Sizes, Lot Dimensions and Types for C-1 Use / Occupancy
A-7
A-8
A-9
A-10
Note: The Minimum NBCP

setbacks may have to be
relaxed as these will cause
extreme hardship and losses to
the lot owner i.e. as the resultant
to utilization is much too low.
A-11
A-12
A-13
A-14
A-15
Figure A-15 Suggested Minimum Lot Sizes, Lot Dimensions and Types for R-1
A-16
A-17
A-18
A-19
Figure A-19 Suggested Minimum Lot Sizes, Lot Dimensions and Types for R-3 Maximum
A-20
A-21
Figure A-21 Suggested Minimum Lot Sizes, Lot Dimensions and Types for R-5 Use / Occupancy
A-22
A-23
A-24
A-25
Figure A-25 Suggested Minimum Lot Sizes, Lot Dimensions and Types for R-2 Basic
A-26
A-27
A-28
A-29
A-30
A-31
A-32
Note: The Minimum NBCP setbacks may have

to relaxed as these will cause extreme
hardship and losses to the lot owner i.e. as the
resultant lot utilization is much too low.
A-33
Figure A-33 Suggested Minimum Lot Sizes, Lot Dimensions and Types for R-3 basic
A-34
A-35
A-36
A-37
A-38
Note: The Minimum NBCP setbacks may

have to be relaxed as these will cause
extreme hardship and losses to the lot
owner i.e. as the resultant lot utilization is
much too low.
A-39
A-40
Note: The Minimum NBCP setbacks may have

to be relaxed as these will cause extreme
hardship and losses to the lot owner i.e. as the
resultant lot utilization is much too low.
A-41
A-42
A-43
A-44
A-45
A-46
Annex B Outermost Faces of Buildings (OFB)
and Outermost Limits of Building
Projections (OLBP) under the 2004
Revised IRR of P.D. No. 1096 (1977
NBCP)
Contents Figure B-17 RROW Angles from Centreline that Determine the OFB of Buildings / Structures along a 20.00
m RROW ................................................................................................................................................................................ 18
B.1 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................................................... 1
Figure B-18 RROW Angles from Centreline that Determine the OFB of Buildings / Structures along a 20.00
m RROW ................................................................................................................................................................................ 19
Tables, Figures and Equations Figure B-19 RROW Angles from Centreline that Determine the OFB of Buildings / Structures along a 26.00
m RROW ................................................................................................................................................................................ 20
Table B-1 List of Acronyms used for this Annex ........................................................................................................................1
m RROW ................................................................................................................................................................................ 21
m RROW ...................................................................................................................................................................................2
m RROW ................................................................................................................................................................................ 22
m RROW ...................................................................................................................................................................................3
m RR ...........................................................................................................................................................................................4
m RROW ...................................................................................................................................................................................5
m RROW ...................................................................................................................................................................................6
m RROW ...................................................................................................................................................................................7
m RROW ...................................................................................................................................................................................8
m RROW ...................................................................................................................................................................................9
m RROW ................................................................................................................................................................................ 10
m RROW ................................................................................................................................................................................ 11
m RROW ................................................................................................................................................................................ 12
m RROW ................................................................................................................................................................................ 13
m RROW ................................................................................................................................................................................ 14
m RROW ................................................................................................................................................................................ 15
m RROW ................................................................................................................................................................................ 16
m RROW ................................................................................................................................................................................ 17
B-i B-ii
B.1 Introduction
This Annex graphically illustrates the prescribed compliances for the Outermost Face
of Buildings (OFB) and Outermost Limits of Building Projections (OLBP) based on the
derived angles from the road right-of-way (RROW) centerline as dictated by the local
government unit (LGU)-approved land use or zoning classification, RROW width,
prescribed building setbacks (including incremental setbacks), building height limit
(BHL), etc. And the resultant NO-BUILD ZONE (NBZ) under the 2004 Revised IRR of
P.D. No. 1096 (the 1977 National Building Code of the Philippines/ NBCP). The
document is intended for ready reference by physical planners, architects, designers,
and the competent reviewing authorities authorized to review/ process and approve
building plans under P.D. No. 1096.
Table B-1 List of Acronyms used for this Annex

Term Definition
C-1 Commercial 1 (Light Commercial) classification i.e. a neighborhood or
community level of commercial use or occupancy, characterized mainly
as a low-rise building/ structure for low intensity commercial/trade, service and
business activities, e.g. one to three (1 to 3) storey shopping centers, small
offices or mixed use/ occupancy buildings and the like) under Rule VII of the
2004 IRR of P.D. No. 1096 (NBCP);
C-2 Commercial 2 (Medium Commercial) classification i.e. a municipal or city level
of commercial use or occupancy, characterized mainly as a medium-rise
building/structure for medium to high intensity commercial/ trade, service and
business activities, e.g. three to five (3 to 5) storey shopping centers, medium
to large office or mixed use/ occupancy buildings/ structures and the like) under
Rule VII of the 2004 IRR of P.D. No. 1096 (NBCP);
C-3 Commercial 3 (Metropolitan Commercial) classification i.e. a metropolitan level
of commercial use/ occupancy, characterized mainly as a medium-rise to high-
rise building/ structure for high to very high intensity commercial/ trade, service
and business activities, e.g. large to very large shopping malls, very large office
or mixed use/ occupancy buildings and the like) under Rule VII of the 2004 IRR
of P.D. No. 1096 (NBCP);
R-1 Residential 1 classification (low density residential zone e.g. single family,
single-detached dwellings) under Rule VII of the 2004 IRR of P.D. No. 1096
(NBCP);
R-2 Residential 2 classification (medium density residential use or occupancy e.g.
low-rise single-attached, duplex or multi-level building/ structure for exclusive
use as multi-family dwellings) under Rule VII of the 2004 IRR of P.D. No. 1096
(NBCP);
R-3 Residential 3 classification (high density residential use or occupancy e.g. low-
rise or medium-rise building/ structure for exclusive use as multiple family
dwellings with mixed housing types) under Rule VII of the 2004 IRR of P.D. No.
1096 (NBCP);
R-4 Residential 4 classification (medium to high density residential use or
occupancy e.g. low-rise townhouse building/ structure for exclusive use as
multiple family dwellings) under Rule VII of the 2004 IRR of P.D. No. 1096
(NBCP); and
R-5 Residential 5 classification (very high density residential use or occupancy e.g.
medium-rise or high-rise condominium building/ structure for exclusive use as
multiple family dwelling) under Rule VII of the 2004 IRR of P.D. No. 1096
(NBCP).
B-1
Figure B-1 RROW Angles from Centreline that Determine the OFB of Buildings / Structures along a 3.00 m RROW
B-2
B-3
Figure B-3 RROW Angles from Centreline that Determine the OFB of Buildings / Structures along a 8.00 m RR
B-4
B-5
B-6
B-7
B-8
B-9
B-10
B-11
B-12
B-13
B-14
B-15
B-16
B-17
B-18
B-19
B-20
B-21
B-22
Annex C Proposed Typical Public Buildings
(Reference Concept-Level
Architectural Plans and Designs for
Proposed Typical Buildings Intended
for Public Use)
Contents Figure C-10

Figure C-11
Conceptual Architectural Plans of Civic Center (Option 2) ............................................................................ 13
Perspectives of 2-storey Hall of Justice Building ................................................................................................ 21
C.1 PROPOSED TYPICAL PUBLIC BUILDINGS (REFERENCE CONCEPT-LEVEL ARCHITECTURAL PLANS
Figure C-12 Conceptual Architectural Plans of 2-Storey Hall of Justice Building .......................................................... 22
AND DESIGNS FOR PROPOSED TYPICAL BUILDINGS INTENDED FOR PUBLIC USE) ............................. 1
Figure C-13 Perspective of 2-Storey Fire Station Building ...................................................................................................... 25
C.1.1 FIVE-STOREY SECONDARY SCHOOL BUILDING ....................................................................................................... 1
C.1.2 FOUR- TO EIGHT-STOREY PUBLIC HOUSING BUILDING .......................................................................................... 3 Figure C-14 Conceptual Architectural Plans of 2-Storey Fire Station Building .............................................................. 26
C.1.3 CIVIC CENTRE BUILDING (OPTION 1) .................................................................................................................. 9 Figure C-15 Perspective of Police Substation Building.............................................................................................................. 28
C.1.4 CIVIC CENTRE BUILDING (OPTION 2) ................................................................................................................ 13
C.1.5 EXPANDABLE 2-STOREY HALL OF JUSTICE BUILDING ........................................................................................... 21 Figure C-16 Conceptual Floor Plan of Police Substation Building ........................................................................................ 28
C.1.6 2-STOREY FIRE AND POLICE STATION BUILDINGS ............................................................................................... 25 Figure C-17 Perspectives of City Bus Terminal Building .......................................................................................................... 29
C.1.7 CITY BUS TERMINAL BUILDING ......................................................................................................................... 29
C.1.8 PUBLIC MARKET BUILDING ............................................................................................................................... 31 Figure C-18 Conceptual Architectural Plans of City Bus Terminal Building .................................................................... 30
C.1.9 PUBLIC GYMNASIUM BUILDING.......................................................................................................................... 36 Figure C-19 Perspectives of Public Market Building .................................................................................................................. 31
C.1.10 PUBLIC POOL AND BATH BUILDING .................................................................................................................... 37
Figure C-20 Conceptual Architectural Plans of Public Market Building ............................................................................ 32
C.1.11 COVERED COURT BUILDING ............................................................................................................................... 39
C.1.12 4-STOREY PUBLIC COVERED PARKING BUILDING ................................................................................................. 40 Figure C-21 Perspective of Public Gymnasium Building........................................................................................................... 36
C.1.13 SMALL AIRPORT PASSENGER TERMINAL BUILDING (PTB) ................................................................................... 44
Figure C-22 Conceptual Architectural Plans of Public Gymnasium Building .................................................................. 36
Figure C-23 Perspective of Public Pool and Bath Building ...................................................................................................... 37
Tables, Figures and Equations Figure C-24 Conceptual Architectural Plan of Public Pool and Bath Building ................................................................ 38
Table C-1 Spatial Programming of 5-Storey Secondary School Building .........................................................................3 Figure C-25 Perspective of Covered Court Building ................................................................................................................... 39
Table C-2 Spatial Programming of 5-Unit per Floor, 4-Storey/ 8-Storey Public Housing Building .....................8 Figure C-26 Conceptual Architectural Plan of Covered Court Structure ........................................................................... 39
Table C-3 Spatial Programming of Civic Centre Building (Option 1) ............................................................................. 11 Figure C-27 Perspective of Public Covered Parking Building ................................................................................................. 40
Table C-4 Spatial Programming of Civic Center Building (Option 2) .............................................................................. 16 Figure C-28 Conceptual Architectural Plans of Public Covered Parking Building......................................................... 40
Table C-5 Spatial Programming of Expandable 2-storey Hall of Justice Building ..................................................... 24 Figure C-29 Perspectives of a Small Airport Passenger Terminal Building ..................................................................... 44
Table C-6 Spatial Programming of 2-storey Fire Station Building ................................................................................... 27 Figure C-30 Conceptual Architectural Plan of a Small Port Passenger Terminal Building (PTB) .......................... 45
Table C-7 Spatial Programming of Police Substation Building .......................................................................................... 29 Figure C-31 Perspectives of a Small Port Passenger Terminal Building (PTB) Option 1 ........................................... 46
Table C-8 Spatial Programming of City Bus Terminal Building ........................................................................................ 31 Figure C-32 Conceptual Architectural Plan of a Small Port Passenger Terminal Building (PTB) Option 2….. 47
Table C-9 Spatial Programming of Public Market Building ................................................................................................. 34
Table C-10 Spatial Programming of Public Gymnasium Building ....................................................................................... 37
Table C-11 Spatial Programming of Public Pool and Bath Building................................................................................... 38
Table C-12 Spatial Programming of Covered Court Structure ............................................................................................. 40
Table C-13 Spatial Programming of 4-storey Public Covered Parking Building .......................................................... 42
Table C-14 Spatial Programming of a Small Port Passenger Terminal Building (PTB) Option 1 ......................... 45
Table C-15 Spatial Programming of a Small Port Passenger Terminal Building (PTB) Option 2… ..................... 47
Figure C-1 Perspective of a 5-storey Secondary School Building ..........................................................................................1

Figure C-2 Conceptual Architectural Plans of 5-storey Secondary School Building .....................................................1
Figure C-3 Perspectives of 4-storey Public Housing Building ................................................................................................3
Figure C-4 Conceptual Architectural Plans of 4-storey Public Housing Building ..........................................................4
Figure C-7 Perspectives of Civic Center Building (Option 1) ..................................................................................................9
Figure C-8 Conceptual Architectural Plans of Civic Center Building (Option 1) ............................................................9
Figure C-9 Perspectives of Civic Center Building (Option 2) ............................................................................................... 13
C-i C-ii
C-2
C-5
Table C-2 Spatial Programming of 5-Unit per Floor, 4-Storey/ 8-Storey Public
Housing Building
5-UNIT PER FLOOR, 12-STOREY SPACE PROGRAM
BUILDING
DIMENSION (m) SUBTOTAL
NAME OF SPACE AREA(m²) (sq.m)
W D
GROUND FLOOR
Garden/Atrium 12.8 3.6 46.08
Stairwell 4 2.85 11.4
Elevator 2.8 2.6 7.28
E.E. 1 2.6 2.6
Open Area / Circulation 16.4 24.5 334.12
TOTAL GROUND FLOOR AREA 16.4 26 411
TYPICAL 2ND - 11TH FLOOR
TYPICAL UNIT [X5] 5.5 10 275
Balcony 5.5 1.5 8.25
Bedroom 2 2.7 6
Master's Bedroom 3.5 2.7 9.45
Dining and Living 3 5.8 16.8
Toilet and Bath 01 2.4 1.8 3.96
Toilet and Bath 02 2.4 1.4 3.72
Kitchen 2.4 2.6 6.24
Subtotal: Typical Unit 54.42
Elevator 2.8 2.6 7.28
E.E. 1 2.6 2.6
Circulation 109.92
TOTAL TYPICAL 2ND-11TH FLOOR 16.4 27.5 406.2
AREA
ROOF DECK
Machine Room 5.4 2.6 14.04
Open Area 16.4 27.5 380.76
TOTAL ROOF DECK FLOOR AREA 16.4 27.5 406.2
TOTAL 5-UNIT PER FLOOR, 12- 5285.4
STOREY PUBLIC HOUSING
BUILDING FLOOR AREA
C-7 C-8
C-10
Table C-3 Spatial Programming of Civic Centre Building (Option 1)

CIVIC CENTER BUILDING [OPTION 1] SPACE PROGRAM
DIMENSION (m) SUBTOTAL
NAME OF SPACE AREA(m²) (sq.m)
W D
GROUND FLOOR
Lobby 50 40 1400
Male's Toilet 3.5 10 35
Female's Toilet 3.5 10 35
Subtotal: Public Space 1470
Enclosed Hallways (Left Wing) 260
Enclosed Hallways (Right Wing) 226
Subtotal: Private Circulation 486
Stairwell 1 3 6 18
Stairwell 2 3 6 18
Stairwell 3 10 10 100
Subtotal: Stairwells 136
Consultation Office 10 10 100
Legal Affairs Office 10 10 100
Attorney's Office 10 10 100
Traffic Office 10 10 100
Social Welfare and Development Office 10 10 100
Engineering Design 10 10 100
Engineering Office 10 10 100
Planning and Development Office 10 10 100
Mayor's Office 8
C-11
CIVIC CENTER BUILDING [OPTION 2] SPACE PROGRAM CIVIC CENTER BUILDING [OPTION 2] SPACE PROGRAM
DIMENSION (m) Subtotal DIMENSION (m) Subtotal
NAME OF SPACE AREA(m²) (sq.m) NAME OF SPACE AREA(m²) (sq.m)
W D W D
Auditor's Office 10 8.3 83 Females Toilet 3.5 9.5 33.25
Chief Deputy Auditor Office 10 8.3 83 Waiting Areas & Circulation 5445.55
Conference room 10 6 60 Subtotal: Public Spaces 5546.55
Accounting Office 10 6 60 Stairwell 1 3 6 18
Treasurer Office 10 8.5 85 Stairwell 2 3 4.5 13.5
Personnel Office 10 8.5 85 Stairwell 3 3 6 18
Engineering Design Office 10 11.5 115 Stairwell 4 3 4.5 13.5
Plan Checking Office 10 11.5 115 Stairwell 5 10 10.5 105
Water Services Office 10 11.5 115 Stairwell 6 10 10.5 105
Public Information Office 10 11.5 115 Subtotal: stairwells 273
Consultation Office 10 11.5 115 UPPER GROUND FLOOR TOTAL 13127
Legal Affairs Office 10 11.5 115 SECOND FLOOR PLAN
Traffic Office 10 11.5 115 Councillor’s Office 1 10 11.5 115
Social Welfare and Development Office 10 11.5 115 Councillor’s Office 2 10 11.5 115
Control centre 20 22.3 446 Legal Counsel Office 10 11.5 115
Information Desk and Public Service 20 23.5 470 Library 20 11.5 230
Police Assembly Room 24.5 13.8 338.1 Clustered Cell 1 10 11.5 115
Police Office 24.5 32 784 Clustered Cell 2 10 11.5 115
Police Chief Office 10 6 60 Clustered Cell 3 10 11.5 115
Police Public Safety Office 1 10 8.5 85 Clustered Cell 4 10 11.5 115
Interview Room 03 5 6 30 Clustered Cell 5 10 11.5 115
Interview Room 04 5 6 30 E.E. 2 3 6.5 19.5
Police Public Safety Office 2 10 8.5 85 Shower and Locker Area 4 8 32
File/s Storage Room 6.5 6 39 Utilities Storage 3 3 9
Conference room 6.5 8.5 55.25 Dining and Dayroom Area 1 12 17 197.4
Police Office 1 10 11.5 115 Dining and Dayroom Area 2 12 23.5 282
Police Office 2 10 11.5 115 Prison Area 58 53 2210
Police Office 3 10 11.5 115 Kit 10 4 40
Police Office 4 10 11.5 115 Storage Room 7 6 42
Police Office 5 10 11.5 115 Interrogation Room 10 5.25 52.5
Police Office 6 10 11.5 115 Visiting Room 1 10 5.25 52.5
Police Office 7 10 11.5 115 Visiting Room 2 10 6.5 65
Police Office 8 10 11.5 115 Warden's Office 10 9.3 93
General Storage Room 2 7 8 56 Police Captain's Office 10 9.3 93
Clustered Cell 1 10 7.3 73 Conference Room 8 9.3 74.4
Clustered Cell 2 10 6.5 65 Patrol Guards Office 20 23.5 470
Clustered Cell 3 10 4 40 File/s Storage Room 7 14.5 101.5
Firearms and Equipment Storage Room 10 17 170 Conference Room 10 6 60
Storage Room 7 4.5 31.5 Assistant City Management Office 10 8.5 85
Subtotal: Private Spaces 7307.45 Clerical 10 6 60
E.E. 3 11.5 34.5 City Management Office 10 8.5 85
Males Toilet 3.5 9.5 33.25 File/s Storage Room 7 14 98
C-17 C-18
W D W D
Conference Room 7 7.5 52.5 Shower and Locker Area 4 8 32
Council Hall 2 30 21.5 645 Utilities Storage 3 3 9
Council Hall 1 30 22.3 669 General Storage Room 2 7 8 56
Councillor’s Office 3 10 7.3 73 Attorney's Office 1 10 7.3 73
Photocopy Room 10 4 40 Photocopy Room 10 4 40
Storage Room 7 6 42 Storage Room 7 6 42
Maintenance Office 10 6.5 65 Maintenance Office 10 6.5 65
Conference Room 10 8 80 Conference Room 10 8 80
City Administrator's Office 10 6.5 65 Judge's Office 1 10 6.5 65
Vice Mayor's Office 1 10 6.5 65 Judge's Office 2 10 6.5 65
Mayor's Office 10 6.5 65 Judge's Office 4 10 6.5 65
General Storage Room 7 8 56 Bailiff 1 of Courthouse 1 7 7.3 51.1
General Storage Room 7 8 56 Storage of Courthouse 1 7 6.5 45.5
E.E. 3 11.5 34.5 Bailiff 2 of Courthouse 1 7 8.5 59.5
Subtotal: Private Areas 7509.8 Courthouse 1 30 22.3 669
Males Toilet 3.5 9.5 33.25 Bailiff 1 of Courthouse 2 7 6.5 45.5
Females Toilet 3.5 9.5 33.25 Storage of Courthouse 2 7 7.8 54.6
Waiting Areas & Circulation 8038.7 Bailiff 2 of Courthouse 2 7 7.2 50.4
Subtotal: Public Spaces 8139.7 Courthouse 2 30 21.5 645
Stairwell 1 3 6 18 File/s Storage Room 7 14.5 101.5
Stairwell 2 3 6.5 19.5 Conference Room 10 6 60
Stairwell 3 3 6 18 Hearing Room 03 10 8.5 85
Stairwell 4 3 6.5 19.5 Clerical 10 6 60
Stairwell 5 10 10.5 105 Hearing Room 04 10 8.5 85
Stairwell 6 10 10.5 105 Dining and Dayroom Area 1 12 17 197.4
Subtotal: stairwells 285 Dining and Dayroom Area 2 12 23.5 282
TOTAL SECOND FLOOR 15900 Prison Area 58 53 2210
THIRD-FOURTH FLOOR Kit 10 4 40
General Storage Room 1 7 8 56 Storage Room 7 6 42
E.E. 3 11.5 34.5 Interrogation Room 10 5.25 52.5
Public Attorney's Office 10 11.5 115 Visiting Room 1 10 5.25 52.5
Hearing Room 1 10 11.5 115 Visiting Room 2 10 6.5 65
Hearing Room 2 10 11.5 115 Warden's Office 10 9.3 93
Library 20 11.5 230 Police Captain's Office 10 9.3 93
Clustered Cell 3 10 11.5 115 Subtotal: Private Areas 7665.9
Clustered Cell 4 10 11.5 115 Males Toilet 3.5 9.5 33.25
Clustered Cell 5 10 11.5 115 Females Toilet 3.5 9.5 33.25
E.E. 2 3 6.5 19.5 Waiting Areas & Circulation 7882.6
C-19 C-20
W D W D
Auditor's Office 10 8.3 83 Females Toilet 3.5 9.5 33.25
Chief Deputy Auditor Office 10 8.3 83 Waiting Areas & Circulation 5445.55
Conference room 10 6 60 Subtotal: Public Spaces 5546.55
Accounting Office 10 6 60 Stairwell 1 3 6 18
Treasurer Office 10 8.5 85 Stairwell 2 3 4.5 13.5
Personnel Office 10 8.5 85 Stairwell 3 3 6 18
Engineering Design Office 10 11.5 115 Stairwell 4 3 4.5 13.5
Plan Checking Office 10 11.5 115 Stairwell 5 10 10.5 105
Water Services Office 10 11.5 115 Stairwell 6 10 10.5 105
Public Information Office 10 11.5 115 Subtotal: stairwells 273
Consultation Office 10 11.5 115 UPPER GROUND FLOOR TOTAL 13127
Legal Affairs Office 10 11.5 115 SECOND FLOOR PLAN
Traffic Office 10 11.5 115 Councillor’s Office 1 10 11.5 115
Social Welfare and Development Office 10 11.5 115 Councillor’s Office 2 10 11.5 115
Control centre 20 22.3 446 Legal Counsel Office 10 11.5 115
Information Desk and Public Service 20 23.5 470 Library 20 11.5 230
Police Assembly Room 24.5 13.8 338.1 Clustered Cell 1 10 11.5 115
Police Office 24.5 32 784 Clustered Cell 2 10 11.5 115
Police Chief Office 10 6 60 Clustered Cell 3 10 11.5 115
Police Public Safety Office 1 10 8.5 85 Clustered Cell 4 10 11.5 115
Interview Room 03 5 6 30 Clustered Cell 5 10 11.5 115
Interview Room 04 5 6 30 E.E. 2 3 6.5 19.5
Police Public Safety Office 2 10 8.5 85 Shower and Locker Area 4 8 32
File/s Storage Room 6.5 6 39 Utilities Storage 3 3 9
Conference room 6.5 8.5 55.25 Dining and Dayroom Area 1 12 17 197.4
Police Office 1 10 11.5 115 Dining and Dayroom Area 2 12 23.5 282
Police Office 2 10 11.5 115 Prison Area 58 53 2210
Police Office 3 10 11.5 115 Kit 10 4 40
Police Office 4 10 11.5 115 Storage Room 7 6 42
Police Office 5 10 11.5 115 Interrogation Room 10 5.25 52.5
Police Office 6 10 11.5 115 Visiting Room 1 10 5.25 52.5
Police Office 7 10 11.5 115 Visiting Room 2 10 6.5 65
Police Office 8 10 11.5 115 Warden's Office 10 9.3 93
General Storage Room 2 7 8 56 Police Captain's Office 10 9.3 93
Clustered Cell 3 10 4 40 File/s Storage Room 7 14.5 101.5
Firearms and Equipment Storage Room 10 17 170 Conference Room 10 6 60
Storage Room 7 4.5 31.5 Assistant City Management Office 10 8.5 85
Subtotal: Private Spaces 7307.45 Clerical 10 6 60
E.E. 3 11.5 34.5 City Management Office 10 8.5 85
Males Toilet 3.5 9.5 33.25 File/s Storage Room 7 14 98
C-17 C-18
W D W D
Conference Room 7 7.5 52.5 Shower and Locker Area 4 8 32
Council Hall 2 30 21.5 645 Utilities Storage 3 3 9
Council Hall 1 30 22.3 669 General Storage Room 2 7 8 56
Photocopy Room 10 4 40 Photocopy Room 10 4 40
Storage Room 7 6 42 Storage Room 7 6 42
Maintenance Office 10 6.5 65 Maintenance Office 10 6.5 65
Conference Room 10 8 80 Conference Room 10 8 80
City Administrator's Office 10 6.5 65 Judge's Office 1 10 6.5 65
Mayor's Office 10 6.5 65 Judge's Office 4 10 6.5 65
General Storage Room 7 8 56 Bailiff 1 of Courthouse 1 7 7.3 51.1
General Storage Room 7 8 56 Storage of Courthouse 1 7 6.5 45.5
E.E. 3 11.5 34.5 Bailiff 2 of Courthouse 1 7 8.5 59.5
Subtotal: Private Areas 7509.8 Courthouse 1 30 22.3 669
Males Toilet 3.5 9.5 33.25 Bailiff 1 of Courthouse 2 7 6.5 45.5
Females Toilet 3.5 9.5 33.25 Storage of Courthouse 2 7 7.8 54.6
Waiting Areas & Circulation 8038.7 Bailiff 2 of Courthouse 2 7 7.2 50.4
Subtotal: Public Spaces 8139.7 Courthouse 2 30 21.5 645
Stairwell 1 3 6 18 File/s Storage Room 7 14.5 101.5
Stairwell 2 3 6.5 19.5 Conference Room 10 6 60
Stairwell 3 3 6 18 Hearing Room 03 10 8.5 85
Stairwell 4 3 6.5 19.5 Clerical 10 6 60
Stairwell 5 10 10.5 105 Hearing Room 04 10 8.5 85
Stairwell 6 10 10.5 105 Dining and Dayroom Area 1 12 17 197.4
Subtotal: stairwells 285 Dining and Dayroom Area 2 12 23.5 282
TOTAL SECOND FLOOR 15900 Prison Area 58 53 2210
THIRD-FOURTH FLOOR Kit 10 4 40
General Storage Room 1 7 8 56 Storage Room 7 6 42
E.E. 3 11.5 34.5 Interrogation Room 10 5.25 52.5
Public Attorney's Office 10 11.5 115 Visiting Room 1 10 5.25 52.5
Hearing Room 1 10 11.5 115 Visiting Room 2 10 6.5 65
Hearing Room 2 10 11.5 115 Warden's Office 10 9.3 93
Library 20 11.5 230 Police Captain's Office 10 9.3 93
Clustered Cell 3 10 11.5 115 Subtotal: Private Areas 7665.9
Clustered Cell 4 10 11.5 115 Males Toilet 3.5 9.5 33.25
Clustered Cell 5 10 11.5 115 Females Toilet 3.5 9.5 33.25
E.E. 2 3 6.5 19.5 Waiting Areas & Circulation 7882.6
C-19 C-20
Table C-5 Spatial Programming of Expandable 2-storey Hall of Justice Building

EXPANDABLE 2-STOREY SPACE PROGRAM
HALL OF JUSTICE BUILDING
DIMENSION (m)
NAME OF SPACE AREA(m²)
W D
GROUND FLOOR
Judge's Office 01 10 6 60
Entry to Cells 3.6 6 21.6
Cell 1 3.8 3 11.4
Cell 2 3.8 3 11.4
Judge's Office 03 8 7.5 60
Staff's Office 01 8 7.5 60
Attorney's Office 3 8 7.5 60
Attorney's Consultation 8 10 80
Staff's Office 02 8 7.5 60
File Storage 8 5 40
Male's Toilet 8 3.25 23.1635
Female's Toilet 8 3.25 23.1635
Storage 8 3 24
General Office 8 10 80
Court room 01 8.85 8.85 78.3225
Court room 02 8.85 8.85 78.3225
Court room 03 8.85 8.85 78.3225
Court room 04 8.85 8.85 78.3225
Court Lobby 17.7 20 304
Stairs 01 3 4.25 14.625
Stairs 02 3 4.25 14.625
Stairs 03 5 5 25
Stairs 04 5 5 25
Circulation 307.023
GROUND FLOOR TOTAL 37.7 47.7 1798.29
SECOND FLOOR
File Storage 4 6 24
Entry to Cells 3.6 6 21.6
Cell 1 3.8 3 11.4
Cell 2 3.8 3 11.4
Hearing Room 01 8 7.5 60
Attorney's Consultation 8 10 80
C-23 C-24
Figure C-14 Conceptual Architectural Plans of 2-Storey Fire Station Building
C-26
Table C-6 Spatial Programming of 2-storey Fire Station Building

2-STOREY FIRE STATION BUILDING SPACE PROGRAM
NAME OF SPACE DIMENSION (m)
AREA(m²)
W D
GROUND FLOOR
Maintenance Area 10 14 140
Fire hose Storage 4 3.5 14
Turnout Storage 4 3.5 14
Medical Supplies Storage 4 3.5 14
Stairwell 3.2 3 9.6
Clinic 4 6 24
Clinic Head's Office 4 6 24
Firefighter's Captain Office 4 6 24
Chief Firefighter's Office 4 6 24
Admins Office 4 6 24
Lobby 20 8 106
Conference Room 9 5 45
Alarm / Watch Room 3 3 9
Fire Trucks 29 14 354.4
TOTAL GROUND FLOOR AREA 826
SECOND FLOOR
Male Firefighter's Dressing Room 6 6 36
Utility Storage 3 3 9
Male Firefighter's Toilet and Bath 7 6 42
Female Firefighter's Toilet and Bath 7 6 42
Utility Storage 3 3 9
Female Firefighter's Dressing Room 6 6 36
Male Firefighter's Quarters 16 6 96
Female Firefighter's Quarters 16.05 6 96.3
Stairwell 3.2 3 9.6
Circulation 38.1 14 157.5
TOTAL SECOND FLOOR AREA 375.9
TOTAL FIRE STATION BUILDING 1201.9
FLOOR AREA
C-27
Table C-9 Spatial Programming of Public Market Building

PUBLIC MARKET SPACE PROGRAM
DIMENSION (m)
W D
STALL(LEFT WING) Comfort Room 7.2 9.6 69.12
1 to 16 7.2 12 86.4
7.2 7.2 51.84
17 to 40 4.8 9.6 46.08
4.8 12 57.6
4.8 7.2 34.56
41 to 64 4.8 9.6 46.08
4.8 12 57.6
4.8 7.2 34.56
65 to 88 4.8 9.6 46.08
4.8 12 57.6
4.8 7.2 34.56
89 to 112 4.8 9.6 46.08
4.8 12 57.6
4.8 7.2 34.56
113 to 136 7.2 9.6 69.12
7.2 12 86.4
7.2 7.2 51.84
Subtotal: LEFT WING 967.68
C-33 C-34
PUBLIC MARKET SPACE PROGRAM

DIMENSION (m)
W D
STALL(RIGHT WING)
1 to 7 (Right) 7.2 7.2 51.84
7.2 12 86.4
7.2 12 86.4
1 to 6(Left) 7.2 7.2 51.84
8 to 33(Right) 4.8 7.2 34.56
4.8 12 57.6
4.8 12 57.6
7 to 20(Left) 4.8 12 57.6
4.8 4.8 23.04
4.8 7.2 34.56
4.8 12 57.6
4.8 12 57.6
21 to 34(Left) 4.8 12 57.6
4.8 4.8 23.04
60 to 85(Right) 4.8 7.2 34.56
4.8 12 57.6
4.8 12 57.6
35 to 48(Left) 4.8 12 57.6
4.8 4.8 23.04
86 to 111(Right) 4.8 7.2 34.56
4.8 12 57.6
4.8 12 57.6
49 to 62(Left) 4.8 12 57.6
4.8 4.8 23.04
1 to 24 8.4 7.2 60.48
8.4 12 100.8
8.4 12 100.8
8.4 12 100.8
8.4 7.2 60.48
Subtotal: RIGHT WING 1621.44
Hallway 50.4 36 846.72
50.4 64.8 1644.48
Arcade 513.78
TOTAL PUBLIC MARKET BUILDING 5594.1
FLOOR AREA
C-35
Table C-13 Spatial Programming of 4-storey Public Covered Parking Building

PUBLIC COVERED PARKING BUILDING SPACE PROGRAM
DIMENSION (m)
W D
GROUND FLOOR PLAN
Parking Slot 5 26.2 131
5 23.6 118
10 31.2 312
Subtotal: Parking Slots 561
Stair 3.25 2.45 7.9625
Subtotal: Stairs 23.8875
Island 1.825 2.6 4.745
Subtotal: Islands 14.235
Comfort Room 4.85 2.45 11.8825
Subtotal: Comfort Rooms 23.765
Ramp(computed at 2nd floor) 80.25
Driveway 23.075 52.4 505.9925
TOTAL GROUND FLOOR AREA 1209.13
2ND FLOOR
5 7.8 39
10 31.2 312
Stair 3.25 2.45 7.9625
Island 1.825 2.6 4.745
C-41 C-42
PUBLIC COVERED PARKING BUILDING SPACE PROGRAM

DIMENSION (m)
W D
Comfort Room 4.85 2.45 11.8825
Ramp 98.14
Subtotal: Ramps 196.28
Driveway 23.075 52.4 547.9625
TOTAL 2ND FLOOR AREA 1209.13
3RD FLOOR
5 7.8 39
10 31.2 312
Stair 3.25 2.45 7.9625
Island 1.825 2.6 4.745
Comfort Room 4.85 2.45 11.8825
Ramp 98.14
Driveway 23.075 52.4 547.9625
TOTAL 3RD FLOOR AREA 1209.13
ROOF DECK
5 7.8 39
10 31.2 312
Stair 3.25 2.45 7.9625
Island 1.825 2.6 4.745
Comfort Room 4.85 2.45 11.8825
Ramp 98.14
Driveway 23.075 52.4 547.9625
TOTAL ROOF DECK AREA 1209.13
TOTAL COVERED PARKING BUILDING 4836.52
FLOOR AREA
C-43
Figure C-30 Conceptual Architectural Plan of a Small Port Passenger Terminal

Building (PTB)
Table C-14 Spatial Programming of a Small Port Passenger Terminal Building (PTB)
Option 1
SMALL PORT SPACE PROGRAM
PASSENGER TERMINAL BUILDING (PTB)
OPTION 1
DIMENSION (m)
W D
Departure Lounge 7 20 140
Electrical Room 1.5 4 6
Departure Lounge Toilet 1.5 4 6
Arrival Toilet 1.5 4 6
Utlity Room 1.5 4 6
Information / Check-in 3 6 18
Information / Check-in Storage 3 1.8 5.4
Pantry 3 2.2 6.6
Storage 3 2 6
Office 6 13 60
Arrival 7 20 140
TOTAL SMALL PORT PASSENGER 20 20 400
TERMINAL BUILDING (PTB) OPTION 1
FLOOR AREA
C-45
Figure C-32 Conceptual Architectural Plan of a Small Port Passenger Terminal

Building (PTB) Option 2
Annex D Minimum Performance Standards and

Specifications (MPSS) for New Public
Buildings (also applicable private
buildings)
Table C-15 Spatial Programming of a Small Port Passenger Terminal Building (PTB)
Option 2
SMALL PORT PASSENGER TERMINAL SPACE PROGRAM
BUILDING (PTB) OPTION 2
DIMENSION (m)
W D
Departure Lounge 8 13.4 95.375
Ticket Queueing Area 6.8 2.7 18.36
Office and Ticketing 5.2 11 57.2
Arrival Lounge 8 16 116.175
Departure Lounge Toilet 1.5 2.2 3.3
Arrival Area Toilet 1.5 2.2 3.3
Storage 1 3 1.5 4.5
Storage 2 3 1.6 4.8
TOTAL SMALL PORT PASSENGER 19 16 304
TERMINAL BUILDING (PTB) OPTION 2
FLOOR AREA
C-47
Contents Acronyms and Abbreviations

D.1 PURPOSE .................................................................................................................................................. 1 Term Definition
C
o
degree Celsius
D.2 DESIGN ..................................................................................................................................................... 3
ACI American Concrete Institute (ACI)
D.2.1 SCOPE OF DESIGN SERVICES ...................................................................................................................... 3
ACP Architectural Code of the Philippines, DPWH 2000
D.2.2 COMPONENTS AND OUTPUTS OF DETAILED ARCHITECTURE AND ENGINEERING DESIGN ADR Alternative Dispute Resolution
(DAED) BY BUILDER .................................................................................................................................... 3 AISC American Institute of Steel Construction
D.2.3 GOVERNING CODES AND SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................................... 5 AISI American Iron and Steel Institute
D.2.4 ARCHITECTURAL STANDARDS................................................................................................................... 5 ANSI American National Standards Institute

ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
D.2.5 STRUCTURAL STANDARDS ......................................................................................................................... 8
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
D.2.6 ELECTRICAL STANDARDS ......................................................................................................................... 10
AWS American Welding Society
D.2.7 SANITARY AND PLUMBING STANDARDS ................................................................................................ 11
B.P. Batas Pambansa (national law)
D.2.8 TOILETS ...................................................................................................................................................... 11 BoQ bill of quantities
D.2.9 MATERIALS ................................................................................................................................................ 11 BPS Bureau of Product Standards
D.2.10 OTHER STANDARDS .................................................................................................................................. 15 BRS Bureau of Research and Standards

CAED Conceptual Architectural and Engineering Design
D.2.11 OTHER REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................................................................... 15
CCD Construction Completion Deadline
D.3 CONSTRUCTION .................................................................................................................................... 16
CCN Construction Completion Notice
D.3.1 SCOPE OF CONSTRUCTION ....................................................................................................................... 16
CED Conceptual Engineering Design
D.3.2 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION .................................................................... 16 CO convenience outlet
D.3.3 DETAILED CONSTRUCTION PLAN ............................................................................................................ 16 CoC Certificate of Completion
D.3.4 TEST REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................................................................... 17 CoFA Certificate of Final Acceptance

cu.ft. cubic foot/ feet
D.3.5 COMPLETION OF CONSTRUCTION ........................................................................................................... 17
cu.m. cubic meter/s
dB (A) decibel/s
DAC Design Approval Committee
Tables and Figures

DAED Detailed Architectural and Engineering Design
DBS Design-Build Services
Table D-1 Live Loads ........................................................................................................................................................................................9 DCE detailed cost estimate
DCP Detailed Construction Plan
Figure D-1 Scope of Design..............................................................................................................................................................................3 DED Detailed Engineering Design
DIN Deustche Industrie Norm
DLP Defects Liability Period
DILG Department of the Interior and Local Government
DoH Department of Health
DoLE Department of Labor and Employment
DoTC Department of Transportation and Communications
DPWH Department of Public Works and Highways
DTI Department of Trade and Industry
E.O. Executive Order
FCP Fire Code of the Philippines
FCL finished ceiling line
D-i D-ii
Term Definition Term Definition

FFL finished floor line RC Referral Code/s
FGL finished grade line RCN Rectification Completion Notice
FRD Final Rectification Deadline RH relative humidity
FFFE Furniture/ Furnishings, Fixtures & Equipment RI Rectification Inspection
IC Independent Consultant RLAs registered and licensed architects
IM Information Memorandum SIF seismic importance factor
IMC intermediate metallic conduit sqm square meter/s
IRR Implementing Rules and Regulations WIF wind importance factor
ISO International Organization for Standardization
ITB Instructions to Bidders
ITPB Instructions to Prospective Bidders
kg kilogram/s
kpa kilopascals
kph kilometers per hour
LD liquidated damages
m meter/s
m3 cubic meter/s
MDP main distribution panel
mg milligram/s
mm millimeter/s
mpa megapascal/s
mpm meters per minute
m/s meters per second
MPSS Minimum Performance Standards and Specifications
MSDS material safety data sheet
NBCP National Building Code of the Philippines
NFPA National Fire Protection Association
NGL natural grade line
NSCP National Structural Code of the Philippines
NTP Notice to Proceed
OSHS Occupational Safety and Health Service
P.D. Presidential Decree
PCBs polychlorinated biphenyls
PCM Project or Construction Manager
PEC Philippine Electrical Code
PMC Philippine Mechanical Code
PNS Philippine National Standards
PRLs professional regulatory laws
psf pounds per square foot
psi pounds per square inch
PVC polyvinyl chloride
R.A. Republic Act (national law)
RC reinforced concrete
D-iii D-iv
D.1 Purpose Architecture and R.A. No. 10587 for Environmental Planning (the last 4 only as
applicable), etc. and their derivative regulations]
The purpose of these Minimum Performance Standards and Specifications (MPSS) is  R.A. No. 4566, the 1965 Contractor’s Licensing Law, implemented by the DTI
to:
 R.A. No. 8293, The 1997 Intellectual Property Code of the Philippines,
 Establish the minimum requirements that the Builder must conform w ith in the implemented by the DTI
design and construction of new Public Buildings to be sited at their respective
 R.A. No. 386, the New Civil Code of the Philippines (1949), particularly the civil
PROJECT SITES (the ‘Project’).
liability provisions under its Art. 1723
 Create certainty for both the Procuring Agency and the Builder in the standards of
 E.O. No. 1008, the Law on Construction Arbitration, implemented by the DTI
performance expected of the Builder.
 R.A. No. 9285, The Alternative Dispute Resolution (ADR) Act of 2004, its IRR and
The Builder is the winning Bidder i.e. Designer and/or Constructor (the ‘Builder’)
Special Rules of Court on ADR, promulgated by the Supreme Court (SC) and
under the Agreement (the ‘Agreement’). This MPSS and its Annexes form part of the
denominated as A.M. No. 07-11-08-SC
Agreement and the Builder is required to conform with all the MPSS provisions.
D.1.1 Other Documents for use as Reference for the Procurement Effort
The other key documents that shall primarily govern the procurement effort are:
 the Instructions to Bidders (ITB)
 the MPSS
Unless otherwise specified in the ITB and these MPSS, all information contained in the
ITB, these MPSS, and the Agreement supersede any information supplied in the
Information Memorandum (IM) and previous versions of the MPSS.
D.1.2 Governing Laws and Regulations for the Procurement Effort
 R.A. No. 9184, the Government Procurement Reform Act (GPRA) and its latest
implementing rules and regulations (IRR)
 R.A. No. 6957, as amended by R.A. No. 7718, the Build-Operate-Transfer (BOT)
Law and its latest IRR
 P.D. No. 1096, the 1977 National Building Code of the Philippines (NBCP), its 2004
Revised IRR, duly promulgated by the DPWH and its various Referral Codes (RCs),
mostly official executive issuances or self-regulatory documents in their latest
versions [RCs such as valid and subsisting laws e.g. the Water and Sanitation
Codes (P.D. Nos. 1067 & 856) and the 2010 (or latest) edition of the National
Structural Code of the Philippines/ NSCP], respectively, etc.
 R.A. No. 9514, the 2008 Fire Code of the Philippines (FCP) and its 2009 IRR, duly
promulgated by the DILG
 B.P. Blg. 344, The Law to Enhance the Mobility of Disabled Persons and its IRR/
Annex as well as the applicable provisions of R.A. No. 7277, otherwise known as
The Magna Carta for Disabled Persons
 the various professional regulatory laws [PRLs, e.g. R.A. No. 9266 in the case of
State-registered and licensed architects/ RLAs, R.A. No. 544, as amended by R.A.
No. 1582 for registered and licensed civil engineers/ RLCEs, R.A. No. 1364 for
Sanitary Engineering, R.A. No. 1378 for Master Plumbing, R.A. No. 8560 for
Geodetic Engineering, R.A. No. 4209 for Geology, R.A. No. 7920 for Electrical
Engineering, R.A. No. 8495 for Mechanical Engineering, R.A. No. 9292 for
Electronics and Communications Engineering, R.A. No. 9053 for Landscape
D-1 D-2
D.2 Design  DAED plans, elevations, cross-sections and interior/ exterior perspectives of the
Public Buildings/ Structures at a scale of 1:100 meters (m) or as applicable,
distinguishing between the various building components i.e. architectural,
D.2.1 Scope of Design Services engineering and allied works [architectural interiors (AI), interior design (as
needed), furniture design, landscape architecture, etc.] and noting the vastly
Under the Agreement, the Builder shall prepare the Detailed Architecture and different site characteristics and existing/ potential hazards to development and
Engineering Design (DAED) during the Pre-Construction Stage of the Contract Package continued use/ occupancy. For the structural design, sufficiently detailed
and Builder shall also submit its DAED to the Independent Consultant (IC) for review information is required for the proposed substructure (i.e. foundation and ground
and concurrence, whereby the IC shall be procured through the Procuring Agency’s floor slab) and the superstructure. For AI, material/ sample and color boards are
regular procurement program under R.A. No. 9184, the Government Procurement required for the key public areas of the Project. (A2, A1 and/ or A0 sheet size).
Reform Act (GPRA) of 2003 and its latest IRR, well before the submission of the DAED.
 Detailed/ technical specifications of materials and workmanship. As applicable,
The Builder shall prepare the DAED (a) based on its Conceptual Architectural and these shall include the certificate of accreditation from the Department of Public
Engineering Design (CAED) submitted in the Technical Proposal which is part of its Works and Highways (DPWH) Bureau of Research and Standards (BRS) on the
Bid, and (b) in accordance with these MPSS, as shown in Figure D-1 hereafter. acceptance of new materials/ technology or of equivalencies in materials for use
in the Project. (A4 and/or A3 page size).
Figure D-1 Scope of Design
 Proof of structural quality and integrity of a completed building, particularly for
projects which used new materials/ technologies. (A4 and/or A3 page size).
 Detailed architectural and engineering design (DAED) analyses and computations.
(A4 and/or A3 page size).
 Quantity and cost estimates for the buildings/ structures/ grounds i.e. BoQ and
DCE. (A4 and/or A3 page size).
 Detailed Construction Management Plan (DCMP) including Construction Schedule.
(A4 or A3 page size and/or A2 sheet size).
 Supporting data:
The Builder’s CAED shall form part of the MPSS. The CAED, together with the MPSS
provisions on Construction shall govern the actual construction of the Contract - (1) Simple longitudinal and cross sectional profiles of the ITSP site;
Package to be undertaken by the Builder. - Geotechnical investigation report (as applicable)/ geological information
report; and
D.2.2 Components and Outputs of Detailed Architecture and Engineering Design - Building drainage design report. (A4 and/or A3 page size)
(DAED) by Builder
The DAED, which the Builder shall prepare and submit to the Project and/or D.2.2.2 Property Development Component
Construction Manager (PCM) or Independent Consultant (IC) for review and
Should a property development component be introduced as a component of the
concurrence, shall cover the following components and outputs:
Public Building/ Complex, the same requirements shall be required for submission, in
addition to:
D.2.2.1 Design Deliverables
 A market study
The DAED shall cover the pertinent Public Buildings as defined by the Procuring  Business plan. (A4 and/or A3 page size)
Agency.
 Furniture/ Furnishings, Fixtures & Equipment (FFFE) Component
The DAED shall include the following outputs which shall all conform to the MPSS for
Design, and provide a level of detail that will enable quantities to be estimated up to The DAED for FFFE shall include the following outputs based on the MPSS for FFFE:
the plus/ minus five percent (+5%) of the final quantities. The outputs shall be  Detailed Layouts, Plans and Design of FFFE, showing their dimensions;
transmitted using international paper/ sheet/ board sizes (i.e. A4 and A3 page size or perspectives, plans, and elevations at a scale of 1:10 m, with details at a scale of
A2, A1 and A0 sheet size). 1:5 m; materials specifications; and other basic properties. (A4 and/or A3 page
 Description of the proposed technology and materials e.g. use of pre-fabricated size).
components and/ or conventional built-on-site technology; use of concrete/ steel/  Detailed Cost Estimate (DCE). (A4 and/or A3 page size).
fiber cement/ other materials, etc. (A4 page size).
D-3 D-4
D.2.3 Governing Codes and Specifications The minimum height of the fixed louver or transom window above the operable
windows shall be at 300 mm i.e. measured from the glass part of the window.
 The DAED for the Project shall be governed by the following Design Codes and
Interior window panels (if introduced along passage-ways such as corridors), when
Specifications.
opened, must NOT pose an obstruction nor a physical threat along such passage-ways.
 P. D. No. 1096, the 1977 National Building Code of the Philippines (NBCP), its
The window frames MUST be sturdy enough to withstand vandalism.
2004 Revised IRR and its various Referral Codes (RCs) such as R.A. No. 9514, the
2008 Fire Code of the Philippines (FCP), P.D. No. 1067, the Water Code of the
Philippines, P.D. No. 856, the Sanitation Code of the Philippines, Batas Pambansa D.2.4.2 Doors
(B.P.) No. 344, the Law to Enhance the Mobility of Disabled Persons and its IRR/
There shall be at least two (2) doors for every room/ enclosed space for thirty (30) or
Annexes, and by executive issuances and/or self-regulatory documents such as
more occupants.
the National Structural Code of the Philippines (NSCP), Volume I, 2010, Philippine
Electrical Code (PEC), 2009, Revised National Plumbing Code, the 2000 The door swing-out should be 180 degrees for rooms/ enclosed spaces with 30 or
Architectural Code of the Philippines (ACP), etc.. more occupants.
 US Standards: The door leaf must be at least 900 mm in clear width and 2,100 mm in clear height.
- American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC), as applicable The doors MUST withstand normal wear and tear and shall be provided with keyed
lever-type locksets.
- American Concrete Institute (ACI), as applicable
PVC doors shall NOT be used. If doors made of materials other than wood are to be
- American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI), as applicable
introduced by the Builder, these MUST be fire-rated and thoroughly tested for toxicity
- American Welding Society (AWS), as applicable (normal and burning conditions) and shall have the prior acceptance/ approval by the
- American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), as applicable DPWH BRS.
 Philippine National Standards or PNS Appendix G of PEC1 – 2009 Toilet doors shall be of framed plywood flush or solid door construction with jamb
material [preferably of local (non-banned) or imported hardwood] duly accepted/
 R.A. No. 6716 on rainwater collection system approved by the DPWH BRS, and painted or stained as appropriate.
D.2.4 Architectural Standards D.2.4.3 Floor
The architectural quality of the Public Building/ Structure MUST be in full accordance The finished floor must be of non-skid finish.
with law, specifically with P.D. No. 1096 (1977 NBCP) and its 2004 Revised IRR, with
The finished floor line (FFL) at enclosed spaces should be higher than the passage-way
the applicable portions of the 2000 ACP, and as described in the architectural sections
(common area) FFL by a maximum of 25 mm.
of the Technical Specifications. architectural documents i.e. architectural
perspectives, plans, designs, drawings, computations and like deliverables by the The first level FFL elevation of the passage-way (common area) MUST be above the
Builder MUST be in full compliance with R.A. No. 9266 (The Architecture Act of 2004) one hundred (100)-year flood level to be identified by the Builder.
and its 2004 IRR, as well as with the applicable sections of the Development
A ramp MUST be provided with a maximum gradient of 1:12 in compliance with the
Guidelines and Design Guidance (DGDG) for the PROJECT.
Accessibility Law (B.P. Blg. 344) and properly labelled with the international symbol
of access, either formed of concrete/ cement or metal.
D.2.4.1 Windows
Windows must be of the transparent or translucent types, and both operable and/or D.2.4.4 Suspended Ceiling and Ceiling Cavity
fixed/ non-operable as applicable.
The clear height of enclosed spaces, reckoned from FFL to finished ceiling line (FCL)
The total area of window openings must be at least equal to 10.0 square meters (sqm) MUST be at least 2.7 m.
of the enclosed space being served (or better) to provide for natural ventilation and
Maintenance access to the ceiling cavity (if provided) MUST be primarily through the
illumination. Windows MUST allow the entry of daylight even if closed. If firewalls are
passage-way (common area).
introduced, there shall be NO operable/ non-operable windows on such firewalls.
However, fire-rated glass blocks or light and ventilation wells may be allowed on such The ceiling height of the toilets may be lower than 2.7 m, only for as long as the same
firewalls, in full accordance with the NBCP and FCP, whichever is more stringent. still fully satisfies the minimum requirements under P.D. No. 1096, the 1977 NBCP.
Window sills must NOT be lower than 600 millimeters (mm) NOR higher than 900
mm from the finished floor line (FFL) i.e. measured from the glass part of the window.
D-5 D-6
D.2.4.5 Roof and Roof Cavity The ceiling (suspended ceiling, suspended slab soffit and stair slab soffit), if exposed
shall be flat white while the roof, if of metal construction, MUST be colored light to
The Builder’s choice of roofing material MUST be adequately protected from rust/ maximize unwanted light and heat reflectance. The paints/ coloring materials MUST
oxidation, salt air, acid rain or other sources and forms of corrosion and leaks. If of maintain their quality based on applicable Procuring Agency and/or DPWH standards
metal, the roofing sheets MUST be of the thickest material commercially available in for at least five (5) years.
the Philippines and amply protected from the elements.
While the Procuring Agency shall undertake the requisite periodic maintenance D.2.4.9 Ventilation
regimen on an annual basis, the Builder MUST warrant the performance and condition
of the entire roofing system and its adjunct drainage system and shall undertake the Natural ventilation shall be primarily supplied for some rooms (which are not
requisite repair/s within the minimum Constructor’s Liability period (reckoned from artificially ventilated) through operable windows. However, whenever such windows
the Procuring Agency issuance of the Certificate of Completion) for any damage to the are fully closed, the source of natural ventilation may be through fixed louvers above
Public Building that may arise from faulty design or construction. or beside the operable windows.
The minimum horizontal clear length of eaves (only if introduced, including exterior Artificial ventilation inside each room/ enclosed space MUST be supplied in full
gutter width) shall be: front = 2.438 meters (m); rear = 2.438 m; and sides = 1.829 m accordance with the NBCP and/or with the MCP, whichever is more stringent.
i.e. NO interior gutter shall be introduced in the Public Buildings. Maintenance access The roof cavity (if introduced) MUST be naturally ventilated and pest-proofed.
to the roof cavity (only if introduced) must be through the passage-way (common Whenever applicable, the ceiling cavity for the regular floors (only if introduced), shall
area). be naturally ventilated and pest-proofed.
D.2.4.6 Partitions D.2.4.10 Grounds Development and Civil Works

Partitions, if introduced, MUST be fire-rated, and must be from the top of the The land area enveloping the Public Building shall be treated as part of the Project
structural floor to the bottom (soffit) of the upper floor suspended slab. since the same constitutes the building grounds in which pedestrian/ PWD access
Circulation and Emergency Egress: Corridors (Single-Load), Main Staircases, Service/ systems and the wastewater lines, roadways/ streets, drainage/ flood protection
Emergency Egress Staircases, Fire Exit Ladders and Railings provisions and related civil works are situated above and below the surface
respectively. These areas shall be cleared and made safe for use.
To fully comply with the FCP, the minimum passage-way (common area) clear width
MUST be 2.44 m for the Public Buildings. All staircases MUST have a minimum clear The civil works plan and design for the Project grounds MUST fully conform to the
flight width of 1.83 m (3.66 m total clear staircase width). The clear flight width for DPWH Standard Specifications for Public Works Structures, Volume III, 1995 (Blue
the service staircase/ emergency egress/ fire exit MUST be from 1.22 m to 1.83 m Book).
(2.44 or 3.66 m total clear staircase width). The fire exit ladders MUST have a
minimum clear width of 0.80 m. All stair treads that shall get in contact with water D.2.5 Structural Standards
MUST provide all weather traction, particularly if the treads are wet and shall have a
sloped finished for easy drainage. The stair nosings shall be of sturdy metal and The structural design MUST be in accordance with P.D. No. 1096, the 1977 NBCP and
round-edged, or of better design, to prevent injury during egress occasioned by its 2004 Revised IRR, and specifically with the latest edition of the National Structural
extreme/ emergency events. The staircase, corridor and ramp railings shall be of Code of the Philippines (NSCP), Volume 1, 2010 (or later).
metal pipe construction and securely anchored to the staircase, hallway and ramp.
Classification of Structure: In accordance with the NSCP, the Public Buildings/
Structures shall be designed for the classification, based on the nature of occupancy, of
D.2.4.7 Information Boards ‘Essential Facilities.’
The Public Buildings MUST be provided with built-in information boards, of various Wind Load: The Public Buildings/ Structures, their roofing and walls shall be
types and materials, electronic or illuminated or non-electronic/ non-illuminated, of designed to withstand a minimum wind speed of 250.0 kilometers per hour (kph).
the appropriate widths, heights and thicknesses, with mounting heights and material
A Wind Importance Factor of 1.15, based on the NSCP, shall be used as generic
and finish specifications as per applicable international standards.
reference.
The structure should be fully sealed against rainwater intrusion during typhoons and
D.2.4.8 Painting
heavy rains to protect sensitive materials and equipment. All doors and windows
Where applicable, metal, wood, and plastic components MUST be coated with enamel MUST be fully sealed against strong vertical and lateral rains.
paint, with color subject to Procuring Agency approval. Masonry wall components Seismic Load: The Public Buildings/ Structures shall be designed to withstand
MUST be coated with latex paint, with topcoat color subject to official Procuring earthquakes for Seismic Zone 4 with a corresponding Seismic Zone Factor of 0.40, as
Agency approval. specified in the NSCP.
D-7 D-8
A Seismic Importance Factor of 1.50 shall be used as generic reference. Builders are D.2.6 Electrical Standards
advised to factor in the effect of the nearby fault lines.
Live Loads: The minimum occupancy or live loads shown in Table D-1 shall be used in D.2.6.1 Roughing-ins
the design.
 Service Entrance
Table D-1 Live Loads - Service entrance conduit shall be made of intermediate metallic conduit (IMC).
Underground runs shall be encased in concrete envelope or reinforced concrete
Structure Part Live Load
envelope when crossing a roadway. Ends of conduits shall be provided with a
General Activity Level
sealing compound.
Car Parking Level
- Exposed service entrance conduits shall be painted with epoxy primer in three
Shop Level 1.9 kpa
(3) coats application.
Toilets
Hallways/ Stairs 4.8 kpa - Conduits shall be properly reamed.
Deck Roof Level 1.0 kpa - The service entrance shall be at least 1.60 m above the natural grade line.
Note: kpa = kilopascals  Branch circuit conduits, boxes, fittings and supports shall run parallel to walls,
columns and beams of the building.
Design Life: The structure shall have a design life of at least fifty (50) years. - Metal boxes, gutters, supports and fittings shall be painted with epoxy primer
Building Foundation: The foundation shall be designed for an allowable soil bearing in three (3) coats prior to installation.
pressure of 96 kpa (2,000 pounds per square foot or psf). Consistent with best - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) solvent shall be applied on all PVC pipe joints/
practices, the Builder MUST undertake the prior appropriate studies/ investigations connections.
for use as basis/ bases for the foundation and structural design of the Public
Buildings/ Structures. - End bells shall be used at the end of PVC pipes and locknut and bushing shall be
used for metallic conduit on all boxes and gutters termination.
Consistent with law and with industry practice, the Builder’s designers and builders
shall assume the full professional responsibility and civil liability for the foundation - Branch circuit conduits shall be either metallic or non-metallic as applicable.
and structural design, supervision and construction of the Public Buildings/  Ceiling-mounted lighting fixtures: Flexible metallic tubing shall be used as drop
Structures. In the case of structural designers who are foreign nationals, the Philippine pipe from a junction box to a lighting fixture.
civil/ structural engineer affixing his/ her signature and dry seal on the structural
 In-sight disconnecting means: Watertight type straight or angle connectors shall
plans, designs and computations (submitted for building permit application) shall
be used from pumps, condensing units and other equipment that will be in
solely assume the same. As such, the Procuring Agency shall NOT accept any form of
possible contact with water or rain.
waiver anent the attached professional responsibility or civil liability over the
foundation/ structural design of the Project.  Centralized panelling: Breaker and wire gutter shall be used for proper
arrangement of main distribution panel (MDP).
Wall Vibration: Walls must NOT unduly vibrate due to impact caused by any part of
an adult human body and must NEITHER be dented NOR punctured by deliberate  Stub-out conduits for spares: 15 mm diameter PVC or IMC pipes shall be provided
punches or kicks by adult humans. as stub-out conduits at different panel boards as per schedule of loads. Ends of
stub-out conduits shall be threaded and capped.
Suspended Slabs as Sub-floors: Sub-floors shall only be of suspended concrete slabs
(which are either cast-on-site/ cast in situ concrete or pre-cast concrete). Sub-floor
materials that are highly flammable, that do NOT uphold the fire integrity among the D.2.6.2 Wires and Wiring Devices
floors, that may contain formaldehydes or other potentially harmful substances, that
conducts/ transfers radiant heat and which do NOT possess positive acoustical Wires shall be properly designed in accordance with Article 3.10 and the grounding
properties are not considered the equivalent of a suspended concrete slab and must system shall conform to Article 2.50 of the PH Electrical Code (PEC).
NOT be used for the Public Building/ Structure. Wiring devices must be of modern type and approved for both location and purpose.
Rib-type or double tee suspended slab soffits are acceptable but subject to the PCM or
IC acceptance of the quality of their structural connections and finish. D.2.6.3 Lighting and Fixtures
Each room/ enclosed space must be provided with a lighting product(s) that can
produce 400 lux or better at the tabletop/ countertop level.
Duplex convenience outlets (COs) of the grounding type must be provided for all
rooms/ enclosed spaces.
D-9 D-10
The hallways must be provided with a lighting product(s) that can produce 5,000 D.2.9.1 Reinforced Concrete
lumens or better.
For structural members, minimum compressive strength of 20.7 megapascals (mpa)
(3,000 pounds per square inch or psi).
D.2.7 Sanitary and Plumbing Standards
For non-structural members minimum compressive strength of concrete shall be 17
Waste and vent line piping system: The drain, waste and vent line piping system mpa (2,500 psi).
must be according to American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) D-2729, ISO
At the very minimum, reinforcing bars shall be ASTM A706 with a minimum yield
4435 and ISO 3633.
strength, fy, of 413 mpa for 16 mm diameter and larger, and 275 mpa (33,000 psi) for
Waterline piping system: The system must be according to E DIN1988 for 12-mm diameter and smaller. Alternately, ASTM 615 can be used subject to the
Polypropylene Random Copolymer (PP-R) type 3 pipe and ASTM A53/ A53M. The conditions specified in the NSCP, as follows:
system must provide for a waterline service entrance.
 The actual yield strength based on mill tests does NOT exceed fy by more than 125
Plumbing Fixtures: These must be according to American National Standards mpa.
Institute (ANSI)/ American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME), A112.19.4m,
 The ratio of the actual tensile strength to the actual yield strength is NOT less than
A112.19.3, A112.19.5.
1.25.
Drainage system: The storm drainage system must be sized according to the rainfall
intensities, slope, and roof areas of the building. Provision shall be made for the future D.2.9.2 Structural Steel
installation of rainwater collection system in compliance with R.A. No. 6716 ‘An Act
Providing for the Construction of Water Wells, Rainwater Collectors, Development of This shall be ASTM A36 with a minimum yield strength, fy, 248 mpa (36,000 psi). All
Springs and Rehabilitation of Existing Water Wells in all Barangays in the Philippines’. structural steel works shall be painted with red oxide primer and shall be final coated
with aluminum silver paint.
For the BUILDING Project, only provision/s for connections to future rainwater
collectors, consistent with DPWH design standards are required of the Builder. These
provisions must be reflected in all CAEDs and DAEDs of the Public Buildings. D.2.9.3 Protection from Heat
Septic vault: All concrete septic tanks shall be protected from corrosion by coating Air Supply: Under applicable conditions, clean fresh air shall be supplied to enclosed
with an approved bituminous coat or by other acceptable means. spaces at an average rate of NOT less than 20 to 40 cubic meters (700 to 1400 cu.ft.)
an hour per occupant, or at such a rate as to effect a complete change of air a number
D.2.8 Toilets of times per hour varying from four (4) for sedentary occupants to eight (8) for active
occupants.
The Toilets shall be properly ventilated and provided with running water through a
Where an adequate supply of fresh air cannot be obtained by natural ventilation or
piped water supply system. The supply of running water to the toilets shall be the
where it is difficult to get the desired amount of air at the center of the workroom
responsibility of the Builder.
without creating uncomfortable drafts near inlets, mechanical ventilation devices that
The specific types and numbers of fixtures shall depend on full Builder compliances are capable of generating fresh air (and NOT merely re-circulating air inside a room or
with the applicable provisions of the NBCP and the Sanitation Code of the PH (and its other confined spaces such as toilets), shall be provided.
IRR and with the pertinent issuances of the DoH), whichever is more stringent.
Air Movement: The air movement in enclosed spaces shall be arranged such that the
Additionally, considerations of gender sensitivity e.g. breastfeeding stations, diaper
occupants are NOT subjected to objectionable drafts. The air velocity shall NOT fall
changing stations, sanitary product dispensers, etc. shall be factored in.
below 15 meters per minute during the rainy season and 45 meters per minute during
the summer season.
D.2.9 Materials The rooms and component materials MUST provide for a suitable inside room
temperature compliant with safety and health standards on air temperature, humidity
At the very minimum, all construction materials for the Project MUST conform to the
and air movement.
DPWH Standard Specifications for Public Works Structures, Volume III, 1995 (Blue
Book). New materials which are NOT covered by the Blue Book, however, MUST pass Provision shall be made to control radiant heat from roofing by installing ceilings/
the requirements of the Product Accreditation Scheme prescribed under DPWH ceiling cavities, which may be provided with fire retardant and thermal insulation
Department Order No. 189, series of 2002, and be accredited by the DPWH before materials.
these are used in the Project.
Insulating material and ventilation inside a room should reduce infiltration of too
much radiant and convective heat and should result in the room/ enclosed space
temperature (measured at the center of the room) being at least one degree Celsius (1
oC) lower than the outside temperature.
D-11 D-12
The air velocity in enclosed rooms shall be from 0.25 m/s to 0.75 m/s based on the D.2.9.8 Protection from Toxicity
requirements of the Occupational Safety and Health Service/ OSHS of the Department
of Labor and Employment (DoLE). Enclosed spaces must be designed in such a way that their locations are far from
sources of noxious elements such as paint, varnish, toilets, chemical storage and
Illumination falling at countertop height MUST NOT be less than 400 lux taken with garbage collection/ storage/ handling points.
combined artificial and natural lighting.
The building and finishing material to be used like panel/ ceiling boards, paints,
varnish, etc. must NOT contain or emit any carcinogenic or toxic substances which
D.2.9.4 Resistance to Termites
may pose risk on the health of occupants (such as asbestos, polychlorinated
Where applicable, the Public Building/ Structure MUST be resistant to termites for at biphenyls/ PCB, benzene and the like). A material safety data sheet (MSDS) detailing
least five (5) years. the composition of the construction materials used, must be presented by the Builder
for joint OSHC/ DPWH/ Procuring Agency/ PCM or IC evaluation and possible OSHS
certification (on an absolute need basis).
D.2.9.5 Protection from Corrosion
Newly constructed rooms should be well ventilated prior to occupancy to purge and
Where applicable, the Public Building/ Structure MUST be protected from corrosion/ remove the airborne contaminants trapped and emitted inside the rooms/ enclosed
rust up to at least five (5) years. spaces during painting, sanding, varnishing, etc. Purging of airborne contaminants and
ventilation of the rooms should be for at least one week or until such time that
D.2.9.6 Fire Protection discernible odor is gone. There should be NO toxic airborne contaminants prior to
building occupancy.
Fire protection requirements for the Public Building/ Structure shall mainly be as per
Adequate air movement and supply of fresh air should be provided via natural or
R.A. No. 9514, the 2008 Fire Code of the Philippines (FCP) and its 2009 (or later) IRR.
artificial means to dilute any contaminants, which may be emitted in the course of
However, the Builder must always check which of the following is the most stringent:
occupancy.
1) P.D. No. 1096, the 1977 National Building Code of the Philippines (NBCP) and its
2004 Revised IRR; 2) R.A. No. 9514, the 2008 FCP and its 2009 IRR; 3) the National The non-skid flooring should help prevent the accumulation of dust in small cracks
Fire Protection Association (NFPA) codes, standards or related issuances; or 4) other and crevices.
applicable local fire safety standards. The most stringent rule shall always be applied Based on US Environment Protection Agency Air Quality Standards, the dust
for the Project. concentration for total dust particulates should NOT exceed 0.26 mg/m3, and for
respirable dust should NOT exceed 0.15 mg/ m3.
D.2.9.7 Noise Level Limit
Rule 1076.03 Cleanliness: Dusts, gases, vapors, or mists generated and released in
The sound transmission class/ noise reduction rating of the Public Building and its work process shall be removed at the points of origin and NOT permitted to permeate
component materials, including walls partition and floor slabs, MUST reduce noise the atmosphere of the enclosed rooms/ spaces.
level such that it will comply with accepted standards on noise reduction. Rule 1093.07 Prevention of Dust Accumulation: In rooms where materials producing
Appropriate sound-absorbing or sound insulation material MUST be used on walls flammable dusts are processed, handled and stored;
and partitions to reduce sound transmission inside the rooms/ enclosed spaces.  dusts shall be removed daily from floors, equipment and other horizontal surfaces,
Acoustic materials, finishes or treatments shall be used at interior walls, ceilings and preferably by means of appropriate vacuum apparatus; and
ceiling cavities in the event of reverberation/ echoing of sound inside lower floor  all fixtures, ledges, projections, bearings, sidewalks, ceilings and other parts shall
rooms/ enclosed spaces. be cleaned and freed of dusts at least once a week.
Pertinent occupational safety and health standards such as the permissible noise Floors: Where practicable, floors or rooms in which harmful dust is liberated shall:
exposure limit, threshold limit value and other applicable occupational and safety
 be smooth, impervious and easy to clean; and
standards MUST be complied during the construction of the Public Building.
 NOT be covered with loose sheets, metal or other materials under which dust can
Acoustic material or finish used should offer reduction of noise and noise level which
accumulate.
should NOT exceed 55 dB (A) measured in an unoccupied classroom (to include
ambient noise) and MUST comply with ASHRAE provisions on indoor air quality. Resistance to water penetration: The structure shall be free from water leaks.
Ambient noise MUST necessarily exclude intermittent heavy noise sources such as
Relative Humidity (RH) Range: RH range shall be at 55% plus or minus 5%.
passing vehicles e.g. airplanes, trains, tricycles, old trucks/ buses and the like.
D-13 D-14
D.2.10 Other Standards D.3 Construction

The set of FFFE items MUST harmonize, in terms of functionality and design, with the
intended use of the spaces at the Public Building (including the possible Property D.3.1 Scope of Construction
Development Component/s).
The Builder shall undertake the Construction Works for the Contract Package as
FFFE materials may be wood or non-wood, resistant to termites (if of wood) for at
described in the Information Memorandum.
least two (2) years, and protected from rust for at least for five (5) years. They should
NOT contain or emit any carcinogenic or toxic substance. New materials must first be
certified by the Bureau of Product Standards (BPS) of the Department of Trade and D.3.2 Standards and Specifications for Construction
Industry (DTI).
The construction of the Project shall be implemented according to the DAED prepared
by the Builder, as reviewed and concurred with by the Project or Construction
D.2.11 Other Requirements Manager (PCM) or by the Independent Consultant (IC).
Since the Builder will undertake Design-Build Services, the conduct of the soil b. The Construction of the Project shall also comply with the MPSS for Construction
investigations and of the requisite environmental investigations, MUST all be herein prescribed. The MPSS for Construction includes conformance to the provisions
undertaken by the Builder on their account. pertaining to building under the DPWH Blue Book, Volume III.
All conceptual through detailed architectural and engineering design (CAED to DAED) The Blue Book prescribes, among other things, the material requirements and
plans, designs, drawings/ details, schedules, specifications, bill of quantities (BoQ), construction requirements for different items of work, including the tests to be
detailed cost estimates (DCEs) and similar regulated professional practice documents conducted during Construction by the Builder. The Blue Book incorporates provisions
must be signed and dry-sealed by Filipino registered and licensed professionals of the ASTM and ACI, among others, pertaining to construction. Attention shall be
(RLPs) in full accordance with law e.g. only registered and licensed architects (RLAs) given to the relevant items of work in the following Parts of the Blue Book:
shall prepare, sign and seal the pertinent architectural documents. The ‘As-Built’ plans  Part A - Earthwork
are to be transmitted to the Procuring Agency by the Builder at the completion of the
construction work for the Project.  Part B – Plain and Reinforced Concrete Works
During construction, the Project site must be protected by a 3.0 m tall temporary  Part C – Finishing
perimeter enclosure, where the height shall be reckoned from either the natural or  Part D – Electrical (and Electronics)
finished grade line (NGL/ FGL). Such an enclosure should be of sturdy construction
such that it does NOT constitute a danger during extreme events e.g. storms,  Part E – Sanitary/ Plumbing Works
earthquakes, fire, widespread civil disturbances, and similar occurrences. For materials and technologies NOT covered by the Blue Book, or if the Builder
The Builder MUST provide a certification that the parts and spares for all components intends to use any new material/ technology which is NOT accredited by the DPWH
under the Contract Package shall be available to the Procuring Agency over a period of Bureau of Research and Standards (BRS), the Builder shall submit a certification from
at least ten (10) years after the completion of the Works under the Project. a recognized foreign/ international institution to the effect that the new materials/
technology meets the Minimum Performance Standards and Specifications (MPSS) for
this Project and that the new materials/ technologies have been successfully used in
existing structures with proven integrity.
D.3.3 Detailed Construction Plan
The Builder shall prepare a Detailed Construction Plan (DCP) as part of the DAED that
it shall submit to the PCM or IC for review and concurrence. The DCP shall be based on
the preliminary Construction Plan submitted in the Technical Proposal of the Builder’s
Bid, as updated and detailed to fit the elements of the DAED. The DCP MUST identify
the procedures, processes and management systems that the Builder will apply to
ensure the implementation of the Construction Works in accordance with the
Agreement.
As a minimum, the DCP must define the following:
 Construction organization and management structures for the Contract Package,
identifying key personnel and positions, Constructors, and sub-constructors.
D-15 D-16
 Construction methodology and procedures, including pre-fabrication if any.  All parts of the Project have been completed in accordance with the DAED, as
certified by the PCM or IC, and with the MPSS for Construction, including the
 Quality control and assurance system for all Works.
rectification of all defects.
 Construction schedule, milestones, and S-curve covering all Contract Package
 The completed Project can be safely and reliably placed into normal use and
components and Project site.
occupancy by the competent authorities and end-users.
 Major construction equipment and materials to be used.
The Builder MUST submit (1) the As-Built Drawings, (2) an Asset Register to include a
 Health, safety, and security program in accordance with Department Order No. 13, description of all assets constructed, and (3) the Construction Completion Report for
series of 1998, of the Department of Labor and Employment (DoLE). the Project under the Contract Package, to the Procuring Agency NOT later than two
 Measures and procedures for: (2) months after the issuance of the Certificate of Completion for the Project.
- Control and monitoring of the construction schedule as against actual

Annexes for this MPSS follow.
construction works;
Very Important Notes:
- Supervision and monitoring of the quality control and assurance system for the
Works, including the integrity of tests conducted;  This procurement effort involves both design preparation and construction
delivery by the Builder being sought. The Builder is expected to prepare both its
- Monthly updating of the Construction Plan and monthly progress reports;
Conceptual Architectural and Engineering Design (CAED) and Detailed
- Development and approval of Construction documentation; and Architectural and Engineering Design (DAED) for the Public Building (the
‘Project’).
- Survey and condition monitoring;
 In the event of a possible conflict or inconsistency between the content of these
 Strategies for:
MPSS and its future Annexes or between such future MPSS Annexes, the Builder
- Managing risks must bring the matter to the attention of the Procuring Agency and its Project or
Construction Manager (PCM) or Independent Consultant (IC) at the soonest time
- Obtaining all necessary approvals and permits from national and local
possible.
government authorities
 Further, for both bid preparation and design/ construction purposes, the Builder
- Details of records management and indexing protocols that will enable
is instructed to always adopt the provision that shall result in the most
referencing of all design and construction records to the Contract Package
appropriate, the most responsive and the most complete design/ construction/
components, work type and location
operation/ maintenance solution that shall be consistent with the best local and
international industry practices for design and construction.
D.3.4 Test Requirements
 On matters of compliance with these MPSS and its future Annexes, the PCM or IC
The Builder shall undertake tests during construction in accordance with the shall be the designated sole authority for design review, construction assessment
schedule of minimum testing requirements for items of work and materials covered and initial alternative dispute resolution (ADR) for design and construction issues
by the Blue Book. arising from differing interpretations of the MPSS.
If any new Construction materials proposed by the Builder are NOT covered by the
Blue Book, these materials shall first pass the evaluation and accreditation system of
the DPWH BRS, certified by the PCM or IC, and approved by the Procuring Agency,
before the new materials are used in the Project.
D.3.5 Completion of Construction
The IC shall be required to determine and certify that the Builder has fully complied
with the following requirements for the completion of Construction and, if so, shall
notify the Procuring Agency, which shall then issue the Certificate of Completion to
the Builder in accordance with the Agreement:
 All Tests for Construction comply with the pertinent provisions of the Blue Book
and other test requirements of the MPSS for Construction.
D-17 D-18
Contents
E.1 INTRODUCTION..................................................................................................................................... 1
E.1.1 INTENT OF THE DEVELOPMENT GUIDELINES ................................................................................... 1
E.1.2 DEVELOPMENT AND COMMUNITY PHILOSOPHY .............................................................................. 1
E.2 DEVELOPMENT GUIDELINES FOR PROPOSED BUILDINGS ............................................................... 2
E.2.1 LAND USE STANDARDS ........................................................................................................................ 2
E.2.2 GENERAL USE AND DEVELOPMENT GUIDELINES .............................................................................. 5
E.2.3 ROAD RIGHTS-OF-WAY (RROWS)/ STREETS AND LEGAL EASEMENTS .......................................... 8
E.2.4 MISCELLANEOUS GUIDELINES ............................................................................................................12
E.2.4.1 ADMINISTRATION ...............................................................................................................................13
Annex E Development Guidelines and Design E.2.4.2 UPDATE AND REVISION OF THESE DGDG (ON A NEED BASIS) ........................................................14
E.3 PHYSICAL PLANNING GUIDANCE........................................................................................................15
Guidance (DGDG) for Buildings and their E.3.1 SITE DEVELOPMENT GUIDANCE ........................................................................................................15
Sites / Grounds E.3.2 CIVIL WORKS GUIDANCE ....................................................................................................................18
E.3.3 URBAN DESIGN GUIDANCE .................................................................................................................21
Important Note: This brief presents the potentially optimum development guidelines
and design guidance (DGDG) allowed under existing national and local Philippine (PH) E.4 DESIGN/ POST-DESIGN GUIDANCE ....................................................................................................24
laws for the buildings and the properties/ sites/ grounds under consideration. E.4.1 DETAILED DESIGN PROCESS...............................................................................................................24
Property Owners are at liberty to scale down the proposed development to the
E.4.2 POST-DESIGN PROCESS .......................................................................................................................28
desired/ required/ affordable limit.
E.4.3 ARCHITECTURAL GUIDANCE ..............................................................................................................28
This deliverable offers suggestions as to what to look for while reviewing the physical
planning, design and development of various building and sites/ grounds project E.4.4 SUGGESTED ARCHITECTURAL DESIGN OBJECTIVES........................................................................30
components. E.4.5 ARCHITECTURAL DESIGN CONCEPTS ................................................................................................31
E.4.6 SUGGESTED ARCHITECTURAL PLANNING AND DESIGN CRITERIA ................................................32
E.4.7 OTHER ARCHITECTURAL CONSIDERATIONS....................................................................................34
E.4.8 LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE GUIDANCE ..........................................................................................36
E.5 ENVIRONMENTAL GUIDANCE .............................................................................................................40
E.6 NON-MOBILE BILLBOARDS (NMBS)/ ELECTRONIC DISPLAYS AND SIGNAGES .............................59
E.6.1 REGULATION OF NMBS/ ELECTRONIC DISPLAYS WITHIN A LGU ..................................................63
E-i
Tables, Figures and Equations Acronyms and Abbreviations

Table E-1 Setbacks for Commercial and Industrial Buildings (applicable to BUILDINGS)……..………………2 Term Definition
Table E-2 Reference Table of Maximum Allowable PSO, Maximum Allowable ISA, the MACA, the AFSU amenities/ facilities/ services/ utilities
Minimum USA and the TOSL for a PUD ...............................................................................................................3 AI Architectural Interiors
AMBF Allowable Maximum Building Footprint
Table E-3 Minimum Requirements for Air Changes ...........................................................................................................6
B.P. Batas Pambansa (State law)
Table E-4 Range of Required Sidewalk and Planting Strip Widths (total at both sides of RROW) by
BHL Building Height Limit
RROW Width ................................................................................................................................................................. 11
BoD Bureau of Design
Table E-5 Minimum Planting Strip Widths by RROW Width ....................................................................................... 11
BOD Bio-Oxygen Demand
Table E-6 Example of the Application of the Basic Sustainable Development Controls under P.D. No. BOT Build-Operate-Transfer
1096 (NBCP) ................................................................................................................................................................. 51 CBB Wood-Wool Cement-Bonded Board
Table E-7 Embodied Energy Levels of the Construction and Finishing Materials Specified and Used CDMP Comprehensive Development Master Plan
for a Typical Public Building .................................................................................................................................. 55 cum cubic meter

DGDG Development Guidelines and Design Guidance
Table E-8 Initially Calculated Carbon Footprint for a Typical Low-Rise Public Building ............................... 58
DoE Department of Energy
DoLE Department of Labor & Employment
Figure E-1 STANDARD FORM (Type A0, A1, A2 and A3) FOR BUILDING PLANS/ CONSTRUCTION
DPWH Department of Public Works & Highways
DRAWINGS Figure III.1.(of the 2004 Revised IRR of the 1977 NBCP) ............................................... 27
EMoP Environmental Monitoring Program
EMP Environmental Management Plan
EMS Environmental Management Standards
EPI Environmental Performance Indicators
FCB Fiber Cement Board
FCL Finished Ceiling Line
FFL Finished Floor Line
FGL Finished Grade Line
FLAR floor to lot area ratio (same as FAR/ floor area ratio)
GFA Gross Floor Area
HLURB Housing and Land Use Regulatory Board
IRR Implementing Rules And Regulations
LGU Local Government Unit
m meter
mm millimeter
MVB Maximum Volume of Building
MDP Master Development Plan
MPSS Minimum Performance Standards And Specifications
Reviewer DPWH BoD
NBCP National Building Code of the Philippines
NGL Natural Grade Line
NMB Non-Mobile Billboard
OFB Outermost Face of Building
OSR Open Space Requirement
P.D. Presidential Decree
PH Philippine/s
E-ii
E-iii
Term
ppm
Definition
parts per million
Glossary
PPP Public-Private Partnership Term Definition
PRC Professional Regulation Commission GFA The total floor space within the perimeter of the permanent external building walls (inclusive of the additional
building/ enclosed area/s); areas such as open/ semi-covered parking, walks/ covered walks, courts, pools,
PSO percentage of site occupancy ponds/ grotto, generator shed/ pump room/s and elevated platforms/ view decks do NOT form part of the
GFA.
PUD planned unit development
impervious surface A paved surface, usually just outside the building perimeter, that prevents surface water percolation i.e. the
RLA registered and licensed Architect sinking of water into the ground or paved surfaces that do not have the capability to retard surface water flow,
RLLA registered and licensed Landscape Architect thereby contributing to flashfloods;
RLECE registered and licensed Professional Electronics Engineer RROW The area existing between two (2) or more defined activity spaces that afford such areas direct pedestrian and
vehicular access only; in particular, the RROW/ street shall consist of the sidewalk, the curb and gutter (where
RLEnP registered and licensed Environmental Planner present), the carriageway and all of the other hard-scapes (including street furniture) and soft-scapes that may
be initially introduced by the Owner on the property;
RLPEE registered and licensed Professional Electrical Engineer
street Same as road right-of-way (RROW); common term for RROW;
RLPME registered and licensed Professional Mechanical Engineer
PUD A planned unit development (PUD) refers to a land development scheme for a new project site wherein said
RLSnE registered and licensed Sanitary Engineer project site must have a Comprehensive Development Master Plan (CDMP) or its acceptable equivalent i.e. a
unitary development plan/ site plan that permits flexibility in planning/ urban design, building/ structure siting,
ROI return-on-investment complementarity of building types and land uses, usable open spaces for general public use services and
ROW right-of-way business activities and the preservation of significant natural land features if feasible, whereby said CDMP
must be duly approved by the LGU concerned;
SDP site development planning
TGFA The total floor space within a building (inclusive of extensions/ additions to such a building/ enclosed area)
SPP Standards of Professional Practice (for State-registered and licensed architects/ RLAs in the PH) and auxiliary buildings; the TGFA consists of the GFA and all other enclosed/ partially enclosed support areas
that are built up and/ or paved (with an impervious surface) together with all other usable horizontal areas/
STS sewage treatment system surfaces above and below the finished grade line (FGL) that are all physically attached to such a building;
SWMS solid waste management system areas such as open/ semi-covered parking, walks/ covered walks, courts, pools, ponds/ grotto, generator
shed/ pump room/s and elevated platforms/ view decks all form part of the TGFA.
sqm square meter
Urban Design The 2004 IRR of Republic Act (R.A.) No. 9266 (The Architecture Act of 2004) defines urban design as the
sqmm square millimeter physical and systematic design undertaken by a State-registered and licensed architect (RLA) on a
community and urban plane, more comprehensive than, and an extension of the architecture of buildings,
TA transaction advisor spaces between buildings, entourage, utilities and movement systems. Presently, this definition is the primary
legal basis for interpreting the scope of urban design in the Philippines, even as it applies to projects in rural
TGFA total gross floor area
settings such as environmentally- sustainable developments.
TLA total lot area
TOSL total open space within lot
WHO World Health Organization
E-iv
E-v
E.1 Introduction E.2 Development Guidelines for Proposed BUILDINGS

E.1.1 Intent of the Development Guidelines E.2.1 Land Use Standards
The Department of Public Works and Highways (DPWH) Design Guidelines,
Criteria and Standards (the “DGCS”) and its Volume 6 (Buildings and Related/ Other E.2.1.1 Development Standards
Documents) Annex [Development Guidelines and Design Guidance (the “DGDG”)]
The applicable overall development standards must necessarily include the pertinent
have been formulated for the following purposes:
issuances of the PH National Government, NOT limited to certain physical planning-
 Further promote and protect the health, safety, comfort, convenience and general related guidelines of P.D. No. 1096, otherwise known as the 1977 National Building
welfare of the Owners and the pre-identified users of the buildings for which the Code of the Philippines (NBCP) and its 2004 Revised Implementing Rules and
pertinent plans, designs and documents are to be reviewed by the DPWH BoD. Regulations (IRR, effective 01 May 2005), local development-related ordinances, or
 Protect the character and stability of the development as a physically planned even certain issuances of the Housing and Land Use Regulatory Board (HLURB) as
community and to promote an orderly and beneficial process of development/ may be applicable, and the like.
redevelopment. Compliances with the applicable stipulations of the 1977 NBCP and its 2004 Revised
 Regulate the location, footprint, height, bulk, gross and total gross floor areas IRR effective May 2005, the Referral Codes (RCs) of the NBCP (e.g. Fire/ Structural/
(GFA/ TGFA) and open space ratios of the planned buildings/ structures in order Electrical/ Mechanical/ Sanitation/ Architectural/ Water/ Sanitation Codes, the
to diminish the potentially negative effects of these elements on overall/ general Accessibility Law, etc.), applicable ordinances of the host local government unit (LGU),
public safety, health and welfare. which shall be applied suppletorily, and which should not be in conflict with (and
should be more stringent than) the minimum development controls prescribed under
 Protect and enhance the open spaces of the buildings in order to preserve the the NBCP and its 2004 Revised IRR and RCs) and all other applicable laws are
desired character and ecology of the development and its setting. required for all architects, engineers, designers, developers, constructors, sub-
 Contribute to the process of decision-making in the implementation of the constructors, etc. who shall work on Project components on-site.
development plan/ effort.
The DPWH BoD as Reviewer shall actively interpret and continually evolve (and E.2.1.2 Setbacks and Foot-printing within the Defined Building Sites
improve upon) these DGDG, duly aided by qualified technical consultants (as needed),
Being parts of planned unit developments (PUDs), the footprints of BUILDINGS must
particularly on any question or possible uncertainty that may arise regarding these
be set at a specific minimum distance from the edge of their respective RROWs, as
DGDG or of any other matters of importance to the well-being of BUILDING end-users.
follows:
E.1.2 Development and Community Philosophy Table E-1 Setbacks for Commercial and Industrial Buildings (applicable to BUILDINGS)
A BUILDING Project (the “Project”) shall provide the advantages of safety, community Road Right-of-Way (RROW) Width Front Side Rear
and a productive and uplifting environment. With integrated activity spaces as a (meters) (meters) (meters) (meters)
BUILDING’s primary focus, the designers shall situate a BUILDING’s target public 30.0 and above 8.0 5.0 5.0
users within highly functional spaces on a setting of limited open spaces, hopefully 25.0 to 29.0 6.0 3.0 3.0
attaining a high degree of integration of the natural and built environments. 20.0 to 24.0 5.0 3.0 3.0
All activities and functions must promote the well-being of the individual end-users, 10.0 to 19.0 5.0 2.0 2.0
and of the community as a whole, and must not be detrimental to a BUILDING’s Below 10.0 (if introduced) 5.0 2.0 2.0
intended utilitarian character. A balance between the needs and expectations of
Source: Table VIII.3 of the 2004 Revised IRR of P.D. No. 1096/ 1977 NBCP
individuals and the community as a whole must be achieved and maintained.
The Open Space Requirement (OSR), otherwise referred to as the Percentage of Site
Occupancy (PSO) or Allowable Maximum Building Footprint (AMBF) for buildings
under the 2004 Revised IRR of the 1977 NBCP, that MUST be satisfied for BUILDING
properties shall be at sixty percent (60.0%) of the total lot area (TLA). The applicable
breakdown of the Total Open Space within Lot (TOSL) to be satisfied shall at
maximum development be as follows:
E-2
E-1
Table E-2 Reference Table of Maximum Allowable PSO, Maximum Allowable ISA, the the NBCP), the maximum depth of the basement can then be made equal to one-
MACA, the Minimum USA and the TOSL for a PUD
half (0.5) of the height of the building above grade; if the prescriptions for
Building/ % of Total Lot Area (TLA) natural lighting and ventilation are satisfied, the basement depth can therefore
Structure Use or
Occupancy be as much as one-third (0.33) of the combined height of the building to be
Duly-Approved Zoning
Maximum Maximum Minimum USA TOSL d
(or Land Use)
(examples only) Allowable PSOAllowable ISAc (Unpaved Open(ISA + constructed above grade and below grade.
(Paved OpenSpaces) USA)
Spaces) - The center portion of all basement levels shall be reserved for the satisfaction
of the basement level may extend by a minimum clear distance of 1.4 m from
70
PUD at an inland area 10 20 30
close to an operating the outermost face of the building (OFB) at grade level.
airport
- The OFB at the second and lower basement levels shall follow the line of the
70
PUD at a reclamation 15 15 30 OFB at grade level.
area close to an
operating airport
- All drainage structures below grade shall not exceed the OFB below grade.
Source: Table VIII.1 of the 2004 Revised IRR of P.D. No. 1096/ 1977 NBCP
 Minimum Provisions for Natural Lighting and Ventilation at Basement Levels: If
basements are to be developed, the following minimum provisions for natural
Additionally, there are applicable Angles/ Slopes emanating from the centerlines of light and ventilation shall be satisfied:
the road rights-of-way (“RROWs” or “streets”) that limit architectural projections and
- A primary or main natural light and ventilation shaft (vertical) with a clear
that must be complied with to satisfy additional natural light and ventilation
distance of at least 3.0 m shall be located at the center of the building and shall
requirements along both the RROWs and the front yards of the proposed buildings at
traverse the entire combined height of the building above and below grade;
DPWH properties (reference Figure VII.G.1/ G.2 and Table VII.G.3 of the 2004 Revised
(referencing Fig. VIII.G.23. of the 2004 IRR of the NBCP).
IRR of P.D. No. 1096/ 1977 NBCP).
- Secondary or support natural light and ventilation shaft/s (angular) with a
clear distance of at least 1.2 m shall emanate from the front and rear perimeters
E.2.1.3 Building Height Limit (BHL) and Basements
of the building and shall traverse the entire depth of the basement; the angular
As a BUILDING is usually part of a planned unit development (PUD) e.g. located at an shaft/s shall be at an angle of 60º from the horizontal, consistent with the
inland area close to an operating airport, the maximum allowable height for a building/ maximum Philippine solar angle; separate angular shafts emanating from the
structure on the property shall be from 3- to 25-storeys i.e. 10.0 m to 75.0 m (with side perimeters of the building are encouraged.
CAAP-prescribed BHL as needed) as measured from the top/ finished surface of the - Both the vertical and angular shafts shall only be used for natural air and light
average sidewalk elevation along the RROW/ street immediately fronting the intake and shall not be used for any form of exhaust or air exchange to keep the
BUILDING site, or as otherwise lawfully provided under Table VII.2 and related rules temperature inside the shafts at a minimum.
of the 2004 Revised IRR (effective 01 May 2005) of Presidential Decree (P.D.) No.
1096, otherwise known as the 1977 National Building Code of the Philippines (NBCP).
E.2.1.4 Building Bulk
The stated BHL excludes basement construction where legally and technically feasible.
The NBCP does NOT prescribe a minimum number of basement structures, only that The applicable Floor to Lot Area Ratio (FLAR) i.e. same as Floor Area Ratio (FAR)
such basements not be under the RROW i.e. excluding below-grade crossings. rights at maximum development (including the maximum building/ enclosed area
Basement levels are NOT suggested for BUILDING sites on reclaimed land. In the event additions) shall be at:
however that a Proponent suggests a basement level for a reclaimed BUILDING site,  2.0 to 3.0 times the total lot areas (TLAs) for a building site i.e. if the development
the applicable rules are as follows:
is classified exclusively as an institutional use.
 Maximum Configuration of Basement Levels: While basements may be developed  6.0 to 18.0 times the total lot area (TLA) for the building site i.e. if the
for medium to very high density mixed-use developments, BUILDING planning, development is classified as part of a PUD at an inland area close to an operating
design and construction shall observe the following limitations:
airport.
- The minimum RROW width that services the lot on which the basement can be
 6.0 times the total lot area (TLA) for the building site i.e. if the development is
constructed should be at least 10.0 m wide. classified as part of a PUD at a reclamation area close to an operating airport
- For basements to be allowed, the prescribed setbacks and yards must be (reference Table VII.G.1 of the 2004 Revised IRR of the NBCP) but these may still be
satisfied for the building/ structure above grade in as much as the very same adjusted through the proper representations with either the Local Building
setbacks shall apply below grade to determine the maximum depth or width of Official (BO) or the DPWH Secretary (in his capacity as the National Building
the basement level. Official/ NBO under P.D. No. 1096 (1977 NBCP), mainly if there can be potentially
resultant hardship on the part of the Building Owner, considering the very high
- If the NBCP prescriptions for introducing natural light and ventilation into all
value of the properties (which must both yield a decent return). The applicable
basement levels are first satisfied (referencing Fig. VIII.G.23. of the 2004 IRR of
Gross Floor Area (GFA) and Total Gross Floor Area (TGFA) at maximum
E-4
E-3
development (including the maximum building/ enclosed area additions) shall be provided with a window or windows with an area not less than 1/20 of the floor
arise from the utilized FLAR rights. area of such rooms, provided that such opening shall not be less than 240 sqmm. Such
a window or windows shall open directly to a court, yard, public street or alley, or to
an open watercourse.
E.2.2 General Use and Development Guidelines
The required windows may open into a roofed porch where the porch:
E.2.2.1 Parking Provision  Abuts a court, yard, public street or alley, or open watercourse and other public
open spaces
Under the NBCP, the required parking for a public school development shall be as
follows (for confirmation):  Has a ceiling height of not less than 2.7 m
 One (1) car slot for every 500.0 sqm of GFA or fraction thereof.  Has one of the longer sides at least 65% open and unobstructed
 One off-RROW (off-street) passenger loading space that can accommodate two (2) Eaves, canopies, awnings (or media agua) over required windows shall not be less
queued jeepney/ shuttle slots; or two (2) queued bus slots whichever is applicable. than 750 mm from the side and rear property lines.
 The maneuvering area of buses shall be outside of the RROW i.e. within the There shall absolutely be no openings on/ at/ within/ through all types of abutments
property or lot lines only (reference Table VII.4 of the 2004 Revised IRR of the (such as firewalls) erected along property lines or along the edge of RROWs, except
NBCP). possibly for correctly positioned and properly/ duly-permitted vent wells. In locating
window openings it should be borne in mind that in cases of extreme emergencies,
windows must serve as emergency egress to vacate the premises or access for rescue
E.2.2.2 Minimum Ceiling Heights at Buildings
operations. Such windows shall meet the following requirements:
Habitable rooms provided with artificial ventilation shall have ceiling heights not less  These can be opened from the inside without the use of any tools;
than 2.4 m measured from the floor to the ceiling. The 2004 IRR of the NBCP further
provides that for buildings of more than one (1) storey, the minimum ceiling height of  The minimum clear opening shall have a width not less than 820 mm and a height
the first storey shall be 2.7 m and that for the second storey, it shall be 2.4 m. The of 1.0 m
succeeding stories (above the 2nd storey) shall have an unobstructed typical head-  The bottom of the opening should not be more than 820 mm from the floor;
room clearance of not less than 2.1 m above the finished floor. Enclosed spaces with
 Where storm shutters, screens or iron grilles are used, these shall be provided
natural ventilation shall have ceiling heights of not less than 2.7 m while mezzanine
with quick opening mechanism so that they can be readily opened from the inside
levels shall have a clear ceiling height of not less than 1.8 m above and below it.
for emergency egress and shall be so designed that when opened they will not
drop to the ground
E.2.2.3 Minimum Sizes and Dimensions of Rooms
 All areas immediately outside a fire exit window/ grille must be free of obstacles
The minimum sizes of rooms and their least horizontal dimensions shall be as follows: and must lead to a direct access down into the ground or street level.
 Rooms for human habitation - 6.0 sqm with a least dimension of 2.0 m;
E.2.2.6 2.2.6. Artificial Ventilation
 Kitchen - 3.0 sqm with a least dimension of 1.5 m; and
 Bath and toilet - 1.2 sqm with a least dimension of 900 mm. Rooms or spaces housing heating equipment shall be provided with artificial means of
ventilation to prevent excessive accumulation of hot and/or polluted air. Whenever
artificial ventilation is required, the equipment shall be designed to meet the following
E.2.2.4 Minimum Air Spaces
minimum requirements in air changes as shown in Table E-3 hereafter.
The minimum air spaces shall be provided as follows:
Table E-3 Minimum Requirements for Air Changes
 School rooms - 3.0 cum with 1.0 sqm of floor area per person;
Cubic Meter (CuM) Air Changes Per Hour
 Workshop/ laboratory and offices - 12.0 cum of air space per person; and Per Minute
Per Person Ceiling Height
(examples) (meters)
 Habitable rooms - 14.0 cum of air space per person.
Min. Max. 2.4 3.0 3.7 4.9 6.1
E.2.2.5 Window Openings Cafeteria 0.43 0.57 6 4-½ 3-½ 2-½ 1-¾
Chapel 0.14 0.22 3 2 1-½ 1 ¾
Rooms intended for any use, not provided with artificial ventilation system, shall be
Shop, Retail 0.22 0.29 3 2 1-½ 1 ¾
provided with a window or windows with a total free area of openings equal to at
Office 0.29 0.43 4 3 2-¼ 1-½ 1
least 10% of the floor area of the room, provided that such opening shall be not less
Cafeteria Kitchen 0.34 0.43 5 3-¾ 3 2 1-½
than 1.0 sqm. However, toilet and bath rooms, laundry rooms and similar rooms shall
E-6
E-5
Source: Table VIII.4 of the 2004 Revised IRR of P.D. No. 1096/ 1977 NBCP Utility meter centers shall not be obstructed or altered and the maintenance of utility
meter centers shall be conducted by authorized personnel only.
For other rooms or spaces not specifically covered in Table E-3, the applicable Groundwater wells shall preferably not be constructed within the development.
provisions of the pertinent referral code/s apply. Rainwater collection devices shall be preferably maintained but kept completely out
of public view.
E.2.2.7 Building Modifications
E.2.2.10 Storage
No building/ structure shall be modified to the point where it detracts from the visual
harmony of the schooling community. Front and optional side yard areas visible to the public shall not be used for storage of
DPWH-permitted additions and alterations to buildings/ structures shall strictly any form. Personal property shall be stored completely out of public view.
conform to the intent of these DGDG. No lumber, metals or other bulk materials shall be kept, stored or allowed to
Additions and alterations shall only be in the same architectural style as the original accumulate on any part of the development except during limited/ permitted periods
building/ structure. Additional building materials and color, on the exterior face, shall during construction or alteration.
be similar to the existing building/ structure. Roof slope and/ or parapet construction No machinery or equipment shall be stored or operated upon any part of the
shall likewise match those at the pre-existing building/ structure. development unless necessary and customary for the ordinary use of the property or
All building modifications must be approved by the DPWH Administrator, including for limited construction or alteration work.
repainting, which must still comply with the prescribed/ original color scheme/s. Generator sets shall be pre-approved by the Building Designers before any installation
Building additions (if and only if applicable) shall preferably not be constructed at the commences. The appropriate pollution control or mitigation devices should be
front yard area but shall be encouraged at the rear yards, provided no violations of the provided i.e. noise and air pollutants, etc.
minimum standards prescribed under the 2004 Revised IRR of the NBCP are made.
Roof or gutters of building additions shall not be drained onto neighbouring parcels. E.2.3 Road Rights-of-Way (RROWs)/ Streets and Legal Easements
Retaining walls (if provided) shall not be altered, demolished, or changed by building Within the BUILDING sites, the generated RROWs shall constitute the primary free
additions. Walls for building additions shall have proper structural foundation, such as access zone i.e. where all users (pedestrians and vehicles) may pass for ingress/
cantilever footings or grade beams, independent from that of the retaining wall. egress purposes (intra-property and extra-property movements/ circulation).
The RROW is essentially made up of three (3) parts i.e. the carriageway (or roadway)
E.2.2.8 Trash and Recycling
on which vehicles pass, and which usually take up to 2/3 of the RROW width, the
sidewalk on which pedestrians pass, and which usually take up to 1/3 of the RROW
No person, including any of the end-users and visitors, shall dump refuse on any part
width, and the curb and gutter assembly, which acts as the transition between the
of the property, except in the designated areas for such material/ refuse.
carriageway (at a lower surface elevation) and the sidewalk (at a higher surface
No weeds, rubbish, debris, objects or materials of any kind shall be placed or elevation).
permitted to accumulate within the development.
The RROW/ street areas extend throughout all the three (3) identifiable physical
Garbage and recycling materials shall be placed in covered containers only, preferably development levels of the RROW i.e. grade (street) level, below grade (under the
out of public view. Waste shall be segregated by using separate trash containers for surface of the street) and above grade (above the surface of the street), more properly
biodegradable and non-biodegradable trash. Trash collection and handling shall be defined as follows:
conducted according to or higher than local standards and will be contracted by the
 RROW ABOVE GRADE - refers to the portion of the RROW reckoned from the
Building Owner.
finished surface of the carriageway and/or the sidewalk/ arcade all the way up to
Composting of contained and inoffensive kitchen and yard waste is encouraged only if the air; if this level of the RROW is utilized for whatever purpose, it is the air rights
space can be made available. Approved composting devices shall be maintained that come into play; the minimum clear height for the utilization of air rights
completely out of public view e.g. at the well-ventilated green roof (if introduced). above RROW shall be 4.27 m from the finished crown elevation of the
The burning of trash and refuse is absolutely prohibited under law. carriageway;
 RROW AT GRADE - refers to the portion of the RROW reckoned from the natural
E.2.2.9 Utilities grade line (NGL) up to the finished surface of the carriageway and/ or the
sidewalk/ arcade; this portion of the RROW is generally utilized for the movement
To avoid interference with utility and wastewater lines and surface water drainage, of the general public (motorists and pedestrians alike); and
future excavations onsite shall not exceed 0.30 m in depth.
E-8
E-7
 RROW BELOW GRADE - refers to the portion of the RROW reckoned from the  Any other form of private use, gain, enjoyment or profit at the expense of the
finished surface of the carriageway and/or the sidewalk all the way down into the motoring or walking public.
ground.
E.2.3.3 Preservation of View Corridors and/or Sight Lines
E.2.3.1 Allowed or Encouraged Structures/ Developments Within the RROW/ Street
 The carriageway/ roadway portion of the RROW shall be free of structures,
The RROW at all BUILDING physical levels may only be used for the following types of particularly from commercial signs that will impede the view corridor and sight
structures/ uses or others similar to them, to wit: lines within the RROW.
 Vehicular transportation and ambulant pedestrian-related structures and like  View corridors or sight lines from buildings/ structures on a higher or lower lot
uses whether temporary or permanent e.g. Carriageway, sidewalk, street furniture shall not be entirely blocked by the intervening buildings to allow sight lines to
such as waiting sheds, traffic outposts, streetlamps/ signages and their support exist.
structures, barriers, planterboxes and the like;
 In case of allowed structures within the RROW for transportation or ambulant
 Limited commercial structures/ uses above grade (RROW air rights utilization) or mobility e.g. elevated or ramped crossings/ overpass and the like, the appropriate
below grade, provided that these are ancillary or supplementary/ complementary designs shall be adopted to maximize light, ventilation and view.
to the transportation/ pedestrian-related structures/uses allowed in the previous
paragraph, and the like; E.2.3.4 Sidewalks
 Improvements on the RROW and on all building components/ elements found at
Subject to existing laws and regulations, the local planning authority shall be
all building physical levels e.g. Sidewalks, carriageway, arcades and medians (only
optionally consulted in the determination as to which RROW/ street (particularly at
if introduced), planting strips, street furniture, elevated or underground crossings
or access-ways, and the like; and the building site perimeters) shall have an open sidewalk or an arcaded (or covered)
sidewalk, or a combination of both.
 Utility/ service structures/uses (power, water, drainage, sewerage,
telecommunications, gas, etc.) at all physical levels of the RROW provided that The minimum width of the sidewalk for a RROW width of 9.0 m or more shall be 1.2 m
these do not restrict nor impede the movement of people and vehicles and on each side of the RROW or a total of 2.4 m on both sides of the RROW. For the
minimum width of sidewalk for RROW of less than 9.0 m wide (if introduced),
provided further that the rights to utilize the portions of the RROW are properly
secured and permitted by the Building Administrator. reference Table VIII.G.3 of Rule VIII of the 2004 IRR of the 1977 NBCP.
Sidewalk widths shall be based on the following considerations:
E.2.3.2 Disallowed or Prohibited Structures/ Developments at the RROW/ Street  Volume of pedestrians (regular/ periodic end-users, visitors and the like) who will
use the sidewalks.
The RROW is part of the public domain within a building site, which should be equally
enjoyed by all end-users; as such, the RROW is not to be used for the following types of  Type, intensity or level of operation and size/ expanse of the allowed uses/
buildings/ structures/ occupancies or others similar to them: occupancies along the RROW.
 Any form of semi-permanent/ permanent or semi-enclosed/ enclosed commercial  Types and volume of street furniture e.g. street lighting and traffic signs/ signal
structure/ use and like structures/uses not specifically permitted by the Building supports, pedestrian barriers/ aids, etc., and other urban design elements that will
Administrator. be allowed as permanent fixtures within the width of the sidewalk.
 Any form of temporary, semi-permanent/ permanent or semi-enclosed/ enclosed  Width of the planting strips (if introduced).
residential structure/use and like structures/uses not specifically permitted by  Spatial needs for placements of utility/ service lines underneath the sidewalk and
the Building Administrator. for utility/service poles.
 Long-term or overnight vehicle parking i.e. Unless duly permitted by the Building  Compliance with accessibility requirements as stipulated under Batas Pambansa
Administrator. (B.P.) Blg. 344 (Accessibility Law).
 As a depository of stalled or abandoned vehicles, mechanical devices and the like,  Provisions for commuters e.g. waiting sheds, loading/ unloading areas (as
which shall be removed upon instruction by the Building Administrator. introduced) and the like.
 The conduct of non-institutional activities deemed incompatible with the  Provisions for vehicle crossings/ driveways between the carriageway and the
character of the RROW and of the building site. front yards of buildings/ structures or provisions for loading/ unloading
 Unauthorized recreational or entertainment usage and the like which will only platforms (if allowed/ needed).
benefit certain entities and which will ultimately result in inconvenience/  Need for introduction of allowed uses/ elements within the sidewalk area only if
nuisance/ safety problems to the other end-users, nor there is sufficient sidewalk width e.g. bicycle lanes, jogging lanes and the like.
E-10
E-9
 Climate, light, ventilation, safety, security and overall maintenance of the sidewalk a separating strip between the arcaded portion and the open portion of the sidewalk
and all BUILDING surface areas. (reference is also made to Figure VIII.G.16. of the 2004 Revised IRR of the 1977 NBCP).
Sidewalks shall be of uniform width throughout the entire length of the RROW/ street. Grade of Sidewalks
The sidewalk width grade and finish of the dominant use/ occupancy along the RROW
 Sidewalks shall, as much as possible, be level and of uniform grade throughout the
shall be generally observed.
entire length of the RROW/ street.
The width of the sidewalk shall be as follows:
 Whenever the slope of the street does not exceed 1/12 the sidewalk grade shall
follow the level or slope of the RROW/ street (reference is also made to Figure
Table E-4 Range of Required Sidewalk and Planting Strip Widths (total at both sides of VIII.G.17. of the 2004 Revised IRR of the 1977 NBCP).
RROW) by RROW Width
Road Right-of-Way (RROW) Width Range of Required Sidewalk Widths

 Whenever the slope of the street is 1/10, the sidewalk shall be maintained level
(total at both sides of the RROW) for every 20.0 to 40.0 m of run (reference is also made to Figure VIII.G.18. of the
30.0 m and above from 1/6 up to 1/4 of RROW width 2004 Revised IRR of the 1977 NBCP).
25.0 - 29.0 m from 1/6 up to 1/3 of RROW width  Sidewalks of different levels shall be joined by means of a ramp having any
20.0 - 24.0 m from 1/6 up to 1/3 of RROW width convenient slope not exceeding 1/6 (reference is also made to Figure VIII.G.18. of
10.0 - 19.0 m from 1/4 up to 1/3 of RROW width the 2004 Revised IRR of the 1977 NBCP).
Below 10.0 m from 1/4 up to 1/3 of RROW width  When the grade of two (2) connecting sidewalks are between 1/10 and 1/8, the 2
sidewalks shall be joined by means of a ramp having any convenient slope not
Source: Table VIII.G.4 of Rule VIII of the 2004 Revised IRR of P.D. No. 1096/ 1977 NBCP
exceeding 1/10.
The width of the sidewalk shall include both the paved and unpaved (and possibly No BUILDING/ structure shall be constructed unless it adjoins or has direct access to a
planted) portions. (Refer Table E-5). public space, yard or RROW/ street on at least one (1) of BUILDING sides. All
BUILDINGS/ structures shall face a RROW/ street which has been duly approved by
the proper authorities.
Table E-5 Minimum Planting Strip Widths by RROW Width
Road Right-of-Way Total Minimum Widths of Planting Strip within RROW

(RROW) Width (width per sides of the RROW in meters) E.2.4 Miscellaneous Guidelines
30.0 m & above 1.2 (0.6)
No activities in the designated front yard areas (including porches and decks if
25.0 - 29.0 m 0.6 (0.3)
introduced) shall compromise or detract from the decidedly institutional character of
20.0 - 24.0 m 0.6 (0.3)
the development. The Building Administration shall be primarily responsible for
10.0 - 19.0 m 0.4 (0.2) creating a list of specifically prohibited activities.
Below 10.0 m Optional
Unless specifically permitted, restricted and monitored by the Building
Source: Table VIII.G.5 of Rule VIII of the 2004 Revised IRR of P.D. No. 1096/ 1977 NBCP Administration, no business or commercial activity shall be conducted within the
BUILDING sites, particularly if such activity will result in or involve exterior
advertising (i.e. signs, non-mobile billboards/ NMBs/ electronic displays/ mobile
For allowed, disallowed and prohibited structures/ developments within the RROW,
billboards mounted on vehicles, etc.), increased traffic or parking, significant
refer to Sections 3.1 and 3.2 of these DGDG.
deliveries and/ or shipments or external storage of commercial goods.
The sidewalk pavement shall have a non-slip surface and shall slope down from the
Dangerous, noxious, and offensive activities are absolutely prohibited within the
building line towards the curb line at not more than 1/50 and shall level off with the
BUILDING sites. Activities causing unreasonable or continuing annoyance or nuisance
curb (reference is also made to Figure VIII.G.14. of the 2004 Revised IRR of the 1977
to the BUILDING end-users are similarly prohibited. The Building Administration shall
NBCP).
define these.
Sidewalks of 2.0 m or more in width shall include a planting strip of not less than 800
Unless forming part of carefully considered and proposed engineering interventions,
mm in width up to a maximum of 1/3 of the allowed sidewalk width, separating the
changes to the artificial/ future surface water drainage patterns on-site are
curb from the sidewalk pavement. For wider RROWs (where vehicle speeds are
prohibited. Adjacent properties shall be protected from surface run-off from the
faster), the planting strip must always be near the curbline to protect the ambulant
building site. Drainage of site and structure run-off shall be directed to the nearest
pedestrian (reference is also made to Figure VIII.G.15. of the 2004 Revised IRR of the
RROW/ street or other appropriate channeling/ discharge/ collection devices.
1977 NBCP).
All grounds surrounding buildings and structures shall be maintained in such a
Combined open and arcaded sidewalks shall be provided with a planting strip of not
manner as to prevent or minimize the risk of fire and other dangers to the BUILDING
less than 800 mm in width up to a maximum of 1/3 of the allowed sidewalk width, as
E-12
E-11
sites, as well as the neighboring parcels. This includes landscaping maintenance, observer. The Building Administrator shall develop procedures for such required
including tree-trimming, removal of dry or high grass and removal of dead tree limbs. dispute resolutions in full accordance with R.A. No. 9285 (The Alternative Dispute
Resolution Act of 2004) and its IRR. Should such a process fail, the Building
Respect the Rights of Others. All end-users and visitors are enjoined to fully respect
Administrator shall then officially endorse the dispute to the concerned purok/ sitio
other entities’ rights to enjoy and to make full use of public amenities by using
and barangay having jurisdiction over the BUILDING sites, for additional mediation.
common courtesy and good judgment at all times.
Penalties and Fine System for Violation/s of These DGDG: The Building
Landscaping Treatment and Maintenance. The Building Administrator shall be
Administrator shall formulate a system of notifying, charging and collecting fines for
responsible for the maintenance of all landscaping elements onsite, including
violations of these DGDG or for the assignment of penalties (including waiver of rights
vegetation, paving, decorative items, fountains, etc. No person shall remove any
to access to and/or use of facilities onsite) for continued or repeated violations of
landscaping element nor add any element to the designated public/ common areas,
these DGDG.
unless permitted by the Building Administrator.
Parking and Vehicles. Parking on any designated on-street parking areas is
E.2.4.2 Update and Revision of These DGDG (on a Need Basis)
permitted only during operating hours. Parking in landscaped or other areas not
intended for vehicle use is absolutely prohibited. Vehicles violating parking The Building Administrator may periodically update and revise these DGDG on an
requirements will be subject to immediate towing at the vehicle owner's expense. absolute need basis. Thereafter, sufficient notices shall be furnished all parties
Washing, maintenance, and repair of motor vehicles are prohibited onsite. concerned before the updated/ revised DGDG can take effect.
Animals and Pets. Household pets (dogs, cats, etc.) may be allowed onsite subject to
control by their owner. Owners must clean up after their pets. Pet owners shall be
liable to other end-users and visitors of the building for any harm and/ or damage to
persons or property caused by pets.
Firearms and Weapons. No firearms or other weapons (including dangerous
recreational items such as real bow and arrows) shall be used or brought onsite
except by authorized law officers, which includes the BUILDING’s security services.
Utilities. The Building Owner shall be responsible for maintaining or contracting for
the maintenance of all utilities and utility structures and facilities. No public access
shall be provided or allowed to any utility structure or facility.
Access to Public Facilities. All end-users and visitors must present a valid
identification card or similar device for entry and use of designated common facilities
wherever controlled access is enforced. A limited number of guests (to be determined
by the Building Administrator or facility management) may use the common facilities
if accompanied by an authorized entity.
Hours of Operation and Use. The Building Administrator shall determine the hours
for use of the public facilities onsite. Use of these facilities during non-operating hours
is prohibited.
Facility-Specific Rules. Particular public facilities onsite e.g. chapel (if introduced),
etc. may develop rules specific to their use and operation. These rules shall be posted
in full public view and shall be considered part of the DGDG. The Building
Administrator shall approve such rules and any future amendments.
Personal Items. All end-users and visitors shall remove all personal belongings when
leaving the designated public areas onsite.
E.2.4.1 Administration
Dispute Resolution Among End-users and Visitors: The Building Administrator

shall serve as either a conciliatory or mediating body to settle onsite disputes. In a
conciliation mode, the Building Administrator shall actively participate in seeking a
resolution to the dispute. In a mediation mode, the Building Administrator shall allow
the parties to resolve the dispute and simply act as a facilitator, recorder and
E-14
E-13
E.3 Physical Planning Guidance  Site Coverage: the percentage of the site area that may be occupied by buildings/
structures at ground level (referred to as the PSO under the 2004 Revised IRR of
These guidance for physical planners, designers, constructors and developers define the 1977 NBCP which took effect 01 May 2005).
the type and intensity of land use for public school developments such as those
 Building Height: measured both in numbers of storeys and height in meters (m)
envisioned for the BUILDING sites. These are meant to be the minimum requirements
and related to location, existing built environment and natural features; further
such that the expected standard is met. The BUILDING’s technical team will have to
restrictions are imposed on the proportion of building volume that may reach the
define their specific goals, or development characteristics, in each particular case, in
maximum height expressed as a percentage of the total building floor area
accordance with their expectations and development strategies. However, the
(referred to as Maximum Volume of Building/ MVB and partly referred to under
resulting specifications should never go below the minimum standards under these
Floor to Lot Area Ratio or FLAR under the 2004 Revised IRR of the 1977 NBCP);
physical planning and design guidance.
this regulation is partly intended to promote variety in the building volumes.
Nevertheless, and in order not to restrain, or even prevent possible creative or
 Car Parking: reference the minimum parking regulations under the 2004 Revised
innovative inputs by the physical planners/ designers, the guidance is not to be taken
IRR of the 1977 NBCP for mixed-use developments or for specific building
as rigid rules, but rather as having a considerable degree of latitude and allowing
occupancies forming such developments.
interpretation and adjustment to specific situations and site conditions, which must all
be fully compliant with the dictates of law. It will be up to the physical planning/  Setbacks and Easements: reference the provisions of both the 1949 (1954) New
design authority to ascertain the adequacy, acceptability or even quality of the Civil Code and the 1977 NBCP and its 2004 Revised IRR.
particular proposals assuming the same depart from the base criteria/ considerations.
E.3.1.3 Density
E.3.1 Site Development Guidance
Density refers to the number of end-users or buildings/ structures per hectare (ha.),
Site development planning (SDP) and design standards must be institutionalized, as which determines to a great extent the overall character of the development.
described in the succeeding sections. Guidance that are applicable to proposed public
school facility planning as well as to general developments and to environmentally- E.3.1.4 Building Heights
sensitive areas help ensure a functional, safe and attractive environment for the
building and grounds’ end-users and visitors. The maximum allowable heights of buildings greatly influence the character of an
institutional development due to the visibility of taller buildings. If a very natural site
appearance is desired, the BUILDINGS could be limited to three (4) or even up to five
E.3.1.1 Site Development Standards
(5) fully functional levels, combined with larger building footprints coupled with
There are several types of specific standards that are applicable to the controlled generous open space and landscaping. Taller buildings will create a more urban
development of institutional facilities. These standards typically include: character of development, although, if combined with ample open space and
landscaping, taller buildings can be widely acceptable in a high density institutional
 Development density environment (and possibly even on reclaimed land, if not for cost and ROI
 Building height considerations). The BUILDINGS shall require elevators to move large numbers of
passengers and heavy/ very heavy furniture and equipment, which entails additional
 Building setbacks from amenity features, rows and other buildings/ structures
costs for installation and maintenance.
 Floor to lot area ratio (FLAR)
 Site coverage i.e. Percentage of site occupancy (PSO) by buildings and other E.3.1.5 Building Setbacks
structures
The setbacks or minimum distances required of main buildings from amenity features,
 Parking requirements RROWs and other buildings, are important to maintain a sense of openness and
 Other requirements, such as those for landscaping and open space, public access sufficient space for landscaping, privacy of building occupants, and in some cases for
to amenity features, signs and utility lines. safety and security reasons. Adequate setbacks are particularly necessary for several
reasons:
E.3.1.2 Establishing Site Development Guidelines  Protection of buildings and their foundations from any perceivable damage.
 Allowance of adequate space from the RROW for public access and recreational
The exact requirements for the site development guidelines shall vary depending on
use by end-users/ visitors.
the intended character of the public school development and on the environmental
situation, although there is a generally accepted range of requirements.
Key Planning Factors:
E-16
E-15
E.3.1.6 Floor to Lot Area Ratio (FLAR) containers, and the like plus softscaping i.e. soil, water, vegetation, trees and the like. A
portion of the green roof may be assigned for composting to create fresh garden soil
Floor Area Ratio (FAR), also referred to as the Floor to Lot Area Ratio (FLAR) under or for activities such as vermiculture, hydrophonics within or near a mini-greenhouse
the 2004 Revised IRR of the NBCP, is a measure of the intensity of development, and setting. The bulk of the created spaces at the green roof may serve a variety of social
refers to the ratio between the total floor area of all storeys/ levels of all the buildings functions and amenity-related uses.
and the total site area of the DPWH properties (or total lot area/ TLA in the case of
individual buildings). The FLAR is calculated by dividing the generated gross floor
E.3.1.10 Public Access
area (GFA) by the area of the site (or of the individual lot) and is expressed as a
percentage (%). Adequate public access should be provided at amenity features and public facilities. In
addition to incorporating public access in the respective master development plans
E.3.1.7 Site Coverage (MDPs), these can be generally required by regulation, such as the introduction of
public access points to a suitable section set apart at regular distances e.g.
The site coverage by buildings and structures, also referred to as the PSO under the approximately every one thousand meters (1,000.0 m) as a possible maximum in a
2004 IRR of the 1977 NBCP, is likewise indicated as a percentage (%), and is an developed area.
important development control on the amount of impervious surface limit i.e. not
penetrable by surface/ rain water, landscaped areas and open space within the
E.3.1.11 Sign Controls
development.
Large, unattractive, and inappropriately located signs, whether commercial or
E.3.1.8 Off-street Parking directional, can greatly detract from the appearance/ character of the BUILDING
developments. Sign control standards should be established with respect to their type,
Provisions in full accordance with the 2004 IRR of the 1977 NBCP should be made for location, size, materials used and lighting. Often, an approach applied is not to allow
sufficient off-street parking to handle all vehicles, including parking/ layover/ waiting any outdoor advertising signs onsite, but only well-designed identification and
spaces for staff/ end-users/ visitors at the defined peak period use, so that the directional signs constructed of materials that are compatible with the environment
RROWs/ streets shall not become congested with parked/ waiting/ queued vehicles. A and that can be discretely lighted at night.
special provision for larger spaces may need to be made for the parking of special
vehicles/ conveyances. The specific requirements for off-street parking will vary In the event that the DPWH officially permits the mounting of non-mobile billboards
greatly, depending on the location, building type and intended occupancies/ usage of (NMBs)/ electronic displays on any of the sides of the BUILDING’s exterior surfaces,
the component developments onsite. these must be fully compliant with the latest valid and subsisting issuances of the
DPWH and its NBO, particularly on the sizing and mounting of such NMBs at any point
For some BUILDING areas, it may be difficult to precisely project parking or elevation onsite as well as the satisfaction of the minimum requirements for natural
requirements, and in fact these requirements may change over time. In these light and ventilation both inside and outside the BUILDING (refer to Section 6. of this
situations, provision can be made for possible future parking needs by allowing for DGDG).
vertical parking expansion in appropriate locations, but initially landscaping these as
part of the interim/ initial open space until such time as these may actually be needed.
E.3.1.12 Underground Utility Lines
In this manner, an excessively large area is not reserved for parking lot development,
but sufficient parking spaces will be made available for possible future use. Parking Overhead electric and telephone lines and their supporting poles are unattractive
areas of any type should be well landscaped and must fit into the overall environment elements and disturb views in any environment. Although very high voltage electric
of the intended development. lines are difficult to place underground (particularly at reclaimed areas that still need
to settle over time), the lower voltage distribution lines can still be located
E.3.1.9 Landscaping and Green Roof economically underground. Placing utility lines under the natural ground line (NGL) is
initially more expensive but because of lower maintenance costs, may be no more
In addition to the site coverage requirement, it is common practice to also require that costly over the long term than overhead lines. In areas prone to occasional high winds
a minimum amount of landscaping be developed (including any naturally-occurring that can topple utility poles and lines (or trees over the lines), underground i.e. below
vegetation onsite, as may be applicable), and that landscaping be provided in NGL lines offers additional safety and maintenance advantages.
otherwise unattractive spaces, including large parking areas, alongside RROWs and
around utility buildings and structures, in order to screen these from view. The
minimum landscaping requirement may also be expressed as a percentage (%) of total E.3.2 Civil Works Guidance
site area.
As with the other plan/ design disciplines, climatic characteristics establish the basic
A green roof may be introduced atop the BUILDINGS (if provided with deck roof factors that need to be taken into account in terms of building grounds and RROW
levels) to replace the natural ground/ vegetation lost to building footprinting. Such a features related to access and drainage plans/ designs for public school buildings/
green roof may be a combination of hardscaping i.e. walks, paths, squares, railings, grounds sited in a hot-humid tropical climate such as that found in the Philippines
barriers, landscaping furniture, lighting, plant/ soil and water holders/ structures/
E-18
E-17
(PH). Image should also evolve in the planning stage as a consequence of the physical E.3.2.3 Drainage
and market analyses as each site is unique and hence should be allowed to name and
evolve its own character and image. In addition to the drainage associated with RROWs, the specifications for other types
of drainage-ways, such as for various sizes of culverts and canals, are to be
The building grounds should be developed to enable all types of end-users to move established.
around freely and safely. This requires the removal or treatment of site hazards e.g.
abrupt changes in ground elevation, presence of large amounts of running or surface
E.3.2.4 Water Supply
water, sharp rocks or geologic formations, soft soil and the like. Natural lighting and
ventilation within the grounds and the RROWs, if present/ provided, are requirements
Water supply quality standards are evolved and established based on either local
to be fully satisfied but it is equally important to introduce provisions that protect all
standards, if they are acceptable, or on international standards such as those set by
end-users from excessive sun, light and heat.
the World Health Organization (WHO). The source of water supply will of course
The use of the correct surface colour and texture selection for construction and depend on local conditions, but standards should be established for the amount of
finishing materials to balance reflected light and heat is a must. The use of paving water required for various activities within an institutional development, the quality
materials that allow surface water percolation is highly encouraged e.g. porous/ well- level of the water, water pressure to be maintained, and the specifications of the
drained asphalt mixes, smooth stones, paver blocks/ tiles on sand bedding and the distribution system. Water supply standards should include provisions for fire
like, except in areas directly above basements. protection and water conservation techniques.
When choosing between asphalt and concrete pavement, the light and heat absorption
or reflection properties (and ambient heat generated by the material), surface traction E.3.2.5 Electric Power
and surface water percolation should become key factors for material choice. Asphalt
The source of electric power will also vary from place to place, but standards can be
pavement if properly founded and well-drained can last up to three (3) decades
evolved and established for the amount of power to be available, based on projected
without need for major repair, especially for inland locations.
demand, reliability of supply, consistency of voltage, and the specifications for
All developments should be sufficiently drained to prevent a host of sanitation/ installation of the distribution system. Any possibilities for utilizing energy
health-related problems, particularly where stagnant water can be found. Only conservation techniques such as solar heating/ power generation should be applied as
properly sized, connected and sloped drainage and sewerage lines must be in place. much as possible.
If at all possible, all developments must never interfere with the normal movement of
water/ hydraulics in and around the Project site. Intervention is however encouraged E.3.2.6 Sewage Disposal
if damage is caused to the land by excessive water movements e.g. scouring and
erosion. The type of sewage disposal system will depend on the scale of development and local
conditions, and may range from the use of septic tanks to large integrated sewage
collection and treatment systems e.g. centralized sewage treatment plan (STP),
E.3.2.1 General Engineering Guidelines
although portable compartmentalized STP units are already available in the PH
Engineering design standards for the Project area should be evolved and established market. Standards should be evolved and established with respect to the degree of
to ensure that at least minimum infrastructure and construction requirements are met treatment required - primary, secondary, or tertiary - and the disposal technique of
in designated development areas. In less-developed countries or regions where these effluent, based on preventing any pollution. Investigation should be made as to the
standards have not yet been adopted or exist but are considered unsuitable, potential for recycling sewage effluent, especially in water-deficient areas, for use as
international standards or those of a more developed country can be adopted, adapted landscaping irrigation water or other domestic or even possible potable use.
(modified or customized) and/ or applied. The basic types of engineering standards
are reviewed in the following sections. E.3.2.7 Solid Waste Disposal
The type of solid waste disposal will also vary, depending on the local situation, but
E.3.2.2 Road Rights-of-Way (RROW)
standards should likewise be evolved and established to ensure that there is proper
For inland sites, various categories of RROWs are established based on projected disposal and that the techniques of disposal, such as landfill (if introduced), will not
traffic usage, as well as respective RROW widths and related drainage-ways, generate any other pollution problems. Recycling of solid waste should be required to
walkways, and landscaping requirements determined. Cross-sections of these various the greatest extent possible.
types of roadways are drawn, and construction and materials specifications are
generally written in conformity to accepted international standards. E.3.2.8 Telecommunications
International standards exist that can be applied to the development of internet,

telephone, telegraph/ telex (where still needed/ applicable), radio-telephone,
cellular/ mobile and other means of wireless (or wired) telecommunications.
E-20
E-19
E.3.2.9 Building Construction Standards buildings, spaces between buildings, entourage, utilities and movement systems.
Presently, this definition is one of the primary legal basis for interpreting the scope of
Standards and specifications for the construction of public school buildings and other urban design in the Philippines.
structures are essential. Usually, these already exist in the area in the form of the 1977
NBCP and its2004 Revised IRR, but should be reviewed to ensure that they are Urban design quality necessitates addressing the following considerations:
suitable, including review for public safety and fire protection. For example, sprinkler  character
systems may now be required for low-rise buildings under R.A. No. 9514, the 2008
 continuity and enclosure
Fire Code of the Philippines (FCP) and its 2009 IRR.
 permeability
E.3.2.10 Sanitation and Public Health Standards  legibility
Maintaining minimum sanitation and hygiene standards is also essential in  quality of the public realm
institutional developments, especially for restaurants, bars, and toilet/ bathing  ease of movement
facilities. Usually sanitation standards, in the form of a national or local public health
code (such as The PH Sanitation Code), cover institutional areas but should be  robustness
reviewed to make certain that they are adequate.  diversity
Public health standards also relate to room size, ventilation, and fenestration (door, The four (4) basic urban design elements are:
window or other natural light and/ or ventilation opening) requirements.
 appraisal of context
E.3.2.11 Other Types of Engineering Design Standards  defining framework within which development will take place
- pattern, grain
Other types of engineering design considerations for institutional developments
include, for example, elevator equipment, mechanized walk/ walkalator systems (if - movement
introduced), and the like, which all require specific standards, especially as related to - legibility, landmarks, views
operational and safety factors.
- blocks and plots
E.3.2.12 Engineering-related Safety and Security Standards - density and form
- mixing uses
Maximum attention must be given to engineering provisions fully addressing safety
and security matters i.e. fire integrity of buildings/ structures, fire protection - landscaping
provisions and response mechanism (including building floor/ level fire searches and
 connecting the development to movement and utilities (traffic management,
fire-fighting), incidents/ accidents, natural disaster (earthquake, grass fire, flashflood,
parking etc.)
animal attack and the like), crime, medical (including first aid and CPR) and related
emergency responses, telecommunications/ linkages to the proper authorities,  designing the details that make the place a unique place
evacuation and the like; monitoring and prevention management devices and
- public realm
techniques should be well in place when the BUILDING operates.
- massing
E.3.2.13 Operations and Management Guidelines - robustness
- building and open space details

Good planning and design of a public school development is only as good as the
operation and management of the facility. Sustainable development requires an The applicable urban design applications for institutional projects envisioned for the
ongoing environmental management program (EMP) that covers environmental DPWH properties are:
awareness, good practice, staff training, visitor education and environmental
 place markers and directional signage and/or way-finding systems
monitoring and evaluation procedures.
 RROWs including possible arcades
E.3.3 Urban Design Guidance  wide open flexible use/ assembly areas and walking spaces
 street furniture in urbanized and highly built-up areas
What is urban design? The 2004 IRR of Republic Act (R.A.) No. 9266 (The
Architecture Act of 2004) defines urban design as the physical and systematic design  other forms of open public spaces
undertaken by a State-registered and licensed architect (RLA) on a community and
urban plane, more comprehensive than, and an extension of the architecture of
E-22
E-21
E.3.3.1 Street Furniture Guidelines (where applicable)

E.4 Design/ Post-Design Guidance
The overall quality of any development depends upon all aspects being
sympathetically designed within an overall approach. For example, ill-considered E.4.1 Detailed Design Process
detail in street furniture e.g. sidewalks/ paths, curb and gutter, railings/ barriers,
benches/ rest furniture, site lighting, directional signage and related way-finding If applicable, all aspects of detailed plan/ design preparation for all facilities/
treatments, driveways, drop-off areas, bus/ mega-taxi/ jeepney stops (outside the buildings/ structures onsite must conform to the 2004 Revised Implementing Rules
property line), etc. can impact unfavorably upon the overall impression of the Project. and Regulations (R-IRR, effective 01 May 2005), of Presidential Decree (P.D.) No.
1096 otherwise known as the 1977 National Building Code of the Philippines
E.3.3.2 Signs and Information Panels (NBCP) and its approximately twenty (20) referral codes (“RCs”, particularly R.A. No.
9514/ 2008 Fire Code of the Philippines and B.P. Blg. 344/ the Accessibility Law),
Signage should not dominate or block views and is more effective if a simple, easy to which should be familiar to most Philippine physical planners, architects, engineers
read design is used and the chosen materials and colors blend in with the natural and designers, who shall necessarily assume the attendant professional responsibility
setting. Outdoor displays are a good way to introduce the end-user/ visitor to the and civil liability for the projects onsite.
introduced flora in the Project area.
However, if the guidelines and standards under this document or its subsequent
Lighting should be chosen to emphasize moods, themes and create a relaxed iterations may in effect supplant/ complement/ supplement the absent, unexplained,
atmosphere e.g. the use of the night-time sky can be dramatic. However, light insufficient or conflicting provisions under the NBCP and its 2004 Revised IRR, insofar
intrusion and over-lighting glare can obscure what little night vision is available. Care as the physical planning and design of the proposed facilities/ buildings/ structures
is therefore required to limit night lighting to the minimum necessary for safety. Light onsite are concerned, the same shall be fully complied with, particularly if the same
fixtures should remain close to the ground to minimize eye level glare. are more stringent than the minimum standards prescribed by the NBCP.
Established principles for creating sustainably-planned/ designed, green architecture
(GA)-oriented and tropical design-oriented solutions are also strongly suggested for
adoption into detailed designs for all facilities and buildings/ structures onsite.
E.4.1.1 Detailed Design Documentation
The minimum design documentation for public school projects are as shown
hereafter:
Pre-Design Documents which may include the following:
 The identification or confirmation (in case a master development plan/ MDP had
already been prepared) of land (and available water) uses and access systems and
the cross-effects between these and the proposed horizontal and vertical
developments, on-site analyses on the physical characteristics and development
potentials of the Project site, the proposed environmental design elements
(including those that will define movement/ access/ privacy/ security, future
access/ expansion), compliance with existing site master planning and design
guidelines for institutional estate developments, national building laws e.g.
concerning the delineation of structure footprints and construction areas and
even local development-related ordinances.
 In instances where a MDP has already been prepared, the identification or
confirmation of base data on the topography, soil condition, domestic water
sources, drainage capability, flood cycles and levels, existing land use/ activities,
existing utilities, access points and road rights-of-way (RROWs), rights-of-way
(ROWs)/ legal easements, Philippine sun-path, solar angle and prevailing wind
orientations, view orientation and sight lines, visual quality, environmental
quality, climate and possible volcanic/ seismic activity/ fault-line locations, etc.
 In instances where a MDP has already been prepared, the identification or
confirmation of data needed to fully comply with institutional-related planning
and design guidelines/ laws/ ordinances to finalize siting, orientation,
E-24
E-23
configuration, sizing and clustering of the proposed development components, to documents, supportive engineering analyses, bid bulletins including schedules of
specify view corridors that will maximize privacy and security within each material suppliers, official forms for permitting purposes, etc.
development, to specify the appropriate structures and materials to make the
 In the case of architectural documents as defined under PH law and international
built environment earth-friendly and end-user-friendly, to specify the types of
practice i.e. architectural plans, designs, drawings, details, specifications,
plants suitable to the place, to specify site civil works, etc.
schedules, reportage and contract documents, R.A. No. 9266 and its IRR specify
 Pre-Design Documents for the horizontal and vertical development components that only registered and licensed architects (RLAs) shall prepare, sign and seal
of the Project in accordance with the stipulations of the pertinent Standards of such architectural documents.
Professional Practice (the “SPP”, effective March 2011) documents promulgated
Sec. 302.4 of the 2004 Revised IRR of the NBCP enumerates architectural documents
by the Philippine Professional Regulation Commission (PRC) as part of the
as follows:
Implementing Rules and Regulations (IRR) of Republic Act (R.A.) No. 9266,
otherwise known as the Architecture Act of 2004, and covering such  Architectural Plans/ Drawings
professional responsibilities and deliverables as spatial and building program,  Vicinity Map/ Location Plan within a 2.0 kilometer radius for commercial,
architectural program, initial project cost determination, design briefs, etc., which industrial, and institutional complex and within a half-kilometer radius for
altogether constitute the bases for design. residential buildings, at any convenient scale showing prominent landmarks or
 The necessary reportage and work phase documentation. major thoroughfares for easy reference.
Schematic Design Documents (or their official equivalents) which may include the - Site Development Plan (SDP) showing technical description, boundaries,
following: orientation and position of proposed building/structure in relation to the lot,
existing or proposed access road and driveways and existing public utilities/
 Conceptual plans and designs for the horizontal and vertical development
services. Existing buildings within and adjoining the lot shall be hatched and
components of the Project in full accordance with the stipulations of the pertinent
distances between the proposed and existing buildings shall be indicated.
SPP documents (effective March 2011 and thereafter) promulgated by the PRC as
part of the IRR of R.A. No. 9266, and covering such professional responsibilities - Perspective drawn at a convenient scale and taken from a vantage point (bird’s
and deliverables as the schematic architectural/ space, supportive engineering eye view or eye level).
and allied plans/ layouts, initial plan and design analyses, budgetary cost estimate - Floor Plans drawn to scale of not less than 1:100 m showing: gridlines,
of the Project development cost, etc.; and complete identification of rooms or functional spaces.
 The necessary reportage and work phase documentation. - Elevations, at least four (4), same scale as floor plans showing: gridlines;
Design Development Documents (or their official equivalents) which may include natural ground to finish grade elevations; floor to floor heights; door and
the following: window marks, type of material and exterior finishes; adjoining existing
structure/s, if any, shown in single hatched lines.
 Preliminary plans and designs for the horizontal and vertical development
components of the Project in full accordance with the stipulations of the pertinent - Sections, at least two (2), showing: gridlines; natural ground and finish levels;
SPP documents (effective March 2011 and thereafter) promulgated by the PRC as outline of cut and visible structural parts; doors and windows properly labeled
part of the IRR of R.A. No. 9266 and covering such professional responsibilities reflecting the direction of opening; partitions; built-in cabinets, etc.;
and deliverables as the preliminary architectural/ space, supportive engineering identification of rooms and functional spaces cut by section lines.
and allied plans/ layouts, outline specifications, revised budgetary cost estimate of - Reflected ceiling plan (RCP) showing: design, location, finishes and
the Project development cost, etc. specifications of materials, lighting fixtures, diffusers, decorations, air
 The necessary reportage and work phase documentation. conditioning exhaust and return grills, sprinkler nozzles, if any, at scale of at
least 1:100 m.
Contract Documents (or their official equivalents) which may include the following:
 Details, in the form of plans, elevations/sections:
 Detailed plans and designs for the horizontal and vertical development
components of the Project in full accordance with the stipulations of the pertinent - Accessible ramps
SPP documents (effective March 2011 and thereafter) promulgated by the PRC as - Accessible stairs
part of the IRR of R.A. No. 9266, and covering such professional responsibilities
and deliverables as detailed architectural/ space, supportive engineering and - Accessible lifts/elevators
allied plans/ layouts and the attendant technical specifications (all signed and - Accessible entrances, corridors and walkways
sealed by duly-qualified and suitably-experienced registered and licensed
professionals/ RLPs registered and licensed by the PRC in compliance with the - Accessible functional areas/comfort rooms
pertinent professional regulatory laws/ PRLs), schedules of materials and - Accessible switches, controls
finishes, final or detailed cost estimate of the Project development cost, tender
- Accessible drinking fountains
E-26
E-25
- Accessible public telephone booths - Detail design of major architectural interior elements.
- Accessible audio visual and automatic alarm system - Plan and layout of interior, wall partitions, furnishing, furniture,
equipment/appliances at a scale of at least 1:100 m.
- Accessible access symbols and directional signs
- Interior wall elevations showing: finishes, switches, doors and convenience
- Reserved parking for disabled persons
outlets, cross window sections with interior perspective as viewed from the
- Typical wall/bay sections from ground to roof main entrance at scale of at least 1:100 m.
- Stairs, interior and exterior - Floor/ceiling/wall patterns and finishing details.
- Fire escapes/exits - List of materials used.
- Built-in cabinets, counters and fixed furniture - Cost Estimates.
- All types of partitions  Plans and specific locations of all accessibility facilities of scale of at least 1:100 m.
 Schedule of Doors and Windows showing their types, designations/marks,  Detailed design of all such accessibility facilities outside and around buildings/
dimensions, materials, and number of sets. structures including parking areas, and their safety requirements all at scale of
 Schedule of Finishes, showing in graphic form: surface finishes specified for 1:50 m or any convenient scale.
floors, ceilings, walls and baseboard trims for all building spaces per floor level.  Fire Safety Documents
 Details of other major Architectural Elements. - Layout plan of each floor indicating the fire evacuation route to safe dispersal
areas, standpipes with fire hose, fire extinguishers, first aid kits/cabinets, fire
Figure E-1 STANDARD FORM (Type A0, A1, A2 and A3) FOR BUILDING PLANS/ alarm, fire operations room, emergency lights, signs, etc.
CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS Figure III.1.(of the 2004 Revised IRR of the 1977
NBCP) - Details of windows, fire exits with grilled windows and ladders.
- Details of fire-resistive construction of enclosures for vertical openings.
- Details of fire-resistive construction materials and interior decorative materials

with fire-resistive/ fire-retardant/ fire-spread ratings
- Other Related Documents
- Other related documents
E.4.2 Post-Design Process
The post-design process shall generally include the following sets of activities:
 Pre-construction activities which include other project management work, design
review and modification, contractor pre-qualification, bidding and award/
selection.
 Construction activities which include actual construction and finishing works,
construction management.
 Post-construction activities which include project documentation, commissioning
works, turnover, acceptance, occupancy.
MODEL TITLE BLOCK for Building Plans/Construction Drawings Figure III.2. (of the 2004 Revised IRR of the  The necessary reportage and work phase documentation.
1977 NBCP)
 Architectural Interiors/ Interior Design
E.4.3 Architectural Guidance
- Space Plan/s or layout/s of architectural interior/s.
Climatic characteristics establish the basic factors that need to be taken into account
- Architectural interior perspective/s.
in terms of building features related to the architecture of low-/ medium-density
- Furniture/ furnishing/ equipment/process layout/s. terminal buildings in a hot-humid tropical climate.
- Access plan/s, parking plan/s and the like.
E-28
E-27
Image: This consideration should evolve in the planning stage as a consequence of the or recycled wood are preferred over naturally grown/ harvested tree varieties,
physical and market analysis. Each site is unique and hence should name its own particularly PH hardwoods which are scarce and some species of which are banned
characteristic image. for construction use. The use of alternative construction and finishing materials such
as the CBB or FCB and the like, which use both natural and artificial components, are
Building Form, Finishes and Layout: It is accepted that most rooms will be
also encouraged to avail of their superior material qualities (as compared with some
preferably/ optionally air-conditioned (for indoor climate control) but end-users
conventional construction materials).
should also be able to benefit from outdoor breezes. However, the main objectives are
to encourage breezes to pass through the non-air-conditioned communal/ common The use of imported construction/ finishing materials is only recommended if the
building spaces and outdoor spaces. The orientation and construction of buildings to comparative environmental planning/ design value of the material is high to very
exploit the maximum amount of air movement is very important. high.
While natural ventilation is a must, it is equally important to complement it with Interior/ Architectural Interior (AI): In any mixed-use development facility, and
sufficient provisions that protect the end-users from excessive sun, light and heat. The especially in hot-humid tropical areas such as the PH, the interiors/ AI should be
use of the correct exterior color selection to balance reflected light and heat is a must considered carefully. Major internal spaces are the heart of any facility, being the areas
while the selection of non-traditional building materials that have high to very high through which all people move. The treatment of such spaces should reflect a Project's
insulating, pest-proofing, fire-resisting, water-repelling and other beneficial unique quality.
properties is encouraged e.g. wood-wool cement-bonded board (CBB), fiber cement
Sympathy and Consistency of Detail: The design should evolve from careful study of
board (FCB) and the like which come in different densities, textures and finish
the BUILDING Project sites and their surroundings, and once in place, the intent
preparations.
should be visible and consistent, extending from broad concepts to the choice of
The broad factors to be observed are: motifs.
 Major buildings should be designed with relatively open, elongated plan form with
rooms generally distributed in single rows to allow maximum cross ventilation E.4.4 Suggested Architectural Design Objectives
and penetration of breezes (passive cooling techniques through the floor, walls
and ceiling when and where applicable). E.4.4.1 General Design Objectives
 Main public facilities should be accessible from open galleries.
 Cost-effective space planning/ design/ implementation/ startup/ operation/
 Projecting canopies or broad overhanging eaves should provide shading to maintenance.
outdoor sitting and circulation areas – shading devices provide both essential
 Good return-on-investment (ROI) for the building owner.
protection and a means to define and articulate architectural characteristics.
 Enhancement of owner’s image through the creation of an appealing architectural
 High ceilings or use of double roof construction should be used as applicable;
design solution.
enclosed ceiling cavities, if introduced must either be actively or passively cooled.
 Improvement of the quality of functions, services, circulation and security through
 Inexpensive insulating and pest-proofing devices for all building elements should
sensitive/ sensible/ practical design and efficient architectural and space
be considered.
planning.
 Window openings should ideally be considered in relation to sunlight i.e. The
 Enhancement of public areas such as the lobbies, lounges, waiting areas, etc. to
integration of shading devices that minimize direct radiation, reduce sky glare,
foster better relations with entities being served; improvement of personnel
permit adequate natural lighting and allow outward views.
efficiency of the public school facilities through the betterment of building usage
 The use of water and water mist/ spray can also be employed to cool the building conditions and environment.
environment and its grounds.
Materials: These should reflect the development image, visual context, the Project E.4.4.2 Specific Design Objectives
site's setting within the area and degree of harmony, or contrast, being sought. Where
possible, properly-treated/ processed local materials, preferably pest-proof and more  Optimization of spatial provisions for internal building/ structure circulation/
importantly, fire-resistant or retardant, should be extensively used. traffic.
High quality materials and furniture, roadway, footpath and hard open space surfaces,  Optimization of space provisions for basic building operational tasks.
shade structures, fencing, walls, lighting, bollards, rails and the like, can make an  Optimization of space provisions for amenities/ facilities/ services/ utilities (the
immense difference to the quality of the grounds development. The materials and “AFSU”).
architectural form can help integrate them with their environment.
 Balance among end-users, planned spaces and identified activities that shall take
General/ overall environmental sustainability is a foremost consideration in base place inside the building/ structure/ facility.
construction and finishing material selection. Commercially-grown hardwood/
 Balance between the building and the natural environment.
softwood varieties, processed wood products from wood wastes/ debris/ driftwood
E-30
E-29
 Balance between the building’s function and form.  Maximization of the use of all horizontally, generated spaces through the use of all
available vertical spaces.
 Balance between the BUILDING’s interior and exterior i.e. Organic design or the
interplay of interior and exterior spaces a preferred spatial and design solution.  Maximization of the use of all horizontally generated spaces by allowing for the
flexibility and multiplicity of space uses.
 Balance between the BUILDING’s strength and economy.
 Generated space plans should reflect considerations of time and motion studies.
 Balance between present and future end-user needs.
 Generated space plans must reflect considerations for territoriality i.e. The human
 Balance between the user-friendliness of the BUILDING and its grounds/
bubble which can be opened or closed depending on the type of activity and the
perimeter areas with overall operations/ upkeep/ maintenance considerations.
situations called for.
 Balance between energy efficiency and a good operating environment.
 Generated space plans may either show considerations for the way people tend to
behave inside enclosed/ confined spaces or measures to curb what may be
E.4.5 Architectural Design Concepts considered as unproductive/ undesirable behaviour.
 Maximization of use of locally available (but of good quality) and/ or imported but
E.4.5.1 General Concepts locally-sourced materials to generate cost savings, to facilitate project
implementation, and for ease of upkeep/ maintenance.
Since the Project is essentially institutional and supposed to be sited on lots with
optimal sizes and configurations, with projected numbers of future building users and  Maximization of building and equipment lifecycles through the proper selection/
with the certain possibility of future operational expansion, it may be worth mix of the necessary components.
considering to provide for maximized vertical expansion flexibility, only if
 Maximization of the use of trees, plants and other soft landscaping elements to
countenanced under existing development controls such as the 2004 Revised IRR of
cleanse/ purify the atmosphere at the micro-environment level and to achieve
the 1977 NBCP.
exterior and interior micro-climate control e.g. Near-ground ambient
temperature/ heat levels caused by heat-/ light-reflective materials.
E.4.5.2 Specific Concern on What the Proposed BUILDING/ Structures Should Have
 Optimum to maximum attention given to health and sanitation matters.
There are many specific concepts that will be generated by Project consultants for  Maximum attention given to safety and security matters, particularly the fire
discussion with the Building Owner, and among these are: integrity and defensibility of buildings/ structures.
 The correct physical orientation to achieve maximum indoor climate control and
energy efficiency. E.4.6 Suggested Architectural Planning and Design Criteria
 The maximization of operational efficiency indoors and outdoors through the
correct use of materials, lighting, forms, finishes and textures, etc. E.4.6.1 Function
 Employment of passive cooling/ lighting technology as applicable for both the This criterion has to be addressed above all others inasmuch as it pertains to how the
buildings and their grounds.
resulting BUILDINGS shall be utilized to realize key Building Owner goals and
 The projected building exterior/ interior images should convey combinations of objectives. Inasmuch as the Projects are mainly public service-related structures, the
strength, stability, efficiency, honesty, nationalism (and possibly even hints of key considerations are:
dedication to civic duty and public service), approachability at all times,
 The types and numbers of end-users.
accessibility and possibly even a sense of appreciation for art/ history and culture.
 The types of activities that shall take place within each building by such as official
 Exterior/ interior areas must use a good mix of light colors for body, and dark
business, personal transactions, instructional, social, recreational, religious,
colors for accent to achieve a good measure of climate and psychological control.
commercial.
 If possible, forms should follow lines so that the buildings’ appearance would not  The quantity/ quality of spaces to be generated, by type.
age easily in terms of aesthetic appeal.
As all of the foregoing factors are closely interrelated, an exhaustive identification and
 The buildings should all be human in scale and proportion, with the direct analysis of the end-users together with the hierarchy of their needs and activities, as
application and judicious mix of both asian and western space planning/ well as of the optimum spaces required to satisfy these end-user needs/ activities
architectural design standards.
shall be undertaken by Project consultants to establish and possibly rank or prioritize
 Provision of a visitor-friendly and worker-friendly environment i.e. The buildings all the necessary amenities/ facilities/ services/ utilities (AFSU).
and their grounds should be safe and easy to use at all times for people of all ages,
physical capabilities and backgrounds.
 Provision of optimum room for future operational expansion and growth.
E-32
E-31
E.4.6.2 Form or Integration of Architectural Design Elements BUILDINGS. The resulting structure should be safe for everyone to use i.e. including
children, the elderly and the persons with disabilities (PWDs), women, etc.
This criterion pertains to the need to relate existing site/ building conditions with the
planned physical/ social/ psychological environments as well as with the envisioned The satisfaction of the minimum physical planning and design standards by
quality of generated spaces. Various design elements have to be carefully utilized to compliance with all applicable local and international laws must be observed by all
realize the best architectural solution and of these, form is one of the most important. Project consultants, particularly the State-registered and licensed environmental
planners (the “RLEnPs”) and the State-registered and licensed architects (“RLAs”)
Although form is the logical consequence of having initially established the buildings’ who will be held primarily responsible and liable for their respective Project roles
function/s (which is/ are the primary consideration/s for any building plan/ design), under the concerned PH PRLs and the New Civil Code (1949/ 1954).
it shall be qualitatively expressed in terms of lines, scale, proportion, the use of light
and shade, textures, finishes and color. If properly integrated, all of these would Before getting engaged in local mixed-use projects, foreign or expatriate physical
contribute in projecting a very stable and efficient image for the Owner/ Proponent, planning and/ or architectural consultants must secure the necessary permits from
which will ultimately redound to each end-user's pride in his/ her abode, recreational the PRC i.e. a Special/ Temporary Permit (STP) to practice a State-regulated
space and/or workplace. profession on PH soil, the PH Department of Labor & Employment (DoLE), the Bureau
of Immigration and Deportation (BID), as well as from the PH Department of Foreign
Affairs (DFA).
E.4.6.3 Adherence to Basic Architectural Design Principles
BUILDINGS should preferably all be "self-contained systems" that shall be planned/
A judicious mix of the basic architectural design principles of unity of design and of designed to promote health and sanitation, worker efficiency and minimal disturbance
the use of repetition, rhythm, balance and emphasis should be regularized in support to the natural and built environments.
of the public nature of the proposed BUILDING’s and grounds.
Maximum attention given to architectural provisions fully addressing safety and
security concerns i.e. fire integrity of buildings/ structures, fire protection provisions
E.4.6.4 Budget and Economy in Space Planning/ Architectural Design and response mechanism (including fire/ floor/ level searches and fire-fighting),
incidents/ accidents (including possible yacht-related events/ occurrences at the
The availability of funds for planning/ design/ implementation/ startup/ operation/
marina), natural disaster (earthquake, tsunami, grass fire, flashflood, animal attack
maintenance will influence all planning/ design options that shall be made available to
and the like), crime, medical (including first aid and CPR) and related emergency
the Building Owner by the Project planning or architectural consultant.
responses, telecommunications/ linkages to the proper authorities, evacuation and
The satisfaction of the sub-criterion of design economy starts with correct space the like; monitoring and prevention management devices and techniques should be
planning and this is the reason why this particular component of the Pre-Design well in place when the institutional facilities operate.
service should be carried out well. Design should only result from careful interior
space planning and site development planning but such good plans can only become E.4.6.7 Application of Internationally-Recognized Architectural Planning and Design Standards and of
possible with the utmost cooperation of the Owner/ Proponent, the end-users, other Anthropometrics
identifiable stakeholders and the host community in general. Therefore, interactive
discussions between the parties and the Project consultants are a must and should be In as much as the proposed BUILDINGS shall be accorded a high profile and
regularized. international character by virtue of its function, a judicious mix of Filipino, Asian and
Western planning/ design standards shall be applied. Anthropometrics must always
play a key role in making the institutional environment easy and safe to use. The
E.4.6.5 Time Consideration
resultant anthropometrics-based plans/ designs shall ultimately redound to the
From the architectural planning/ design viewpoint, this criterion has to do mainly attainment of savings and efficiency of operations.
with the anticipation of future BUILDING use changes, supplementary operational
requirements and expansion potentials all of which would have to be satisfied to E.4.7 Other Architectural Considerations
forestall future growth difficulties. A normal planning-design horizon is from 10 - 15
years on a Project life cycle of 25 years. Other architectural considerations for the envisioned BUILDINGS shall be as follows:
From the Project implementation standpoint, this criterion would mean
considerations such as those that will affect construction phasing and the project E.4.7.1 General Architectural Design
timetable (from pre-construction to occupancy/ startup of the structure).
Architectural design guidelines for public service-related facilities must be more
flexible than development standards to allow for the creativity of the Architect/
E.4.6.6 Safety, Security, Accessibility and Environmental Considerations
Designer. However, when a certain design character is desired in an area or
These architectural planning/ design criteria must reflect the Project consultant’s development site, basic guidelines should be established and provided to the
major concern for the well-being of all identified end-users of the proposed Architects/ Designers for their use in the space planning and design process. These
E-34
E-33
guidelines are also to be used by the approving authorities in their review of the levels. Building design should also take advantage of any views fronting the site to
proposed facility design. help maximize organic relationships with the host site.
Some basic types of guideline considerations are mentioned elsewhere hereafter e.g.
standards on mixed-use facility layouts, room sizes, length of corridors, and other E.4.7.6 Design for Persons with Disabilities (PWDs)
standards, which are generally available in design reference books on such subjects.
More emphasis is now being placed on architectural designs for the PWDs (in
compliance with both Batas Pambansa Bilang (B.P.) Blg. 344: The Accessibility Law of
E.4.7.2 Local Styles and Motifs 1982 and its IRR and with R.A. No. 7277 (otherwise known as the Magna Carta for
Disabled Persons of 1991) and its IRR, including provisions for the physically
If there are distinctive local, traditional, or historic architectural styles already
impaired, sensory-impaired, slower moving elderly people, and the mentally impaired.
developed in the host area/s and environs, these should be incorporated into the
This design approach is also being extended to end-users who are PWDs. Barrier-free
institutional facility designs to the greatest extent possible so that these facilities fit
architectural design should be applied to the envisioned BUILDING and attractions,
into the local environment, reinforce the architectural character of the area, and
with techniques applied such as:
impart a distinct sense of place to the BUILDING development.
 Developing hard, relatively smooth, wide indoor paved surfaces;
In some instances, there is a problem of completely integrating the local style due to
differences in scale and function, but usually some local motifs can still be utilized.  Ramped access with automatic door openings or through bars at entrances to
Local motifs, including handcrafted materials, can also be incorporated into the buildings/ structures, and
interior decor of the facilities. If no local styles prevail, sometimes a neutral
 Restrooms and public telephones designed for use by persons in wheelchairs.
international but environmentally-oriented style is appropriate, rather than wholly
importing a style from elsewhere that is not related to the area. In high ambulatory/ pedestrian traffic areas, vehicular traffic should be well separated
from pedestrian access-ways for safety reasons in general and especially for the safety
of the PWDs. At such areas, presentation techniques should include those that can be
E.4.7.3 Roof Lines
appreciated by the sensory-impaired and mentally impaired, with special programs
The design of roofs (flat, pitched, overhang, etc.) is an especially critical design organized where relevant.
element inasmuch as rooflines are very visible for low-rise buildings, and these
greatly influence the character and appearance of the buildings/ structures to be E.4.7.7 Design for Gender and Age
erected onsite. Rooflines should preferably reflect the local architectural style
(primarily based on functional considerations) and be consistent with the Emphasis shall also be placed on design considerations that address various
characteristics of the natural environment. sensitivities related to gender and age i.e. the physical needs of end-users such as
women, young adults, children, babies and the elderly, particularly as the same relates
to ambulatory activities.
E.4.7.4 Use of Local Building Materials
To the greatest extent possible, local building materials should be utilized, especially if E.4.8 Landscape Architecture Guidance
they relate to the local architectural style (primarily based on functional
considerations), as is often the case with wood or stone construction. Also, the use of One of the strongest features for institutional developments is the quality of the
local building materials may be less expensive than imported materials and provides outdoor environment. Successful developments carefully blend landscaping and
employment and may provide some measure of possible income for residents of the architecture to achieve a consistent, unified and unique Project character.
host area. Exceptions to this standard are where use of traditional local materials, Considerations for institutional developments in particular, include:
even though attractive and functional, may create environmental problems.
Thematic design should be related to the planning and architectural elements of the
For example, metal roofs and expansive masonry walls generate very hot building facility. For example, the use of boulders (introduced onsite) and local trees can
interiors in high temperature environments, leading to increased demand for air- provide both a sense of enclosure and integration with the existing landscape while
conditioning (which is contrary to energy conservation). lush courtyards can help extend interior spaces outward.
Each BUILDING development requires some form of appropriate open space which
E.4.7.5 Environmental Relationships should be dedicated for the use and enjoyment of all visitors/ end-users. These should
ideally be designed around existing vegetation and landforms. Even the smallest
Building design should relate to the natural environment. For example, in tropical and
planting pockets, if well-designed, can offer elements of form, texture, shadows,
subtropical areas, buildings should incorporate indoor-outdoor (or organic design-
fragrances and color. People will enjoy external spaces for passive recreation and
oriented) relationships through use of open-sided lobbies, patios, and courtyard
socializing in a sunny/ warm but humid climate if the space is well-shaded and
gardens. In tropical climates, designing for natural ventilation may preclude the need
correctly orientated.
for air-conditioning during much of the year but demand for air-conditioned facilities
should never be discounted as the PH is a hot-humid tropical zones i.e. high humidity
E-36
E-35
Aside from the foregoing elements, planting/ vegetation can be used for shelter/ area; in some cases, the plants themselves can be used to provide focal points and
shade and reduction of glare. The cost of running air-conditioning can be reduced by major visual features.
using vegetation to shield roofs and walls from direct sunlight.
 Situating plants in strategic places where they can be best appreciated; many
Planting can also be used to screen substations and garbage bins, as a barrier to plants are more attractive if planted in mass and seen from a distance whereas
prevent people straying, to stop soil erosion and stabilize slopes and as a space others must be seen at close range to be fully appreciated.
definer. The use of naturalized plant species can also reduce water usage.
 Arranging and massing trees and shrubs, particularly native flowering species, to
Xeriscape landscaping is the selection and zoning of plants according to their water provide dramatic color and textural variation.
requirements. This design strategy is very cost-effective, as maintenance and watering
 Introducing visitors to new species and varieties of plants, especially from the
are minimized. It is also aesthetically- and ecologically-sound in principle since plants
local area (as applicable).
are selected to harmonize with their environment. Landscaping schemes should
therefore attempt to group plants according to water and maintenance requirements Landscaping can also be used to screen and ameliorate poor building design or
inappropriate use of building materials, not an uncommon situation in public service-
The selection of material for hard landscapes depends on the purpose. The use of
related developments.
materials also helps to define changes of use (vehicles/ pedestrians), level, ownership
and approaches to focal points. Attention should be given to color, pattern, noise, Where available, local indigenous plant material should be utilized in landscaping
sunlight, heat and maintenance. The appropriate use of water, its sight and sound, can because local plants grow well in their own environment and reinforce the natural
enrich the enjoyments of the environment and resort facility immensely and be vegetative character of the sites. However, certain imported exotic plants that do well
employed to cool the environment. in the local environment may also be appropriate. Major plants and especially mature
trees endemic to the development site should be saved and incorporated into the final
landscaping plan as much as possible.
Other Landscape Architectural Considerations
Plant material that is easy and inexpensive to maintain and conserves resources
Other landscape architecture considerations for the envisioned BUILDING should be used e.g. not using plant species which require large amounts of water, etc.
developments are as described in the following sections. Water features such as ponds and small waterfalls can offer very interesting accents
and visual focal points in a landscaped area, but these should be carefully designed for
General Landscaping Design ease of maintenance and conservation of water such as re-circulating the water used
in ornamental fountains and waterfalls.
Generous and suitable landscaping is an essential element in creating an attractive
Footpaths are an important element of landscaping for institutional developments and
and interesting public service-related environment and also serves important
visitor facility sites. In addition to serving their pedestrian function, footpaths should
functional purposes. Even in urban environments, exterior and interior landscaping
be attractive, safe and practical to use, as well as be designed to offer interesting
can help create a desired character of the facility. Landscape architecture is concerned
views. Outdoor furniture (benches, tables, etc), shelters, and kiosks are often
with the relationship and appearance of the total environment, with particular
important to include when landscaping mixed-use facilities; these should be suitably
reference to plants and landscaping features such as water bodies, footpaths, and
designed reflecting the building design, properly located, and well constructed.
outdoor furniture and lighting. Good landscaping attempts to provide unity and
cohesion in the local environment and a sensitive balance between man-made Night lighting in landscaped areas is important for both functional reasons of safety
features and the natural elements. and security and for aesthetic appreciation of buildings and landscaping. Lighting is
used at entrances, access drives, and parking lots, along footpaths, in recreational
More specifically, landscaping in public service-related developments involves the
effective use of plant materials and other features for such purposes, according to areas, to illuminate interesting building and landscape features, for information signs
and in service yards. Except in service and high security areas, the most suitable type
certain principles as:
of lighting is typically indirect and not too bright e.g. use of low-shaded lights along a
 Creating an attractive setting conducive to relaxation and recreation (even just for footpath that light the pathway but do not shine in the walkers’ eyes.
short periods).
A properly registered and licensed Landscape Architect (RLLA) must be
 Screening objectionable views and providing privacy. commissioned directly by the Building Owner/s or through/ with the separately-
 Providing vegetative buffers to absorb unpleasant sounds, smells, and dust. commissioned registered and licensed Architect (RLA) or Environmental Planner
(RLEnP) to jointly collaborate on the landscape architectural design of the Project.
 Arranging plants to provide relief from intense sun glare and rain, as well as to
reduce surface/ ambient temperatures.
Design for Persons with Disabilities (PWDs)
 Minimizing the effects of high winds, yet still allowing for the flow of gentle
breezes. More emphasis is now being placed on designing for the persons with disabilities or
PWDs (in compliance with both B.P. Blg. 344 and R.A. No. 7277), including the
 Organizing the plant material to complement a landform, to enhance a building
physically impaired, sensory-impaired, slower-moving elderly people, and the
line or facade, to gradually unfold an attractive vista or to frame a major entrance
E-38
E-37
mentally impaired. Barrier-free design should be applied particularly

transportation facilities and attractions, with techniques applied such as:
to
E.5 Environmental Guidance
 Developing hard, relatively smooth, wide walkway paving surfaces.
E.5.1 Environmental Awareness
 curbs with ramped cuts at intersections.
Environmental awareness is growing throughout the world As such, the promotion of
 ramped access with automatic door openings or through bars at entrances to
sustainable development in the Philippines can only bring positive results as it can
buildings/ structures.
provide a basis for achieving sustainability in the planning and design of public
 restrooms, drinking fountains, and public telephones designed for use by persons facilities, encourage responsible decisions in energy and water conservation and
in wheelchairs. waste management, and emphasize the importance of bio-diversity.
Design for Gender and Age E.5.1.1 Environmental Management
Emphasis shall also be placed on design considerations that address various A proactive approach to environmental management may include a commitment to
sensitivities related to gender and age i.e. the physical needs of end-users such as continuous improvement in the area of general land and facility management. Possible
women, young adults, children, babies and the elderly, particularly as the same relates co-operative working agreements between government and the community at large,
to ambulatory activities. particularly in urban or rapidly urbanizing settings should be established e.g.
sponsoring environmental management and/ or conservation education activities and
monitoring sensitive ecological sites.
E.5.1.2 Staff Training
Producing an environmental management plan (EMP) is an essential factor in

developing a pro-active approach. A clear environmental policy statement or Code of
Ethics to be adopted and endorsed by the Building Administrator shall ensure
compliance to environmental management standards (EMS). This policy would
guarantee responsibilities of key Building Administration site personnel towards the
natural and built environments, alongside training and communications procedures
instituted to continually and progressively inform/ educate BUILDING end-users and
visitors about such a policy.
An environmental policy statement from the Building Administrator could include
realistic environmental management objectives and targets. Procedures and targets
may be specified for environmental issues such as environmental protection, waste
management (including reuse/ recycling), energy and water conservation, education
and research, purchasing or cleaning policies, landscaping and visitor education.
Depending on the results of ongoing coordination and research work, additional
material on the immediately foregoing environmental considerations may be
subsequently supplied.
For large-scale institutional developments, it may be necessary to employ an
environmental officer to establish environmental procedures and supervise and
monitor their practice/ implementation/ enforcement. Consequently, the impact of an
institutional development upon the surrounding environment could be monitored.
Adequate staff training will also help ensure the mixed utilization of measures to
improve environmental performance. Fostering innovation within the development
and amongst the BUILDING staff/ end-users/ visitors will encourage improvements in
environmental management and performance.
E.5.1.3 End-User/ Visitor Education
In campus developments (such as PUDs or portions thereof) that are properly

planned, the environmental work often becomes part of the marketing package, as
E-40
E-39
environmental constraints such as landscape features, water elements, available or E.5.2.2 General Requirements
introduced wildlife (such as birds), etc. all become blended into the development and
gradually become part of the attraction. The sewage treatment system (STS) of an institutional development must be
adequate, especially when sited at environmentally-sensitive locations (as applicable).
E.5.1.4 Maintenance Guidelines Sewage from mixed use facilities must be treated in accordance with the effluent
standards of DENR Administrative Order No. 35, series of 1990 or later issuances that
A realistic maintenance program is crucial in the continuing promotion and success of are valid and subsisting.
the Project's image. It must be remembered that even the best-designed developments
can be seriously compromised by poor maintenance.
E.5.2.3 Awareness
Recognition of the close links between the environment and long term economic
viability will promote commitment towards improved environmental management of The applicable provisions of Rule IX (Sanitation) of the 2004 Revised IRR (effective 01
the development. May 2005) of P.D. No. 1096, the 1977 NBCP and the pertinent NBCP referral code/s
(RCs) covering the sewerage requirements of the Project must be fully satisfied. A
Effective environmental management practices may involve recycling and waste properly registered and licensed Sanitary Engineer (RLSnE) must be commissioned
management programs, energy and water conservation, staff training and end-user/ directly by the DPWH (and/or the BUILDING project Proponent/s) or possibly
visitor education and involvement. through/with the separately-commissioned registered and licensed Architect (RLA)
Monitoring of the construction and operation phases of the intended development can or Environmental Planner (RLEnP) to jointly collaborate on the planning and design
improve the effectiveness of environmental management practices and minimize of the sewage handling and sewerage system.
adverse environmental or social impacts.
E.5.2.4 Possible Arrangements
E.5.1.5 Monitoring and Evaluation
The use of treated/ processed sewage water for toilet flushing or for watering plants
Baseline environmental data should always be collected before any construction or should be encouraged to help reduce the amount of sewage.
development work commences. An environmental audit, or an audit of some aspects
of performance (such as energy or water conservation and efficiency or waste E.5.2.5 On Sewage Disposal
management practices) shall be useful in providing future baseline data and in
identifying specific areas where alternative practices can contribute towards In the absence of a sewer system, septic tanks may in the interim fully process sewage
improved environmental performance. before direct discharge to the wastewater drainage system.
An environmental monitoring program (EMoP) should record regulatory Absorption pits are economical options but may inevitably and deleteriously affect
requirements and set realistic management and performance targets or standards, groundwater quality.
such as for example, a ten percent (10%) reduction in electricity use.
The EMoP should also establish environmental performance indicators (EPI) that are E.5.2.6 Checklists (Dos and Donts)
easy to measure and that might indicate specific problems preventing the
Is a responsible and sufficiently experienced/ trained person going to oversee the
achievement of specific targets. Regular data collection, record keeping and reporting
operation of the STS for the proposed BUILDING?
procedures to examine actual performance will need to be established.
Are the areas for sewage collection/ treatment and for sewerage conveyance secure
and amply buffered/ segregated from other activity areas?
E.5.2 Sewerage Guidance
E.5.2.1 Applicable Definitions E.5.3 Wastewater Guidance
Sewage refuse liquids or waste matter carried off by sewer pipes/ lines. E.5.3.1 Applicable Definitions
Sewer a man-built subterranean conduit to carry sewage and sometimes
Drain to draw off liquids gradually and/ or completely; a pipe or conduit
surface and rain/ storm water.
through which liquids are drained;
Sewerage the removal and disposal of sewage and surface water through sewer
Drainage a device or system for draining liquids;
pipes/ lines.
Wastewater water that has been used, rejected for any other use and needing to be
disposed of or physically removed from a site; wastewater may
organic and/ or inorganic and may include natural surface run-off,
surface drainage water for paved/ artificially impervious surfaces,
E-42
E-41
excess rainwater, storm water, kitchen water, bath/ shower water, E.5.4 Water Supply Guidance
and similar types of water; the term also refers to sewage; and
Wastewater a process of collecting, storage and disposal (through treatment, Applicable Definitions
Management recycling, creative re-use, etc.) of wastewater (including sewage) for
economic and social (including environmental) gain; management Water the liquid that is a major constituent of most living organisms,
entails planning, supervision and monitoring of wastewater resources which descends from the clouds as rain, forms water bodies/
and facilities and the enforcement of guidelines for safe and passages and subsequently collected naturally or artificially and
economical wastewater re-use or disposal. distributed for use.
Water Supply a very limited and closed/ controlled commercial system
involving water generation/ collection and distribution for
E.5.3.2 General Requirements domestic and other uses by consumers.
Wastewater drainage is a mandatory requirement for all establishments. Water Management a managed system/ procedure of collecting, storage,
distribution, conservation (including limited recycling) of safe
Sanitary plans/ designs and an accomplished Sanitary Permit form, duly signed and
domestic and potable water secured from commercial or other
sealed by a RLSnE, is required before commencing any level of construction work
sources; management entails planning, supervision and
involving sanitary and outdoor plumbing work.
monitoring of use and consumption of the resource and the
A sanitary inspection must be satisfied for the renewal of the annual LGU-issued enforcement of guidelines for safe and economical water usage.
permit to operate the BUILDING.
Flooding by natural causes must be prevented as much as possible by the correct and
General Requirements
economical engineering interventions e.g. interceptor trenches, culverts, dikes,
retention or impounding structures and the like (as needed). Water sources can be rainwater, freshwater, well-sourced water, other types of
harvested ground water (as applicable).
E.5.3.3 Awareness
Design Considerations
The applicable Rule IX (Sanitation) of the 2004 Revised IRR (effective 01 May 2005) of
P.D. No. 1096, the 1977 NBCP and the pertinent NBCP referral code/s covering the Distances between source points and usage points must be minimized.
wastewater requirements of the proposed Project must be fully satisfied.
b. A three to four (3-4) day supply reserve may be ideal for most types of institutional
Similarly, a RLSnE must be commissioned directly by the DPWH (and/or the operations and should be considered in the designed water storage capacity.
BUILDING Owner/s) or through/with the separately-commissioned RLA or RLEnP to
jointly collaborate on the planning and design of the wastewater system. Use low-pressure distribution systems to minimize system leakages.
E.5.3.4 Design Considerations Awareness
Wastewater must be processed by chemical means to limit its negative effect on living The Rule IX (Sanitation) of the 2004 Revised IRR (effective 01 May 2005) of P.D. No.
organisms i.e. bio-oxygen demand (BOD) of 10 parts per million (ppm) or less or 1096, the 1977 NBCP and the pertinent NBCP referral code/s covering the water
better. supply requirements of the proposed Project must be fully satisfied.
Wastewater may be mixed. However, sewage water and kitchen wastewater may be Similarly, a RLSnE must be commissioned directly by the Building Owner/s or
mixed with other types of wastewater only after they have undergone the proper through/ with the separately-commissioned RLA or RLEnP to jointly collaborate on
treatment or processing. the planning and design of the water supply system.
E.5.3.5 Checklists Conservation
Shall a responsible and sufficiently experienced/ trained person be in charge of the Faucets within the BUILDING/ facilities. Together with faucets (with additional flow
wastewater management program for the BUILDING? controllers), there is also need to always supply a full large pail of water for use in
toilets and a drum of water on standby i.e. which double as an emergency water
Is the area for wastewater (including sewage) collection, storage, treatment, recycling, supply in case of fire.
etc. amply buffered/ segregated from other activity areas?
E-44
E-43
Checklists the separately-commissioned RLA, to collaborate on the planning and design for the
solid waste management system (SWMS).
Shall a responsible and sufficiently experienced/ trained person be in charge of the
water management program for the BUILDING?
E.5.5.4 Collection and Handling
Is the area for water collection, storage, etc. protected from contamination, secure and
amply buffered/ segregated from other activity areas? Solid waste collection must be performed routinely every 12 hours if possible.
Segregation of organic and inorganic solid wastes must be performed immediately
E.5.5 Solid Waste Guidance after collection. Ideally, separate waste bins must be supplied at the source so that
segregation is done earlier, but this may be difficult to implement/ maintain. The
E.5.5.1 Applicable Definitions following practice of color-coding solid wastes may be followed:
Green garbage bags for biodegradable wastes e.g. materials that decompose or that
Waste a damaged, defective or superfluous organic or inorganic material, can be reduced to finer particles such as kitchen and garden wastes;
whether liquid, solid or gas, resulting from any type of human/
artificial activity or from natural occurrences/ processes, that is Black garbage bags for non-biodegradable wastes e.g. materials that do not
rejected for use and necessitates physical removal from a site for decompose such as plastics, styropor, tetra-packaging, ceramics, glass, construction
health, safety, environmental, social and other valid reasons; debris (concrete, metals and the like);
Solid Waste organic or inorganic waste matter that is solid i.e. three (3)- Yellow garbage bags for pathological/ infectious wastes e.g. used cotton/ gauze/
dimensional in form, that results from any type of human/ artificial bandages/ strips, used sanitary napkins/ tampons/ condoms, used tissue paper/ table
activity or from natural occurrences/ processes and that must be napkin, hospital/ medical./ dental wastes, body or animal parts, cadavers/ carcasses,
removed from a site for a valid reason; this includes garbage, body fluids, blood, used dental or medical implements, syringes and the like; and
rubbish and also excreta; and Transparent garbage bags for types of waste to be identified by the users.
Solid Waste a process of collecting, storage and disposal (through removal, fill, Sorting and storage facilities must be well away from activity or guest areas so that
Management composting, breakdown, treatment, recycling, creative re-use, etc.) foul odors do not permeate such areas.
of solid waste matter for economic and social (including
environmental) gain; management entails planning, supervision Do not store organic solid wastes (particularly kitchen and leftover food or food
and monitoring of solid wastes and handling facilities and the waste) on-site as these readily decompose, attract pests and unwanted insects/
enforcement of guidelines for their safe and economical re-use or animals and emit foul odor.
disposal. Hauling or removal off-site should be done either late at night or dawn when most
end-users are away.
E.5.5.2 General Requirements The use of open dumpsites is absolutely discouraged as it is a major health hazard.
Solid waste incineration is an unlawful practice under the Clean Air Act.
A solid waste management program for the Project must be well coordinated by all
stakeholders (public and private sectors) as it is not the sole responsibility of the
public sector i.e. BUILDING end-users/ visitors. E.5.5.5 Solid Waste Prevention Strategies
Any waste management system must be integrated with that of the rest of the host Limit the use of paper products within the BUILDING as much as possible e.g. use of
community and the LGU. electronic files instead of hardcopies (wherever applicable).
Solid waste handling or disposal sites must never be allowed in identified If land is available, composting should be considered to realize zero organic waste.
preservation and conservation areas, particularly within watersheds (or portions
Actively promote waste segregation and recycling practices on-site by giving end-
thereof, including downstream areas).
users/ visitors and staff incentives to do so.
E.5.5.3 Awareness
E.5.5.6 Checklists
The applicable provisions of the Solid Waste Management Act (and its IRR) and the
Shall a responsible and sufficiently experienced/ trained person be in charge of the
pertinent referral code/s covering the waste handling/ management requirements of
solid waste management program for the BUILDING?
the proposed Project must be fully satisfied.
Is the disposal area (including areas for collection, storage, fill, composting,
A RLEnP, with specific expertise/ specialization and/or experience in environment
breakdown, treatment, recycling) provided with a separate access system?
consulting, must be commissioned directly by the Buulding Owner/s or through/ with
E-46
E-45
Where is the removed/ hauled waste being deposited? It must be the solid waste E.5.5.10 General Requirements
source point’s i.e. the waste generator’s business to find out exactly where the waste is
destined because it may just be deposited in a nearby area which could eventually Electrical plans/ designs and an accomplished Electrical Permit application form, duly
affect the source point’s operations/ safety. signed/ sealed by a RLPEE, is required prior to commencement of the applicable level
of construction work involving electrical work.
E.5.5.7 Energy Guidance An electrical inspection must be satisfied for the renewal of the annual LGU-issued
permit to operate the mixed use facility.
The applicable provisions periodic issuances of the Department of Energy (DoE) shall
be used as the primary reference for energy conservation in the BUILDING and its
E.5.5.11 Design Considerations
grounds.
A mix of power sources is recommended so that any system shall not be overly
E.5.5.8 Applicable Definitions dependent on one (1) power source.
The use of independently-supplied power is the most ideal source for light and
Energy usable sources of natural or artificially generated/ sourced
electricity i.e. generator (preferably diesel, silent-type). A backup generator should be
power such as heat, fuel, wind, moving water, wave/ tidal
on board.
action, geothermal, muscle, decomposition (biogas),
electricity, natural fuels (firewood), combinations thereof If a 24-hour generator is used, it may have to be installed along with a water-
and the like, that can be harnessed for use economically and production unit that can also operate for 24 hours. Noise and fume abatement
without much negative effect on the environs/ setting of the measures must all be in place.
energy source (to include considerations for human/
animal/ plant communities); E.5.5.12 Conservation
Energy Supply a limited and closed/ controlled commercial system
To maximize cooling of structures/ buildings, the correct architectural orientation
involving power generation and distribution for domestic
and other uses by consumers; and with respect to sun and wind must be prioritized, sometimes over view orientation.
Passive cooling techniques, wide/ extended overhangs and other green architecture
Energy Management a managed system/ procedure of acquiring, accessing,
(GA) solutions or tropical architecture devices should be widely employed in the
storing, distributing, conserving (including possible
recycling) of safe sources of power secured from commercial planning and design of the mixed use structures/ buildings.
or other sources; management entails planning, supervision Positioning structures under/ behind/ beside exterior natural or artificial shading
and monitoring of use and consumption of the resource and devices should be practiced i.e. ornamental or shade trees, heat-reflecting or
the enforcement of guidelines for safe and economical power absorbing (as applicable) walls or greenery, etc.
usage.
Use light exterior colors for the structures to reflect unwanted light and heat and
provide for a cooler interior.
E.5.5.9 Awareness Electric fans are preferred over air-conditioners. However, the Project must always
offer end-users the option to avail of either means of artificial ventilation.
The applicable provisions of Rule XIII (Electrical and Mechanical Regulations) of the
2004 Revised IRR of the NBCP and the pertinent referral code/s covering the power/
mechanical (heating, ventilation, air-conditioning, refrigeration, etc.) requirements of E.5.5.13 Efficiency
the proposed Project must be fully satisfied.
Use only low consumption - high output electrical devices.
A properly registered and licensed Professional Electrical Engineer (RLPEE) must be
Use only rated electrical devices to be able to monitor consumption properly.
commissioned directly by the Building Owner/s or through/ with the RLA or RLEnP
to collaborate on the planning and design of the energy system (including all electrical
devices). The planning and design of systems for electronics and communications E.5.5.14 Renewable Energy Resources
devices are best handled by a properly registered and licensed Electronics Engineer
If the technology becomes fully accessible at a low acquisition/ operating/
(RLEE) while the planning and design of the mechanical systems of the proposed
maintenance cost, the use of devices that can economically harness solar, wind, tide/
development shall be by a properly registered and licensed Professional Mechanical
wave and geothermal power in appropriate quantities for domestic use should be
Engineer (RLPME).
promoted.
E-48
E-47
E.5.5.15 Checklists The most efficient combination of luminaires, lamps and ballasts appropriate for the
lighting task and for the environment shall be selected so that lamp light output is
Shall a responsible and sufficiently experienced/ trained person be in charge of the used effectively. The selected luminaire should meet the requirements with respect to
energy management program for the BUILDING? light distribution, uniformity and glare control. The use of highly polished or mirror
Is the area for energy generation, interface, storage, etc. safe, secure and amply reflectors are recommended to reduce the number of lamps installed without
buffered/ segregated from other activity areas? reducing the illumination level. Where ballasts are used, these should be of the
electronic type or low-loss type with a power factor of at least 85%.
E.5.5.16 Energy Efficient Lighting Design The highest practical room surface reflectance should be considered in the lighting
design. The use of light finishes will attain the best overall efficiency of the entire
There are multiple sustainable design provisions under the 2007 Department of lighting system. Dark surfaces should be avoided because these absorb light. (Table
Energy (DoE) Guidelines on Energy Conserving Design of Buildings, particularly under 3.3 of the DoE Guidelines on Energy Conserving Design of Buildings lists the
its Section 3.3 (General Requirements of Energy-Efficient Lighting Design). These all recommended room surface reflectances.)
form part of nationally-instituted energy efficiency guidelines that are all intended to
Selective switching possibilities should be provided so that individual or specific
conserve power, a design and construction practice that has a positive effect on both
the natural and built environments. group of fixtures can be turned off when not needed and lighting levels can be adapted
to changing needs.
Hereafter is the list of key energy efficiency guidelines (particularly with reference to
The lighting system shall be so designed (such) that day-lighting can be coordinated
the lighting of the building) to help make buildings of truly sustainable design i.e.
effectively making Green Buildings. with artificial lighting, taking into consideration the problems of glare, brightness
imbalance and heat buildup in the building interior.
In selecting lighting systems, the costs of operation and energy usage and not simply
E.5.6 General Requirements of Energy-Efficient Lighting Design
the initial cost should be considered.”
The lighting design shall utilize energy-efficient lighting equipment. The lighting
system shall be chosen (so) as to provide a flexible, effective and pleasing visual E.5.7 Sustainable Design for Buildings
environment in accordance with the intended use, but with the least possible energy
requirements.
E.5.7.1 Basic Sustainable Design Compliances with P.D. No. 1096, the 1977 National Building Code of
The use of task-oriented lighting shall be used whenever practicable. the Philippines (1977 NBCP)
In the design of general lighting in buildings with centralized air-conditioning There are several basic sustainable design provisions under P.D. No. 1096 (otherwise
equipment, consideration should be given to integrated lighting and air-conditioning known as the 1977 National Building Code of the Philippines (NBCP), particularly
systems which use luminaires with heat removal capabilities. under its 2004 Revised Implementing Rules and Regulations (IRR), and partly under
The lighting system shall be designed for expected activity. The task shall be analyzed some of its Referral Codes (RCs, covering certain building safety aspects and physical
in terms of difficulty, duration, criticalness and location in order to determine the planning/ building design sensitivities) and under some derivative regulations (RCs).
lighting needs throughout the space, always keeping in mind that higher illumination These all form part of nationally-instituted sustainable development controls that are
levels than necessary are likely to waste energy while on the other hand, levels lower all intended to prevent over-building and over-paving, both nuisance practices by
than needed could impair visual effectiveness. (Table 3.1 2007 of the DoE Guidelines on some building designers and constructors that have a very negative effect on both the
Energy Conserving Design of Buildings lists the recommended illuminance levels.) natural and built environments.
The most efficient lamps appropriate to the type of lighting, color rendition and color Below is the matrix showing an example of the application of the basic sustainable
appearance shall be selected. The use of such types of lamps reduces power development controls under P.D. No. 1096 (NBCP) to help make buildings of truly
requirements. (Refer to Table 3.2 of the DoE Guidelines on Energy Conserving Design of sustainable design i.e. effectively making Green Buildings.
Buildings re Efficacy Ranges and Color Rendering Indices of Various Lamps.)
In general, the normal artificial light source should be the fluorescent lamp. In down-
light installation, high-pressure discharge lamps can be used. In large high bay areas,
high-pressure discharge lamps should be used. Where good color rendering is
required, the tubular fluorescent lamp and other high-pressure discharge lamps
except high-pressure sodium lamps should be used. However, if moderate color
rendering is of comparatively minor importance, high-pressure sodium lamps can be
used. If very good color rendering is required, the tubular fluorescent lamp should be
used.
E-50
E-49
which do not provide transparency to the interior. Only exterior wall surfaces are
counted in the ratio, and not roof surfaces.
The WWR is often a factor in the energy efficiency of a building, with a low ratio
generally indicating better efficiency as windows usually perform less well than the
rest of the exterior walls as a thermal barrier. Note however that while windows may
Table E-6 Example of the Application of the Basic Sustainable Development Controls
under P.D. No. 1096 (NBCP) not be thermally ideal due to the heat that is permitted to penetrate the building
interior i.e. which has to be balanced by artificially cooling the building interior, its
Applicable Basic Sustainable Development Compliances with Basic Sustainable Development Control/s
Control/s Under P.D. No. 1096 (the 1977 NBCP)
energy efficiency value lies in the amount of natural light that it draws inside the
as applied to a Public School Building Project Development Control to building i.e. thereby helping reduce the artificial lighting load.
on a Corner-Through Lot (or a Corner Lot be Satisfied Compliances by the Remarks
Abutting 3 or More Streets) for a Public School Building Project Based on certain trends, it may be reasonable to say that for a typical building, an
Building Project
optimal 30% WWR for hot-humid tropical settings (like in the Philippines) may be
Allowable maximum building footprint (AMBF) or AMBF or Maximum PSO Building Footprint of Fully compliant and is
maximum percentage of site occupancy (PSO) set at 60.0% of the Total 3,198.12 sqm results in a LOWER than the maximum enough to exploit daylight (i.e. too much daylight inside the building interior is also
Lot Area (TLA) of 5,464.64PSO of only 58.52% of thePSO by 1.48% of the TLA. not a desirable situation), since there is no significant increase in daylight availability
sqm TLA
for larger or taller window sizes and since there is need to balance the intensity of the
Building Height Limit (BHL) BHL at 15.0 meters (or 5 BHL at only (approx.) 13.5 Fully compliant and is building interior-penetrating daylight via opaque surfaces.
regular storeys) meters LOWER than the set BHL
by 1.5 meters
The entry of controlled amounts of natural light into the building interior is an
Floor to Lot Area Ratio (FLAR) Maximum FLAR at 2.5 Applied FLAR at only Fully compliant and is absolute necessity in helping prevent the sick building syndrome, engendered by the
times TLA (approx.) 0.78 times TLA LOWER than the maximum
FLAR by 1.71 times the unchecked growth of harmful microorganisms e.g. spores, etc. that may thrive within
TLA dark and damp interior building spaces.
Gross Floor Area (GFA) Maximum GFA at 2.5 timesGenerated GFA of approx.Fully compliant and is
TLA 4,302.08 sqm is at only LOWER than the maximum As an example, a WWR of 29.0% is well within the desired WWR range, helping make
(approx.) 0.79 of the TLA GFA by 1.71 times the TLA the building truly sustainably designed i.e. effectively making it a Green Building.
Total Gross Floor Area (TGFA) Maximum TGFA at Generated TGFA of 5,377.6Fully compliant
approx.1.25 times GFA sqm is at 1.25 times GFA
E.5.7.2 Carbon Reduction (and Embodied Energy) of Construction and Finishing Materials Specified/
Total Window Surface Area (TWSA) to TGFA RatioTWSA at a minimum of TWSA at approx. 10.4% ofFully compliant and Used for Buildings
10% of TGFA TGFA EXCEEDS the set minimum
by 0.4% of TGFA
Carbon reduction is a complex challenge for all organizations, not least those in the
Unpaved Surface Area (USA) or Unpaved Open Minimum USA at approx. Generated USA of 1,965.05Fully compliant and
Spaces 30% of the TLA sqm is at approx. 35.96% of
EXCEEDS the set minimum construction industry i.e. taking a comprehensive view of the construction sector
the TLA by 5.96% of TLA value chain means considering all aspects of the design, construction, use (and
Minimum Required Parking Slot, Parking Area and One (1) car slot for every Off-RROW (street) open Fully compliant demolition) of buildings and infrastructure, beyond simple occupancy itself. Any
Loading Space Requirements five (5) classrooms: one (1)parking provisions include:
off- road right-of-way Eight (8) slots facing the
energy efficiency improvements in building occupancy mean that the carbon emitted
(RROW/ street) (or off- NEC Building; indirectly through the supply chain could form an even larger proportion of that
street) passenger loading One (1) off- road right-of- building's lifetime footprint.
space that can way (RROW/ street) (or off-
accommodate two (2) street) passenger loading
queued jeepney/ shuttle space that can
This indirect, embodied carbon (or spent energy) arises from the extraction of various
slots; and one (1) school accommodate two (2) raw materials, the energy intensive processes associated with the manufacture,
bus slot for every two queued jeepney/ shuttle
hundred (200) students slots;
handling/ transportation/ delivery, installation, use, maintenance, etc. of the building
one (1) school bus slot for materials, and the activities of a multitude of constructors i.e. embodied energy of
every two hundred (200) construction and finishing materials as discussed in the previous section.
students; and
two (2) parking slots for
loading/ unloading trucks
With the processes to be monitored and managed lying beyond direct control of the
(which can accommodate 4 industry's main developers and prime constructors, construction organizations must
regular cars when not in
use).
reduce carbon throughout their extended supply chains. After all, this is a growing
priority because, in addition to the environmental benefits, where there's carbon
there's cost, and where there's cost there could be savings i.e. benefits to both the
While not explicitly provided for in the 2004 Revised IRR of the 1977 NBCP, the
building owner and the general public.
window-to-wall ratio (WWR) of a building is the percentage (%) of a building's facade
taken up by windows i.e. the percentage of the exterior building walls taken up by Hereafter are some concepts that were partially or substantially incorporated in the
light-transmitting (i.e. transparent or translucent glazing) surfaces, including physical planning and design of a building project:
windows and translucent surfaces such as glass bricks, thereby implying that natural
Review the selection of raw materials: The extraction, production and
ventilation via operable windows is not necessarily a factor in the determination of
transportation of basic construction materials are both energy- and carbon-intensive,
the WWR. The WWR does not include glass surfaces used ornamentally or as cladding,
E-52
E-51
so it is critical to select suppliers of building products and materials who are actively does the device produce more energy or save more energy than it took to make it (or
working to manage their own carbon impacts. make it usable/ beneficial)?
Investigate the origin of the raw materials: Natural stone, for example, produces Embodied energy is an accounting method which aims to find the sum total of the
minimal emissions during the production process but the transportation from the energy necessary for an entire product life-cycle. Determining what constitutes this
source to manufacturing site can be the largest cause of emissions, e.g. in transporting life-cycle includes assessing the relevance and extent of energy into raw material
from quarry sites. In such cases, managing the transportation process is crucial to extraction (sourcing), transport (and handling), manufacture, assembly, installation,
managing supply chain emissions. This contrasts with concrete where typically the dis-assembly, deconstruction and/or decomposition (and disposal) as well as human
carbon emissions during production are much higher than those released during and secondary resources. Different methodologies produce different understandings
transportation. of the scale and scope of application and the type of energy embodied. Source :
Wikipedia (with some additions/ edits from PTCC Project Team)
Consider construction phase emissions: Key factors contributing to construction
process emissions include the multiple, temporary sites, transportation, waste arising, A matrix showing the embodied energy levels of the construction and finishing
and heavy machinery which are common for large building projects. materials specified and used for a typical public building is provided in Table E-7.
Most of the construction and finishing materials specified/ used for the sample public
Consider how to influence the occupancy and use of buildings and
building are locally sourced and have only low to medium qualitative embodied
infrastructure: These “downstream” emissions are generated in the occupancy/ use
energy ratings, thereby helping make the building of truly sustainable design i.e.
phase but are greatly influenced by specifications from architects, choices made by
effectively making it a Green Building.
developers and building owners, and from the way the buildings are used by the
people who ultimately work and live in them. The purpose and design of a building
also contributes to its embodied carbon. The people using it, the use of lighting,
heating, ventilation and air conditioning, and the proportions and differing insulating
properties of glass, metal, concrete, masonry (plaster, brick, etc.) and wood can all
have a tangible impact on the carbon footprint.
Being mindful of these factors, good examples of design, coupled with good occupier
habits and behaviours, can generate a lower carbon impact during end use as well as
construction e.g. buildings using locally-sourced, sustainable timber, ground-source
heat pumps using natural energy to provide heating and cooling, rainwater harvesting
and grey water recycling facilities to provide 100% of toilet water use and thereby
help to reduce overall water consumption by as much as 20%.
Key concerns for the design and construction teams were:
 Manage carbon throughout the construction supply chain/s;
 Measure the footprint of individual products in order to identify carbon “hot
spots” (carbon intensive areas e.g. Areas with equipment that are heavy power
users) and focus efforts on carbon reduction;
 Suggest the use of suppliers that offer low carbon products and those that can
demonstrate a consideration for both the direct and indirect impacts of their
products and services;
 Conceptualize a carbon strategy and implementation plan; and
 Understand the likely carbon footprint generated in the occupancy/ use phase,
and encourage the building owner/ end-users to plan for sustainability
throughout the useful life of the building. Source : carbon trust : building a lower
carbon construction Industry (with paraphrasing and additions/ edits from PTCC
Project Team)
Embodied Energy is the sum of all the energy required to produce goods (materials)
or services, considered as if that energy was incorporated or “embodied” in the
product itself. The concept can be useful in determining the effectiveness of energy-
producing or energy-saving devices, or the "real" replacement cost of a building, and,
because energy-inputs usually entail greenhouse gas emissions, in deciding whether a
product contributes to or mitigates global warming. One fundamental question is:
E-54
E-53
Table E-7 Embodied Energy Levels of the Construction and Finishing Materials Qualitative Embodied Energy
Specified and Used for a Typical Public Building Common Building Construction or Architectural Finishing Material Source Rating (EER) of Materials Used
Materials for A Typical Public Building
Qualitative Embodied Energy Negligible to Low to High to
Common Building Construction or Architectural Finishing Material Source Rating (EER) of Materials Used Local Foreign Very Low Medium Very High
Materials for A Typical Public Building
Negligible to Low to High to 7. Vinyl floor tiles x √
Local Foreign Very Low Medium Very High
8. Epoxy paint x √
Common Building Construction Materials Used
9. Gypsum wallboard and ceiling board x √
Premium termiticide concentrate x √
10. Metal spandrel ceiling for eaves x √
Pre-mixed concrete x √
11. Acoustical boards, fine- fissured x √
Basic steel (hot-dipped galvanized) x √
12. Toilet fixtures, vitreous china x √
Zinc-chromate corrosion resistant agent x √
13. Toilet compartments, 12 mm thick “phenolic” board with laminate x √
Bituminous waterproofing paint x √ finish
Extruded aluminum frames x √
Tanguile lumber (kiln-dried) x √ E.5.7.3 Initially Calculated Carbon Footprint for a Typical Low-Rise Public Building
Medium density fiberboard (MDF) x √
A carbon footprint has historically been defined by Championne as "the total sets
High pressure laminate (HPL) x √
of greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions caused by an organization, event, product or
Membrane waterproofing x √
person." However, calculating the total carbon footprint is impossible due to the large
Cementitious waterproofing, 90 mils thick x √
amount of data required and the fact that carbon dioxide can be produced by natural
Pre-painted long span cold roll steel, coil coated (pre-painted) x √ occurrences. It is for this reason that Wright, Kemp, and Williams, writing in the
aluminum zinc alloy roof panels
journal Carbon Management, have suggested a more practicable definition:
19 mm tempered glass sheets with film for UV protective layer x √
Tanguile marine plywood x √
"A measure of the total amount of carbon dioxide (CO2) and methane (CH4)
emissions of a defined population, system or activity, considering all relevant
Polyvinylchloride (PVC) conduit x √
sources, sinks and storage within the spatial and temporal boundary of the
Intermediate metal conduit (IMC) x √
population, system or activity of interest. Calculated as carbon dioxide
Electrical metallic tubing (EMT) x √ equivalent (CO2e) using the relevant 100-year global warming
Flexible steel conduit (FSC) x √ potential (GWP100)."
Thermoplastic insulated wire (TIW) and cables (TIC) x √
Greenhouse gases can be emitted through transport, land clearance, and the
Annealed copper wire for conductors x √ production and consumption of food, fuels, manufactured goods, materials, wood,
Receptacles, hospital grade, 220V, grounding type x √ roads, buildings, and services. For simplicity of reporting, it is often expressed in
Thermoplastic cover plates for wiring devices x √ terms of the amount of carbon dioxide, or its equivalent of other GHGs, emitted.
Diesel engine electric generating unit with accessories, auxiliary x √ Most of the carbon footprint emissions come from "indirect" sources, i.e. fuel burned
equipment
to produce goods far away from the final consumer/ end-user. These are
Long fluorescent: T-8, 3000K, energy-savings type x √
distinguished from emissions which come from burning fuel directly in one's car or
Electronic digital ballasts (EDB) x √
stove, commonly referred to as "direct" sources of the consumer's/ end-user’s carbon
Galvanized iron, (GI) main water lines, schedule 40 x √ footprint, where the term end-user can refer to the building constructor, owner
High density polypropylene pipes to fixtures, type 3 (or high density x √ and/or occupants.
cross-linked polyethylene pipes), type PE-Xa with disinfection-
resistant compression sleeve fittings The concept name of the carbon footprint originates from the concept of the ecological
Common Architectural Finishing Materials Used footprint, discussion for which was developed by Rees and Wackernagel in the 1990s,
1. All paints (non-toxic and contain an effective amount of fungicide x √ and which estimates the number of "earths" that would theoretically be required if
and mildew-proofing agent to prevent the paint from showing a mold everyone on the planet consumed resources at the same level as the person
growth or shall be inherently fungistatic by the nature of their
constituents) calculating their ecological footprint. However, carbon footprints are much more
specific than ecological footprints since they measure direct emissions of gases that
2. Flatwall & quick dry enamel, oil-based x √
cause climate change into the atmosphere.
3. Gloss varnish, lacquer solvent x √
4. Exterior wall masonry liquid water repellant, water-based alkyl x √
silane Measuring Carbon Footprints
5. Plain cement floor x √ An individual's, nation's, or organization's carbon footprint can be measured by
6. Ceramic tiles, heavy traffic x √ undertaking a GHG emissions assessment or other calculative activities denoted
as carbon accounting. Once the size of a carbon footprint is known, a strategy can be
E-56
E-55
devised to reduce it, e.g. by technological developments, better process and product Table E-8 Initially Calculated Carbon Footprint for a Typical Low-Rise Public Building
management, changed Green Public or Private Procurement (GPP), carbon capture, B. Calculated Carbon Footprint
consumption strategies, and others. Non-Food Carbon-Consuming Components for a Typical
Low-Rise Public Building During Construction Onsite Carbon Dioxide
and During Projected Use/ Occupancy of the Building Unit of Carbon equivalent (CO2e)
Several free online carbon footprint calculators exist, where the pertinent websites Quantity Consumption in metric tons (MT)
(Over a One Year Period)
ask you to answer more or less detailed questions about transportation choices,
Initially Calculated Non-Food Carbon Consumption During Construction Onsite (Over an Aggregated One Year
building size, activities, usage of electricity, heating, and heavy appliances, etc. The Period)
website then estimates the carbon footprint based on the answers to such questions.
Lighting and power consumption onsite Say 36,000 KwH 20.03
The mitigation of carbon footprints through the development of alternative projects, LPG (cooking gas for worker meals) Say 1,430 Liter 2.10
such as solar or wind energy (done onsite or offsite) or reforestation (done offsite), Three (3) service vehicles i.e. mainly cars and SUVs aged
Say 429 Vehicle Unit 76.44
represents one way of reducing a carbon footprint and is often known as carbon from six (6) to ten (10) years old
offsetting. Two (2) service vehicles i.e. mainly trucks aged from six (6)
to ten (10) years old
The main influences on carbon footprints include population, economic output, and
Fuel for Various Heavy Equipment onsite Say 2,860 Liter 4.20
energy and carbon intensity of the economy. These factors are the main targets of
Subtotal for I. 204.69
individuals and businesses in order to decrease carbon footprints. Scholars suggest
the most effective way to decrease a carbon footprint is to either decrease the amount Initially Calculated Non-Food Carbon Consumption During Projected Use/ Occupancy of the Building (Over the First
One Year Period)
of energy needed for production (including construction) or to decrease the
Lighting and power consumption Say 72,000 KwH 40.05
dependence on carbon emitting fuels (during actual building use/ occupancy).
LPG (cooking gas for cafeteria) Say 1,430 Liter 2.10
Ten (10) service vehicles i.e. mainly cars and SUVs aged
Say 1,430 Vehicle Unit 254.80
Other Ways to Reduce Carbon Footprint from six (6) to ten (10) years old
The most common way to reduce the carbon footprint of humans is to Reduce, Reuse Two (2) service vehicles i.e. mainly trucks aged from six (6)
and Recycle. The reduction of the carbon footprint is addressed in the previous to ten (10) years old
section on carbon reduction and embodied energy of construction and finishing Subtotal for II. 398.87
materials for the building. Nothing should be disposed off into the soil i.e. all the Total for I. and II. 603.56
ferrous (metal) materials which are prone to degrade or oxidize with time should be
sold as early as possible at reduced price. This can also be done by using reusable
items rather than disposable ones. If that option isn't available, it is best to properly
recycle the disposable items after use. When one recycles at least half of their waste,
they can potentially save a minimum of 1.2 tons of carbon dioxide annually.
Yet another option for reducing the carbon footprint of humans is to use less air-
conditioning in the building i.e. introduce passive cooling techniques since the
Philippines is in a hot-humid tropical location. By adding insulation to the walls and
roof of a building, and installing weather-stripping around doors and windows, one
can also lower their artificial ventilation costs. Setting the thermostat just two (2)
degrees lower in summer could potentially save about 1 ton of carbon dioxide each
year (for possibly each cooling unit). Source: Wikipedia (with some additions/ edits
from PTCC Project Team)
Based on the use of the UK-based Carbon Footprint calculator (at
http://www.carbonfootprint.com/calculator.aspx), the matrix hereafter shows that
the approximated carbon footprint for a typical low-rise public building during its
construction (aggregated 1.0 year period) and initial use/ occupancy (over its first 1.0
year period), which altogether may total 603.56 metric tons (MT) in carbon dioxide
equivalent (CO2e) units, a relatively low building carbon footprint, thereby helping
make the building of sustainable design i.e. effectively making it a Green Building.
E-58
E-57
E.6 Non-Mobile Billboards (NMBs)/ Electronic Displays and electronic signs mounted on facades of buildings, the BEDU shall be sized in
accordance with the zoning classification and in proportion to the building height limit
Signages (BHL), architectural projections and outermost face of buildings/ billboards (OFB),
the outermost limit of building projections (OLBP) and the permissible proportions of
Policy: It is the declared policy of the State to ensure an improved quality of life for all
openings/ fenestrations for mandated natural light and ventilation and related
through continuing efforts to improve the natural/ built and physical/ non-physical
provisions under the NBCP as well as the various safety provisions under the FCP,
environments. It is also the policy of the State to preserve public spaces as public
duly determined by a RLA.
domain and not to allow the use of such spaces for private enjoyment nor benefit.
“Building Height Limit or BHL” means the maximum height to be allowed for a
Definition of Terms: As used in these DGDG, the following terms shall be as defined
building/ structure based on their proposed use/occupancy. As defined under the
hereafter:
NBCP, the BHL is generally measured from the established grade line to the topmost
“ABO” or Acting Building Official is the official designation of the DPWH for its LGU portion of such a building/ structure, inclusive of a non-mobile billboard mounted on
appointees under Sec. 477 of the LGC, and who are tasked with the implementation top of such a building/ structure. Under this Ordinance, BHL shall also mean Billboard
and enforcement of the NBCP and its derivative regulations. Height Limit.
“Air Right” means the right to physically develop and subsequently benefit or profit “Cantilevered Support Structure” means a support structure that is not directly
from the continued use of the air space above the NATIONAL AND LOCAL road right- planted on the ground or any portion of the national RROW, similar ROWs or legal
of-way (RROW) or other NATIONAL AND LOCAL rights-of-way (ROWs) or legal easement within the LGU; such a structure may rest on a portion of a building or
easements or private/ public property outside or along such ROWs or easements another support structure not originally planned/ designed to support a billboard; a
within the jurisdiction of the pertinent LGU, subject to the payment of lease to the cantilevered structure is necessary so that the effective width of the sidewalk or
appropriate public party for availing of such rights. The upper limit of the air rights is similar components of the RROW are neither compromised nor lessened;
the airways navigational path such as the clearance limits of aerodrome and flight
“Carriageway” or “Roadway” means the portion or component of a national RROW
patterns (particularly for helicopters using helipads within the LGU) and the partial
within the LGU, on which land-based transportation conveyances such as motor
availment of such air rights shall require the official evaluation and permission of the
vehicles are allowed to pass or park. For national RRROWs within the LGU, the term
Civil Aviation Authority of the Philippines (CAAP).
may be “Railway” and for national WROWs within the LGU, the applicable term may
“Alignments” are the surface areas/ spaces traversed by a NATIONAL RROW, similar be “Waterway” or “Vessel-way”.
ROWs, legal easements or similar public spaces within the LGU, which form part of the
“Content” means the message and image components of a billboard or electronic
public domain and are therefore disallowed sites for non-mobile billboards.
display which may be advertising, commercial, directional or general public
“barangay” means the basic government unit distinct from the LGU. information in intent.
“Billboard and Electronic Display” means an attention-getting device in the form of “DILG” means the Department of Interior and Local Government.
notices/ signages/ graphics/ images visible to public view, that are designed to
“DOTC” means the Department of Transportation and Communication which
promote, entice, sell, offer, for commercial purposes, a product or services, and
maintains exclusive control over certain types of national ROWs and RROWs. “DPWH”
consisting of a support structure, a display or message area, a lighting system and
means the Department of Public Works and Highways which maintains exclusive
related components. The term also refers to all types of identification, description,
control over national road rights-of-way (RROWs) within the LGU and which is the
illustration, images, pictures, display or device which is affixed to or represented
primary implementing agency and enforcer of the NBCP, its 2004 or latest
directly or indirectly upon a portion of a building/ structure, support structure or land
implementing rules and regulations (IRR), its applicable referral codes (RCs such as
and which directs attention to a product, place, activity, person, institution, business,
R.A. No. 9514, the 2008 FCP and its 2009 IRR, the National Structural Code of the
idea or belief. The term shall be generic and shall collectively refer to but not be
Philippines/ NSCP, 2010 or latest edition, the Philippine Electrical Code, latest edition,
limited to multi-media or tri-vision billboards, neon, electronic displays or other
the Electronics Code, if any in its latest edition, etc.) and its applicable derivative
illuminated signs, painted signs and the like. The classifications of the key types of
regulations (DRs including National Executive Orders (EOs), National Administrative
billboards that may be erected at the defined regulated areas under these DGDG; non-
Orders (AOs), DPWH Department Orders/ DOs, DPWH Department Administrative
mobile billboards (NMBs)/ electronic displays shall only be permitted in the zones
Orders/ DAOs and DPWH Memoranda Circulars/ MCs).
defined under these DGDG while the Permitted Construction shall only be within
private lots inasmuch as NMBs/ electronic displays are prohibited in all parts of and “Display or Electronic Display” means the material or device mounted on the non-
types of ROWs i.e. streets, utilities, rivers/ water bodies, including mandated legal mobile billboard or electronic display support structure together with its content/
easements (MLEs), unless specifically recommended under these DGDG; message. A display/ electronic display surface area in excess of one square meter (1.0
sqm), with a least dimension of one meter (1.0 m), shall be considered part of a NMB/
“Billboard or Electronic Display Unit” or “BEDU” shall refer to one (1.0) independent
BEDU.
NMB or electronic display with a total display area of anywhere between seven point
five square meters (7.5 sqm) minimum to two hundred twenty five square meters “FCP” means the 2008 Fire Code of the Philippines, otherwise known as R.A. No. 9514
(225.0 sqm maximum, including border and trim but excluding supports) maximum or its future iterations, duly supported by its 2009 and/ or latest IRR and/or related
for existing/ proposed NATIONAL urban RROWs/ ROWs within the LGU. For NMBs/
E-60
E-59
executive issuances by the DILG, the agency tasked with its full implementation and “Non-Mobile Billboard/ Electronic Display Unit (BEDU)” means a billboard/ electronic
enforcement. display positioned at a fixed location, usually along a NATIONAL road right-of-way
(RROW) within the LGU, where it can be readily and continuously viewed by the
“Firewall” means a reinforced masonry or reinforced concrete separator with the
passing public.
appropriate fire-resistive rating and which shall be positioned between buildings/
structures to maintain the fire integrity of each building/ structure. Firewalls that are “Official Signs” mean directional or information-conveying signs, in whatever form
erected along and/or above property lines utilize a substantial portion of the allowed under the IRR of this Ordinance, that are officially issued and erected by or
maximum development potential of a property and shall therefore have no openings through the national government or by the LGU for the purpose of public service.
except for the permitted vent wells specified under P.D. No. 1096, the 1977 National
“PCE” - professional communications engineer.
Building Code of the Philippines (NBCP) and its 2004 and/ or latest Implementing
Rules and Regulations (IRR). Firewalls are not envisioned as a mounting surface for “PEE” - professional electrical engineer.
billboards and other types of display under the NBCP and its IRR as such billboards/ “Property Line” means the imaginary or defined line or a set of such interconnected
displays also constitute a fire and safety hazard to an adjoining property. lines and denoting the limits of a property.
“IRR” means the Implementing Rules and Regulations of this Ordinance. “RLAr” - registered and licensed architect.
“Intersections” are common surface areas or spaces shared by two (2) or more “RLCE” - registered and licensed civil engineer.
national RROWs, similar ROWs or legal easements within the LGU, or a mix of such
public spaces, which form part of the public domain and are therefore disallowed sites “RLEnP” - registered and licensed environmental planner.
for non-mobile billboards. “ROW” means a national Right-of-Way, including the airspace and the leasable air
“LGC” - the 1990 Local Government Code, otherwise known as R.A. No. 7160 and its rights above such a ROW within the LGU.
derivative regulations as implemented and enforced by the DILG. “RROW” or national “Road-Right-of-Way” or “Street” means a public open space
“LGU” – The Local Government Unit of Makati City, as defined under the LGC. within the LGU, for the continuous flow of pedestrian and vehicular traffic, including
the air space above such RROW, that must be free of all forms of prohibited physical
“Legal Easement” means a public open space mandated under law that must be obstructions. The national RROW or street within the LGU is the surface area lying
absolutely free of all forms of physical obstructions that can negatively affect natural between two (2) or more parallel properties and its width is horizontally measured
light and ventilation within such a space or that can impede access to or the full from opposite property lines.
recreational use of such a space by the general public. Legal easements also refer to
the public area within the LGU that may lie between the legally usable portions of a “RRROW” means a national Railroad-Right-of-Way within the LGU, consisting of the
private/public property and natural or built bodies of water or waterways. railway/ tramway/ tracks on which the trains actually pass, the buffer areas on either
side of the railway for operational safety and fixed facilities for passenger exchanges,
“Lighting System” means the luminaries/ complete lighting units, power source and inclusive of the airspace above such a RRROW.
connections, controls and all support structures/ devices that ensure the continuous
illumination of a display/ electronic display. Regulated Area means all areas inside the boundaries of the LGU which are adjacent to
and within fifty meters (50.0 m) of the edge of the national road right-of-way (RROW)
“MMDA” means the Metropolitan Manila Development Authority. within the LGU (applicable to NMBs only).
“Minimum BEDU” shall refer to one (1.0) display with a total display area of seven “Residual Areas” are spaces that may fall outside the alignments or intersections of
point five square meters (7.50 sqm), with a least dimension of one meter (1.0 m). two (2) or more national RROWs, similar ROWs or legal easements or a mix of such
“Maximum BEDU” shall refer to one (1.0) display with a total display area of two public spaces within the LGU, which still form part of the public domain and are
hundred and twenty five square meters (225.0 sqm), with a least dimension of seven therefore disallowed sites for NMBs.
point five meters (7.5 m). “Scenic Vista” shall refer to a naturally occurring or a good combination of natural and
“NBCP” means the 1977 National Building Code of the Philippines, otherwise known artificial/man-made features in the viewable landscape and which offers the viewer a
as Presidential Decree or P.D. No. 1096 or its future iterations, duly supported by its refreshing visual experience or respite.
2004 and/or latest IRR and/or related executive issuances by the DPWH, the agency “Setback” means a one (1)-dimensional quantity denoting the level horizontal distance
tasked with its full implementation and enforcement, particularly in the case of the measured at a ninety degree angle (90˚) from the line formed by the outermost face of
DPWH NBCDO Memorandum Circular No. 1, series of 2008. a building/ structure or billboard/ electronic display support structure to a property
“NBO” or National Building Official is the official designation of the DPWH Secretary as line, whereby both lines run parallel to each other.
per the NBCP. “Sidewalk” means the portion on each side of the national road right-of-way (RROW)
“Non-Conforming Billboard/ Electronic Display Unit (BEDU)” means any non-mobile within the LGU, for the exclusive use of pedestrians and the disabled who are in
billboard or electronic display lawfully constructed prior to the enactment of this transit.
Ordinance, but which thereafter fails to conform to its provisions.
E-62
E-61
“Signages” are devices limited to identifying location/ addresses and names of E.6.1.1 Position Within/ Along National RROWs, ROWs and Legal Easements within the LGU
establishments, as distinguished from NMBs/ electronic displays which offer goods/
services to consumers, but like non-mobile billboards/ electronic displays, these are No NMB/ electronic display shall be located in a position that obstructs or obscures
exposed to public view and therefore come under “public safety, public welfare, and the view of vehicular or pedestrian traffic in such a manner as to endanger their safe
public domain”, and as per local/ national enabling laws (e.g., R.A. No. 7160, the 1991 movement thereof. NMBs shall not be erected in a manner that can confuse or
Local Government Code of the Philippines/ LGCP and its latest IRR), are therefore obstruct the view or interpretation of any official traffic sign, signal or device.
subject to the permitting processes, regulations, and the imposition of taxes, fees and The outermost portion or projection of a NMB/ electronic display or its support
charges by the LGU, as provided for in this Ordinance. structure or its lighting system shall be located at least five meters (5.0m) from the
“Support Structure” means the rigid framework on which the display/ electronic outermost line of the national street or RROW, RRROW, UROW, WROW, legal
display or attention-catching device of a non-mobile billboard/ electronic display shall easement and the like.
be mounted. The foundation and superstructure for part of the support structure. Non-mobile billboards/ electronic displays shall not be erected on any structure or
“Temporary Sign” means a sign made of fabric/ cloth, vinyl/ plastic or similar light portion thereof found within the national RROW, RRROW, UROW, WROW, legal
and/or combustible material, with or without frame i.e., streamers, bills, posters and easement and the like. The air rights over such ROWs and legal easements shall not be
the like that are installed within or outside a ROW within the LGU, for display/public availed of for the purpose of erecting NMBs. As such, no part of a NMB shall extend
viewing for a limited period of time, subject to the issuance of the required permit/s. over any part of the RROW at grade or above grade.
‘Urban Design” - refers to the physical and systematic design undertaken by a RLA on Temporary signs, regardless of material, intended use and size, including election-
a community and urban plane, more comprehensive than, and an extension of the related signs or signs showing the names and/or likeness of elective/ appointed
architecture of buildings, spaces between buildings, entourage, utilities and officials, shall not be strung or installed over or across a national RROW, RRROW,
movement systems, including the siting, sizing and placement of NMBs/ electronic UROW, WROW, legal easement and the like, unless otherwise permitted by the
displays and signages. barangay concerned or by the LGU but in no case shall the period of display exceed
seven (7) calendar days. The barangay or LGU must thereafter remove said temporary
“UROW” means the Utility Right-of-Way means the area within the LGU on which sign/s.
public utility lines e.g. power, telecommunications, water supply, drainage, sewer, gas,
etc. are allowed to pass, including buffer/ safety zones, service/ maintenance areas Reckoned from the edge of the national RROW within the LGU, all large NMB/
and the airspace above such a UROW. electronic billboard displays i.e. in excess of thirty square meters (30.0 sqm) in display
area shall have a minimum clear/ unobstructed viewing distance of twenty five
“View Corridor” means the visually unobstructed width, depth and height of all meters (25.0 m).
available sight lines running through and along national RROWs, legal easements and
similar ROWs, open spaces within lots including yards and courts or through and No NMB/ electronic display shall be located within more than two hundred meters
along designated public spaces including recreational areas within the LGU. View (200.0m) of the outermost portion of all interchanges or of the outermost portion of
corridor also means specific ranges of sight lines from a building or structure to a the national right-of-way (ROW) of all underpasses, overpasses, bridges, tunnels,
specific natural or man-built object and/ or development considered of beauty or station/ terminal/ inter-modal/ multi-modal structures and the like or from the
value. center of an intersection. For existing/ proposed national RROW widths of forty
meters (40.0m) wide or wider, a distance of from fifty to one hundred and fifty meters
“WROW” means a national Water Right-of-Way found in inland waterways such as (50.0m to 150.0m) shall apply.
rivers, streams, canals and the like found within the LGU, and consisting of the
waterway/ vessel-way on which boats/ ships/ barges pass, the embankments and No part of a NMB/ electronic display including its support structure shall be placed on,
portions of the shore areas used to access the waterway/ vessel-way, including the in or over any public property/ domain, including national public/
airspace above such a WROW. transportation/utility ROWs or utility/drainage easements or upon telephone/utility
poles or upon natural features such as trees, rocks and the like. In particular, non-
“Yard” means a two (2)-dimensional space consisting of the vacant land area between mobile billboards/ electronic displays shall not be erected or maintained or violate
the outermost portion of a NMB/ electronic display including its support structure the air rights above a carriageway/ roadway, railway or waterway/ vessel-way.
and the property lines.
NMBs/ electronic displays shall not be erected at residual areas at or along
intersections of national RROWs, RRROWs, ROWs and legal easements or at or along
E.6.1 Regulation of NMBs/ Electronic Displays within a LGU intersections of such public spaces.
Any NMB or electronic billboard erected, modified, retrofitted, rehabilitated or NMBs/ electronic displays that may obscure or obstruct the view of vehicular or
otherwise altered and exhibited shall comply with the following requirements: pedestrian traffic or that may interfere, imitate, resemble or be confused with official
traffic signs, signals or devices shall not be permitted. No NMB/ electronic display that
prevents a clear and unobstructed view of official traffic signs in approaching or
merging traffic shall be permitted.
E-64
E-63
No NMB/ electronic display that may impair any scenic vista or view corridor from the properties, unless a current and valid lease agreement for the use of such air rights
national RROW/ legal easement or from a building/ structure along such RROW/ legal exists.
easement shall be permitted.
A NMB/ electronic display mounted on a fire-walled property shall not utilize the air
NMBs/ electronic displays may only be single-faced or double-faced. In the case of rights of a private/ public property adjoining such a fire-walled property without the
a double-faced NMBs/ electronic displays, the allowed display surface area/ BEDU on written consent of the property owner or lawful possessor of the affected property
each face shall not exceed one hundred twenty five square meters (125.0 sqm) per and without the permit of the barangay concerned or the LGU. In case of the presence
BEDU/ display/ face, a maximum size that must be proportional to the RROW width of official consent by the affected property’s owner or lawful possessor for a firewall-
e.g. for RROWs that are 40.0 m or wider, provided that applicable setback, yard and mounted NMB/ electronic display, the same may opt to share in the income that may
building height limit (BHL) requirements of the NBCP and its IRR are satisfied. be derived from the NMB/ electronic display in exchange for the use of the air rights.
In case of the lack of consent or refusal by the affected property’s owner or lawful
Triple, quadruple or higher multi-faced non-mobile billboards/ electronic displays possessor for a firewall-mounted NMB/ electronic display, only a painted display may
shall not be allowed as these are already configured as buildings or solid structures be placed on the firewall, still subject to the prior consent of the affected property’s
that unnecessarily block natural light and ventilation and pose public safety problems. property owner or lawful possessor and to the prior permission of the barangay
NMBs/ electronic displays shall not be placed within or above any portion of a RROW concerned or the LGU. Neither a NMB/ electronic display mounted on the firewall nor
or ROW, particularly at the sides, below or on top of the exterior of public structures a display painted on the firewall shall be allowed if there is lack of consent or official
such as elevated expressways and transit alignments/ stations/ terminals and the like refusal/ objection by the affected property’s owner or lawful possessor.
which occupy the RROW, including the airspace/ air rights above such RROWs/ No NMB/ electronic display shall be erected or maintained upon or above the roof of
ROWs, but may be allowed at the enclosed sides of loading platforms and pedestrian any building/ structure if the same is in violation of the NBCP and its IRR, applicable
access-ways at such public structures. executive issuances or more stringent laws.
No NMB/ electronic display shall be constructed on a property where the same can
E.6.1.2 Position within Private Property or Public Property Outside RROWs/ ROWs/ Legal Easements
within the LGU (including those mounted on building facades and firewalls) obscure or shade the prescribed openings, windows or doors of adjacent buildings/
structures. NMBs/ electronic display shall not be made of reflective material that can
All NMBs/ electronic displays shall be erected in conformity with the front, side redirect unwanted light towards adjacent buildings/ structures, particularly at
and rear setback and yard requirements prescribed in the latest pertinent executive residential structures at night time.
issuance pertaining to and/or the latest IRR of the National Building Code of the
Philippines (NBCP), with the DPWH NBCDO Memorandum Circular No. 1, series of E.6.1.3 NMB/ Electronic Display Spacing and Density
2008 and in the applicable LGU zoning regulations. In case of conflict between such
laws/ regulations, the provisions of the NBCP shall generally prevail. However, if the Independent structures for NMBs/ electronic displays located upon or oriented
provisions under the pertinent LGU ordinance are more stringent than the NBCP, then towards traffic traveling upon the same side of a national RROW/ street at all its
such LGU ordinance shall prevail. development levels at grade and above grade, with maximum permitted BEDU shall be
spaced no less than five hundred meters (500.0 m) apart in the case of building
NMBs/ electronic signs mounted on facades of buildings along a national RROW/
exterior wall-mounted BEDU and no less than two hundred and fifty meters (250.0 m)
street shall be sized in accordance with the zoning classification and in proportion to
apart in the case of freestanding or self-mounted BEDU. For narrower national
the applicable setbacks, building height limit (BHL), the permissible proportions of
RROWs, the spacing may be between a minimum of two hundred and fifty meters to a
openings/ fenestrations for mandated natural light and ventilation, outermost face of
maximum of five hundred meters (min. 250.0 m – max. 500.0 m) depending on the
buildings/ billboards (OFBs) and outermost limits of building projections (OLBP) and
allowed vehicle speeds on the RROW as determined by the DPWH. These foregoing
related provisions under the NBCP as well as the various safety provisions under the
distances shall be measured along a straight line between the two (2.0) nearest points
FCP, duly determined by a registered and licensed architect (RLA). NMBs/ electronic
of the NMBs/ electronic displays. The minimum spacing required shall not apply to
signs mounted on facades of buildings and in between independent structures for
two (2.0) displays viewed from different directions but which share a common
NMBs along a national RROW/ street/ other ROW shall be similarly restricted as
support structure.
NMBs on independent structures, based on applicable development controls found in
the NBCP and/or specific executive issuances of the DPWH Secretary, such as but not Regardless of national RROW/ other ROW widths, NMBs/ electronic displays shall not
limited to NBCDO Memorandum Circular No. 1, Series of 2008, in his capacity as the be located within a one hundred meter (100.0 m) radius (radial distance) of another
National Building Official (NBO). NMB/ electronic display even if the two (2.0) NMB s/ electronic displays are on
No part of a NMB/ electronic display shall be placed on, in or over any private/ public different RROWs/ streets/ other ROWs.
property without the written consent of the property owner or lawful possessor and Building-mounted NMBs/ electronic displays located upon or oriented towards
without the permit of the barangay concerned or the LGU. This particularly applies to traffic traveling upon the same side of a national or LGU RROW/ street, with maximum
NMBs/ electronic displays and their outdoor lighting provisions, as applicable, permitted BEDU shall be spaced on a case-to-case basis as determined through the
mounted on firewalls and deliberately intruding into the air rights of adjoining proper application of development controls mandated under the NBCP (minimum
E-66
E-65
standards) and/or under the pertinent LGU ordinance (with standards more stringent satisfaction of the applicable setback, yard and building height limit (BHL), maximum
than that of the NBCP), duly prepared by a registered and licensed architect (RLA). architectural projection/ OLBP and/or outermost face of building/ billboard (OFB)
requirements of the NBCP and its 2004 and/or latest IRR and the pertinent LGU
E.6.1.4 Display Content and Lighting for NMBs/ Electronic Displays Zoning Ordinance (ZO).
For Zone 2 (Along Secondary RROWs/ ROWs)
All display content for NMBs/ electronic displays and temporary signs must conform
to the standards set by the Advertising Board of the Philippines (a self-regulatory A NMB/ BEDU shall have a surface or display area of between seven point five (7.5)
agency) and/or the government agency tasked or to be tasked with reviewing and sqm minimum and thirty (30.0) sqm maximum for existing/ proposed national urban
approving the display. RROWs/ ROWs.
All display content exhibited in a foreign language shall similarly exhibit the The maximum dimension of any one (1.0) side of a maximum BEDU shall be one point
corresponding translation in either English or the local dialect/s. five meters (1.5 m), subject to compliance with the applicable NMB height limitation
under these DGDG.
No NMB/ electronic display with any commercial content shall be permitted within all
properties zoned as residential nor within residential subdivisions. In the case of a No freestanding NMB/ electronic display shall exceed twenty five (25.0 m) in height,
new residential subdivision, only commercial NMBs/ electronic displays containing measured from the average elevation of the surface of the natural ground or existing
information on the residential subdivision shall be allowed. sidewalk or carriageway level (whichever is higher) up to the highest point of the
NMB or any of its components. This maximum height is contingent on the prior
No NMB/ electronic display with any commercial content shall be erected within a satisfaction of the applicable setback, yard and BHL, maximum architectural
two hundred meter (200.0 m) distance of the nearest property line of declared
projection/ OLBP and/or OFB requirements of the NBCP and its 2004 and/or latest
historic or cultural sites or of institutional sites such as schools, churches, hospitals, IRR and the LGU ZO.
government buildings, public parks/ playgrounds/ recreation areas, convention
centers, cemeteries or any other area which must be free of NMBs/ electronic displays
with commercial content. E.6.1.6 Placement of Billboards/ Electronic Displays with respect to Emergency Exits, Doors and
Windows.
Lighting: NMBs shall be illuminated only by luminaries exuding a fixed/ non-
oscillating/ non-fluctuating amount of light that shall not produce glare or unwanted No NMB/ electronic display shall be erected in such a manner that any portion of its
reflectance when directed at a display. display or supports will interfere in any way with the free use or operation of any fire
escape, emergency exit, door, window, standpipe and the like. A NMB/ electronic
display shall not be erected, constructed and maintained so as to obstruct any
E.6.1.5 Allowable Dimensions for Non-Mobile Billboard Displays/ Electronic Displays
emergency exit or other openings or to prevent free passage from one part of a roof to
All NMBs/ electronic displays shall be erected in conformity with the building any part thereof. A NMB/ electronic display in any form or shape shall not in any
manner be attached to a fire escape or be so placed as to interfere with an opening
height limits (BHL, also applicable as Billboard Height Limits), the outermost limits on
required for introducing natural light and ventilation into a building/ structure. This
building projections (OLBP) and the outermost face of buildings (OFB, also applicable
provision shall particularly apply to all tall buildings.
as outermost face of billboards), duly prescribed in the 2004 and/or latest IRR of the
NBCP and in the applicable LGU Zoning Ordinance (ZO) and related development- NMBs/ electronic displays shall also not be used to wrap buildings to deprive
oriented national and local laws and regulations. occupants natural light, ventilation and view. This particularly applies to all types of
residential and office buildings as well as above-grade parking buildings, where
Allowable variations from the standard measurements per Zone shall generally
exhaust venting shall be severely compromised by such non-mobile billboards/
conform with the following:
electronic displays, even if perforations are introduced.
For Zone 1 [Along Major RROWs/ ROWs, at Planned Units Developments (PUDs) and
at Special Development Zones/ SDZs]
E.6.1.7 Responsible State-regulated Professionals for NMBs/ Electronic Displays
A NMB/ BEDU shall have a surface or display area of between thirty (30.0) sqm
minimum and two hundred twenty five (225.0) sqm maximum for existing/ proposed As of the effective date of this Ordinance, the permit documents for the erection and
national urban RROWs/ ROWs. maintenance of all NMBs/ Electronic Displays under these DGDG shall be as follows:
The maximum dimension of any one (1.0) side of a maximum BEDU shall be seven  Registered and licensed Architect (RLAr) for the Architectural and Urban Design
point five meters (7.5 m), subject to compliance with the applicable NMB height Analyses;
limitation under these DGDG.  Registered and licensed Environmental Planner (RLEnP) for the Environmental
No freestanding NMB/ electronic display shall exceed twenty five meters (25.0 m) in Analyses;
height, measured from the average elevation of the surface of the natural ground or  Registered and licensed Civil Engineer (RLCE) with specialization in structural
existing sidewalk or carriageway level (whichever is higher) up to the highest point of design for the Structural Design and Analyses;
the NMB or any of its components. This maximum height is contingent on the prior
E-68
E-67
 Registered and licensed Professional Electrical Engineer (PEE) for the Electrical wall entrance or at perimeter wall, gate or fence. The allowed maximum height of each
Design and Analyses for Non-Mobile Billboards; and letter is 1.0 m.
 Registered and licensed Professional Communications Engineer (PCE) for the Building identification sign and/or logo sign (canopy sign) shall be allowed at
Electronic Design and Analyses for Electronic Displays. entrance canopy. The allowed maximum height of each letter is 0.6 m.
Canopy signs: shall be allowed a minimum height from bottom of the sign to the
E.6.1.8 General Regulations for Signages finished surface of the sidewalk at 2.2 m and a maximum height from top of wall sign
to sidewalk surface level of 4.0 m. For signage illumination, maximum areas, and
Temporary Signs: Temporary signs shall be limited to hangings such as buntings, locations, refer to the allowed use and/or specific regulations by zone hereafter.
banners and posters mounted on existing posts, fences or buildings – except in any
part of the RROWs, shall have a life of thirty (30) calendar days, renewable, with the Events signs: shall be allowed a minimum height from the bottom of sign to sidewalk
date of expiry printed on the sign, which shall be removed at owner’s expense or if level of 2.2 mts. and maximum height from top of sign to finished surface of the
removed by the LGU, removal costs shall be charged accordingly to the signage owner; sidewalk at 4.0 m, where the sign shall be located at the building façade near the
signs on construction fences shall be allowed only for the duration of the construction entrance. For signage illumination and maximum areas, refer to the allowed use
work, and should be maintained at original quality at all times; events signs are and/or specific regulations.
considered temporary signs. Free-standing ground signs (e.g. building directory): shall not be higher than 1.8
Dimensions of signage and illumination: Signage dimensions shall range from a m, shall have a minimum letter height of 0.2 m, and shall be located within the
minimum of 0.045 sqm for address and occupant signs to a maximum of 6.0 sqm for property line. If the 2nd floor finished floor line (FFLL) is less than 6.0 m from the
event signs as well as building directory signs. The most common sign, the wall sign, finished sidewalk level, the minimum height shall be set at 3.0 m from finished
shall range from 1.0 sqm to 3.0 sqm. sidewalk level to the bottom of sign while the maximum height shall be 6.0 m from
finished sidewalk level to the top of sign. If 2nd floor FFL is more than 6.0 m from
Other building signs: Certain uses shall be allowed special signs. Places that serve as
finished sidewalk level, the top of sign should not extend beyond 2 nd floor level. Signs
congregation areas for large crowds (e.g. places of worship; sports stadiums, are allowed up to 75% of width of frontage of rented space but shall not exceed 1.0 m
racetracks, etc.) shall be allowed event signs to announce details of the occasion.
high or 6.0 m wide, and the maximum projection allowed shall only be at 0.2 m from
Structures that have multiple tenants shall be allowed a building directory sign.
property line.
Projecting signs shall be allowed for fire/ security stations and general/ specialized
hospitals, medical centers. Petrol identification signs (pole signs) shall be specific to Monument signs: shall be allowed a maximum area of 3.0 sqm including the base
petrol filling kiosks/ service stations. material which is attached to the ground and shall be located at the entrance area,
except for petrol filling kiosks/ service stations. For monument signs located at petrol
For certain types of uses, signage regulations shall be consistent no matter the zone filling kiosks/ service stations, the signs shall be allowed a maximum area of 2.0 sqm
these are located in. These allowed uses include fire/ security stations; general/
and shall be mounted on the ground.
specialized hospitals, medical centers; hotels; multi-family dwellings; parking
structures; parks/ playgrounds/ gardens; petrol filling kiosks/ service centers; Petrol identification signs (pole signs): shall be illuminated, shall have a maximum
residential inns, condominiums/ condotels/ apartments; single-detached dwellings; area of 2.0 sqm and shall have a minimum height of 3.0 m up to a maximum of 5.0 m
supermarkets/ food stores; transit stations/ terminal; wet/ dry markets; and zoos, from the finished sidewalk level.
other nature centers. Projecting signs: shall be illuminated, shall have a maximum area of 1.0 sqm with a
minimum height from bottom of sign to finished sidewalk level of 2.2 m and a
Detailed Signage Regulations maximum height from top of wall sign to finished sidewalk level of 4.0 m, and be
Address & occupant signs: for buildings or structures shall be allowed a maximum attached perpendicular to the building façade near the entrance. The projecting sign
area of 0.045 sqm (0.15 m x 0.3 m) and a height of between 1.2 - 1.6 m from sidewalk shall not obstruct the sidewalk.
level, except for fire stations. For fire/ security stations, there shall be no limit to the Wall signs: shall be allowed a minimum height from bottom of the sign to finished
dimensions for the maximum area. For signage locations and illumination, the allowed sidewalk level of 2.2 m and a maximum height from top of wall sign to finished
use and/or specific regulations shall be as discussed hereafter. sidewalk level of 4.0 m with the exception of parking structures, transit stations/
Building identification signs and/or logo signs: Building identification sign and/or terminals and petrol filling kiosks/ service stations. For parking structures and transit
logo sign (halo-lighted, internally lighted or externally lighted) and building stations/ terminals, wall signs shall be allowed a minimum height of 2.4 m measured
identification sign and/or logo sign (at top of building) shall be allowed a maximum from the bottom of sign to crown of RROW carriageway. For petrol filling kiosks/
area of 3.0 sqm, a height of not more than 4.0 m or not more than 4% of building service stations, the wall sign shall be at the edge of the roof/ parapet. For signage
height, whichever is smaller, and be located near the top of building. illumination, maximum areas and similar locations, refer to the allowed use and/or
specific regulations by zone as shown hereafter.
Building identification sign and/or logo sign, address sign (illuminated) shall be
allowed a maximum area of 3.0 sqm, a minimum height of 2.2 m and a maximum
height of 4.0 m, and shall be located at the ground floor of building façade near the
E-70
E-69
E.6.1.9 Official Signs Exempted E.6.1.12 Sustainability of NMBs/ Electronic Displays
The following official signs are exempt from the restrictions of this Ordinance that All of the construction and finishing materials, related to the erection, operation and
may also apply to signs: maintenance of NMBs/ BEDUs, particularly including the mode of disposal, reuse,
recycling, etc. of such materials such as used paints, stickers, tarpaulin, plastics,
 Official highway route number signs, street name signs, directional, or other
metals, glass, expended luminaires, and the like, shall conform with the pertinent
official government signs;
environmental laws and regulations, including those related to professional practices
 Directional, information or public service signs, such as those advertising in the fields of environmental planning, environmental investigation and
availability of restrooms, telephone or similar public conveniences; environmental design (in which architecture and urban design are included), as well
 Official traffic signs, signals, devices and the like; and as accepted and/or prescribed international sustainability practices such as
international agreements and protocols in which the Republic of the Philippines is a
 Official signs for memorial or historical places. signatory.
Of particular importance are the determination of embodied energy levels in such
E.6.1.10 Possible Exemption for Non-Mobile Billboards/ Electronic Displays Only Above the Sidewalk materials, which is part of the carbon (footprint) reduction effort worldwide. The
Portion of the RROW
embodied energy used in the sourcing, manufacture, transportation/ handling/
Satisfaction of the following conditions, whereby the permitted non-mobile billboard/ delivery, installation, use and operation/ maintenance of such materials must require
electronic display is made to effectively contribute to positive urban design/ the least consumption and production of carbon and must thereby promote health and
redevelopment, may allow the placement or erection of non-mobile billboards/ general wellbeing (including nuisance avoidance) of all affected by the introduction of
electronic displays but only above the sidewalk portion of the RROW: the pertinent non-mobile billboard/ BEDU.
 If the NMB/ electronic display and its cantilevered support structure is used to
effectively hold in place and disguise/ conceal overhead electrical, telephone,
cable TV and similar utility lines that hover above the sidewalk and that may pose
possible danger to pedestrians; provided that such utility lines are also effectively
concealed from the view of persons within a property/ building or structure
without unduly compromising considerations of natural light and ventilation.
 If the NMB/ electronic display and its cantilevered support structure is also used
to effectively provide a shelter from the elements for the pedestrians passing
underneath; as such, the non-mobile billboard serves as a component of a virtual
covered sidewalk system.
 If the NMB/ electronic display to cover the utility lines is officially permitted by
the DPWH with the MMDA and/or the DILG.
 If the allowed NMB/ electronic display does not exceed 1.2 meters in height and
provides a clear vertical distance of at least 4.0 meters for pedestrians passing
underneath.
E.6.1.11 State Regulation of NMB/ Electronic Display Content
Since the content of NMBs/ electronic displays have an undeniable effect on its
viewers, particularly the young, the State must perforce regulate such NMB/
electronic billboard content such that public morals are preserved in general and such
that undue attacks on beliefs, customs and traditions, lawful practices and on the
exploited and/or marginalized sectors of society are likewise prevented, with the
proper presentation of the content and of the display’s context without directly
venturing into censorship.
Only limited self-regulation among industry players may be allowed, such that the
LGU shall continue to exercise overall supervision on all matters pertaining to
regulation of NMBs/ electronic displays within its jurisdiction. In such a manner,
liabilities and violations can be clearly established by the LGU and subsequently
addressed by the proper authorities.
E-72
E-71
Current Interpretations of Rule XII of P.D. No. 1096 (1977 NBCP)
This Annex graphically illustrates interpretations of the prescribed compliances for buildings under
Rule XII of the 2004 Revised IRR of P.D. No. 1096 (the 1977 National Building Code of the
Philippines/ NBCP) and is intended for ready reference by physical planners, architects, designers,
and the competent reviewing authorities authorized to review/ process and approve building plans
under P.D. No. 1096.
Annex F Current Interpretations of Rule XII of

P.D. No. 1096 (1977 NBCP)
F-1
F-2
F-3
F-4
F-5
F-6
F-7
F-8
F-9
F-10
F-11
F-12
F-13
F-14
F-15
F-16 F-17
F-18 F-19
F-20 F-21
Annex G Generic Documents Guide for a Large

National Government Office Building
Project
F-22
ELEVATION
Generic DOCUMENTS GUIDE for a A-16 LONGITUDINAL
SECTION
LARGE NATIONAL GOVERNMENT OFFICE Building Project A-17 CROSS SECTION
BETWEEN GRIDS 2&3
(Approx. 1.7 hectares Total Lot Area/ TLA, approx. 60,000 sqm Total Gross Floor Area/ TGFA, A-18 CROSS SECTION
Large Footprint, Medium-rise with Deck Roof Level and No Basement Level) BETWEEN GRIDS 6&7
A-19 CROSS SECTION
Generic Plan and Design Drawing Schedule A-20
BETWEEN GRIDS 8&9
PARTIAL SECTION
at Approximately 275 A0 (i.e. about 30” x 40”) Size Sheets BETWEEN GRIDS 2&3
CURTAIN WALL
(FRONT)
Very Important Note: In the case of repair, renovation, rehabilitation, retrofit, PARTIAL SECTION
BETWEEN GRIDS 3&4
expansion, heritage conservation, fit-out, and similar works/ projects for buildings/ REAR WALL
structures, the AS-BUILT PLANS AND DESIGNS of such buildings/ structures, A-21 PARTIAL SECTION
BETWEEN GRIDS 6&7
together with the respective SCOPE OF WORKS BRIEF i.e. an image map CURTAIN WALL
showing the plans, sections, elevations, etc. with call-outs of the intended (FRONT)
PARTIAL SECTION
construction works, MUST be provided by the Designer and/or Project Proponent BETWEEN GRIDS 8&9
(FRONT)
before the rest of the Plans/ Designs/ Documents listed hereafter. A-22 PARTIAL PLAN: DETAIL SECTION
SHOWING CONC. CONCRETE LEDGE
A. Design B. Sheet Code C. A0 Sheet Content LEDGES (REAR)
Discipline (and Number)
A-23 PARTIAL PLAN: DETAIL SECTION:
1. Primary 2. Secondary 3. Secondary/ CANOPY @7TH FLOOR CONCRETE LEDGE
Drawing/s Drawing/s and/or Other LEVEL (LEFT & RIGHT SIDE)
Primary Information A-24 PARTIAL PLAN: SPOT DETAIL
Information CONCRETE CANOPY
1. ARCHITECTURAL (A) A-1 PERSPECTIVES VICINITY MAP; TABLE OF @7TH FLOOR LEVEL
Sheets LOCATION PLAN CONTENTS A-25 CANOPY @ SEVENTH
Note: By law (R.A. No. A-2 SITE DEVELOPMENT FLOOR DETAILED
PLAN SECTION
9266), only registered and
licensed architects/ RLAs A-26 CROWN & PORTHOLE PARAPET DETAILS
DETAILS
shall prepare, sign and seal
A-27 TOWER DETAILS ISOMETRIC DRAWING
all professional outputs for
A-28 REFLECTED CEILING LEGEND CALLOUTS
buildings i.e. those that are PLAN LOWER GROUND LIGHTING FIXTURE CEILING FIN.
classified as Architectural A-29 REFLECTED CEILING LEGEND CALLOUTS
Documents PLAN UPPER GROUND LIGHTING FIXTURE CEILING FIN.
A-3 LOWER GROUND A-30 REFLECTED CEILING LEGEND CALLOUTS
FLOOR PLAN PLAN SECOND FLOOR LIGHTING FIXTURE CEILING FIN.
A-4 UPPER GROUND A-31 REFLECTED CEILING LEGEND CALLOUTS
FLOOR PLAN PLAN THIRD FLOOR LIGHTING FIXTURE CEILING FIN.
A-5 SECOND FLOOR PLAN A-32 REFLECTED CEILING LEGEND CALLOUTS
A-6 THIRD FLOOR PLAN PLAN FOURTH FLOOR LIGHTING FIXTURE CEILING FIN.
A-7 FOURTH FLOOR PLAN A-33 REFLECTED CEILING LEGEND CALLOUTS
A-8 FIFTH FLOOR PLAN PLAN FIFTH FLOOR LIGHTING FIXTURE CEILING FIN.
A-9 SIXTH FLOOR PLAN A-34 REFLECTED CEILING LEGEND CALLOUTS
PLAN SIXTH FLOOR LIGHTING FIXTURE CEILING FIN.
A-10 SEVENTH FLOOR
PLAN A-35 REFLECTED CEILING LEGEND CALLOUTS
PLAN SEVENTH LIGHTING FIXTURE CEILING FIN.
A-11 ROOF DECK PLAN
FLOOR
A-12 FRONT ELEVATION
A-36 LIGHTING PLAN-DECK LEGEND CALLOUTS
A-13 LEFT-SIDE ELEVATION AND MACH. ROOM LIGHTING FIXTURE CEILING FIN.
A-14 REAR ELEVATION A-37 SCHEDULE OF DOORS DOOR FIN. &
A-15 RIGHT-SIDE ACCESSORIES
G-1 G-2
A-38 SCHEDULE OF WINDOW FIN. & INTERIORS (AI)* LOWER GROUND WALL FIN.
WINDOWS, TAGS AND ACCESSORIES Sheets
COUNT Note: By law (R.A. No. AI-2 PARTITION PLAN- LEGEND
A-39 FIXED/SLIDING CALLOUTS & OUTLINE 9266), only registered and UPPER GROUND WALL FIN.
WINDOW DETAIL SPECIFICATIONS
licensed architects/ RLAs
A-40 FIXED/SLIDING CALLOUTS & OUTLINE
WINDOW DETAILS SPECIFICATIONS
A-41 CURTAIN WALL CALLOUTS & OUTLINE all professional outputs for
DETAILS SPECIFICATIONS buildings i.e. those that are
A-42 DOOR TAGS AND DOOR FIN. & classified as Architectural
COUNT ACCESSORIES Interior (AI) Documents
A-43 FLOOR PATTERN- LEGEND AI-3 PARTITION PLAN- LEGEND
ROOF DECK FLOOR FIN. SECOND FLOOR WALL FIN.
A-44 PLAN MAINSTAIRS: LG- ISOMETRIC VIEW AI-4 PARTITION PLAN LEGEND
UG THIRD FLOOR WALL FIN.
PLAN MAINSTAIRS: AI-5 PARTITION PLAN LEGEND
UG-7TH FLOOR FOURTH FLOOR WALL FIN.
PLAN MAINSTAIRS: 7TH AI-6 PARTITION PLAN LEGEND
FLOOR-DECK LEVEL FIFTH FLOOR WALL FIN.
A-45 MAIN STAIRS SECTION DETAIL SECTION AI-7 PARTITION PLAN LEGEND
PARTIAL SECTION: 5TH- SPOT DETAIL SIXTH FLOOR WALL FIN.
ROOD DECK LEVEL NOSING DETAIL AI-8 PARTITION PLAN LEGEND
PARTIAL SECTION: SEVENTH FLOOR WALL FIN.
TYP. FLOORS AI-9 FLOOR PATTERN- LEGEND CALLOUTS
A-46 FIRE EXIT DETAILS SPOT DETAILS LOWER GROUND FLOOR FIN. OTHER FIN.
A-47 ENTRANCE STAIR CALLOUTS AI-10 FLOOR PATTERN- LEGEND
DETAIL FINISHES & OUTLINE UPPER GROUND FLOOR FIN.
DISABLED RAMP SPECIFICATIONS AI-11 FLOOR PATTERN- LEGEND
DETAILS SECOND FLOOR FLOOR FIN.
A-48 CANOPY DETAILS CALLOUTS AI-12 FLOOR PATTERN- LEGEND
ENTRANCE STAIR FINISHES & OUTLINE THIRD FLOOR FLOOR FIN.
DETAILS SPECIFICATIONS AI-13 FLOOR PATTERN- LEGEND
A-48 KITCHEN EQUIPMENT OUTLINE NOTES FOURTH FLOOR FLOOR FIN.
DETAILS SPECIFICATIONS AI-14 FLOOR PATTERN- LEGEND
AI-49 SCHEDULE OF OUTLINE NOTES FIFTH FLOOR FLOOR FIN.
EXTERIOR PAINTING SPECIFICATIONS AI-15 FLOOR PATTERN- LEGEND
WORKS SIXTH FLOOR FLOOR FIN.
AI-50 SCHEDULE OF OUTLINE NOTES AI-16 FLOOR PATTERN- LEGEND
EXTERIOR SPECIFICATIONS SEVENTH FLOOR FLOOR FIN.
ARCHITECTURAL AI-17 SCHEDULE OF OUTLINE NOTES
METALWORK FINISHES FOR SPECIFICATIONS
AI-51 SCHEDULE OF OUTLINE NOTES ARCHITECTURAL
MURALS AND PUBLIC SPECIFICATIONS INTERIOR WORKS
ART/ EXTERIOR AI-18 SCHEDULE OF OUTLINE NOTES
SCULPTURE FINISHES FOR SPECIFICATIONS
AI-52 SCHEDULE OF OUTLINE NOTES ARCHITECTURAL
OUTDOOR TILEWORK, SPECIFICATIONS INTERIOR WORKS
TAGS AND COUNT AI-19 SCHEDULE OF OUTLINE NOTES
AI-53 PLANS, DRAWINGS, OUTLINE NOTES FINISHES FOR SPECIFICATIONS
DETAILS AND SPECIFICATIONS ARCHITECTURAL
SCHEDULE OF INTERIOR WORKS
ARCHITECTURAL AI-20 SCHEDULE OF FINISH OUTLINE NOTES
COMPLIANCES WITH FOR ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS
THE ACCESSIBILITY INTERIOR WORKS
LAW AI-21 TYPICAL HALLWAY CALLOUTS
DETAILS SPECIFICATIONS
SIXTH FLOOR
HALLWAY DETAIL
AI-22 PARTIAL PLAN: MAIN CALLOUTS
2. ARCHITECTURAL AI-1 PARTITION PLAN- LEGEND
G-3 G-4
LOBBY DETAILED FINISHES & & DETAILS

ELEVATION SPECIFICATIONS AI-37 KITCHEN EQUIPMENT CALLOUTS
AI-23 DETAILED ELEVATION: SPOT DETAIL: COLUMN LAYOUT FINISHES & OUTLINE
MAIN LOBBY CLADDING SPECIFICATIONS,
PLAN: COLUMN CALLOUTS KITCHEN EQUIPMENT
CLADDING FINISHES & OUTLINE LIST
SECTION: COLUMN SPECIFICATIONS AI-38 LOWER GROUND
CLADDING FURNITURE LAYOUT,
SECTION: ACCENT TAGS & COUNT
WALL AI-39 UPPER GROUND
AI-24 DETAIL SECTION: SPOT DETAIL: FLOOR FURNITURE
RAILING HANDRAIL LAYOUT, TAGS &
DETAIL ELEVATION: SECTION: ALUMINUM COUNT
RAILING SHEET AI-40 SECOND FLOOR
PARTIAL ELEVATION: FURNITURE LAYOUT,
RAILING @ MAIN TAGS & COUNT
LOBBY AI-41 THIRD FLOOR
AI-25 WALL DETAIL MOULDING DETAILS FURNITURE LAYOUT,
SECTIONS SPOT DETAILS TAGS & COUNT
AI-26 CEILING DETAILS CALLOUTS AI-42 FOURTH FLOOR
FINISHES & OUTLINE FURNITURE LAYOUT,
SPECIFICATIONS TAGS & COUNT
AI-27 TOILET DETAILS CALLOUTS AI-43 FIFTH FLOOR
-LOWER GROUND FINISHES & OUTLINE FURNITURE LAYOUT,
FLOOR SPECIFICATIONS TAGS & COUNT
-UPPER GROUND AI-44 SIXTH FLOOR
FLOOR FURNITURE LAYOUT,
-SECOND FLOOR TAGS & COUNT
A-28 TOILET DETAILS CALLOUTS AI-45 SEVENTH FLOOR
-THIRD FLOOR FINISHES & OUTLINE FURNITURE LAYOUT,
-FOURTH FLOOR SPECIFICATIONS TAGS & COUNT
AI-29 TOILET DETAILS CALLOUTS AI-46 -SIGNAGE AND OUTLINE NOTES
-FIFTH FLOOR FINISHES & OUTLINE GRAPHICS DESIGN SPECIFICATIONS
-SIXTH FLOOR SPECIFICATIONS DETAIL
AI-30 PANTRY DETAILS CALLOUTS AI-47 -SIGNAGE AND OUTLINE NOTES
-UPPER GROUND FINISHES & OUTLINE GRAPHICS DESIGN SPECIFICATIONS
FLOOR SPECIFICATIONS PLANS, TAG AND
AI-31 PANTRY DETAILS CALLOUTS COUNT
-SECOND FLOOR FINISHES & OUTLINE AI-48 SCHEDULE OF OUTLINE NOTES
SPECIFICATIONS HARDWARE AND SPECIFICATIONS
A1-32 PANTRY DETAILS CALLOUTS COUNT
-THIRD FLOOR & FINISHES & OUTLINE AI-49 SCHEDULE OF OUTLINE NOTES
FOURTH FLOOR SPECIFICATIONS FIXTURES, TAG AND SPECIFICATIONS
AI-33 PANTRY DETAILS CALLOUTS COUNT
-FIFTH FLOOR FINISHES & OUTLINE AI-50 SCHEDULE OF OUTLINE NOTES
SPECIFICATIONS FURNISHINGS, TAG SPECIFICATIONS
AI-34 PANTRY DETAILS CALLOUTS AND COUNT
-SIXTH FLOOR FINISHES & OUTLINE AI-51 SCHEDULE OF STAIRS, OUTLINE NOTES
SPECIFICATIONS ESCALATORS AND SPECIFICATIONS
AI-35 PANTRY DETAILS CALLOUTS ELEVATORS
-SEVENTH FLOOR FINISHES & OUTLINE AI-52 SCHEDULE OF SMALL OUTLINE NOTES
SPECIFICATIONS OFFICE EQUIPMENT, SPECIFICATIONS
AI-36 PLAN: GM BACKWALL CALLOUTS TAG AND COUNT
& BACK CABINET FINISHES & OUTLINE AI-53 SCHEDULE OF OUTLINE NOTES
ELEVATIONS, SPECIFICATIONS GRAPHICS, SIGNAGES SPECIFICATIONS
SECTIONS & DETAILS AND WAYFINDING
PARTIAL PLAN: DEVICES
GM/CONF. RM, AI-54 SCHEDULE OF OUTLINE NOTES
DIVIDER CAB. FURNITURE AND SPECIFICATIONS
ELEVATION, SECTIONS
G-5 G-6
MOVABLE ITEMS DESIGN & DETAILS SPECIFICATIONS

AI-55 SCHEDULE OF OUTLINE NOTES ID - 4 - CUSTOM FURNITURE OUTLINE NOTES
FURNITURE AND SPECIFICATIONS DESIGN & DETAILS SPECIFICATIONS
MOVABLE ITEMS ID - 5 - CUSTOM FURNITURE OUTLINE NOTES
AI-56 SCHEDULE OF OUTLINE NOTES DESIGN & DETAILS SPECIFICATIONS
FURNITURE AND SPECIFICATIONS ID - 6 - CUSTOM FURNITURE OUTLINE NOTES
MOVABLE ITEMS DESIGN & DETAILS SPECIFICATIONS
AI-57 SCHEDULE OF OUTLINE NOTES ID - 7 SCHEDULE OF OUTLINE NOTES
FURNITURE AND SPECIFICATIONS FURNITURE AND SPECIFICATIONS
MOVABLE ITEMS MOVABLE ITEMS
AI-58 SCHEDULE OF OUTLINE NOTES ID - 8 SCHEDULE OF OUTLINE NOTES
MILLWORK ITEMS SPECIFICATIONS DRAPES, CURTAINS, SPECIFICATIONS
AI-59 SCHEDULE OF OUTLINE NOTES CUSHIONS, WINDOW
INTERIOR PAINTING SPECIFICATIONS ACCESSORIES, ETC.
WORKS AND ATTENDANT
AI-60 SCHEDULE OF OUTLINE NOTES HARDWARE ITEMS
INTERIOR SPECIFICATIONS ID - 9 SCHEDULE OF DÉCOR OUTLINE NOTES
ARCHITECTURAL ITEMS, PAINTINGS SPECIFICATIONS
METALWORK AND INTERIOR
AI-61 SCHEDULE OF OUTLINE NOTES SCULPTURE
INDOOR TILEWORK, SPECIFICATIONS
TAGS AND COUNT 4. LANDSCAPE*** LA - 1 -PLANTING PLAN & CALLOUTS, OUTLINE GENERAL NOTES
AI-62 SCHEDULE OF TOILET OUTLINE NOTES ARCHITECTURAL (LA) GENERAL NOTES SPECIFICATIONS
FIXTURES AND SPECIFICATIONS Sheets
ACCESSORIES
Note: By law (R.A. No. LA - 2 -PLANT LIST & OUTLINE CONSOLIDATED
AI-63 SCHEDULE OF OUTLINE NOTES DETAILS SPECIFICATIONS AND PLANT LIST
ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS 9053), only registered and
licensed landscape CALLOUTS
LIGHTING FIXTURES
(INCLUDING architects/ RLLAs shall
MONUMENTAL prepare, sign and seal all
LIGHTING) AND professional outputs for
ACCESSOTIES buildings i.e. those that are
AI-64 SCHEDULE OF OUTLINE NOTES classified as Landscape
INDOOR PLANTS AND SPECIFICATIONS Architectural (LA)
HOLDERS Documents
AI-65 PARKING AND
LA - 3 SOFTSCAPING PLAN, CALLOUTS, OUTLINE
TRAFFIC PLAN DESIGN AND DETAILS SPECIFICATIONS
AI-66 PLANS, DRAWINGS, OUTLINE NOTES
LA - 4 HARDSCAPING PLAN, OUTLINE
DETAILS AND SPECIFICATIONS DESIGN AND DETAILS SPECIFICATIONS AND
SCHEDULE OF CALLOUTS
ARCHITECTURAL
LA - 5 LANDSCAPING OUTLINE
INTERIOR LIGHTING AND SPECIFICATIONS AND
COMPLIANCES WITH SIGNAGE PLAN, CALLOUTS
THE ACCESSIBILITY DESIGN AND DETAILS
LAW
5. SITE DEVELOPMENT SDP-1 SITE DEVELOMENT
3. INTERIOR DESIGN ID - 1 -SYSTEMS FURNITURE OUTLINE NOTES PLAN
DESIGN & DETAILS SPECIFICATIONS PLAN (SDP) Sheets
(ID)** Sheets
Note: By law (R.A. No. SDP-2 MAIN FENCE DETAILS ISOMETRIC DETAILS
Note: By law (R.A. No. ID - 2 -SYSTEMS FURNITURE OUTLINE NOTES
DESIGN & DETAILS SPECIFICATIONS 9266), only registered and
licensed architects/ RLAs
licensed interior
designers/ RLIDs shall
all professional outputs for
prepare, sign and seal all
buildings and their grounds
professional outputs for
i.e. those that are classified
buildings i.e. those that are
as Site Development Plan
classified as Interior
(SDP) Documents
Design (ID) Documents
SDP-3 PLAN: GUARD’S GUARD’S OUTPOST
ID - 3 -SYSTEMS FURNITURE OUTLINE NOTES OUTPOST -WINDOW SCHEDULE
G-7 G-8
-ROOF DECK PLAN -PARAPET DETAIL SLABS, NOTES ON

-FRONT ELEVATION SECTION STRUCTURAL STEEL,
-LEFT ELEVATION SECURITY BOOTH NOTES ON COLUMNS &
-REAR ELEVATION -WINDOW SCHEDULE DESIGN CRITERIA
-RIGHT ELEVATION -PARAPET DETAIL Note: By law (R.A. No. S-2 FOUNDATION/ CALLOUTS & OUTLINE
-CROSS SECTION 544, as amended by R.A. COLUMN KEY PLAN SPECIFICATIONS
-LONGITUDINAL No. 1582), only registered
SECTION
and licensed civil
PLAN: SECURITY
BOOTH
engineers/ RLCEs shall
-FRONT ELEVATION prepare, sign and seal all
-LEFT ELEVATION professional outputs for
-REAR ELEVATION buildings i.e. those that are
-RIGHT ELEVATION classified as Structural (S)
-CROSS SECTION Engineering Design
-LONGITUDINAL Documents
SECTION S-3 FOUNDATION DETAILS PILE CAP SCHEDULE
SDP-4 FLAGPOLE PALN AND CALLOUTS CALLOUTS & OUTLINE
DETAILS FINISHES & OUTLINE SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS S-4 COLUMN SCHEDULE SPECIFICATIONS
SDP-5 GATE PLAN AND CALLOUTS S-5 COLUMN SCHEDULE CALLOUTS & OUTLINE NOTES
DETAILS FINISHES & OUTLINE SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
S-6 SHEAR WALL CALLOUTS & OUTLINE
SDP-6 PEDESTRIAN GATE ISOMETRIC DETAILS SCHEDULE SPECIFICATIONS
PLAN AND DETAILS S-7 SHEAR WALL CALLOUTS & OUTLINE
SCHEDULE SPECIFICATIONS
6. CIVIL WORKS (CW) CW – 1 GRADING PLAN AND S-8 LOWER GROUND NOTES
Sheets DETAILS FLOOR FRAMING PLAN
Note: By law (R.A. No. CW – 2 SITE DRAINAGE PLAN, S-9 UPPER GROUND
544, as amended by R.A. DESIGN AND DETAILS FLOOR FRAMING PLAN
No. 1582), only registered S-10 SECOND FLOOR
and licensed civil FRAMING PLAN
engineers/ RLCEs shall S-11 THIRD FLOOR
FRAMING PLAN
professional outputs for S-12 FOURTH-SIXTH FLOOR
FRAMING PLAN
buildings i.e. those that are S-13 SEVENTH FLOOR
classified as Civil Works FRAMING PLAN
(CW) Documents S-14 LOWER ROOF DECK
CW – 3 PERIMETER WALL AND FRAMING PLAN
FENCE DESIGN AND S-15 UPPER ROOF CALLOUTS & OUTLINE
DETAILS FRAMING PLAN AND SPECIFICATIONS,
CW – 4 DRIVEWAY, ROAD AND DETAILS TYPICAL CORBEL
SIDEWALK PLAN, DETAIL
DESIGN AND S-16 SCHEDULE OF
DDETAILS MOMENT RESISTING
GIRDERS
7. STRUCTURAL (S) S-1 CONSTRUCTION GENERAL NOTES, S-17 SCHEDULE OF
Engineering Design NOTES NOTES ON CONCRETE GIRDERS
Sheets MIXES AND PLACING, S-18 SCHEDULE OF
NOTES ON GIRDERS
REINFORCING STEEL S-19 SCHEDULE OF BEAMS TYPICAL BAR DETAILS
BARS, NOTES ON FOR BEAMS
FOUNDATION, NOTES S-20 SCHEDULE OF BEAMS
ON CONCRETE WALLS, S-21 SCEDULES OF SLABS TYPICAL SLAB
NOTES ON MASONRY DETAILS, DROP SLAB,
WALLS, NOTES ON CORNER SLAB &
BEAMS AND GIRDERS, TYPICAL DETAIL OF
NOTES ON CONCRETE SLAB OPENINGS
G-9 G-10
E-12 FIFTH FLOOR

S-22 TRUSS DETAILS CALLOUTS & OUTLINE LIGHTING LAYOUT
SPECIFICATIONS E-13 SIXTH FLOOR
CONNECTION DETAILS LIGHTING LAYOUT
S-23 MAIN STAIR DETAILS CALLOUTS & OUTLINE E-14 SEVENTH FLOOR
SPECIFICATIONS LIGHTING LAYOUT
S-24 LEFT / RIGHT WING CALLOUTS & OUTLINE E-15 ROOF DECK LIGHTING
FIRE EXIT DETAILS SPECIFICATIONS, LAYOUT
BEAM DETAILS & E-16 GROUNDS POWER
SPOT DETAILS LAYOUT
S-25 MACH. RM DETAILS / SCHEDULE OF BEAMS E-17 LOWER POWER
BEAM SCHEDULE OF CALLOUTS & OUTLINE LIGHTING LAYOUT
MACHINE ROOM SPECIFICATIONS E-18 UPPER POWER
S-26 TOWER / MAST CALLOUTS & OUTLINE LIGHTING LAYOUT
DETAILS SPECIFICATIONS E-19 SECOND POWER
S-27 PARAPET WALL CALLOUTS & OUTLINE LIGHTING LAYOUT
SUPPORT AND WALL SPECIFICATIONS E-20 THIRD POWER
DETAILS LIGHTING LAYOUT
S-28 OVERHEAD / GROUND CALLOUTS & OUTLINE E-21 FOURTH POWER
WATER TANK DETAILS SPECIFICATIONS LIGHTING LAYOUT
S-29 UPPER ROOF CALLOUTS & OUTLINE E-22 FIFTH POWER
FRAMING PLAN AND SPECIFICATIONS LIGHTING LAYOUT
DETAILS E-23 SIXTH POWER
LIGHTING LAYOUT
8. ELECTRICAL (E) E-1 LOAD SCHEDULE GENERAL NOTES E-24 SEVENTH POWER
Engineering Design LIGHTING LAYOUT
Sheets E-25 ROOF DECK POWER
Note: By law (R.A. No. E-2 LOAD SCHEDULE LAYOUT
7920), only registered and E-25 ROOF DECK POWER
LAYOUT
licensed professional
E-26 DETAILS CALLOUTS & OUTLINE NOTES
electrical engineers/ SPECIFICATIONS
PEEs shall prepare, sign E-27 DETAILS CALLOUTS & OUTLINE NOTES
and seal all professional SPECIFICATIONS
outputs for buildings i.e. E-28 DETAILS CALLOUTS & OUTLINE NOTES
those that are classified as SPECIFICATIONS
Electrical (E) Engineering
Design Documents 9. MECHANICAL (M) M-1 -DRAWING INDEX, HVAC PIPE SYMBOLS,
E-3 LOAD SCHEDULE AND Engineering Design LEGENDS AND HVAC DUCT
EMERGENCY LOAD Sheets ABBREVIATIONS & SYMBOLS& SITE
SCHEDULE GENERAL NOTES DEVELOPMENT PLAN
E-4 EMERGENCY LOAD Note: By law (R.A. No. M-2 -SCHEDULE OF
SCHEDULE 8495), only registered and EQUIPMENT
E-5 LIGHTING FIXTURE licensed professional
SCHEDULE mechanical engineers/
PANELBOARD
PMEs shall prepare, sign
SCHEDULE
and seal all professional
E-6 GROUNDS LIGHTING
LAYOUT outputs for buildings i.e.
E-7 LOWER GROUND those that are classified as
LIGHTING LAYOUT Mechanical (M)
E-8 UPPER GROUND Engineering Design
LIGHTING LAYOUT Documents
E-9 SECOND FLOOR M-3 -LOWER GROUND A/C CALLOUTS & OUTLINE
LIGHTING LAYOUT AND VENTILATION SPECIFATIONS
E-10 THIRD FLOOR LAYOUT
LIGHTING LAYOUT M-4 -UPPER GROUND LEGEND, NOTES
E-11 FOURTH FLOOR FLOOR A/C AND CALLOUTS & OUTLINE
LIGHTING LAYOUT VENTILATION LAYOUT SPECIFICATIONS,
G-11 G-12
UNIT DESIGNATION 10. FIRE PROTECTION FP - 1 -FIRE PROTECTION

AND QUANTITY (FP)**** Design DRAWING INDEX, FIRE
M-5 -SECOND FLOOR A/C LEGEND, NOTES Sheets PROTECTION
AND VENTILATION CALLOUTS & OUTLINE LEGENDS,
LAYOUT SPECIFICATIONS, ABBREVIATIONS &
UNIT DESIGNATION SYMBOLS, FIRE
AND QUANTITY PROTECTION
M-6 -THIRD FLOOR A/C LEGEND, NOTES GENERAL NOTES, SITE
AND VENTILATION CALLOUTS & OUTLINE DEV’T PLAN,
LAYOUT SPECIFICATIONS, SCHEDULE OF
UNIT DESIGNATION PUMPS,SCHEDULE OF
AND QUANTITY CONTROLLERS,
M-7 -FOURTH FLOOR A/C LEGEND, SCHEDULE OF PIPE
AND VENTILATION CALLOUTS & OUTLINE SLEEVES & PIPE SIZE
LAYOUT SPECIFICATIONS, CONVERSION TABLE
UNIT DESIGNATION Note: By law (R.A. No. FP - 2 -LOWER GROUND CALL OUTS & OUTLINE
AND QUANTITY 8495), only registered and FLOOR FIRE SPECIFICATIONS
M-8 -FIFTH FLOOR A/C AND LEGEND, NOTES licensed professional PROTECTION LAYOUT
VENTILATION LAYOUT CALLOUTS & OUTLINE mechanical engineers/
SPECIFICATIONS, PMEs shall prepare, sign
UNIT DESIGNATION
and seal all professional
AND QUANTITY
outputs for buildings i.e.
M-9 -SIXTH FLOOR A/C LEGEND, NOTES
AND VENTILATION CALLOUTS & OUTLINE those that are classified as
LAYOUT SPECIFICATIONS, Mechanical (M)
UNIT DESIGNATION Engineering Design
AND QUANTITY Documents
M - 10 -SEVENTH FLOOR A/C LEGEND, NOTES FP - 3 -UPPER GROUND CALL OUTS & OUTLINE
AND VENTILATION CALLOUTS & OUTLINE FLOOR FIRE SPECIFICATIONS
LAYOUT SPECIFICATIONS, PROTECTION LAYOUT
UNIT DESIGNATION FP - 4 -SECOND FLOOR FIRE CALL OUTS & OUTLINE
AND QUANTITY PROTECTION LAYOUT SPECIFICATIONS
M - 11 -ROOFDECK A/C AND LEGEND, FP - 5 -THIRD FLOOR FIRE CALL OUTS & OUTLINE
VENTILATION LAYOUT CALLOUTS & OUTLINE PROTECTION LAYOUT SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS, FP - 6 -FOURTH FIRE CALL OUTS & OUTLINE
UNIT DESIGNATION PROTECTION LAYOUT SPECIFICATIONS
AND QUANTITY
FP - 7 -FIFTH FIRE CALL OUTS & OUTLINE
M - 12 -GENSET DETAILED CALLOUTS & OUTLINE NOTES PROTECTION LAYOUT SPECIFICATIONS
PLAN & SECTION, SPECIFICATIONS
ACCU BALCONY FP - 8 -SIXTH FIRE CALL OUTS & OUTLINE
DETAILED PLAN AND PROTECTION LAYOUT SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION * FP - 9 -SEVENTH FIRE CALL OUTS & OUTLINE
MISCELLANEOUS PROTECTION LAYOUT SPECIFICATIONS
DETAILS FP - 10 -ROOF DECK FIRE CALL OUTS & OUTLINE
M - 13 -SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM CALLOUTS & OUTLINE NOTES PROTECTION LAYOUT SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS STAIRWELL FP - 11 -FIRE PUMP ROOM BLOW UP DETAIL LEGEND
PRESSURIZATION AND EQUIPMENT DETAIL OF LADDER NOTES
FAN SEQUENCE LAYOUT RUNGS
OF OPERATION --DETAILED SECTION DETAILED SECTION
SMOKE DETAIL OF AIR VENT DETAIL OF AIR VENT
EVACUATION FAN LEGENDS AND
SEQUENCE OF SYMBOLS
OPERATION ISOMETRY
M - 14 -MISCELLANEOUS CALLOUTS & OUTLINE NOTES FP - 12 -SCHEMATIC FLOW CALLOUTS & OUTLINE NOTES
DETAILS 1 SPECIFICATIONS DUCT SCHEDULE DIAGRAM OF SPECIFICATIONS
DETAILS STANDPIPE SYSTEM
M - 15 -MISCELLANEOUS CALLOUTS & OUTLINE NOTES, FP - 13 -MISCELLANEOUS CALLOUTS & OUTLINE NOTES
DETAILS 2 SPECIFICATIONS, DIMENSIONS & DETAILS 1 SPECIFICATIONS MATERIAL:
ELEVATIONS & PIPE SIZE Carbon Steel
DETAILS BOLT DIAMETER
G-13 G-14
FP - 14 -MISCELLANEOUS MATERIAL: Carbon Steel NOTES SPECIFICATIONS

DETAILS 2 CALLOUTS & OUTLINE EC – 17 DETAILS CALLOUTS & OUTLINE NOTES
SPECIFICATIONS, SPECIFICATIONS
ISOMETRIC VIEW EC – 18 DETAILS CALLOUTS & OUTLINE NOTES
FP - 15 -MISCELLANEOUS CALLOUTS & OUTLINE NOTES SPECIFICATIONS
DETAILS 3 SPECIFICATIONS TABLES 12. PLUMBING (P)
PLANS Design Sheets
11. ELECTRONIC (EC)***** EC – 1 -DRAWING INDEX, Note: By law (R.A. No. P-1 LOWER GROUND CALLOUTS & OUTLINE
Engineering Design LEGENDS AND PLUMBING LAYOUT SPECIFICATIONS
Sheets ABBREVIATIONS,
GENERAL NOTES, licensed master
PIPE SYSMBOLS, SITE plumbers/ MPs shall
DEVELOPMENT PLAN prepare, sign and seal all
Note: By law (R.A. No. EC – 2 - GROUNDS AUXILIARY CALLOUTS & OUTLINE professional outputs for
9292), only registered and SYSTEM LAYOUT SPECIFICATIONS buildings i.e. those that are
licensed professional classified as Plumbing (P)
electronic engineers/ Design Documents
PECEs shall prepare, sign Note: Depending on the P-2 UPPER GROUND CALLOUTS & OUTLINE NOTES
and seal all professional Lower Court’s FLOOR PLUMBING SPECIFICATIONS
interpretation (for final LAYOUT
outputs for buildings i.e.
those that are classified as adjudication by the
Electronic (EC) Supreme Court), registered
Engineering Design and licensed sanitary
Documents engineers/ SEs may
EC – 3 -LOWER AND UPPER CALLOUTS & OUTLINE apparently prepare, sign
GROUND FLOOR SPECIFICATIONS and seal all professional
AUXILIARY SYSTEM outputs for buildings i.e.
LAYOUT those that are classified as
EC – 4 -SECOND AND THIRD CALLOUTS & OUTLINE Plumbing (P) Design
FLOOR AUXILIARY SPECIFICATIONS Documents. The
SYSTEM LAYOUT concerned entities must
EC – 5 -FOURTH AND FIFTH
make the necessary
FLOOR AUXILIARY
SYSTEM LAYOUT
representations with the
EC – 6 -SIXTH AND SEVENTH Client.
FLOOR AUXILIARY P-3 - SECOND FLOOR CALLOUTS & OUTLINE NOTES
SYSTEM LAYOUT PLUMBING LAYOUT SPECIFICATIONS
EC – 7 -ROOF DECK P-4 THIRD FLOOR CALLOUTS & OUTLINE NOTES
AUXILIARY SYSTEM PLUMBING LAYOUT SPECIFICATIONS
LAYOUT P-5 FOURTH FLOOR CALLOUTS & OUTLINE NOTES
EC – 8 -BMS POINTS LIST PLUMBING LAYOUT SPECIFICATIONS,
TYPICAL CONNECTION
EC – 9 -SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM LEGEND NOTES
OF WS TO DS
STAIRWELL
PRESSURIZATION P-6 FIFTH FLOOR CALLOUTS & OUTLINE NOTES
PLUMBING LAYOUT SPECIFICATIONS
FAN SEQUENCE
OF OPERATION P-7 SIXTH FLOOR CALLOUTS & OUTLINE NOTES
EC – 10 -SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM CALLOUTS & OUTLINE
SPECIFICATIONS
EC – 11 -LOWER AND UPPER CALLOUTS & OUTLINE P-8 SEVENTH FLOOR CALLOUTS & OUTLINE NOTES
GROUND FLOOR BMS SPECIFICATIONS
EC – 12 -SECOND AND THIRD CALLOUTS & OUTLINE P-9 ROOF DECK CALLOUTS & OUTLINE
FLOOR BMS SPECIFICATIONS
EC – 13 -FOURTH AND FIFTH P-10 RISER DIAGRAM OF CALLOUTS & OUTLINE
COLD WATER SPECIFICATIONS
FLOOR BMS
EC – 14 -SIXTH AND SEVENTH P-11 RISER DIAGRAM OF CALLOUTS & OUTLINE
DOWNSPOUT ALONG SPECIFICATIONS
FLOOR BMS
GRID LINE-B
EC – 15 -ROOF DECK BMS
P-12 RISER DIAGRAM OF CALLOUTS & OUTLINE
EC – 16 DETAILS CALLOUTS & OUTLINE NOTES SANITARY DRAINAGE SPECIFICATIONS
G-15 G-16
P-13 DETAIL OF GROUND DETAIL OF classified as Sanitary (S)

WATER TANK WATERTIGHT Engineering Design
MANHOLE, DETAIL OF Documents
AIR VENT, DETAIL OF
SE-3 STP DETAILS
LADDER RUNGS,
DETAIL OF PIPE SE-4 MISCELLANEOUS CALLOUTS, OUTLINE TABLE OF
DETAILS SPECIFICATIONS DIMENSIONS,
SLEEVE, DETAIL OF
NOTES
OVERFLOW
PIPE/DRAIN BOX Notes:
P-14 DETAIL OF ELEVATED CALLOUTS & OUTLINE NOTES *includes Fixtures, Furnishings and Equipment (Non-capital) i.e. FFE and Graphic Design, including all forms of
WATER TANK SPECIFICATIONS Way-finding Systems (such as those for office and parking spaces);
P-15 -ROUGHING-IN OF ISOMETRIC **includes Furniture and Movables Design (FMD) and Décor Items; and
TOILETS CALLOUTS, OUTLINE ***includes all hard and soft landscaping components.
SPECIFICATIONS ****oftentimes included as part of the Mechanical (M) Design sheets; and
P-16 -ROUGHING-IN OF ISOMETRIC *****includes Building Management System (BMS) and other automation features.
TOILETS CALLOUTS, OUTLINE
SPECIFICATIONS
P-17 -ROUGHING-IN OF ISOMETRIC
SPECIFICATIONS
P-18 -ROUGHING-IN OF ISOMETRIC
SPECIFICATIONS
P-19 -DETAIL OF PUMP CALLOUTS & OUTLINE
INSTALLATION, PUMP SPECIFICATIONS
DISCHARGE RISER
PIPING DETAIL,
SCHEDULE OF
EQUIPMENT
P-20 -MISCELLANEOUS CALLOUTS & OUTLINE TABLE OF RISER
DETAILS SPECICATIONS, CLAMPS, TABLE
DETAIL OF LADDER OF CLEVIS
RUNG HANGERS, TABLE
OF TRAPEZE
HANGERS, TABLE
OF BRACKET
DIMESIONS
P-21 -MISCELLANEOUS CALLOUTS, OUTLINE TABLE OF
DETAILS SPECIFICATIONS DIMENSIONS,
NOTES, TABLE
OF MINIMUM
THRUST BLOCK
BEARING AREAS
IN SQUARES
METRES FOR
PIPE SIZES 75mm
- to 600mm∅
13. SANITARY (SE) SE - 1 SITE PLAN SHOWING CALLOUTS
Engineering Design OUTSIDE SANITARY
Sheets UTILITIES, TABLE OF
CONTENTS AND
LEGEND/ SYMBOLS
Note: By law (R.A. No. SE-2 SEWAGE TREATMENT
1364), only registered and PLANT (STP)
licensed sanitary
engineers/ SEs shall
professional outputs for
buildings i.e. those that are
G-17 G-18
SECTION 03410 – PRECAST CONCRETE WALLS ............................................................................................................. 92
Generic Table of Contents for the Technical Specifications for a DIVISION 04 - MASONRY ........................................................................................................................................... 96
SECTION 04050 – BASIC MASONRY MATERIALS ........................................................................................................... 96
LARGE NATIONAL GOVERNMENT OFFICE Building Project
SECTION 04220 – CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT WORK ................................................................................................ 101
(Approx. 1.7 hectares Total Lot Area/ TLA, approx. 60,000 sqm Total Gross Floor Area/ TGFA,
Large Footprint, Medium-rise with Deck Roof Level and No Basement Level) SECTION 04810 – UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLES .......................................................................................................... 103
at Approximately 480 A4 Size Pages DIVISION 05 - METAL .............................................................................................................................................. 113

SECTION 05120 – STRUCTURAL STEEL........................................................................................................................ 113
Very Important Note: In the case of repair, renovation, rehabilitation, retrofit,
SECTION 05500 – METAL FABRICATIONS ................................................................................................................... 119
expansion, heritage conservation, fit-out, and similar works/ projects for buildings/
SECTION 05510 – MISCELLANEOUS METALS .............................................................................................................. 126
structures, the SCOPE OF WORKS BRIEF for such buildings/ structures i.e. a
SECTION 05520 – HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS (STAINLESS STEEL) .............................................................................. 127
general description of the intended construction works, MUST be provided by the
SECTION 05540 – LIGHT STEEL FRAMING SYSTEM ..................................................................................................... 134
Designer and/or Project Proponent before the rest of the Plans/ Designs/
Documents listed hereafter. The provisions that DO NOT apply to the types of DIVISION 06 – WOOD AND PLASTICS ...................................................................................................................... 135
work listed above shall be deleted on an need/ applicability basis. SECTION 06200 – CARPENTRY AND JOINERY ............................................................................................................. 135
DIVISION 07- THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION ............................................................................................ 138

INTRODUCTION........................................................................................................................................................... 1
SECTION 07100 – WATERPROOFING.......................................................................................................................... 138
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS .................................................................................................................... 6
SECTION 07145 – MEMBRANE-TYPE ELASTOMERIC WATERPROOFING .................................................................... 142
SECTION 01010 – SUMMARY OF WORKS ....................................................................................................................... 6
SECTION 07260 – BATT INSULATION .......................................................................................................................... 145
SECTION 01011 - CONTRACT DOCUMENTS .................................................................................................................... 6
SECTION 07431 – INSULATED METAL ROOF PANELS .................................................................................................. 146
SECTION 01040 - COORDINATION.................................................................................................................................. 7
SECTION 07610 – SHEET METAL ROOFING AND CLADDING ....................................................................................... 150
SECTION 01060 - REGULATORY AND OTHER REQUIREMENTS ....................................................................................... 7
SECTION 07800 – ROOF ACCESSORIES ....................................................................................................................... 160
SECTION 01090 - REFERENCE STANDARDS .................................................................................................................... 8
SECTION 07920 – CAULKING AND SEALING ............................................................................................................... 161
SECTION 01300 - SUBMITTALS ..................................................................................................................................... 10
SECTION 01312 - PROJECT MEETINGS .......................................................................................................................... 14 DIVISION 08 - DOORS AND WINDOWS .................................................................................................................... 162
SECTION 01352 - PROJECT HEALTH AND SAFETY ......................................................................................................... 17 SECTION 08110 – STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES ........................................................................................................... 162
SECTION 01400 - QUALITY CONTROL ........................................................................................................................... 20 SECTION 08120 – ALUMINUM DOORS ....................................................................................................................... 166
SECTION 01500 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES (TEMFACIL) ................................................................................................ 22 SECTION 08130 – AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE SYSTEM ................................................................................................... 168
SECTION 01600 - MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................................ 24 SECTION 08210 – WOOD PANEL AND FLUSH DOORS ................................................................................................. 172
SECTION 01700 - CONTRACT CLOSEOUT ...................................................................................................................... 26 SECTION 08331 – OVERHEAD COILING DOORS .......................................................................................................... 176
SECTION 01710 - CLEANING ......................................................................................................................................... 28 SECTION 08520 – ALUMINUM WINDOWS ................................................................................................................. 180
SECTION 08700 – HARDWARE ................................................................................................................................... 184
DIVISION 02 - SITE CONSTRUCTION ........................................................................................................................... 29
SECTION 08800 – GLASS AND GLAZING...................................................................................................................... 189
SECTION 02250 – SOIL TREATMENT FOR SUBTERRANEAN TERMITE CONTROL ......................................................... 29
SECTION 02300 - EARTHWORK .................................................................................................................................... 31 DIVISION 09 – FINISHES........................................................................................................................................... 192
SECTION 02444 - PERIMETER FENCES AND GATES ....................................................................................................... 38 SECTION 09220 – PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER ........................................................................................................ 192
SECTION 09290 – GYPSUM CEILING BOARDS ............................................................................................................. 195
DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE........................................................................................................................................... 41
SECTION 09295 – GYPSUM WALLBOARD (DRY WALL) ............................................................................................... 198
SECTION 03100 - PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT .................................................................................... 41
SECTION 09310 – CERAMIC TILE WORK ..................................................................................................................... 201
SECTION 03210 – REINFORCED CONCRETE .................................................................................................................. 63
SECTION 09510 – ACOUSTICAL CEILING SYSTEM ....................................................................................................... 204
SECTION 03300 – CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE .............................................................................................................. 74
G-19 G-20
SECTION 09575 – SPANDREL CEILING ........................................................................................................................ 205 SECTION 16425 – LOW VOLTAGE SWITCHBOARD ...................................................................................................... 404
SECTION 09650 – HOMOGENOUS TILES..................................................................................................................... 206 SECTION 16460 – AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH .................................................................................................... 413
SECTION 09660 – PLAIN CEMENT FLOOR FINISH........................................................................................................ 209 SECTION 16470 – PANELBOARDS ............................................................................................................................... 420
SECTION 09666 – VINYL FLOOR TILES ......................................................................................................................... 211 SECTION 16500 – LUMINARIES AND ACCESSORIES .................................................................................................... 425
SECTION 09678 – CONCRETE FLOOR ADDITIVES/ SEALER .......................................................................................... 212 SECTION 16510 – RROW LIGHTING ............................................................................................................................ 431
SECTION 09750 – NATURAL STONE ............................................................................................................................ 213 SECTION 16550 – LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEMS................................................................................................ 438
SECTION 09910 – PAINTING ....................................................................................................................................... 214 SECTION 16680 – GROUNDING SYSTEM .................................................................................................................... 441
SECTION 09965 – EPOXY PAINT.................................................................................................................................. 217 SECTION 16720 – FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM........................................................................................... 445
SECTION 16740 – STRUCTURAL CABLING SYSTEM ..................................................................................................... 451
DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES ..................................................................................................................................... 218
SECTION 16755 – PABX SYSTEM SPECIFICATION ........................................................................................................ 452
SECTION 10280 – TOILET PARTITION SYSTEM ............................................................................................................ 218
SECTION 16770 – BACKGROUND MUSIC AND PAGING SYSTEM (BGM/PA) ............................................................... 460
SECTION 10800 – TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES .................................................................................................... 224
SECTION 16780 – CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION SYSTEM (CCTV) ................................................................................ 464
SECTION 10810 – PANTRY ACCESSORIES ................................................................................................................... 226
SECTION 16900 – INSTRUMENTATION, ATC & BMS SYSTEM ..................................................................................... 467
SECTION 10890 – WALK-THROUGH METAL DETECTOR.............................................................................................. 227
SECTION 16950 – TESTING AND COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SERVICES ........................................................... 477
DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT ..................................................................................................................................... 235
SECTION 11130 – LOADING DOCK EQUIPMENT ......................................................................................................... 235
SECTION 11260 – KITCHEN EQUIPMENT .................................................................................................................... 245
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS.................................................................................................................................... 259

SECTION 12210 – BLINDS ........................................................................................................................................... 259
SECTION 12482 – ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES ......................................................................................... 261
DIVISION 14 – CONVEYING SYSTEM ........................................................................................................................ 265

SECTION 14210 – ELEVATORS .................................................................................................................................... 265
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL .................................................................................................................................... 270

SECTION 15300 – FIRE PROTECTION WORKS ............................................................................................................. 270
SECTION 15320 – FIRE PUMPS ................................................................................................................................... 287
SECTION 15400 – PLUMBING ..................................................................................................................................... 292
SECTION 15780 – MECHANICAL (HVAC) ..................................................................................................................... 309
SECTION 15910 – DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES ............................................................................................................. 354
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL ....................................................................................................................................... 357

SECTION 16000 – ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS................................................................................................ 357
SECTION 16010 – ELECTRONICS & COMMUNICATION GENERAL PROVISIONS .......................................................... 372
SECTION 16110 – RACEWAYS AND BOXES ................................................................................................................. 375
SECTION 16122 – HIGH-VOLTAGE CABLE AND ACCESSORIES ..................................................................................... 382
SECTION 16200 – ENGINE GENERATOR SETS ............................................................................................................. 385
SECTION 16266 – PARALLELING SWITCHGEAR .......................................................................................................... 396
SECTION 16271 – POWER TRANSFORMER ................................................................................................................. 400
SECTION 16272 – DRY TYPE TRANSFORMER .............................................................................................................. 402
G-21 G-22
CHECKLIST FOR USE BY THE DPWH FOR ASSESSING DOCUMENTS SUBMITTED

FOR DESIGN REVIEW
(based on Sec. 302 of the 2004 Revised Implementing Rules and Regulations/ IRR of P.D. No. 1096, the
1977 National Building Code of the Philippines/ NBCP)
1. Duly accomplished prescribed request form/s for design review, with the following support documents:
a. In case the design review applicant is the registered owner of the lot:
i. Certified true copy of OCT/ TCT, on file with the Registry of Deeds,
ii. Tax Declaration, and
iii. Current Real Property Tax Receipt.
b. In case the design review applicant is not the registered owner of the lot, in addition to the above;
duly notarized copy of the Contract of Lease, or the Deed of Absolute Sale.
2. Five (5) sets of survey plans, design plans, specifications and other documents duly prepared, signed
and sealed over the printed names of the duly registered and licensed professionals (RLPs), as
Annex H Check List for Use by the DPWH for follows:
a. Geodetic Engineer (GE), in case of lot survey plans e.g. relocation, topographic, etc.;
Assessing Documents Submitted for b. Architect (Ar), in case of architectural documents, including architectural interior (AI) documents
and related physical planning documents for a Project site of less than five hectares (-5.0 has.) in
Design Review total land area/ TLA (reference Sec. 20.5 of R.A. No. 9266, the Architecture Act of 2004); in case
of interior design (ID) documents, including furniture design, an interior designer (IDr) must sign
and seal;
c. Civil Engineer (CE), in case of civil/ structural documents;
d. Professional Electrical Engineer (PECE), in case of electrical documents;
e. Professional Mechanical Engineer (PME), in case of mechanical documents;
f. Sanitary Engineer (SnE), in case of sanitary documents;
g. Master Plumber (MP), in case of plumbing documents;
h. Professional Electronics Engineer (PEE), in case of electronics documents;
i. Landscape Architect (LAr), in case of landscape architectural documents for building grounds
(hard scape and soft scape); and
j. Environmental Planner (EnP), in case of master development plans (MDPs) and related physical
planning documents for a Project site of more than five hectares (5.0 has.) in total land area
(TLA).
3. Five (5) sets of special studies duly prepared, signed and sealed over the printed names of the duly
accredited professionals, as follows:
a. Civil Engineer (CE), Environmental Planner (EnP) or Architect (Ar), with duly-qualified
specialization in transportation planning, in case of the traffic impact analysis (TIA); and
b. Civil Engineer (CE), Environmental Planner (EnP) or Architect (Ar), or an Environment Specialist,
with duly-qualified specialization in environmental investigation, in case of the environmental
impact analysis (EIA), required to secure the Environmental Compliance Certificate (ECC).
4. Architectural Documents
a. Architectural Plans/ Drawings
i. Vicinity Map/ Location Plan within a two kilometer (2.0 km) radius for commercial,
industrial, and institutional complex and within a 0.5 km radius for residential buildings, at
any convenient scale showing prominent landmarks or major thoroughfares for easy
reference.
ii. Site Development Plan (SDP) showing technical description, boundaries, orientation and
position of proposed building/structure in relation to the lot, existing or proposed access road
and driveways and existing public utilities/ services. Existing buildings within and adjoining
H-1
the lot shall be hatched and distances between the proposed and existing buildings shall be v. Detailed design of major architectural interior elements i.e. floors, walls, ceiling, doors and
indicated. related fenestrations, fixed counters and cabinetry, hardware, etc.
iii. Perspective drawn at a convenient scale and taken from a vantage point (bird’s eye view or vi. General plan, layout and design of the architectural interiors, including walls/ partitions,
eye level). furnishing/ furniture/ equipment (FFE)/ appliances at a scale of at least 1:100 m, including
iv. Architectural Program (including Space Program), with Space Plans cum Stacking Diagrams ceiling cavity and roof cavity plans, as needed.
(only for multi-storey buildings) drawn to scale of not less than 1:100 meters (m). vii. Interior wall elevations showing: finishes, switches, doors and convenience outlets, cross
v. Floor Plans drawn to scale of not less than 1:100 meters (m) showing: gridlines, complete window sections with architectural interior perspective as viewed from the main entrance at
identification of rooms or functional spaces. scale of at least 1:100 m.
vi. Elevations, at least four (4), same scale as floor plans showing: gridlines; natural ground to viii. General floor/ ceiling/ wall patterns and general finishing details.
finish grade elevations; floor to floor heights; door and window marks, type of material and ix. Technical Specifications (including operation/ use and maintenance), Schedules and related
exterior finishes; adjoining existing structure/s, if any, shown in single hatched lines. list/s of materials to be used for architectural interior finishing works.
vii. Sections, at least two (2), showing: gridlines; natural ground and finish levels; outline of cut x. Cost Estimates.
and visible structural parts; doors and windows properly labeled reflecting the direction of c. Plans and specific locations of all accessibility facilities of scale of at least 1:100 m., including the
opening; partitions; built-in cabinets, etc.; identification of rooms and functional spaces cut by detailed design of all such accessibility facilities outside and around buildings/structures including
section lines. parking areas, and their safety requirements all at scale of 1:50 m or any convenient scale.
viii. Reflected ceiling plan (RCP) showing: design, location, finishes and specifications of d. Fire Safety Documents
materials, lighting fixtures, diffusers, decorations, air conditioning exhaust and return grills, i. Layout plan of each floor indicating the fire evacuation route to safe dispersal areas,
sprinkler nozzles, if any, at scale of at least 1:100 m. standpipes with fire hose, fire extinguishers, first aid kits/ cabinets, fire alarm, fire operations
ix. Details, in the form of plans, elevations/sections: room, emergency lights, signs, etc.s
(a) Accessible ramps ii. Details of windows, fire exits with grilled windows and ladders.
(b) Accessible stairs iii. Details of fire-resistive construction of enclosures for vertical openings.
(c) Accessible lifts/ elevators iv. Details of fire-resistive construction materials and interior decorative materials with fire-
(d) Accessible entrances, corridors and walkways resistive/ fire-retardant/ fire-spread ratings
(e) Accessible functional areas/ comfort rooms v. Other Related Documents
(f) Accessible switches, controls f. Physical Planning documents (for Project Sites at less than 5.0 hectares in Total Land Area/ TLA)
(g) Accessible drinking fountains i. Vicinity Map/ Location Plan at a scale of at least 1:10,000 m.
(h) Accessible public telephone booths ii. Framework Plan at a scale of at least 1:2,500 m showing existing and proposed access
(i) Accessible audio visual and automatic alarm system systems, connectivities, identified hazards, orientations (wind, sun, odor, noise, etc.), view
(j) Accessible access symbols and directional signs corridors, and like information.
(k) Reserved parking for persons with disabilities (PWDs) iii. Master Development Plan (MDP) at a scale of at least 1:1,250 m showing all setbacks and
(l) Typical wall/ bay sections from ground to roof mandated legal easements (as applicable), proposed road rights-of-way (RROW, clearly
(m) Stairs, interior and exterior delineating the carriageway and sidewalks), proposed building footprints at grade level,
(n) Fire escapes/ exits proposed outermost faces of buildings (OFB) at the second levels/ floors, floor to lot area
(o) Built-in cabinets, counters and fixed furniture (FLAR) used, gross floor area (GFA) to be generated, total GFA (TGFA) to be generated,
(p) All types of partitions building heights, and like information, to fully comply with Rules VII and VIII of the 2004
(q) Provisions for PWDs, the elderly, gender and development (GAD), and the like; Revised IRR of P.D. No. 1096, the 1977 NBCP.
(r) Provisions to address concerns of climate change adaptation (CCA) and disaster risk iv. Proposed Land Use Distribution (breakdown).
reduction (DRR) g. Other related documents
x. Schedule of Doors and Windows showing their types, designations/ marks, dimensions,
materials, hardware provisions, and number of sets. 5. Interior Design
xi. Schedules of Finishes, showing in graphic form: surface finishes specified for floors, ceilings, i. Detailed space plan/ layout and design of all interior design elements, including furniture and
walls and baseboard trims for all building spaces per floor level. furnishings at all fully enclosed areas/ spaces, at a scale of at least 1:50 m.
xii. Details of other major Architectural Elements; and ii. Interior design perspective/s showing details of special finishing and furnishing items.
xiii. Technical Specifications (including operation/ use and maintenance) for all architectural iii. Special floor/ ceiling/ wall patterns and finishing details.
works. iv. Technical Specifications (including operation/ use and maintenance), Schedules and related
b. Architectural Interiors (AI) list/s of materials to be used for interior design finishing works.
i. General Space Plan/s or general layout/s of architectural interiors. v. Cost Estimates.
ii. Architectural interior perspective/s.
iii. Furniture/ furnishing/ equipment (FFE) layouts and process layout/s. 6. Civil/ Structural Documents
iv. Access plan/s, parking plan/s and the like. a. Site Development Plan (SDP)
H-2 H-3
Site Development Plan showing technical description, boundaries, orientation and position of e. Plans drawn to scale of 1:100 m indicating location of store rooms, fuel tanks, fire extinguishing
proposed non-architectural horizontal structure such as: sewerage treatment plan (STP), silos, systems, fire doors, fire escape ladders and other protective facilities.
elevated tanks, towers, fences, etc. building/ structure in relation to the lot, existing or proposed f. Detailed drawings of all duct work installations, indicating dampers, controls, filters, fireproofing,
access road and driveways and existing public utilities/ services. Existing buildings within and acoustical and thermal insulation.
adjoining the lot shall be hatched and distances between the proposed and existing buildings shall g. Detailed Plans of machinery foundations and supports drawn to scale of at least 1:50 m.
be indicated. h. Detailed Plans of boilers and pressure vessels with a working pressure of above 70 kPa regardless
b. Structural Plans of kilowatt rating.
i. Foundation Plans and Details at scale of not less than 1:100 m. i. Design Computations and Detailed Plans of elevators, escalators, and the like drawn to scale of
ii. Floor/ Roof Framing Plans and Details at scale of not less than 1:100 m. 1:50 m.
iii. Details and Schedules of structural and civil works elements including those for deep wells, j. For all installations, additions or alterations involving machinery of at most 14.9 kW, the signature
water reservoir, pipe lines and sewer system. of a duly licensed Mechanical Engineer shall be sufficient except fired and unfired pressure
c. Structural Analysis and Design for all buildings/structures except for one storey and single vessels, elevators, escalators, dumbwaiters, central/split/packaged type air conditioners and piping
detached building/structure with a total floor area of 20.0 square meters (sqm) or less. systems of steam, gas or fuels.
d. Boring and Load Tests k. Detailed plans of fire suppression systems, location of automatic and smoke detectors and alarm
Buildings or structures of three (3) storeys and higher, boring tests and, if necessary, load tests and initiating devices use to monitor the conditions that are essential for the proper operation
shall be required in accordance with the applicable latest approved provisions of the National including switches for the position of gate valves as well as alert and evacuation signals; the
Structural Code of the Philippines (NSCP). However, adequate soil exploration (including boring detailed layout of the entire safe area to be protected and the heat/smoke ventilation system.
and load tests) shall also be required for lower buildings/ structures at areas with potential
geological/geotechnical hazards. The written report of the civil/ geo-technical engineer including 9. Sanitary Documents
but not limited to the design bearing capacity as well as the result of tests shall be submitted a. For deep well, water purification plants, water collection and distribution systems, reservoirs,
together with the other requirements in the application for a building permit. Boring test or load test drainage and sewer systems, sewage treatment plants, malaria control structures, and sewage
shall also be done according to the applicable provisions of the NSCP which set forth requirements disposal systems:
governing excavation, grading and earthwork construction, including fills and embankments for any i. Location Plan and Site Plan
building/structure and for foundation and retaining structures. ii. Detailed Plan and layout drawings of minimum scale 1:100 m.
e. Seismic and Wind Load Analyses iii. Design Analysis and Technical Specifications
a. Other related documents iv. Cost Estimates
b. For pest and vermin control, sanitation and pollution control facilities:
7. Electrical Documents i. Detailed plan, layout & drawing of abatement and control device of minimum scale 1:100 m.
Electrical plans and technical specifications containing the following: ii. Design analysis and technical specification
a. Location and Site Plans iii. Cost Estimates
b. Legend or Symbols
c. General Notes and/or Specifications 10. Plumbing Documents
d. Electrical Layout For all plumbing installations, additions and/or alterations involving hot and cold water supply, fixtures,
e. Schedule of Loads, Transformers, Generating/ UPS Units (Total kVA for each of the preceding sewage drainage and vent system, storm drainage and sewerage system within or adjacent to the
items shall be indicated in the schedule) building:
f. Design Analysis a. Location Plan and Site Plan of minimum scale 1: 2000 m
g. One Line Diagram b. Plumbing Plans, Layouts and Details, of minimum scale 1: 50 m
c. Legend and General Notes
8. Mechanical Documents d. Isometric drawings of the systems
a. Location Plan and Key Plan e. Design analysis and technical specifications
b. General Layout Plan for each floor, drawn to a scale of not less than 1:100 m, indicating the f. Cost Estimates
equipment in heavier lines than the building outline with names of machinery and corresponding
brake horsepower shall be indicated. 11. Electronics Documents
c. Longitudinal and Transverse Sections of building and equipment base on the section lines drawn to Electronic plans and technical specifications for wired or wireless telecommunications systems,
scale of at least 1:100 m showing inter-floor relations and defining the manner of support of broadcasting systems, including radio and TV broadcast equipment for commercial and training
machines/equipment. Sections shall run longitudinally and transversely through the building length purposes, cable or wireless television systems, information technology (IT) systems, security and alarm
or width other than particularly detailed section for each machinery/equipment (fired and unfired systems, electronic fire alarm systems, sound-reinforcement systems, navigational aids and controls,
pressure vessel, elevator, escalator, dumbwaiter, etc.). indoor and outdoor signages, electronically-controlled conveyance systems, electronic/computerized
d. Isometric drawing of gas, fuel, oil system showing: Assembly of pipes on racks and supports, process controls and automation systems, building automation, management and control systems,
Legend and General Notes, capacity per outlet and complete individual piping system. including, but not limited to the following:
a. General layout plans with legends
H-4 H-5
b. Single line diagram xvi. Department of Agrarian Reform (DAR)

c. Riser diagram xvii. Department of Agriculture (DA)
d. Isometry of the system xviii. Department of Labor and Employment (DOLE)
e. Equipment specifications xix. National Housing Authority (NHA)
f. Design analysis, as applicable xx. National Council for the Welfare of Disabled Persons (NCWDP)
g. Cost estimates xxi. Philippine Reclamation Authority (PRA)
xxii. Metropolitan Manila Development Authority (MMDA)
b. Geodetic Documents xxiii. National Commission on Culture and the Arts (NCCA)
Lot Survey Plans, including but not limited to:
a. Vicinity Map/ Location Plan
b. Lot Plan
c. Relocation Survey Plan and Report
d. Line and Grade
e. Detailed Topographic Plan of the site and immediate vicinity
c. Environmental Planning documents (for Project Sites at 5.0 hectares or larger in Total Land Area/ TLA)
a. Vicinity Map/ Location Plan at a scale of at least 1:10,000 m.
b. Framework Plan at a scale of at least 1:2,500 m showing existing and proposed access systems,
connectivities, identified hazards, orientations (wind, sun, odor, noise, etc.), view corridors, and like
information.
c. Master Development Plan (MDP) at a scale of at least 1:1,250 m showing all setbacks and
mandated legal easements (as applicable), proposed road rights-of-way (RROW, clearly
delineating the carriageway and sidewalks), proposed building footprints at grade level, proposed
outermost faces of buildings (OFB) at the second levels/ floors, floor to lot area (FLAR) used, gross
floor area (GFA) to be generated, total GFA (TGFA) to be generated, building heights, and like
information, to fully comply with Rules VII and VIII of the 2004 Revised IRR of P.D. No. 1096, the
1977 NBCP.
d. Land Use Distribution (breakdown).
12. Clearances from Other Agencies
a. A locational clearance shall be obtained by the design review applicant from the Office of the City/
Municipal Zoning Administrator.
b. Whenever necessary, written clearances shall be obtained from the various authorities exercising
and enforcing regulatory functions affecting buildings/ structures by the design review applicant.
Application for said clearances shall be requested by the design review applicant. Such authorities
which are expected to enforce their own regulations are:
i. Department of Public Works and Highways (DPWH)
ii. Air Transportation Office (ATO, now the Civil Aviation Authority of the Philippines or CAAP)
iii. Housing and Land Use Regulatory Board (HLURB)
iv. Local Government Unit (LGU)
v. Department of Tourism (DOT)
vi. Department of Environment and Natural Resources (DENR)
vii. Department of Transportation and Communication (DOTC)
viii. Department of Interior and Local Government (DILG)
ix. Philippine Ports Authority (PPA)
x. Department of Education (DepEd)
xi. Department of Health (DOH)
xii. Philippine Institute of Volcanology and Seismology (PHIVOLCS)
xiii. Laguna Lake Development Authority (LLDA)
xiv. Manila Waterworks and Sewerage System (MWSS)
xv. National Water Resources Board (NWRB)
H-6 H-7
2014 DPWH-BoD SPACE ALLOCATION STANDARDS BY OFFICE TYPE (Gross Floor Area/ GFA)* 2014 DPWH-BoD SPACE ALLOCATION STANDARDS BY TYPE OF USAGE (Gross Floor Area/ GFA)*
*The GFA excludes the main common areas such as common areas e.g. lobbies, building cores, stairs and fire exits, service or *The GFA excludes the main common areas such as common areas e.g. lobbies, building cores, stairs and fire exits, service or
utility balconies and decks, parking spaces and access-ways (within the building footprint) and similar spaces. utility balconies and decks, parking spaces and access-ways (within the building footprint) and similar spaces.
PARTICULARS MAXIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS (in Sq.M.) PARTICULARS MAXIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS (in Sq.M.)
SPACE REQUIREMENT/S OF KEY OFFICIALS SPACE REQUIREMENT/S
A. OFFICE OF THE SECRETARY OR ITS EQUIVALENT SG-31 POSITION A. MAIN LOBBY 0.25/ pax; minimum for lobby as waiting/
1. Secretary 72.00 standing room is 0.28/ pax
2. Staff 4.00 - 6.00/ pax¹ B. BUREAU-LEVEL FACILITIES
3. Conference Room 60.00 1. Conference Room 30.00
4. Reception Room 30.00 2. Pantry 10.00
5. Toilet/ Bathroom 6.00 3. Storage Area¹ 15.00
6. Pantry 10.00 C. TRAINING ROOM 2.40/ pax including aisles and services such as
7. Storage Area² 10.00 storage, production room and toilet for the staff
B. OFFICE OF THE UNDERSECRETARY OR ITS EQUIVALENT SG-30 POSITION D. QUARTERS
1. Undersecretary 63.00 1. Single Bedroom 4.00
2. Staff 4.00 - 6.00/ pax¹ 2. Twin-Sharing Bedroom 8.00
3. Conference Room 40.00 3. Toilet/ Bathroom 4.00
4. Reception Room 20.00 4. Pantry 10.00
5. Toilet/ Bathroom 6.00 E. TOILET FACILITIES² 1.50 per one water closet (WC) enclosure
6. Pantry 10.00 1. For Agencies providing frontline services (for  1 WC/ 1-100 for female
7. Storage Area² 10.00 Public use)  1 WC/ 1-200 for male
C. OFFICE OF THE ASSISTANT SECRETARY OR ITS EQUIVALENT SG-29 POSITION  1 urinal/ 1-100 for male
1. Assistant Secretary 56.00  1 lavatory/ 2 WC
2. Staff 4.00 - 6.00/ pax¹ 2. For Agencies with no clientele (for Employee  1 WC/ 1-15, 2WC/ 16-35, 3WC/ 36-55 for
3. Conference Room 30.00 use) male and female
4. Reception Room 20.00  1 lavatory/ 40 for male and female; or 1
5. Toilet/ Bathroom 6.00 lavatory/ 2 WC
6. Pantry 10.00 ¹for storage of supplies, equipment, records/ files and other materials
7. Storage Area² 10.00 ²based on the Revised National Plumbing Code of the Philippines (R.A. No. 1378)
D. OFFICE OF THE DIRECTOR IV OR ITS EQUIVALENT SG-28 POSITION
1. Director IV 36.00
2. Staff 4.00 - 6.00/ pax¹
3. Reception Room 10.00
4. Toilet/ Bathroom 4.00
5. Pantry 5.00
6. Storage Area² 6.00
E. OFFICE OF THE DIRECTOR III OR ITS EQUIVALENT SG-27 POSITION
1. Director III 24.00
2. Staff 4.00 - 6.00/ pax¹
3. Toilet/ Bathroom 4.00
F. DIVISION-LEVEL UNIT
1. Division Chief 12.00
2. Staff 4.00 - 6.00/ pax¹
3. Lobby/ Lounge 0.25/ pax
¹includes circulation area
²for storage of supplies, equipment, records/ files and other materials
H-8 H-9

DPWH 2015 DGCS Vol 6

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

DPWH 2015 DGCS Vol 6

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Design Guidelines, Criteria and Standards: Volume 6 – Public Buildings and Other Related Structures

Table 5-1 General Lighting Load Density ....................................................................................................................................5-5

Table 8-22 Design Criteria of Five Typical Soils ............................................................................................................................... 8-80

Acronym Definition Acronym Definition

FCC Federal Communications Commission NEC National Electrical Code®

Alarm Zone A part or subdivision of a protected building or premises.

Attention Signal (alias Tone or ringing-style short signal before an announcement.

Building A roofed and walled structure built for permanent use.

Concrete A mixture of cement, fine aggregate, coarse aggregate and water.

Ductility Ability of a component or solid material to deform under tensile stress.

 Apply prescribed setbacks and yards/court to determine AMBF.

Excluded Floor Areas

Market Stalls and Aisles

3.8.3 School Building Design Particulars Maximum Space Requirements

Main Lobby 0.25/pax; minimum for lobby as waiting/standing Pantry 5.00

(for Public use) 1 WC/1 – 200 for male

Space Requirement/s of Key Officials

pipes/tubings/drains connected to NON-CAPITAL EQUIPMENT and

4.2.3 Gravity Loads

4.2.4 Dead Load

4.2.5 Live Load

4. Bowling alleys, poolrooms and -- 3.6 0 Notes for Table 4-3

Table 4-4 Special Loads1 11

p = qGCp − qi (GCpi ) Table 4-6 Occupancy Category

Occupancy Category Occupancy or Function of Structure

(GCpi ) = internal pressure coefficient from NSCP Figure 207-5

Zone Classification (Basic Provinces Height above Ground Exposure (Note 1)

4. Linear interpolation for intermediate values of height 𝓏𝓏 is acceptable.

5. Exposure categories are defined in Section 207.5.6.

Table 4-11 Terrain Exposure Constants Simplified Design Base Shear

Average Soil Properties for Top 30 m of Soil Profile SC 0.32 0.56Nv

Seismic Source Closest Distance to Known Seismic Source2

Table 4-15 Seismic Coefficient, Ca

System Limitation and System Limitation and

 Composite steel and concrete concentrically braced frame 6 2.8 NL NL

 Composite steel plate shear walls 7.5 2.8 NL NL

 Buckling-restrained braced frame 8 2.8 NL NL

 Special steel plate shear walls 8 2.8 NL NL

 Masonry shear wall steel OMRF 4.2 2.8 NL 50

 Steel EBF with steel SMRF 8.5 2.8 NL NL

System Limitation and Vertical Distribution of Force (NSCP Section 208.5.5)

System Limitation and

Table 4-23 Vertical Structural Irregularities

Irregularity Type and Definition Reference NSCP Section

analysis. Source: NSCP 2010

varies upon the nature of the project. Author Comments

Fy-steel = yield stress of steel = 0.55 Fy−casing

where: Various techniques in supporting excavations may be used depending on the

Design Axial Load Strength

ØPn = 0.85Ø[.85f'c(Ag-Ast) + Astfy]

 International Conference of Building Officials Uniform Building Code 1997 where:

As specified in NSCP 504.5, the following shall apply:

Eyebars (NSCP Section 504.6)

An example is provided for an eyebar connection.

Ω = 2.00 Example: Eyebar Tension Members

Example: Find Ae of a Plate with Staggered Bolts

4.5.5 Design for Compression (NSCP Section 505)

ΦPn > Pu Using ASD

3. Find K. Solve for KLx and KLy.

Square and Rectangular HSS and Box-Shaped Members

Round HSS and Pipes

Tees and Double Angles Loaded in the Plane of Symmetry

Rectangular Bars and Rounds